JP2020093144A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from getting bored with a game in an early stage after a jackpot game has been provided.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: a winning hole by which a first privilege is provided; a first ball entry area disposed inside the winning hole and by which a second privilege is provided; and a second ball entry area by which a third privilege is provided. A first ball entry state in which a ball can enter the first ball entry area, and a second ball entry state in which a ball can enter the second ball entry area, are changed over by changeover means at timing when variable means is varied by variable control means. Consequently, when the game turns out a specific lottery result, besides the first privilege, the game machine may provide a player with the second privilege or the third privilege according to timing when the variable means is varied by the variable control means. Even after the specific lottery result is produced and a ball can enter the winning hole by which the first privilege is provided, the player can have interest in a privilege to be offered. Accordingly, this configuration can prevent such a problem that the player gets bored with the game in an early stage.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

On a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, after a predetermined display mode appears, by passing the game ball through a plurality of predetermined areas provided on the game board, a jackpot based on the predetermined area through which the game ball has passed There is known a gaming machine in which a lottery for a type of a game is made and a big hit game is started by the type of the big hit game that is drawn.

The lottery ratio of the type of the jackpot game is different for each of a plurality of predetermined areas provided, and the player selects any one of the plurality of predetermined areas to pass the game ball. According to, the type of jackpot game is selected by lottery.

JP, 2013-233181, A

However, until the jackpot game type is drawn, the interest of the player can be increased, but after the jackpot game type is drawn and the jackpot game is granted, the game becomes monotonous, and the player is early. There was a problem that I got tired of.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting bored early after a jackpot game is awarded.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a first privilege that is advantageous to a player by entering a game ball. The prize hole to be given, a variable means for changing the game ball into the first state in which the game ball can enter the prize hole and the second state in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first state, and the lottery result by the lottery means In the case of a specific lottery result, there is a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state, and the game is arranged inside the winning opening and enters the winning opening. A first ball entering area where a ball can enter, a second ball entering area different from the first ball entering area, and the first ball based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering area. A privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the privilege and granting a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege on the basis of the game ball entering the second ball entering area. According to the timing at which the variable means is changed by the variable control means, the first entrance state in which the first entrance area can enter and the second entrance area in which the second entrance area can enter. And a switching means for switching between the spherical state and the spherical state.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the winning opening, a first flow path capable of guiding a gaming ball to the first entry area and to the second entry area. And a second flow path capable of guiding a game ball, and the switching means distributes the game ball entering the winning opening to the first flow path and the first distribution state and the second flow path. At least a distribution member that can be changed to a second distribution state and a variable control unit that can change the distribution member to one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state at a predetermined timing. Is.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a plurality of ball entry areas, which are arranged in the winning opening and into which a game ball including the first ball entry area can enter, are provided around the game area. A first rotating body having, and a second rotating body which is arranged in the winning opening and has a plurality of entering areas around which game balls including the second entering area can enter, and at least the winning opening And a rotation control means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a predetermined direction during a period in which a game ball can enter.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, in which a game ball different from the winning port is configured to be able to enter, and a specific winning port The game ball has a specific changing means that can be changed between a entering state in which the game ball can enter and a restricting state in which it is more difficult to enter than the entering state, and the variable control means specifies the specific value by the lottery means. When it is determined that the result is a lottery result, either one of the variable means or the specific variable means is selected to change the second state to the first state or the regulated state to the entering state. To control.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the first prize which is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball And a variable means for changing the game ball into the first state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. In some cases, it has a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state, is arranged inside the winning opening, and a game ball that has entered the winning opening can enter. A first entrance area, a second entrance area different from the first entrance area, and a game ball entering the first entrance area, which is different from the first privilege. A privilege granting means for granting a second privilege, and a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entering area; and the variable control. According to the timing at which the changing means is changed by the means, the first entering state in which the first entering area can be entered and the second entering state in which the second entering area can be entered are switched. And switching means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the winning opening has a first flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the first entrance area and a second flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the second entrance area, The switching means is a distribution member that is variable between a first distribution state that distributes the game balls that have entered the winning opening to the first flow path and a second distribution state that distributes the game ball to the second flow path, and the distribution member. At least with variable control means for varying either the first distribution state or the second distribution state at a predetermined timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first rotating body disposed in the winning opening and having a plurality of winning areas around which game balls including the first winning area can enter, and a second rotating body disposed in the winning opening, the second rotating body A second rotating body having a plurality of entering areas around which a game ball including a entering area can enter, and the first rotating body and the first rotating body at least during a period in which the game ball can enter the winning opening. And a rotation control means for rotating the second rotating body in a predetermined direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it becomes more difficult to enter the game than a specific winning opening in which a gaming ball different from the winning opening is allowed to enter, a winning state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening, and the winning state. A specific variable means that can be changed to a regulated state, and the variable control means, when the lottery means determines that the specific lottery result, among the variable means or the specific variable means. Either one is selected and variably controlled from the second state to the first state or from the restricted state to the ball entering state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a front view of the inside of a distribution winning a prize device in a 1st embodiment, (b) is a partial enlarged view of a distribution entrance mouth in a 1st embodiment, (c) is a. It is a perspective view of the rotating body in one embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 1st Embodiment. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing various counters in a 1st embodiment, and an outline of a reservation sphere storage area. It is a figure which shows the content of RAM in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the content of ROM in the main-control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is correspondence with the 1st random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value of a special symbol in 1st Embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the type of the big hit in 1st Embodiment, and (d). FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit value of a normal symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of disengagement (normal) in 1st Embodiment, FIG. 6D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probability change) in the first embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram shown. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the special design 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the special design 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a gate control process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning a prize detection processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize detection ending processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory related processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of continuous winning which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the probability variation winning a prize processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the inside of the distribution winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which illustrated the display screen which shows the continuation opportunity in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a display screen which shows the probability variation chance in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which illustrated. (A) is a schematic diagram which illustrated the display screen which shows continuation determination in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a display screen which shows probability change determination in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which illustrated. (A) is a front view of the inside of a distribution winning a prize device in a modification of a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the inside of a distribution winning a prize device in a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a front sectional view of the distribution winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is an upper surface sectional view of the distribution winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is an exploded perspective view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device of La-La section in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional view, (c) is 1st in 3rd Embodiment. It is a top view of a variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the main controller in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the type of big hit in the second embodiment, and (c) is a winning opening and payout balls in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with a number typically. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the abnormal processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in 3rd Embodiment, and (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 3rd Embodiment. .. It is a timing chart of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram of the display mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram of the display mode in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the main controller in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation execution determination processing processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot setting process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning a prize processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification receiving process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous display determination process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation design setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the increase time hold symbol setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time reduction symbol setting process at the time of reduction performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the electric power combination opening pattern in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition transfer of the game state in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 selection table in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 2 selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition transfer of the game state in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed typically the electric constitution in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a special figure 1 type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a special figure 2 type selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol 2 change start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing 5 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th execution form. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the 1st per random number table in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the 1st per classification type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram of the 2nd per random number table. And (d) is a schematic diagram of a first small hit type selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hitting setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the usual symbol change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit prize winning processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the V passage jackpot setting processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit prize completion processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the time saving number selection table in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning state determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board in an eighth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the distribution winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the transition transfer of the game state in 8th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram of the 1st per random number table in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of a 1st per classification type selection table. It is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figures 1 in 8th Embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figures 2. It is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special maps 2 in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view showing a game board of a modification in an 8th embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in a modification. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in a modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3A to 3C are distribution winning apparatus 650. 4 is a detailed view of FIG. 4, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, and a distribution winning device 650 having a probability varying rotating body 900 and a continuous rotating body 901 and the like can be attached to and detached from the back side of the inner frame 12. Be attached to. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1 ), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22, for example, inputs game information on the game information input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, changes the stage of the effect, and effects of super reach. It is operated by the player when changing the contents.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in association with a ball (starting prize) into the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, which will be described later, are adapted to the theme given to each stage. Designed to be done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “a stage in the city”→“ It is repeatedly changed in the order of "Sky Stage" → "Island Stage" → "City Stage" →... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is expanded to the super reach, a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. A display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. Be seen. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first prize. The winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the normal winning opening 67, the distribution winning device 650, the variable winning device 165, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. Be done. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the normal winning opening 67, the variable winning device 165, the variable display unit 80, and the distribution winning device 650 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and a shot ball is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70. It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64a, a special symbol 1 (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and when the ball enters the second winning opening 64b. The special symbol 2 (one of the first symbols) is selected by lottery. A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is selected. In the lottery for the special symbol that is performed for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the jackpot game, jackpots of up to 16 rounds are executed. In the present embodiment, at least 8 rounds of jackpots are guaranteed, and if a winning is made in the continuation opening 901a of the continuous rotating body 901 during 8 rounds, 8 rounds of jackpot games are added, and a total of 16 rounds of jackpot games are played. Granted to the person.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first round to the eighth round are configured to have a maximum of 15 seconds, and the total of the game balls won in the second specific entrance 650a is 5 seconds after 15 seconds have elapsed. The distribution winning apparatus 650 is set to an open state until the ball is reached. From the first round to the eighth round, the interval time between the rounds is set to 5 seconds. Here, since both the probability varying rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 arranged in the distribution winning apparatus 650 are rotated at a speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, when the interval of 5 seconds elapses, the probability varying rotation is performed. The game ball held and rotated by the body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 can be in a discharged state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from being held by the probability varying rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 over the rounds.

In the present embodiment, the distribution prize winning device 650 is set to be opened from the first round to the eighth round, and the variable winning device 165 is set to be opened from the ninth round to the 16th round. No, until 15 seconds elapse from the start of one round, the distribution winning apparatus 650 is set to the open state and the variable winning apparatus 165 is set to the closed state, until 15 seconds to 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the one round. Alternatively, the distribution winning apparatus 650 may be set in a closed state, and the variable winning apparatus 165 may be set in an open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to divide a period in which the game balls are won in the distribution prize winning device 650 and a period in which the game balls are entered in the variable winning device 165, and the winning device won by the player is selected. You can choose and play the game. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening width of the second specific ball entrance 650a of the distribution variable winning a prize device 1650 is made smaller than the opening width of the specific ball entrance 165a of the variable award winning device 165 to make it difficult for a game ball to enter. It is configured. As a result, the digestion time of the jackpot game becomes long, but since the variable winning device 165 in which the game ball easily enters after 15 seconds has elapsed, the digestion time of the jackpot game can be shortened.

It should be noted that the winning device that is opened from the start of one round to 15 seconds and thereafter is set to be switched, but it is not limited to this, and may be set to be switched every 3 seconds, for example. You may comprise so that it may set with a cycle other than. Further, the opening cycle is the same in all rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening cycle (timing) may be changed for each round.

Further, the variable winning device 165 may be opened based on the fact that the player has entered the continuation opening 901a. If the player has entered the continuation opening 901a, he/she will enter the probability variation opening 900a described later. If not, the distribution winning device 650 may be continuously opened, and the variable winning device 165 may be opened only when the game ball has already entered the probability variation opening 900a.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b. become. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

As the big hit type of the special symbol, one kind of big hit type “big hit A” is set (see FIG. 9C). As described above, the jackpot type of this "jackpot A" is a jackpot game of at least 8 rounds and a jackpot game of up to 16 rounds can be executed. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit, the start of the "big hit A" is always determined. Then, in this jackpot A, the distribution winning apparatus 650 is opened from the first round to the eighth round. In the 8 round jackpot game, when the game ball enters the continuation opening 901a, the game ball is detected by the continuation switch (not shown), and when the 9th to 16th round jackpot games are awarded, the variable winning is achieved. The device 165 is opened.

From the 1st round to the 8th round, the slide member 670 of the distribution prize winning device 650 is slid toward the back side of the game board 13 to open the game ball into the second specific entrance 650a. Is set. This open state is set to a closed state when five game balls enter the second specific ball inlet 650a or when the open state continues for 15 seconds, and one round of jackpot game is completed. From the first round to the eighth round, the interval time between the rounds is set to 5 seconds.

From the 9th round to the 16th round, the opening/closing door of the variable winning device 165 is rotated to the front side to be in an open state, and the opening/closing door receives the game ball flowing down on the front side of the game board 13 to make a specific entrance. It is configured to guide the game ball into the inside of the mouth 165a. Here, when the variable winning device 165 is in the open state, 10 game balls enter the specific ball inlet 165a, or when the open state has passed for 30 seconds, the open/close door is turned to the upright state and closed. Set to state. The interval time between the 9th round and the 16th round is set to 3 seconds. As a result, the time between the 9th round and the 16th round is shorter than the time between the 1st round and the 8th round. Further, since the opening width of the specific ball entrance 165a of the variable winning device 165 is set to be larger than that of the distribution winning device 650, it is easy for the game ball to enter the ball and the digesting time of one round can be shortened. it can. The size of the specific ball entrance 650a of the distribution winning device 650 is set so that one game ball can enter, as shown in FIG. 3(a), and it is difficult to enter. Is becoming

Details of the distribution winning apparatus 650 arranged on the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 3A to 3C are views for explaining the details of the distribution winning apparatus 650. The distribution winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13 in a state of being inserted into an opening hole processed by a router. The distribution winning device 650 is configured from the front side of the base plate 651 to have substantially the same outer shape as the base plate 651, and by fitting with the base plate 651, a front cover in which a region in which game balls can flow down is formed. And a body 652.

FIG. 3A is a front view of the distribution winning apparatus 650 with the front cover body 652 removed. On the upper part of the base plate 651, one game ball is formed, and a specific ball entrance 650a which is an opening into which a ball can enter is formed so as to project to the front side. Above the specific ball entrance 650a, a slide member 670 for varying the game ball into the specific ball entrance 650a into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter is slid in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10. It is arranged as possible. This slide member 670 is connected to a solenoid arranged on the back side of the base plate 651 by a connecting member, and in a non-actuated state where the solenoid is not excited, the slide member 670 is projected to the front side of the game board to identify it. It is set so as to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance 650a. When the solenoid is excited and operated, the slide member 670 is moved to the back side of the game board 13 by the connecting member, and the specific entrance 650a is set to an open state.

The flow path through which the game ball that has entered the specific ball inlet 650a can flow down is formed by the flow path wall portion 653 that projects to the front side. The flow path wall portion 653 is formed with a width (15 mm in this embodiment) in which one game ball (diameter 11 mm) can flow down, and a flow path is formed in the direction directly below from the distribution ball inlet 650a. Then, after that, a flow path for branching down the game ball flowing down to the left flow path 654 or the right flow path 655 is formed. A magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path immediately below the distribution entrance 650a so as to detect the game sphere entering the distribution entrance 650a. No wall portion is formed on the surface of the flow path that is opposite to the branch point, and the rotation distribution member 800 is arranged. The rotation distributing member 800 has the same width as the protruding width of the flow path wall portion 653, and has a shaft portion 800a for rotatably fixed to the base plate 651. A distribution motor 270a, which is a motor for rotating the rotation distribution member 800, is provided on the back surface side of the base plate 651.

The distribution motor 270a is rotationally controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 rotates the rotary distribution member 800 30 degrees to the right (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 3A) and rotates 30 degrees to the left (the position indicated by the solid line). The distribution motor 270a is driven and rotated every 5 seconds to the position shown by the dotted line in FIG. 3(a). That is, the state of distributing the game balls to the left channel 654 and the state of distributing the game balls to the right channel 655 are switched every 5 seconds. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is turned on every 5 seconds by turning on the pachinko machine 10 and executing a gate control process (S1104) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later. The distribution motor 270a is drive-controlled to repeatedly rotate the rotation distribution member 800. As will be described in detail later, the gate clock counter 203k of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured to be backed up even when the power is cut off. The counting is restarted from the state of 1 and the rotation distribution member 800 is rotated.

Therefore, the rotational distribution member 800 is not driven at the same timing every time the power is turned on, but can be changed depending on the state when the power is cut off. Therefore, even if the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are powered on at the same time, the operation timing of the rotary distribution member 800 can be different.

In the present embodiment, the rotation cycle of the rotary distribution member 800 is fixed at 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be driven so as to be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the drive cycle from being synchronized with another pachinko machine 10. Therefore, depending on the selection of the pachinko machine 10, different playability can be provided.

Below the left flow path opening 654a, which is the lower end of the left flow path, a continuous rotator 901 is rotatably supported with respect to the base body 651. The continuous rotation body 901 is rotated leftward at a rotation speed of 5 seconds by the first rotation motor 270b arranged on the back side of the base body 651. In addition, a positive variable rotating body 900 is rotatably supported by a base body 651 at a right flow passage port 655a which is a lower end portion of the right flow passage 655. The probability varying rotating body 900 is rotated to the right by the second rotation motor 270c arranged on the back side of the base body 651 at a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds. The probability varying rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 have the same shape.

Here, the shapes of the probability varying rotor 900 and the continuous rotor 901 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3C is a perspective view of the probability varying rotating body 900 (continuous rotating body 901). The probability varying rotating body 900 has a circular outer shape, and has a thickness equivalent to one game ball. Around the periphery, recesses into which game balls can enter are formed at four locations, up, down, left and right. The concave portion provided in the periphery is composed of one probability variation opening 900a and three rotation entrances 900b to 900d. The probability variation port 900a is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the back side of the probability variation rotating body 900 so that the game ball can be guided to the probability variation flow path port 901k provided in the base plate 651. In addition, the rotation ball entrances 900b to 900d are provided with wall portions on the back side that prevent guiding the game ball to the probability variation channel opening 901k. Further, the continuous rotating body 901 also has the same configuration as that of the probability varying rotor 900, and in the continuous rotating body 901, the probability varying port 900a is formed as the continuous port 901a.

In a state where the probability varying rotor 900 is rotated to a position where the opening of the probability variation port 900a faces the right flow channel port 655a, the game ball flowing down the right flow channel 655 can enter the probability variation port 900a. The probability varying rotating body 900 is always rotated to the right at a rotation speed of one rotation for 5 seconds, and when a game ball enters the probability varying opening 900a while rotating, the game ball is held in the probability varying opening 900a. When the probability variation opening 900a is turned downward in the above state and the probability variation opening 900a faces downward (the position shown in FIG. 3A), the game ball in the probability variation opening 900a flows down to the probability variation passage opening 900k. The game ball that has flowed into the probability variation channel opening 900k is detected by a probability variation switch (magnetic sensor) (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 13. When a game ball is detected by this probability variation switch, a probability variation flag 203p described later is set to ON by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and 100 is set to the probability variation counter 203g at the end of the jackpot game (timing of ending). In the period until the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot game, a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability is set.

Further, when the game ball flowing down the right flow path 655 enters any of the rotation entrance ball openings 900b to 900d of the probability variation rotating body 900, the probability variation rotating body 900 rotates to the left, and the probability variation channel opening 900k. Even if it is rotated to the position, the game ball cannot flow down to the probability variation channel port 900k due to the back side wall portion of the rotary ball inlet port 900b, and the game ball within the rotary ball port 900b to 900d is discharged to the discharge channel 656. Discharge. The game ball discharged to the discharge flow path 656 flows down the discharge flow path 656, and is discharged to the back surface side of the game board 13 through a discharge port 657 formed at the lower end of the discharge flow path 656, and the game board 13 is discharged. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (on the side of the island facility) by a flow path (not shown) arranged on the back side.

In this way, the probability variable rotating body 900 is constantly rotated at a speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, and the distribution member 800 is also rotated every 5 seconds to switch the distribution direction. Therefore, in the case of a big hit game, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the probability variation entrance 900k is set once in one round, and the player's expectation for the probability variation game is increased. You can Therefore, it is possible to be interested in whether or not the probability variation game is given even during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot of the special symbol is achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the jackpot. is there.

The continuous rotating body 901 is constantly rotated leftward at a rotation speed of 5 seconds per rotation. Therefore, similar to the probability varying rotating body 900, when the game ball flowing down the left flow path 654 enters the continuation opening 901a, the game ball is held in the continuation opening 901a and rotated leftward, and the continuous flow path is formed. The game ball inside the continuation opening 901a is made to flow down to the continuation flow path 901k at a position facing 901k. The game ball that has flowed into the continuous old flow path 901k flows down to the back side of the game board 13 and is detected by a continuation switch (magnetic sensor) not shown, and then to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (to the side of the island facility). Is discharged.

Here, when a game ball is detected by the continuation switch, a round start flag 203m described later is set to ON by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 113. When the round start flag 203m is set to ON, the start of the next round is set if the current number of rounds is less than 16.

In this way, the continuous rotating body 901 is rotated at a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, and the distribution member 800 also switches the distribution direction every 5 seconds. Therefore, during one round of the jackpot game, the right flow path is surely generated. Since the continuation opening 901a faces the left channel opening 654a in the state where the game balls are distributed to 654, the player can be expected to set (continue) the next round. Therefore, even during the big hit game, it is possible to make the player play the game with an interest in the flow of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the big hit.

Further, the probability varying rotating body 900 is rotated by the first rotating motor 270b (see FIG. 6) formed of a stepping motor as described above. Similarly, the continuous rotation body 901 is rotated by the second rotation motor 270c (see FIG. 6) configured by a stepping motor. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, in the process of S1011 in the startup process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the probability variation rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are initially set. The operation settings are executed. For the setting of this initial operation, the origin positions of the first rotary motor 270b and the second rotary body motor 270c (the origin positions of the probability varying rotary body 900 and the continuous rotary body) are set.

The probability variable rotating body 900 is provided with a detection piece (not shown) fixed to the rotating shaft 900z on the back surface side of the base plate 651. When the probability variation port 900a of the probability variation rotating body 900 is rotated to a position facing the above-described probability variation flow path port 900k (see FIG. 3A), a detection piece (not shown) is detected by the photosensor. Is configured. In the initial operation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, based on the fact that the positive variable rotating body 900 is rotated rightward and the photo sensor (not shown) detects the detection piece (not shown), The operation of the first rotary motor 270b is stopped and the step counter is set to zero. The step counter is a counter for controlling the operation of the first rotation motor 270b, and is configured to be able to determine the rotational position of the probability varying rotating body 900 by the number of counters. Similarly, for the initial operation of the continuous rotating body 900, when the photosensor detects the detection piece by rotating the second rotary motor 270c to the left, the operation is stopped, and the step for the second rotary motor 270c is performed. The counter is set to zero. Also in the continuous rotating body 901, the position where the detection piece is detected by the photosensor is the position where the continuous flow path 901k and the continuous opening 901a face each other.

In the present embodiment, the rotational speeds of the probability varying rotor 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are constant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on, the rotational speeds of the probability varying rotor 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are respectively determined by lottery. You may comprise so that it may be determined by lottery. Further, the rotation speed may be changed depending on the time (for example, every one hour) after the power is turned on. In such a configuration, when the rotation speed is set to be set fast for one hour when the power is turned on, there are many opportunities to enter the probability variation opening 900a or the continuation opening 901a in the time zone immediately after the rotation. Therefore, it is possible to set a period advantageous to the player.

In the probability variation game state (high probability game state) where the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to high probability, the lottery probability of the special symbol is low probability game state (normal game state until the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot game) ) Time 1/400 to 1/40 in the high probability game state (probability variation game state). Further, in the probability variation gaming state, a time-saving gaming state (probability of a normal symbol is set to a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory 64c becomes long, and the number of times of opening is set to a large number) is also set. Therefore, in the probability variation game state, it becomes easy to enter the second winning opening 64b, and by winning the second winning opening 64b to the player, the frequency of paying out the winning balls increases, thereby The decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. Therefore, the player can suppress the consumption of balls and play the probability variation game state, and by winning the jackpot in the probability variation game state, the player can further accumulate the game balls obtained during the jackpot game.

Here, "probability variation game state of special symbols (high probability state)" means a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols has increased, the so-called special symbol probability state (probably changing special symbols), in other words, special It is a game state in which it is easy to shift to the game state. On the other hand, if the "high probability state of the special symbol" is not the "normal game state of the special symbol (low probability state)", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. It shows that the jackpot probability is in a normal state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "the time saving state of the normal symbol" (time saving of the regular symbol) means that the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the electric accessory 64c provided in association with the second winning opening 64b plays the game ball. It is a game state in which the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 64b (inverted C shape (see FIG. 2)) and a ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", which means that the winning probability of ordinary symbol is normal, that is, the winning probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

Instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, as the time to open the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b and the number of times to open the electric accessory 64c per hit of the normal symbol is changed. Is also good. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, "high probability state of the special symbol" and "time saving state of the normal symbol", but after the "high probability state of the special symbol" ends, "time saving state of the normal symbol" It may be configured such that Instead of the special symbol lottery number, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to distribute the sphere entering the specific entrance 650a to either the probability varying rotator 900 or the continuous rotator 901. The configuration is not limited to the distribution winning apparatus 650 in which balls can be entered in the big hit. For example, the distribution prize winning device 650 is configured to be opened other than a big hit, and further, in place of the probability varying rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901, a ball entrance for triggering a lottery for a special symbol is provided, respectively. Good. In this case, the entrances may be entrances with different degrees of advantage (for example, different award balls that can be obtained in the case of a big hit or different probability changes). For example, a ball entrance provided in the arrangement of the probability varying rotor 900 may be advantageous. Further, as the timing of opening the distribution winning a prize device 650, for example, it may be configured to be opened when a normal symbol is hit. In this case, in the case of hitting one normal symbol, the opening pattern in which the specific entrance 650a is opened only during the period when the rotation distribution member 800 is inclined to the right, and the rotation distribution member 800 is on the left side. The opening pattern in which the specific entrance port 650a is opened only during the state of being inclined to the position may be provided. That is, as the time saving state (and the probability change state), a time saving state in which a lottery can be executed with an advantageous entrance and a time saving in which a lottery can be executed with a relatively disadvantageous entrance are provided. Good.

With such a configuration, since it is possible to focus on the ball entrance into which the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 650 enters, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

On the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2), a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided with a first symbol. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are variably displayed by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol, which is performed in association with the entry into the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (starting winning), is being executed by a lighting state. Or, as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, shows a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol in a lighting state, or is inserted into the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not yet been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

If the ball enters the first winning opening 64a while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times of entering the ball is held up to four times, The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown by the third symbol display device 81. Even when the player enters the second winning opening 64b, the number of times of entering the ball is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as reduced working hours. Further, the LED 37a indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as the stopped symbol after the end of the fluctuation.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64a (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is out of the range, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

The variable display of the special symbol showing the lottery result of the lottery game of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is not performed at the same time, but only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol 2 is set with priority.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom for periodical display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64a, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64a while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entered balls is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the corresponding sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, the reserved balls of the second winning opening 64b are set in the same manner by using the number of reserved balls different from the first winning opening 64a (for example, a symbol).

In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 is being performed, and the variation ends. As a later stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the sphere passes through the normal entrance 67, a variation in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. .. Four second design holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, as in the case of the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The number of times may be set more than once (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64a and a second winning opening 64b into which balls can enter are arranged. When a ball enters the first winning opening 64a, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for the special symbol 1 is made at 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Similarly for the second winning opening 64b, when a ball enters, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A lottery for the special symbol 2 is made by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b are also one of the winning openings for paying out five balls as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, as will be described later in detail, the number of winning balls, which is the number of balls won in the switch reading process (S101) of the main controller 110 due to the turning on of the first winning hole switch or the second winning hole switch, The number of acquired balls, which is the number of balls paid out as prize balls, is stored in the winning detection information area (not shown) of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

A variable winning device 165 is provided on the upper right of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b. In the open state of the variable winning device 165, a game ball that has been launched so that the game ball passes through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a game ball that has been launched by a right hit) is arranged at a position where it is easy to win. .. Specifically, the variable winning device 165 is a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing door that covers the specific ball entrance 165a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. ) And. The specific ball entrance 165a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific ball inlet 165a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the state. As described above, the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state when the ninth to 16th rounds are executed during the big hit game.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific entrance 165a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific entrance 165a is opened for a predetermined time, A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific entrance 165a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball enters the specific entrance 165a during opening of the specific entrance 165a. May be formed as a special game state.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate or an identification label are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate or the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is provided on the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, on the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box side are closed. Cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used in the lottery of the special symbol and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 22). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b each including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are adjusted in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b. Are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is stored. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of being a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability of a high probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol than at the time of that low probability (special. It is divided into two types: for the period when the symbol has a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (FIG. 9B) includes a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The numbers of random numbers that are jackpots are different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of alignment, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first per random number table 202a for low probability. (See FIG. 9B). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/400”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-9” is the first random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 9(b ) Reference). In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "1/40".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The value of the first hit type counter C2 and the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 9C). In this embodiment, the value “0 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit A, and the big hit A is always selected when the big hit occurs.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type set in the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 9(c)) is only one type of the jackpot A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be selected. You may comprise. Further, the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot type selected respectively for the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set to have different types and proportions.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol "disconnect reach." "(For example, the range of 90 to 99)" and "complete disconnection" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 stores the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a special symbol, or the like.

For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow and for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely out".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table (see FIGS. 10B to 10D) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main controller 110. Is provided in the ROM 202.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10C). And a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) are set. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various normal reach types (30 seconds), super reach types (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as jackpot variation patterns. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, "0 to 50" for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "51 to 179" for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and various special reach (90 seconds) ), the variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, hits the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach “198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out during the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined and is acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation game state is higher than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when it is out of the normal is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every time a timer interrupt process is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the normal entrance (through gate) 67 on either side. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 10D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When the second random number table (see FIG. 10(d)) matches the value of the random number that is the winning number, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table, for low probability of normal symbols (time period in which the normal state of normal symbols), and high probability when the probability of hitting normal symbols is higher than that for low probability (normal symbols) It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state) and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10D, when the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are the symbols of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is within the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first winning opening 64a is opened only for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first winning port 64a is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first winning opening 64a is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further the release period of the first winning opening 64a. Is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64a. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first winning opening 64a is opened for "1 second×2 times", but the opening time The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 22) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 21). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 8, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, big hit flag 203i, winning detection period storage area 203j, gate clock counter 203k, round start flag 203m, a round counter 203n, a round continuation flag 203p, a probability variation flag 203r, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64a (special symbol 1), and one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) Each of these areas stores the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64a (starting winning) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting winning, immediately the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that various types of information include win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning/prohibiting, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as the prize information, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 233 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From this, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state is always predicted in the prefetch determination. This is, in the present embodiment, whether or not the game ball that has won the distribution prize winning device 650 during the jackpot game enters the probability variation port 900a (whether or not the game ball is detected by the probability variation switch (not shown)). Since it is determined whether the probability variation game state is set after the jackpot game, it is difficult to correctly predict the game state at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol for the won game ball when the game ball is won. Is. The probability variation game is in progress, and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is equal to or greater than the number of holding balls at the time of winning the prize (the number including the number of holdings that have already been won and held before winning), and the fluctuation starts first. If there is no big hit in the hold, it may be configured to execute the pre-reading in the big hit determination in the probability variation gaming state.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2), and the first prize hole 64a (special symbol 1) with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storing area 203a described above. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2), only detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). The vacant areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

Special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting prize) into the first winning opening 64a (third symbol display) This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first winning opening 64a and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 1 They are added (see S504 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 13).

The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display holding in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding sphere number command (see S211 in FIG. 13 and S505 in FIG. 16). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the command of the number of reserved balls to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of holding balls of the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 203d in that the first winning opening 64a (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2). Only the other points are the same and the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is incremented by 1 in the process of S510 in FIG. 16, and is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 13). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 13, S511 of FIG. 16). reference).

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of 4 (See S804 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 of FIG. 18).

When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (FIG. 19). S803: No).

The probability variation counter 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is a probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability variation counter 203g has an initial value set to zero, and in the main controller 110, the timing of closing the specific entrance (large opening) 65a or the second specific entrance 650a in the final round of the jackpot ( That is, the probability variation flag 203r described later is turned on at the end timing of the jackpot), that is, 100 is set when the game ball enters the probability variation port 900a and is detected by the probability variation switch (not shown). To be done.

When the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 15, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 14, S208) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 15, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 14, S208), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referenced, and if the value is greater than 0, at high probability Based on the first per random number table 202a for special symbols is drawn, while the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability, special symbol lottery Is done.

The counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for counting each counter value, as described above.

The big hit flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is on, the jackpot game 650 or the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state by the jackpot control process (FIG. 24, S1105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Is executed.

The winning detection period storage area 203j counts a period determined to be valid when a game ball is detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown) of the distribution winning device 650 in the jackpot game. It is a storage area. When the jackpot game of "jackpot A" is started, a counter value of 3750 (corresponding to 15 seconds) is set at the start of the round from the first round to the eighth round. Then, at the end of the round, the counter value of 1250 (corresponding to 5 seconds) is reset. Here, at the end of the round, even if the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0, that is, even if the detection period remains, the counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is forcibly reset. To be done. As a result, if it is determined that the game balls of five balls, which are the closing conditions, have won the second specific entrance 650a before the maximum opening period of 15 seconds of the second specific entrance 650a, the interval time is determined. A count value corresponding to 5 seconds corresponding to is set.

Thereby, even after the second specific entrance 650a is closed, the winning detection period longer than the interval time is set, and the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown) is set over the rounds. It is possible to suppress a defect in which the detection is determined to be effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second specific entrance 650a is closed, a value corresponding to the same time as the interval time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) is stored in the winning detection period storage area 203j. Since it is set, in this case, it is possible to effectively detect the game ball entering the probability variation opening 900a or the continuation opening 901a. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the closed state is set, the count value corresponding to 5 seconds is configured to be set in the winning detection period storage area 203j, but not limited to this, the second specific entrance 650a. It is configured to set a counter value corresponding to a period obtained by adding 5 seconds to the period required for the game ball that entered into the right channel opening 655a or the left channel opening 654a in the winning detection period storage area 203j. Good. With such a configuration, when the game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a at the end of the round is detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown), it is effective. You can It should be noted that this period may be set to a period required for the gaming ball entering the second specific ball entrance 650a to be detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown). ..

Further, as in the present embodiment, a valid period of 5 seconds is set at the end of the round, and when that period has elapsed, the variable probability rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 is quickly rotated in the direction opposite to the normal direction. Then, the held game balls may be discharged to the discharge channel 656. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the game ball entered at the end of the round will be judged as invalid even though it is detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown). be able to. Further, the probability variation rotating body 900 and the continuous rotation body 901 may be configured to rotate in opposite directions based on the round end timing, so as to prevent detection by the probability variation switch or the continuation switch. ..

When the ninth round to the 16th round are executed, a value of 7500 corresponding to the round period (30 seconds) is set at the start of the round. In this case, 0 is set at the end of the round. As a result, the end of the round can be determined by the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j.

The winning detection period storage area 203j is updated by being subtracted by 1 in S1402 in the winning detection process (S1302 of FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The gate clock counter 203k is a counter for determining the cycle of rotating the rotation distribution member 800. The gate time counter 203k is incremented by 1 in the process of S1201 of the gate control process (S1104 of FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Then, when the value of the gate clock counter 203k reaches a value of 1250 corresponding to 5 seconds, the rotation distribution member 800 is rotated to guide the game ball to the right flow passage 655 or the left flow passage 654. Can be switched. When the value of the gate clock counter 203k reaches 1250, it is reset to 0 which is the initial value.

The round start flag 203m is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the round during the jackpot game. When the round start flag 203m is turned on, it is determined that it is time to start the round. This round start flag 203m is turned on in S219 in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 13, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and in S1427 in the winning detection end process (FIG. 26, S1413). Here, it is set to ON when it is determined that there is a new round to be started. It is set to off at the start of the round.

The round counter 203n is a counter that indicates the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game. This round counter 203n is set to 8 at the start of the jackpot A (S219 in the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 13, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110). Here, the minimum number of rounds, 8, is set. Further, when it is determined that the ball enters the continuation opening 901a in the distribution winning apparatus 650 and is detected by a continuation switch (not shown) (winning detection processing (FIG. 25, S1302) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110). In the case of Yes in S1404), 8 is added to the value of the round counter 203n in S1406. As a result, the jackpot game is set to be executed up to 16 rounds.

The round continuation flag 203p is a big hit game of 1 (1st round to 8th round), the game ball enters the continuation opening 901a, the game ball is detected by the continuation switch (not shown), and the number of rounds is increased. It is a flag indicating that the addition has been made. The round continuation flag 203p is set to ON in S1405 in the winning detection process (S1302 of FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, it is set to OFF in S1424 (at the end of the jackpot game) in the winning detection end processing (FIG. 26, S1413).

The probability variation flag 203r is a flag indicating that the game ball entered the probability variation mouth 900a during the jackpot game of 1 (first round to eighth round) and the game ball was detected by the probability variation switch (not shown). Is. The probability variation flag 203r is set to ON in S1410 in the winning detection process (FIG. 25, S1302) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is set to OFF in S1425 (at the end of the jackpot game) in the winning detection end processing (FIG. 26, S1413).

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. As for the ROM 202, as shown in FIG. 9A, a first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B), a first per type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9C), and a second per random number. At least a table 202c (see FIG. 9D) and a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 10A to 10D) are provided. Since each table has already been described, detailed description will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific entrance 165a. As a shaft, a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side, a solenoid for sliding the slide member 670 of the distribution winning apparatus 650, a solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64c, etc. are connected. The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Each switch 208 includes a sensor (not shown) for detecting a winning ball.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out one award ball. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). The rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, the payout of the prize balls is stopped for a predetermined period (1 second) every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out. Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls such as a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from continuously paying out the prize balls and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from failing due to the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 melting due to the heat generation of the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the accessible portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion such as the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51 that the player touches), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. Can be suppressed. Note that the number of payouts and the pause period of payout until the payout motor 216 stops payout of prize balls are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to suspend the payout each time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. Further, for example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (a speaker not shown) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation pattern effect ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. At least the variation pattern selection table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The fluctuation pattern selection table will be briefly described because it is already known, but based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command are shown. Further detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the type (reach, out, etc.). Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation contents instructed from the main control device 110, one fluctuation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery.

FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a power off flag 223y, and others At least a memory area 223z is provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is changed to the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is an area number in the vacant areas of the four special symbols (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 They are stored in order from the (first to fourth) small areas. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64a, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 29). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Further, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, holds the number of holding spheres (waiting number) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main control device 110 at maximum 4 It is a counter that counts up to times. With the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the number of holding balls is added by the ball entering the second winning opening 64b, and the special symbol different from the display of the holding sphere number symbol of the special symbol 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The only difference is that it is used for displaying the number of reserved balls of No. 2 and the other is the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 223c of the main controller 110. You can change it while doing it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 29), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 33). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 29), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2107 in FIG. 33). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop design according to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed in the third symbol display device 81, so that the stop display of the variable effect is displayed. Is controlled.

The power-off flag 223y sends a power-off command to the voice lamp controller 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the voice lamp controller 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y turns on. The setting is made, and power-off processing is executed (S1616 in FIG. 28). Then, in the startup process (FIG. 27) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the data read process is executed, and the power-off flag 223y is set to off. (S1510 in FIG. 27). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process when the power is cut off can be used again by the data reading process in the startup process when the power is restored, and the navigation game is continuously executed. be able to.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, a variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (variation). (Direction) and notice production are controlled. The display control device 114 has a known configuration, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 12 to 26. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. In this switch reading process (S101), for example, in order to calculate the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in the jackpot game according to the number of game balls that have won in the distribution prize port 650a, the distribution prize device 650 is used. The state of the magnetic sensor 659 provided is detected.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and thereafter. The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64a is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15 and 16.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is If it is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (change in the special symbol 2) The display hold count N2) is acquired (S203).

Next, it is determined whether there is a variable display pending ball in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is 0. If it is determined (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209), and the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1). ) Is determined to be 0 (S209: No), it is determined that there is no variable display holding ball in the special symbol, and this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (S205). ), the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set a holding ball number command (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol 2 variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (N1) is determined to be greater than 0 (S209: Yes), for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1, the same process as the process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 described above is performed. The special symbol 1 variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 14 or a special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 2 fluctuation start process or special symbol 1 fluctuation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b or the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 or the special symbol 1 is set.

After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (the result of the lottery this time) performed by the special symbol variation start process is special. It is determined whether it is a big hit of the symbol (S217). Then, if the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S218), 8 is set to the round counter 203n, and the round start flag 203m is set to ON ( S219). Then, the jackpot start command is set (S220), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is reset (S221), and the process proceeds to S222.

With the jackpot flag 203i set to ON in the processing of S218, the jackpot game processing is executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 24) of the main processing (see FIG. 22) described later. A specific description will be given in a jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) described later.

Further, the round counter 203n is set to 8 and the round start flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S219, so that it is set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later. The special game of the round (8 rounds) is executed according to the value. Although details will be described later, by setting 8 in the round counter 203n by the processing of S219, a special game of eight rounds is executed, and during the execution of the special game, it is determined that the continuous winning is achieved by the prize detection processing (FIG. 25). If determined, 8 is additionally set to the round counter 203n (S1406), and the special game of 8 rounds (total 16 rounds) will be executed.

The jackpot start command set in the process of S220 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the external process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp controller 113 transmits the display jackpot start command to the display controller 114. As a result, a display suggesting the start of the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can recognize that the special game state has been entered.

On the other hand, in the process of S217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S223), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is If it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S223: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S223: No), the process proceeds to S222.

In the process of S222, which is executed after the process of S221, S223 or S224, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81 of the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 are displayed. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop (S222). When the process of S222 ends, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol 2 variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 of the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b. Each value of is acquired (S301). Next, in order to determine whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S301 is a big hit of the special symbol 2, it is determined whether or not it is in probability variation (S302). Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0.

When it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the lottery result of whether or not it is a jackpot is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability of the first random number table 202a (S303). ), and the process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability of the first per random number table 202a (FIG. 9B). The determination is made by comparing each value (winning value) that has been set one by one (S303). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "10 to 399", it is determined to be out (see FIG. 9B). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is not on (S302: No), the lottery result of whether or not it is a jackpot is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the time of the low probability of the first random number table 202a ( S304), the process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of low probability of the first per random number table 202a (FIG. 9(b)). The determination is made by comparing each value (winning value) that has been set one by one (S304). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "1 to 399", it is determined to be out (see FIG. 9B).

In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S303 or S304 is a jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S305: Yes), a jackpot. The display mode of is set (S306). In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the jackpot symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Determine the stop type to be displayed in. For example, as the stop type, "outside reach", "completely outside", etc. are defined.

Next, in the process of S307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the display mode set in the process of S306. Further, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S307). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the big symbol symbol stops on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203j of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Specifically, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, the normal reach is reached, if it is in the range of “51 to 179”, the super reach is reached, and if it is in the range of “180 to 198”, the special reach is given. The fluctuation pattern is determined (see FIG. 10B).

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out of position (S305: No), the display mode of out of position is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Determine the stop type to be displayed in. For example, as the stop type, "outside reach", "completely outside", etc. are defined.

Next, the deviation variation pattern is determined based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 of the variation pattern selection table 202d or the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 of the deviation pattern 202d (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is checked based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the time.

When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 22). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol 1 variation start process, the same process as the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is performed for the special symbol 1. The data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the special symbol 1 is acquired by the process of S401, and then the same process as the process in the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is performed on the special symbol 1. Since the specific contents are the same as the process in the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64a, and if there is a starting winning, It is a process for executing pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the process of holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (starting winning) (S501). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64a is detected over the three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display pending in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d changed by calculation is set to the holding sphere number command (S505).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S505, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are acquired, The symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere storage area (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (starting winning) (S507). When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (S507: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e performs the same process as when winning the first winning opening 64a.

More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S509: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (N2) is incremented by 1 (S510), and the holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is set (S511). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 are acquired and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area (S512), and the process proceeds to S513.

Whether there is no winning in the second winning opening 64b (S507: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S509: No), the process proceeds to S513.

Here, the prefetch processing of S513 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing (S513). The prefetching process (S513) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 16).

In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (S602). Then, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S603), and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the big hit game of the big hit A, the positive change game state is achieved by the game ball passing through the positive change switch (not shown) in the positive change passage opening 900k. In the case of this probability variation gaming state, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the big hit judgment value for high probability in the first hit random number table 202a. Here, at the time when the prefetching process is executed, it can be determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot A, but in the jackpot game, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch (not shown) in the probability variation passage opening 900k. Whether or not it cannot be determined. That is, at the time when the prefetching process is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probability variation gaming state is set.

Therefore, when determining the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit in the prefetch process (S507), the determination value for the low probability in the first random number table is set regardless of whether the probability variation gaming state is set or not. I will use it. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the first hit random number table 202a, it is specified that the big hit judgment value for high probability includes the big hit judgment value for low probability. Specifically, the jackpot determination value for high probability is “0 to 9”, and the jackpot determination value for low probability is “0”. As a result, the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit when the probability is low, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch (not shown) in the probability variation channel opening 900k and enters the probability variation game state. If the value is “0”, which is the determination value, it can be determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the electric motor attached to the second winning opening 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S701). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is performed. In the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the processing of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S708). Whether or not the time is being shortened is determined by whether or not the probability is changing (whether the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0). In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving game state and the probability variation game state are configured to be set at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time variation game state may be provided separately from the probability variation game state.

In the process of S708, when it is determined that it is in time saving (the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S709). ). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit and it is configured to be difficult. This is during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to try to win the specific ball entrance 165a. In this case, when the electric accessory 64c that accompanies the second winning opening 64b is opened, the ball that is trying to win the specific winning opening 165a easily enters the second winning opening 64b. It becomes difficult to make a prize in the specific ball entrance 165a. Therefore, during the big hit of the special symbol, the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is made difficult to be opened, and the game ball is easily won into the specific winning opening 165a. In addition, since the specific winning opening 165a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64a, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first winning opening 64a during the big hit of the special symbol, the first winning opening Many balls enter the mouth 64a. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first winning port 64a becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol is not in the big hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the high hit probability second hit random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 9D).

In the process of S708, when it is not during the time saving (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the low value. Based on the second random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 9D).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S712), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S712: Yes) , The display mode of winning is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the time saving (S714), and if it is during the time saving (S714: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present time is during the big hit of the special symbol (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 64b as much as possible, even if the hit of the normal symbol is the same as the case of the deviation of the normal symbol. , The number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened and the opening time are set.

In the process of S715, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 64b. The opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S714, when it is not during the time saving (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S712: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S719, it is determined whether or not it is during the time saving (S719), and when it is during the time saving (S719: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds ( S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning port 64b becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 64b. It becomes a state.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S722). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S722, if the variation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery for the normal symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S723, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1108) of the main process (see FIG. 22) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variable display being executed is started in the second symbol display device 83, the lottery result of the normal symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is set (S725), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1106) of the main process (see FIG. 22) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 12), judges whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through-gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 If not (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. In the area (S805), and this processing ends. In the process of S805, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1012. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the initial operation of the distribution motor 270a, the first rotary motor 270b, and the second rotary motor 270c is set (S1020). In this initial operation, each motor is rotated in a predetermined direction, the operation is stopped at the origin position (the position where the detection piece is detected by the photo sensor), and each step counter is set to 0. To be done. Here, the origin position of the rotation distribution member 800 is a position for guiding the game ball to the right flow path 655 (the solid line position in FIG. 3A), and the probability variation rotor 900 has the probability variation port 900a as the probability variation flow path. It is a position facing 900k (the turning position of the probability varying rotating body 900 shown in FIG. 3A), and the continuous rotating body 901 has a position where the continuous opening 901 faces the continuous flow path 901k (see FIG. 3A). It is a position rotated 180 degrees from the position shown). The interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

In this way, the initial position (origin position) of the probability varying rotor 900, the continuous rotating body 901, and the rotation distribution member 800 is set by the start-up process (see FIG. 21), so the probability varying rotor 900, continuous rotating body 901. The position of the rotation distribution member 800 can be accurately determined by the step counter. In this way, by determining each position and notifying the position to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command, the voice lamp control device 113 can set an effect for notifying the player of each position. it can. Specifically, the rotation distribution member 800 informs which flow path the game ball is guided to, and whether the game ball can enter the certainty variation opening 900a and the continuation opening 901a. It is possible to perform a notice. Thereby, the player can expect the game ball to enter the probability variation opening 900a and the continuation opening 901a by the effect during the jackpot game, or can aim the game ball at the aim.

In addition, whether or not this effect is notified to the player when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 executes a predetermined lottery and is elected, or a plurality of jackpot types are set and the jackpot type is notified. Alternatively, it may be set to be variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1101 to S1109 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1111 and S1112 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special lamp variation process (see FIG. 13) and the hold ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 16) and the winning information command set in the prefetch process (see FIG. 17) are used as the voice lamp control device 113. Send to. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The jackpot start command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) and the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and the gate control process is executed (S1104). Details of the process of S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed, and the big hit control process for opening or closing the specific entrance (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 165 is executed (S1105). In the jackpot control process, the specific ball entrance 165a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific ball entrance 165a has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won in the specific ball entrance 165a. To do. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific ball entrance 165a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific ball entrance 165a are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific ball entrance 165a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1105) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the process of S1105 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors product 64c is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18), the opening/closing control of the electric auditors product 64c is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

When the process of S1106 is finished, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1107). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. , The first symbol display device 37 is started. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) ends, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the first symbol display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1108). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1110). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1110: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1110: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1111, S1112).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1111). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1112).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1109 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the first fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1109, if the RAM 203 stores the information about the occurrence of power failure (S1109: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 20 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1113 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1113), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1114). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1115), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1116), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1109 is at the timing of the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1108, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1111 and S1112 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut down, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the gate control processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this gate control processing (S1104). This gate control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol big hit state, by switching the position of the rotary distribution member 800, the distribution is performed. This is a process for distributing the game balls that have entered the ball inlet 650a to the left channel 654 or the right channel 655.

In the gate control process, first, 1 is added to the gate clock counter 203k (S1201). Next, it is determined whether the gate time counter 203k is larger than 1250 (S1202). When it is determined that the gate time counter 203k is larger than 1250 (S1202: Yes), the position of the rotary distribution member 800 is switched by driving the accessory motor 270a (S1203), and the gate time counter 203k is changed. It is initialized to 0 (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

Here, since the gate control process is repeatedly executed every 4 ms in the main process, the position of the distribution member can be switched every time the value of the gate timing counter 203k becomes 1250 (that is, every 5 s). it can. In addition, the position of the rotation distribution member 800 is a position where the game balls that have entered the distribution inlet 650a are distributed to the left channel 654 (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 3A) or the right channel 655. It is switched by the accessory motor 270a so as to be located at one of the positions to be distributed to (the position shown by the broken line in FIG. 3A).

When the processing of S1202 or S1205 is completed, the first rotation data is set (S1206) and the second rotation data is set (S1207). After that, a rotator command is set (S1208), and this processing ends.

The drive of the first rotation motor 270b is controlled by the first rotation data set in the process of S1206. Note that, for example, in the case of a big hit, the rotation speed of the first rotary motor 270b may be changed according to the big hit type. As a result, a change occurs in the rotation operation of the continuous rotating body 901, and the interest of the player can be improved as compared with a monotonous gaming machine in which the continuous rotating body 901 rotates at a constant speed. In addition, if the setting is made so that the continuous rotating body 901 rotates slowly, it is possible for the player to easily play a game aiming for continuous winning, and the continuous rotating body 901 is set to rotate faster. By doing so, a continuous winning prize can be drawn in a short time, that is, a gaming machine that can execute a lot of continuous winning prizes in one round.

Further, in the processing of S1206 and S1207, the rotation speeds of the rotary motors (270b, 270c) set may be changed at a predetermined timing. For example, the rotation speed is fast every hour after the power is turned on. Alternatively, the low rotation speed and the low rotation speed may be set alternately. Furthermore, the first rotation data and the second rotation data may be data of a plurality of rotation speeds and their switching timings. For example, half rotations may be high rotation speeds and remaining half rotations may be low rotation speeds. This makes it possible to set the half rotation where each winning opening (900a, 901a) of each rotating body (900, 901) is the upper half to be a slow rotation speed, and the remaining half rotation to be a high rotation speed. As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the prizes to the respective winning openings (900a, 901a), and if not so, it is possible to make the prizes difficult to adjust.

The second rotation data set in the process of S1207 is different from the process of S1206 in that the drive of the second rotation motor 270c is controlled to adjust the rotation operation of the positive variation rotor 900, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S1206 and the processing of S1207 described above, the rotational speeds of the rotary motors (270b, 270c) may be set to be different or the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, the gate control process is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether the jackpot game is being executed, The gate control process may be executed only while the jackpot game is being executed.

The rotating body command set by the processing of S1208 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 sets a sound effect based on the reception of the rotating body command, and transmits the display rotating body command to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to output a sound effect and a display that match the operations of the accessory motor 270a, the first rotary motor 270b, and the second rotary motor 270c set based on the process of the gate control process (S1104). ..

Specifically, the position of the rotation distribution member 800 is a position where the game balls that have entered the distribution ball opening 650a of the distribution winning device 650 are distributed to the left flow path 654, and the continuous rotating body 901 has The continuation opening 901a becomes a position (upward position) where the game ball easily enters, that is, a timing at which the game ball entering the distribution entrance opening 650a with high probability becomes a continuous winning, and Generate a rotating body command to notify the timing. As a result, at a timing at which it is easy to continue winning, a sound effect for notifying the player is output and a performance display is displayed (see FIG. 36(a)). This timing is calculated based on the operation timing of the rotation distribution member 800 based on the gate timing counter 203k and the rotation speed of the continuous rotating body 901 based on the first rotation data set by the process of S1206. The position of the continuous rotating body 901 is calculated by the origin sensor which is a photo sensor (not shown) as described above.

Further, similarly for the probability variation winning, the position of the rotation distribution member 800 is the position where the game sphere that has entered the distribution entrance 650a of the distribution prize device 650 is distributed to the right flow path 655, and When the continuation opening 900a of the probability varying rotating body 900 is located at a position where the game ball is easy to enter (position in which the gaming ball is directed upward), an effect display for notifying the same is displayed (see FIG. 36(b)). This timing is calculated based on the operation timing of the rotary distribution member 800 based on the gate time counter 203k and the rotational speed of the positive variation rotor 900 based on the second rotation data set by the process of S1207. The position of the probability varying rotating body 901 is calculated by the origin sensor which is a photo sensor (not shown) as described above.

This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily determine the timing of winning a game ball into the distribution entrance 650a of the distribution winning apparatus 650.

Further, in the present embodiment, the determination value of the gate timing counter 203k is set to 1250 (the value at which the switching timing becomes 5 seconds), but it may be a smaller value or a larger value.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1105). This jackpot control processing (S1105) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 22), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific entrance This is a process for opening or closing the 165a or the second specific entrance 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1105). In the process of S1105, if the jackpot flag 203i is off (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), it is a jackpot of the special symbol, so the winning detection process is executed (S1302). This winning detection process (S1302) is a process for performing a continuous winning or a probability variation winning, a process according to the end of the winning detection period, etc. in the winning detection period provided in each round in the jackpot game. 25 will be described later.

When the process of S1302 is completed, it is determined whether the round start flag 203m is on (S1303). If the round start flag 203m is on (S1303: Yes), it is the start timing of a new round, and thus the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is opened according to the number of newly started rounds. The winning detection period storage area 203j is set based on the number of newly started rounds (S1304) (S1305).

Specifically, as described above, in the 1-8 round jackpot game, the second specific entrance 650a is opened so that the sorting lottery is executed, and in the 9-16 round jackpot game, the The lottery is not executed and the specific entrance 165a is opened.

Further, the round start flag 203m is set to ON because the condition for closing the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309), and the winning detection period based on the number of completed rounds ends. This is the case (see S1427 in FIG. 26). Here, the winning detection period set when the closing condition of the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied is 5 seconds in the first to eighth rounds (1250 is set in the prize detection period storage area 203j. ) Is 3 seconds in the 9th to 16th rounds (750 is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j), so that in the 1st to 8th rounds, the interval time until the start of the next round is 5 seconds. In the 9th to 16th rounds, the interval time is 3 seconds. In the present embodiment, as described above, the interval time and the winning detection period are set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning detection period may be longer than the interval time, or vice versa. The winning detection period may be shorter than the interval time.

Here, in the jackpot game of the 9th to 16th rounds, since the specific entrance 165a is opened and the second specific entrance 650a is not opened, it is not necessary to detect continuous winning or probability variation winning. Further, in this case, if a continuous winning or a probability variation winning is detected, there is a possibility that the game ball has been illegally won, so by configuring to notify an error, such fraud is suppressed. be able to. Further, in the jackpot game of the 9th to 16th rounds, it is not necessary to detect the continuous winning or the probability variation winning. Therefore, by setting the winning detection period storage area 203j to 0, each winning is not detected. Good. In this case, in order to measure the opening elapsed time of the specific ball entrance (65a, 650a), a separate timer or counter may be provided and the closing condition may be determined based on the timer or counter.

In addition, in this embodiment, although it set as mentioned above in the process of S1304 and S1305, it is not restricted to this, and the specific ball entrance 165a may be opened in the 1st to 8th rounds or may be opened. The interval may be set to 3 seconds or 10 seconds, or the winning detection period storage area 203j may be set to 2000 or 7500, and the second specific entrance 650a may be opened similarly in the 9th to 16th rounds. Alternatively, the set value of the interval or the winning detection period storage area 203j may be changed appropriately. The number of rounds may be divided into 1 to 3 rounds and 4 to 16 rounds, may be set differently in each round, or may be set to be the same in all rounds.

After that, the round start flag 203m is turned off (S1306), and the round counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S1307). Here, when the round counter 203n set at the start of the jackpot becomes 0 by subtracting 1 from the round counter 203n (when eight rounds are finished), the jackpot detection ending process (see FIG. 26) described later is performed. You can execute the settings at the end. Further, the round counter 203n is incremented by 8 in the process of S1406 when there is a continuous winning in the winning detection process (see FIG. 25) described later. In that case, the round counter 203n becomes 0 for 16 rounds. When the game ends, 16 rounds of jackpot games can be executed.

When the process of S1307 ends, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1308), and this process ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1303, if the round start flag 203m is off (S1303: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed after opening the specific ball entrance 165a or the second specific ball entrance 650a (when the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j becomes 0), or the specific ball When a predetermined number of balls are won after opening the mouth 165a or the second specific ball entrance 650a, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. Here, in the process of S1303, as described above, if the jackpot game is 1 to 8 rounds, 15 seconds have elapsed (when the winning detection period storage area 203j set to 3750 has become 0), or It is determined that the closing condition is established when five game balls are won in the second specific ball entrance 650a. On the other hand, in the case of 9 to 16 rounds, when 30 seconds have elapsed (when the winning detection period storage area 203j set to 7500 becomes 0), or when 10 game balls win the specific ball entrance 165a. It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. Although the present embodiment is set as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to eighth rounds may be 30 seconds elapsed, the ninth to 16th rounds may be 15 seconds elapsed, and the first to eighth rounds may be 10 balls winning. The 9th to 16th rounds may be when the 5 balls are won. Also, the way of dividing the rounds is not limited to this, and may be defined as 1 to 2 rounds and 3 to 16 rounds, different closing conditions may be set for each round, or the same closing for all rounds. It may be a condition.

In the processing of S1309, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second specific entrance 650a is not satisfied (S1309: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1309, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309: Yes), the second specific entrance 650a is closed (S1310), and the round ended this time. Based on the number, the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset (S1311), and this processing ends.

Specifically, the process of S1309 resets the winning detection period storage area 203j to 1250 at the end of the 1st to 8th rounds, and resets the winning detection period storage area 203j to 750 at the end of the 9th to 16th rounds. It is something to set. This is because, in the 1st to 8th rounds, the second specific ball entrance 650a is opened, so that at the end of the 1st to 8th rounds, the game balls may remain inside the distribution winning apparatus 650. is there.

Here, since the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset based on the satisfaction of the closing condition (S1309: Yes), even after the second specific entrance 650a is closed by the processing of S1310, the game ball is The game balls remaining inside the distribution winning device 650 (such as the distribution ball opening 650a, the left flow path 654 or the right flow path 655) may pass through the continuous flow path opening 901k and the probability variation flow path opening 900k. In this case, by resetting the winning detection period storage area 203j to 1250, it is possible to detect the winning based on the passage of each flow path opening for 5 seconds after the closing condition is established. As a result, the game balls remaining inside the distribution winning device 650 (such as the distribution ball inlet 650a, the left channel 654 or the right channel 655) enter the continuous channel port 901k or the probability variation channel port 900k. In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the continuous winning or the probability variation winning does not occur.

In addition, since the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset in the 9th to 16th rounds, it is possible to detect that the prize has been illegally won at the second specific entrance 650a.

The value of the winning detection period storage area 203j set here may be appropriately changed depending on the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650. For example, until the left flow path 654 and the right flow path 655 of the distribution winning device 650 are long, and the game ball entering the distribution entrance 650a enters either the continuous passage opening 901k or the probability variation winning opening 900k. In the case where it takes about 10 seconds at maximum, it may be set to be 10 seconds, or may be set to remain at 5 seconds and the winning after 5 seconds is not regarded as winning.

Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not there is a game ball remaining inside the distribution winning apparatus 650, and if it is determined that there is no game ball, end the winning detection period. For example, the number of game balls that enter the distribution ball port 650a of the distribution winning device 650 after the closing condition is satisfied, and the number of game balls that pass the continuous flow path port 901k, the probability variation flow path port 900k, and the discharge port 657. It may be determined whether they match, and if they match, it may be determined that there is no game ball remaining inside the distribution winning apparatus 650. Thereby, when there is no game ball remaining inside the distribution winning apparatus 650, the winning detection period can be ended, and thus it is difficult to illegally make a continuous winning or a probability variation winning. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution ball inlet 650a is determined by using the magnetic sensor 659, and the game balls that have entered the continuous flow path port 901 are switched to the continuous switch ( (Not shown), the gaming balls that have entered the probability variation passage port 900k can be detected by using the probability variation switch (not shown).

Next, the winning detection process (S1302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a view showing a flowchart of the winning detection end processing (S1105). This winning detection process (S1302) is a process executed when the big hit game is being executed in the big hit control process (FIG. 24), and whether or not there is a game ball win in the distribution winning device 650. This is a process for detecting.

In the winning detection process (S1302), first, it is determined whether or not the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0 (S1401). In the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1401: No), it is a period in which the winning detection is unnecessary due to the interval between rounds, so this processing is ended as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0 (S1401: Yes), the winning detection period storage area 203j is decremented by 1 (S1402), and the process proceeds to S1403. Here, since the winning detection process (S1302) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) in the main process (see FIG. 22) that is executed every 4 ms, 1 is subtracted from the winning detection period storage area 203j. It will be every 4 ms. As described above, the winning detection period storage area 203j is set based on the number of new rounds to be started in the process of S1305 of the jackpot control process (S1105). If the number of rounds is 1 to 8, 3750 is set. Therefore, the opening time of the second specific entrance 650a for the first to eighth rounds is 15 seconds. If the number of rounds is 9 to 16, since 7500 is set, the opening time of the specific entrance 165a for 9 to 16 rounds is 30 seconds.

When the process of S1402 is finished, it is determined whether or not the round continuation flag 203p is on (S1403). If the round continuation flag 203p is on (S1403: Yes), the process based on the continuous winning (S1405 to S1407) has already been executed, so the processes of S1404 to S1407 are skipped and the process of S1408 is performed. Transition.

On the other hand, if the round continuation flag 203p is not on (off) (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous winning (S1404). Here, the continuous winning is when the game ball enters the continuous flow path opening 901k, and when the game ball enters the continuous flow path opening 901k, the passage of the game ball is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). Based on the detection by the switch reading process (S101) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is stored as winning detection information. In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous winning, based on the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101).

In the process of S1404, if there is no continuous winning (S1404: No), the processes of S1405 to S1407 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if there is a continuous winning (S1404: Yes), as a process based on the continuous winning, the round continuation flag 203p is set to ON (S1405), and 8 is added to the round counter 203n (S1406). ), a continuous winning command is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408.

As described above, the round continuation flag 203p set by the processing of S1405 can prevent the processing of the continuous winning-based processing (S1405 to S1407) from being duplicated. In addition, the round counter 203n added by the processing of S1406 allows the jackpot game to be executed up to 16 rounds based on the entry of the game ball into the continuous flow path opening 901k. Further, the continuous winning command set by the processing of S1407 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving this continuous winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a continuous winning sound and transmits the display continuous winning command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display continuous winning command, the display control device 114 displays, on the third symbol display device 81, a display indicating that the continuous winning has been achieved. Thereby, based on the entry of the game ball into the continuous flow path opening 901k, the player can be informed of the continuous winning by the winning sound and the display on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203r is on (S1408). In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203r is ON (S1408: Yes), it is after the process based on the probability variation winning (S1410 to S1411) has already been executed, as in the process of S1403. , S1409 to S1411 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not on (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a probability variation winning (S1409). This probability variation prize is determined in the same manner as whether or not there is a continuous prize in the process of S1404, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S1409 that there is no positive variation prize, the process of S1410 and S1411 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1412. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1409 that there is a probability variation winning combination, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON (S1410), the probability variation winning command is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

In the processing of S1412, it is determined whether or not the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1412). If it is determined by the processing of S1412 that the winning detection period storage area 203j is not 0 (S1412: No), it is not the time to end the detection of winning, so the processing of S1413 is skipped and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1412, when it is determined that the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1412: Yes), since it is the timing to end the winning detection, the winning detection end processing is executed (S1413). , This process ends.

Here, the winning detection end processing (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a view showing a flowchart of the winning detection end processing (S1413). The winning detection end process (S1413) is a process executed when the winning detection period storage area 203j becomes 0 in the above-described winning detection process (see FIG. 25), which is the end timing of the winning detection.

In the winning detection end processing (S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the round counter 203n is 0 (S1420). In the process of S1420, if it is determined that the round counter is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1420: No), it means that the round to be executed in the jackpot game still remains, so the round start flag 203m is set. The process is turned on (S1427), and this process ends.

With the round start flag 203m set here, as described above, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24), the processes (S1304 to S1308) related to the round start are executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1420, when it is determined that the round counter 203n is 0, it is the end timing of the jackpot game, so it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203r is on (S1421), and it is on. If there is, the probability variation counter is set to 100 (S1422), and if not turned on, the process of S1422 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1423.

The probability variation flag 203r is set to ON when a game ball enters the probability variation channel opening 900k in the distribution winning apparatus 650, as described above. As a result, the probability variation game state can be set for 100 times based on the entry of the game sphere into the probability variation channel opening 900k. In the present embodiment, the probability variation game state is given 100 times, but the invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation game state may be maintained until the next big hit.

In the process of S1423, the jackpot end is set (S1423), the round continuation flag 203p, the probability variation flag 203r and the jackpot flag 203i are set to OFF (S1424, S1425), and the jackpot end command is set based on the number of rounds. (S1426), this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 33. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 27, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1616 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the startup processing this time ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 28), it executes the power-off process in S1616. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1502: No), the startup processing this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1616 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written by the process of S1406. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1616 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1502: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1616, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1504, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1506). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 28). That is, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1508 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is the moment when the current startup process is performed. This is the case after the occurrence of a general power outage and in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1511).

Next, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1511), the interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1504 to S1506 is passed to S1508. This is the case when the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), after skipping the processing of S1509 to S1510 which is the work area clearing processing of the RAM 223, the processing shifts to S1511, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1511), The interrupt permission is set (S1513), and the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1509 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1504 when the processing of S1508 is reached through the processing of S1504 through S1506. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is S1602 to S1610 which is mainly a process related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variable display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1603 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1602). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later is set (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1605 without performing the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on the reservation lamp according to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a predetermined period such as a period in which the variation effect is not executed, by pressing the frame button 22 when the notice character appears at the start of the variation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the variation this time. Is displayed, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect, it is changed to an effect that has a feeling of expectation for the jackpot, and the frame button 22 is an enter button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. Also good.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the lamp edit process is executed (S1608), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution management process. The sound edit/output process of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. After executing the processing of S1610, the processing shifts to the processing of S1611.

In the processing of S1611, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1613 (S1613: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1615), and the power-off processing is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1614: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Here, for the sake of convenience, the detailed description of each process in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described after the details of the command determination process (S1611) are described first. The variable display setting process (S1612) will be sequentially described.

Next, the command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination process (S1611) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 28) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1611), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area, analyzed, and the main control device 110 changes pattern. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1701). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on (S1702), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The number of holdings N1 of variable display in the symbol 1 or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings N2 of variable display in the special symbol 2) is extracted, and the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp controller 113 is extracted. It stores in the number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c (S1708), and returns to the main process. Further, in the process of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set.

Here, since the number of reserved balls is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first winning opening 64a (start winning) or when the special symbol is drawn, the starting winning is Every time it is detected or each time the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed by the processing of S1708. The value of can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved sphere counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1708 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1707, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1709). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1709: Yes), the lottery result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command, and the winning information storage area of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is extracted. It is stored in the first area of 223a (S1710), and the process returns to the main process. In the process of S1710, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

On the other hand, in the process of S1709, when the winning information command has not been received (S1709: No), it is then determined whether or not a command regarding the big hit has been received (S1711). When a command related to the big hit is received (S1711: Yes), a process related to the big hit corresponding to the received command is executed (S1712), and the process returns to the main process.

Examples of the jackpot commands include a jackpot start command, a round number command, and a jackpot end command. Specifically, for example, when the received command is a jackpot start command, the sound information at the time of jackpot start is set, and the opening command for display is set. The display opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the big hit effect on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, at the start of the big hit, the sound and display of the big hit effect can be output to notify the player. Similar processing is executed for the round number command and the jackpot end command.

In the process of S1711, when the command regarding the jackpot is not received (S1711: No), it is determined whether or not the command regarding the accessory is received from the main control device 110 (S1713). When the command related to the accessory is received (S1713: Yes), the accessory-related process is executed (S1714), and the process returns to the main process. Details of this accessory related processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1713, when the command regarding the accessory is not received (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1715). When the continuous winning command is received (S1715: Yes), the continuous winning time process is executed (S1716), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the continuous winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1715, when the continuous winning command is not received (S1715: No), it is determined whether or not the probability variation winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1717). When the probability variation winning command is received (S1717: Yes), the probability variation winning time process is executed (S1718), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the probability variation winning time process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

On the other hand, in the process of S1717, when the probability variation winning command is not received (S1717: No), the process according to the received other command is executed (S1719), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an accessory-related process (S1714) which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the accessory-related process (S1714). The accessory-related process (S1714) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp controller 113, and determines the command related to the accessory received from the main controller 110. , Execute the process according to the command.

In the accessory-related process (S1714), first, it is determined whether a switching command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1801). When the switching command is received (S1801: Yes), the switching sound is set (S1802), the display switching command is set (S1803), and the process returns to the command determination process.

The display switching command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display switching command, the display control device 114 displays a display suggesting switching on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball that has entered the distribution ball inlet 650a of the distribution winning device 650 by the rotation distribution member 800 is distributed to the left flow path 654, it is "left. When the voice "Yo" is output, the display "Under continuous lottery" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the voice is distributed to the right flow path 655, the voice "Right" is output. Along with the output, the display of "during probability variation lottery" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display is not limited to this, and the suggestion may be performed in another mode (character, screen color, etc.). Further, without displaying a display that suggests switching, the game ball that entered the distribution entrance ball opening 650a of the distribution winning device 650 is the left flow path 654 and the right flow path 655 for the player. You may not be able to recognize which one is assigned.

In the processing of S1801, when the switching command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the rotating body command has been received (S1804). When the rotator command is received (S1804: Yes), the sound effect is set based on the received rotator command (S1805), the display rotator command is set (S1806), and the process returns to the command determination process. ..

The display rotator command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display switching command, the display control device 114 executes the display based on the display rotating body command in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as described above, the notification is made of the timing which is set in the gate control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and in which it is easy to make continuous winning or easy probability variation winning. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily determine the timing of winning a game ball into the distribution entrance 650a of the distribution winning apparatus 650.

On the other hand, in the process of S1804, when the rotating body command is not received (S1804: No), the processes of S1805 and S1806 are skipped, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a description will be given of the continuous winning prize process (S1716) which is one of the processes in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the continuous winning process (S1716). This continuous winning process (S1716) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp controller 113, and is a process corresponding to the continuous winning command received from the main controller 110. To execute.

In the continuous winning process (S1716), first, a continuous winning sound is set (S1901), then a continuous winning command for display is set (S1902), and the process returns to the command determination process. The display continuous winning command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display continuous winning command, the display indicating that the continuous winning has occurred is executed (FIG. 37(a)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous winning has been achieved, and the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous winning is achieved, the process of S1901 and S1902 notifies the player of the occurrence of the continuous winning by displaying a sound and a display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be so arranged that the notification is made only by the display or only by the display, or may not be made. If the player does not notify the continuous winning, the player will determine whether or not the jackpot game will continue depending on whether or not the ninth round will start. Therefore, the player will continue the jackpot game until the ninth round. We will focus on whether or not. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a probability variation winning time process (S1718), which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the probability variation winning award processing (S1718). The probability variation winning time process (S1718) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process according to the probability variation winning command received from the main control device 110. To execute.

In the probability variation winning time process (S1718), first, the probability variation winning sound is set (S2001), the display probability variation winning command is set (S2002), and the process returns to the command determination process. The display probability variation winning command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display probability variation winning command, the display control device 114 performs a display indicating that the probability variation winning command has occurred (FIG. 37(b)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous winning has been achieved, and the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation prize is won, the process of S2001 and S2002 notifies the player of the occurrence of the probability variation prize by sound and display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be so arranged that the notification is made only by the display or only by the display, or may not be made. If the notification is not made, the player cannot determine whether or not it is in the probability variation game state, and thus it is difficult to stop the game until 100 times of games in which the probability variation game state may occur are completed. This can encourage the player to play the game for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, details of the variable display setting process (S1612) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1612). This variable display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S2106. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2102), and then in the processing of S1703 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2104). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize information storage area 223a of the special symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is shifted to the execution area side in order. .. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2106.

In the process of S2106, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2106). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2106: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2106: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2107), and then in the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2108).

Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110.

In the process of S2110, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2110). , This process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

Thus, in the configuration of the first embodiment, depending on the start timing of the big hit game, whether the game ball is easily guided to the probability varying rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 is easily guided. Is configured to be variable depending on the rotation position and rotation timing of the rotation distribution member 800. Therefore, it can be configured such that the expectation to the probability change and the expectation to the 16-round jackpot can be changed depending on the start timing (timing to hit the jackpot) of the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the special symbol determination result is a big hit, the player can play the game with an interest in whether the probability variation is given or 16 rounds are given.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the jackpot, the distribution winning device 650 in which the 16 round lottery (continuous lottery) and the probability variation lottery of the 8 round jackpot game are executed are set to the open state. Also, the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state in the case of the jackpot of 16 rounds and the jackpots of 9 rounds and thereafter. Therefore, from the first round to the eighth round, the game is performed by opening the sorting prize winning device 650, which is more difficult to win the game ball than the variable winning device 165, so that the player can play the probability variation opening 900a and the continuation opening 901a. You can concentrate on how you can enter the game. Also, in the 9th to 16th round jackpot games, since the variable winning device 165 in which the game balls are easy to enter is opened and the games are played, the jackpot games can be played efficiently.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to be rotated every 5 seconds, the player decides whether to aim at the probability variation rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 to play the game. You can also do Therefore, it is possible to decide which of the five lottery balls that can be entered into the second specific entry slot 650a is used for the lottery, that is, probability variation and continuation (16 round jackpot).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening period of the second specific entrance 650a of the first to eighth rounds is set to 15 seconds, but by setting it to 5 seconds, the rotating body that can be aimed in one round is limited, and the round starts. Alternatively, the privilege that can be given to the player can be changed depending on the start timing of the jackpot game.

In addition, by repeatedly configuring the open state and the closed state of the second specific ball entrance 650a for one round in a short time (for example, 1 second), the player can change the probability variation rotor 900 and the continuous rotor 901. It may be configured such that it is difficult to intentionally aim at either one.

<First Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 35, a pachinko machine 10 in a first modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the rotational distribution member 800 is configured so that the game ball that has entered the second specific ball inlet 650a enters either the probability varying rotor 900 or the continuous rotor 901. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the first embodiment, the game ball is guided to the continuous rotating body 901 when the game ball does not enter the probability variation opening 900a of the probability variation rotating body 900. The configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. The same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the game board 13 in the first modified example of the first embodiment. The first modified example of the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 is changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 in the first modified example of the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 35 is a front view of the distribution winning apparatus 650 with the front cover body 652 removed. With the distribution winning device 650 (see FIG. 3A) in the first embodiment, the gaming sphere that has entered the second specific inlet 650a is flow path wall portion so as to be guided to the probability varying rotating body 900. 653 is formed, and a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path in the direct downward direction from the distribution ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the distribution ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning apparatus 650.

In addition, when the game balls that enter the rotary ball inlets 900b to 900d of the probability varying rotating body 900 are discharged to the discharge flow path 662, the discharge flow path 662 guides the game ball to the continuous rotating body 901. The difference is that you did. The description of the same configuration will be omitted.

All the game balls that have entered the second specific ball inlet 650a are guided to the probability variation rotor 900, and when the probability variation slot 900a is won, the probability variation rotor 900 rotates to the right toward the probability variation channel opening 900k. You will be guided by. After that, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON by being detected by the probability variation switch (not shown). Note that, as in the first embodiment, up to five balls are entered into the second specific ball entrance 650a in one round, so if the balls are continuously entered into the second specific ball entrance 650a, the probability changes A game ball is easily inserted into the mouth 900a. In the first modified example of the first embodiment, the maximum opening time of the second specific entrance 650a is set to 5 seconds from the first round to the eighth round, and the second specific entrance. The period in which the game ball can enter the mouth 650a is short. It should be noted that since 100 shots of game balls are shot by the launching device in 1 minute, 1.6 shots are made in 1 second, and approximately 8 game balls can be shot in 5 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the five game balls into the second specific ball entrance 650a, considering that the game balls are sorted by the game nail.

Further, since the continuous rotator 901 is guided by the game balls other than the game balls that have entered the probability variation opening 900a, when the game balls enter the probability variation opening 900a, the game balls that are guided to the continuous rotation body 901 are That will be less. Therefore, the probability of the lottery on whether to enter the continuation opening 901a is lower than that of the lottery on whether to enter the probability variation opening 900a.

With such a configuration, the player first enjoys the lottery as to whether or not to enter the probability variation opening 900a, and then the game balls that have not entered the probability variation opening 900a enter the continuation opening 901a. You can enjoy the lottery. Therefore, the maximum player can enjoy the two-stage lottery. In addition, since the game ball is first guided to the probability variation rotating body 900, the probability variation lottery can be prioritized and executed over the continuous lottery, and the probability variation can be easily given.

In the present embodiment, the probability varying rotor 900 is arranged on the upstream side of the continuous rotating body 901. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous rotating body 901 may be disposed on the upstream side of the probability varying rotating body 900. Further, the number of balls to be entered into the second specific ball entrance 650a in one round is five, but the number is not limited to this, and may be one or less, or ten or more. May be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to distribute the sphere entering the specific entrance 650a to either the probability varying rotator 900 or the continuous rotator 901. The configuration is not limited to the distribution winning apparatus 650 in which balls can be entered in the big hit. For example, the distribution winning device 650 is configured to be opened except for jackpots, and instead of the probability variation opening 900a of the probability variation rotating body 900 and the continuation opening 901a of the continuous rotating body 901, it becomes a trigger for the special symbol lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which each entrance is provided. In this case, the entrances may be entrances with different degrees of advantage (for example, different award balls that can be obtained in the case of a big hit or different probability changes). For example, the ball entrance (i.e., the ball entrance on the downstream side) provided in the arrangement of the continuation port 901 may be advantageous. Further, as the timing of opening the distribution winning a prize device 650, for example, it may be configured to be opened when a normal symbol is hit. In this case, in one normal pattern hit, in the opening pattern and the position of the probability variation opening 900a, the slide member 670 is opened during a period in which the slide member 670 can enter the entry opening disposed at the position of the probability variation opening 900a. An opening pattern may be provided in which the slide member 670 is opened only during a period in which the ball cannot be entered (a state in which the ball can enter the downstream entrance). That is, as the time saving state (and the probability change state), a time saving state in which a lottery can be executed with an advantageous entrance and a time saving in which a lottery can be executed with a relatively disadvantageous entrance are provided. Good.

With such a configuration, since it is possible to focus on the ball entrance into which the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 650 enters, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first modified example of the first embodiment as well, the same effect and control as in the first embodiment are executed, but the detailed description thereof is the same as that described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second modified example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38(a), the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 is changed, and thus the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 in the first embodiment ( 3(a)). The distribution winning device 650 in the second modified example of the first embodiment is a protrusion for holding the game ball entered in the second specific entrance 650a below the slide member 670 as compared with the first embodiment. The difference is that the member 700 is provided. During this round, a solenoid (not shown) is actuated so as to project forward during the round, and the game ball that has entered the second specific ball inlet 650a is held so that it cannot flow downward. Become. After that, at the end of the round, the slide member 670 is slid forward, and at the same time, the protruding member 700 is also changed to the back side to allow the held game ball to flow downstream. In addition, a detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided on the upper portion of the projecting portion 700, and the prize ball is paid out by the detection by the sensor, and the round is finished. Executed. Further, when the game ball is held by the protruding portion 700, even if the second specific ball entrance 650a is in an open state, it is prevented that the held game ball enters the second specific ball entrance 650a. Then, it flows down on the upper portion of the front cover body 652 and flows down below the distribution winning apparatus 650.

Further, a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path in the direction directly below the distribution ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the distribution ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning apparatus 650, as in the above-described embodiment.

Here, in the second modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is switched and rotated every 5 seconds. Further, both the probability varying rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are similarly rotated. Further, the interval period from 1 round to 8 rounds is set to 8 seconds. The maximum time required for the gaming ball held on the protrusion to be detected by the probability variation switch or the continuation switch is 7 seconds. In this modification, the winning detection period storage area 203j is configured to have a period of up to 7 seconds at the end of the round. Specifically, when the round maximum period is set to 15 seconds at the start of the round, and one game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a (in the modified example, the maximum number of prizes in one round is one), A period of 7 seconds is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j.

With this configuration, it is effective when the game ball entering the second specific entrance 650a during the round game is detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown). Can be judged as Therefore, it is possible to enjoy whether the player wins the probability variation mouth 900a or the continuation mouth 901a.

Further, depending on the timing of the end of the round, whether to be guided to the right flow passage 655 or the left flow passage 654 changes depending on the rotation position of the rotation distribution member 800, and it is possible to change the expectation for a certain change or continuation (16 rounds). it can.

In the present embodiment, the projecting portion 700 is changed to the back side at the round end timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing 0.5 seconds after the end of the round or a plurality of times is selected by lottery, and It may be configured to be variable after time. With such a configuration, the timing of the holding release by the protruding portion 700, the rotation position of the rotation distribution member 800, the rotation position of the probability varying rotation body 900, and the rotation position of the continuous rotation body 901 are provided to the player. It can give different interests.

Further, in the second modified example, the number of balls entered into the second specific entrance port 650a is one ball in one round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second specific entrance port 650a is held for three seconds in one round. The game ball may be opened to enter one game ball, closed for 8 seconds to allow the game ball to flow down to be drawn, and again opened for 3 seconds to enter and close the game ball. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to enter a plurality of game balls in one round and to make a lottery of a plurality of times, thereby improving the interest of the player.

<Third Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a third modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(b) is a front view showing the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 of the third modified example of the first embodiment. In the third modified example of the first embodiment, in contrast to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the second specific ball inlet 650a, it is prevented that the game ball flows down to the probability varying rotor 900. It is different in that a protruding portion 700 is provided. This protrusion is changed by a solenoid (not shown) so as to protrude to the front side during the first to eighth rounds. When a game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown). In this modified example, from the first round to the eighth round, the maximum opening period of the second specific ball entrance 650a in the first round is set to 3 seconds, and the slide member at the timing when the three game balls enter the ball. 670 is moved to the closed position. Here, in a state in which the game balls are held in the protruding portion 700, the game balls are configured to have a size that allows up to four balls to enter the second specific ball entrance 650a. Therefore, if more game balls enter before the slide member 670 is closed at the timing when three balls enter the second specific entrance port 650a, a maximum of four balls enter the second specific entrance port 650a in one round. It is configured to be able to play a ball.

Further, a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path in the direction directly below the distribution ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the distribution ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning apparatus 650, as in the above-described embodiment.

One second after the end of one round, the projecting member 700 is changed to the back side so that the game ball flows down to the probability varying rotating body 900. Here, if four game balls have entered the second specific entrance port 650a, it will definitely enter the probability variation port 900a, and it is determined that the probability variation is always given to the player. In addition, thereafter, three game balls are guided to the continuous rotating body 901, and can be inserted into the continuous opening 901a with a probability of 3/4. In the present modification, the maximum period until the game ball held in the protruding portion 700 is detected by the continuation switch (not shown) even in the interval period from 1 round to 8 rounds (10 in the present embodiment). Seconds) is set as the winning detection period in the winning detection period storage area 203j.

A command indicating the number of game balls that have entered the second specific entrance 650a is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and an effect based on the command is executed. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which a display mode showing that the probability change is confirmed to be given at the timing when the fourth ball enters the ball is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Second Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 39 to FIG. 58, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the game board 13 according to the second embodiment, a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front has a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a wind turbine (movable member 310). Others are not shown), rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a left first winning opening 64a, a right first winning opening 64b, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device ( (Not shown), a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the front surface side of the base plate 60 on the rear surface side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a on the left, the first winning opening 64b on the right, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through-hole formed in and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 10) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the left first winning opening 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the right first winning opening 64b, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device provides a round of jackpots. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b is won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots to be determined here, "bonus B (16R probability variation lottery jackpot)" and "jackpot C (16R probability variation no jackpot)" are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "big hit B" is a big hit with a maximum round number of 16 rounds, so that the probability variation switch 65e3 is controlled so that the game ball can pass during the big hit game, and the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. It is a jackpot that has been set. On the other hand, the "big hit C" is a big hit with a maximum round number of 16 rounds, and is a big hit game in which it is difficult for a game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit game. Therefore, in the jackpot C, it is a jackpot in which the time saving game state is mainly given after the jackpot game.

Further, the "probability variation game state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the completion of the jackpot, that is, when the probability is changing (probability variation), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. Also, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving time) is a state where the jackpot probability is normal, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the left first winning opening. 64a or the right first winning opening 64b refers to a game state in which a ball easily wins. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

During probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory parts 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are opened is changed. The normal time is set longer than that in the middle. When the electric power accessories 645a and 645b are in the opened state (open state), the left first winning opening 64a is more than when the electric power accessories 645a and 645b are in the closed state (closed state). Alternatively, the ball easily enters the right first winning opening 64b. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening time of the electric accessory 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b is not changed, or the opening time is changed during the probability change or the shortening of time. In addition to this, the number of times the electric accessory parts 645a and 645b are opened per hit may be changed to be larger than that in the normal case. Further, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time and 1 when the electric auditors goods 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times the electric accessory parts 645a and 645b are opened per hit. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the electric accessory 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b is opened for a period of time, or the electric accessory 645a, 645b is hit once. It is possible to change the number of times to release the number of times, and to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to increase compared to the normal state.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B by using the winning (starting winning) to the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b as a trigger, and the third A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 10 ), for example, upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 10) is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

The pachinko machine 10 is attached to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"). The electric accessories 645a and 645b thus operated are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditory goods 645a and 645b of the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortening of the working hours, the ball can easily enter the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b.

It should be noted that the left first prize during the probability change or the time saving may be increased by other methods such as increasing the winning probability during the time change or the time saving, and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 645a, 645b per hit. In the case where the sphere is likely to win the mouth 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessories 645a and 645b may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution winning port 64 is arranged. Here, the details of the sorting winning port 64 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40(a)-(b) is a front view of the distribution winning port 64 with the front cover body 64c removed, and FIG. 41(a) is a game board in the left-right direction above the sorting winning port 64. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view taken from above by cutting 13; 41(b) is a cross-sectional view of the IVb cross section in FIG. 41(a).

The distribution winning port 64 is inserted into an opening formed in the game board 13 by a router and is fixed to the game board 13 from the front side with a screw. As shown in FIG. 41( a ), a detachable front cover body is arranged on the front side of the distribution winning port 64. Locking pieces 64d and 64e are provided on the left and right sides of the front cover body 64c, and claw portions protruding outward are formed at the tips of the locking pieces 64d and 64e. By fitting the front cover body 64c from the front side of the distribution winning opening 64, the claw portions of the locking pieces 64d, 64e are engaged with the engagement walls 64g, 64h of the base body 641 of the distribution winning opening 64. As a result, the front cover body 64c is fixed to the distribution winning opening 64. Further, when the front cover body 64c is pulled forward, the engagement between the claw portions of the locking pieces 64d and 64e and the engagement walls 64g and 64h is released, and the front cover body 64c can be removed from the distribution winning opening 64. it can.

The front cover body 64c is made of a transparent resin, and has a spiral pattern on the front surface. Due to this pattern, the inside of the distribution winning port 64 looks distorted through the front cover body 64c, which makes it difficult to visually recognize.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), a base body 641 for fixing the distribution winning opening 64 to the game board 13 is formed with an opening portion 64i into which one game ball can be inserted, and the opening thereof is formed. The left entrance hole 64a is on the left side and the right entrance hole 64b is on the right side so that the game balls entered from the portion 64i can flow down. Has been formed. The connecting portion 64j is formed in a convex shape protruding upward, and is configured to restrict the movement of the game ball to the other entrance.

The left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b are each configured to have an inclined surface that receives a game ball entered through the opening 64i and flows down to the back side of the game board 13. .. On the back side of the game board 13, as shown in FIG. 41(a), a left downflow gutter member 64t and a right downflow gutter member 64u are arranged, respectively. As shown in FIG. 41(b), the left downflow gutter 64t is arranged so that the game ball that has entered the left first winning opening 64a flows down below the game board 13 on the back side of the game board 13. .. The left downflow trough 64t is provided with a detection switch 64s1 capable of detecting a game ball, and it is detected that the game ball has entered the left first winning opening 64a.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the right downflow gutter 64u flows down below the game board 13 when the game ball entering the right first winning opening 64b flows down to the back side of the game board 13. It is arranged to. The right downflow trough 64u is provided with a detection switch 64s2 capable of detecting a game ball, and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right first winning opening 64b.

The distribution adjustment of the distribution winning apparatus 64 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game balls are set to be easily distributed to the left first winning opening 64a, and FIG. 40(b) is easy to distribute the game balls to the right first winning opening 64b. It is a figure showing the set state.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the game nails are arranged on the upper side of the opening 64i formed in the base body 641 of the distribution winning apparatus 64c with a width that allows one game ball to pass right and left. Thus, the passage port 645 is formed. The passage opening 645 has a passage formed around the apex of the connecting portion 64j. Among the game nails forming the passage opening 645, the adjustment nails t1 and t2 closest to the base body 641 adjust the ratio of allocating the game balls to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b. Is set to. As shown in FIG. 40(a), by adjusting the game nail t2 so as to be inclined downward, the width of the opening w2 in the right first prize hole 64b is narrowed, and the game ball is in the left first prize hole 64a. It is set to be easily distributed. Here, if the width of the opening w2 is adjusted to be narrower than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, the game ball can be distributed only to the left first winning opening 64a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40(b), by tilting the game nail t1 downward to narrow the width of the opening w1 of the left first prize-winning port 64a, the proportion of game balls distributed to the right first prize-winning port 64b. Can be set a lot. Also, by adjusting the width of the opening w1 to be narrower than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, it is possible to adjust the game ball to be distributed only to the right first winning opening 64b.

Here, in the state in which the front cover body 64c is attached to the distribution winning apparatus 64, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the front cover body 64 covers the adjustment nails t1 and t2 from the front side, and the player is informed. However, it is difficult to identify how the nail is adjusted. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine the distribution adjustment of the distribution winning apparatus 64. In addition, the surface of the front cover body 64c facing the adjusting nails t1 and t2 is formed in a concave shape so as to prevent interference.

Electric parts 645a and 645b are arranged in the passage port 645. When the electric parts 645a and 645b are actuated and the blades are opened outward, the game balls are guided to the passage port 645. Easy to configure.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can play the game by recognizing the passage opening 645 formed on the upper portion of the distribution winning apparatus 64 as a ball entrance and entering the game ball. In addition, when the game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a, one prize ball is paid out to the player. Further, when a game ball enters the right first winning opening 64b, three prize balls are set to be paid out to the player (see FIG. 46(b)). Therefore, the game store side can change and adjust the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player by changing the ratio of distributing the game balls to the left first prize hole 64a and the right first prize hole 64b. Therefore, by adjusting the adjusting nails t1 and t2, the game store side can easily adjust the profit and the like. In this case, the profit can be adjusted without changing the rate of entry into the passage opening 645, and the player can play a game by setting more game balls into the distribution winning opening 64.

In addition, by the game ball entering the left first winning opening 64a, the right first winning opening 64b, the special symbol lottery is executed, the variable display of the third symbol showing the lottery result is the third symbol display device. At 81. Therefore, the player can play the game while maintaining the special symbol lottery opportunity. Therefore, the interest of the player can be increased.

When a ball wins the left first winning opening 64a, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 10) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the left first winning opening 64a in a front view, a right first winning opening 64b in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the right first winning opening 64b, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. 110 (see FIG. 10) is a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In the present embodiment, the adjusting nails t1 and t2 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 64 are used to distribute the balls to either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. It is not limited. For example, instead of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning opening distributed by a switching valve movable by a solenoid or the like is switched. That is, one of the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b may be closed by the switching valve, and the ball may flow down to the other unopened winning opening. Further, in this case, the switching valve may be configured to be able to set a winning opening closed by a hall, may be switched at random, or may be configured to switch the winning opening closed at regular intervals. Good. Further, it may be configured to switch in a predetermined operation pattern each time a normal symbol is hit. Specifically, for example, the left first prize hole 64a with a small number of prize balls normally paid out is opened (the right first prize hole 64b is closed by a switching valve), and when a normal symbol is hit, a predetermined value is given. A configuration in which the right first winning a prize port 64b is opened (the left first winning a prize port 64a is closed by a switching valve) is set for a period (for example, a period in which the electric auditory goods 645a and 645b are opened or more). May be Further, the switching valve may be configured to execute a certain operation each time a normal symbol is hit. For example, the left first winning opening 64b is set to be open for a certain period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after being hit, and the right first winning opening after 1.5 seconds to 4.5 seconds. 64b may be set to be opened, and after 4.5 seconds, the left first winning opening 64a may be set to be opened again. And it is good also as a structure which provides a variation in the opening pattern (type of time saving state) of the electric accessory 645a, 645b in the case of hitting a normal symbol. That is, the electric power accessories 645a and 645b are electrically driven during the time period in which the electric accessory 645a, 645b is opened (time saving state 1) and the right first winning port 64b is opened, while the left first winning port 64a is opened. A configuration may be employed in which a time saving state (time saving state 2) of a pattern in which the accessory products 645a and 645b are opened.

Further, instead of providing the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b, different lottery is executed (for example, different jackpot types are determined when a big hit) It may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that the winning a prize entrance which can be entered is switchable. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to provide a winning opening in which a jackpot with a small number of prize balls is easily determined and a winning opening in which a jackpot with many prize balls is easily determined. By providing the winning openings having different degrees of advantage when the lottery is executed, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the balls will win the advantageous winning openings. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the distribution winning apparatus 64 is not limited to the winning opening. For example, each winning port is provided in a different part on the game board, and a plurality of operating ports for switching each winning port into a ball enterable state or an unballable state (A so-called non-electric accessory) may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that which of the working ports the ball is to be thrown into (which winning port is switched to a state in which the ball can be entered) is switched by a nail, a switching valve or the like.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower left side of the game board 13, and the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b is a big hit. Then, a predetermined dynamic display is executed on the first symbol display device 37A, the first symbol display device 37B, or the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is likely to win the first variable winning device 65. In this special game state, the first variable winning device 65, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first variable winning device 65 is closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the first variable winning device 65 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the details of the first variable winning a prize device 65 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 42, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b projectingly arranged on the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, and the first variable A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and opening/closing for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening/closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h protruding to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked to the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back cover thereof. A flow passage solenoid 65k fixed to the back surface side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for fixing the flow passage solenoid 65k from the back surface side to the back cover body 65j with a screw. It is composed of.

FIG. 43(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 at the La cross section (see FIG. 43(b)). 43(c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 43(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 43(b), the first variable winning device 65 has a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 43(b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 43(b).

As shown in FIG. 43(b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening/closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and a non-entering state. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning a prize device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable award winning device 65 to the second winning a prize port 65 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b with the right hit state, and after the big hit game. You can immediately reduce the time and effort to change the game method to the left. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

43(a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 43(b). As shown in FIG. 43(a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection opening 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection opening 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b), a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later will be described. ..

FIG. 44(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge passage 65e2. As shown in FIG. 44(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), the game sphere guided from the detection opening 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. It The game sphere that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is formed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. To be done.

Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the first variable winning port 65 during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the player's interest even during the jackpot game. You can The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. There is. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning port 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the big hit C is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning port 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot B, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot C, it is not possible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, the probability variation imparting ratio can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent excessive disadvantage from occurring.

With reference to FIG. 44(b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge passage 65e1 will be described. FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the winning ball is won in the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot C is won in the 13th round in a state where the gaming balls won before the 13th round are not discharged.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (for one ball winning in the present embodiment). 15 prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the first variable winning a prize device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp controller 113. The difference is that a part is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment.

The ROM 202 in the present embodiment differs from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment in that the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b are changed and the contents of the prize ball table 202e are added, and in other respects. It is the same.

Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 46(a)) is set so that the big hit B and the big hit C can be respectively selected. Specifically, the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit B, and “30 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit C.

Here, as described above, the "big hit B" is configured such that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state). However, since the “big hit C” is configured such that it cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, the lottery for determining whether or not the probability variation state is reached is not performed), the “big hit C” is performed. The "big hit B" is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B".

Next, the contents of the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. In the prize ball table 202e (see FIG. 46(b)), the game balls enter each of the above-described winning holes (general winning hole 63, left first winning hole 64a, right first winning hole 64b, specific winning hole 65a). This is a table that defines the number of game balls to be paid out in the case of playing. The prize ball table 202e is referred to for calculating the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out, based on the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 48). The prize ball command is generated based on the number of prize balls calculated here, and is transmitted to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. When the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 receives this prize ball command, the payout motor 216 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls according to the received command.

Specifically, one ball is defined as the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a, and 3 as the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the right first winning opening 64b. 10 balls are defined as the number of balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered into the specific winning opening 640, and 5 balls are provided as the number of balls to be paid out when the gaming balls are entered into the normal winning opening 63. ing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the right first prize opening 64b is set to be larger than the number of payout balls than the left first prize opening 64a. As a result, if a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter the right first prize winning opening 64b, it is advantageous to the player, and if not, it is disadvantageous to the player.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passing port 645 to the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, respectively. Has been. As a result, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the right first winning opening 64b a lot, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. FIG. 45B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45(b), the RAM 203 in the present embodiment has a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f. , Counter buffer 203h, jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203r, probability variation setting flag 203s, probability variation passage counter 203t1, winning number counter 203t2, action counter 203t3, remaining ball timer flag 203t4, remaining ball timer 203t5, probability variation valid flag 203t6, probability variation It has at least an effective timer 203t7, a discharge number counter 203t8, a time saving medium counter 203u, an opening flag 203v, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a left first winning opening. The respective values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on winning the prize in the 64a or the right first winning opening 64b are stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, and the acquired data is Among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the case of the winning stored in another reserved area The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is a first special symbol (first prize) that is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) to the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the symbol) up to 4 times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, the ball enters the left first prize hole 64a or the right first prize hole 64b and the number of spheres of variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S204 in FIG. 17).

The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S205 of FIG. 17, see S505 of FIG. 20). .. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the command of the number of reserved balls to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a variable display holding ball number of the normal symbol (second symbol) that is performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67 (the number of waiting times. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the normal starting opening 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S804 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 22).

When the sphere normally passes through the starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S803 in FIG. 23). : No).

The counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for holding each counter value, as in the first embodiment described above.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the jackpot setting processing (S233), which is executed when the jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17) is set (S2503 in FIG. 51), and is executed at the end of the jackpot. It is set to OFF in the ending process (FIG. 55) performed (S2702 in FIG. 55).

The probability variation flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). If the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low-probability gaming state (including a time saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON when the probability variation setting flag 203s described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S2704 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. It should be noted that, in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power cutoff occurs, the state immediately before the power cutoff is backed up.

The probability variation setting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 44(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON (S2812 in FIG. 56). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203r is set to OFF based on the ON setting. The probability variation setting flag 203s is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. 203s may be configured to be officially set to on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203t1 described later has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an irregularity in which only the probability variation setting flag 203s is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203t1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot B in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the first variable winning port 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203t1 and a discharge number counter 203t8, which will be described later. This probability variation passage counter 203t1 is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S2811 in FIG. 56). In addition, after executing the processing as to whether the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S2911 in FIG. 57). The probability variation passage counter 203t1 is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203t2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 42) provided in the first variable winning device 65, the game balls are incremented by one and updated (see FIG. 56). S2803). On the other hand, when one round is finished, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203t2) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203t8 and the probability variation passage counter 203t1) are given to the first variable winning device 65. After it is determined that the two match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203t2 is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203t3 is a counter for counting (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds in the jackpot B based on the start of 13 rounds, and the passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds in the jackpot C based on the start of 13 rounds. Is set. In the big counter B, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds, and in the big counter C, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set to the operation counter 203t3 (S2602 in FIG. 54). On the other hand, in the process of S2809 of the winning process (S1341 of FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203t3 is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203t3 is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203t3 and controlling the flow passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, it means that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. When the remaining sphere timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, the remaining sphere timer 203t5 described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S2905 in FIG. 57). The remaining ball timer 203t5 is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for discharging the game ball in the first variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

The remaining ball timer 203t5, when the preset round 1 is completed and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 65 are discharged. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the remaining ball timer 203t5. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203t5, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match. (S2907 in FIG. 57). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is clogged in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65, give a shock at the start timing of the 13th round, make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and hit the jackpot C. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the fraud of passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203s is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability variation valid flag 203t6 is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 44A) is based on the channel solenoid 65k being ON, and the probability variation switch It is shown that the time is less than or equal to the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

The probability variation valid timer 203t7 is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203t6 described above is set to ON. The probability variation effective timer 203t7 can determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge passage 65e2 to pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 illegally, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is allowed to enter and the probability variation switch 65e3 is allowed to pass the game ball, or the piano wire or the like is inserted from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up the game ball to allow it to pass therethrough or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

The discharge number counter 203t8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 44(a)) in one round. The discharged number counter 203t8 is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the discharged number are determined (S2911 in FIG. 57).

The time saving counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. The time saving medium counter 203u is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probability variation game state is not set after the jackpot game, the time shift game state of 100 times is entered.

The opening flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit has occurred. This opening flag 203v is set to ON in the jackpot setting processing (FIG. 51), which is executed when the jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17) is set (S2504 in FIG. 51), and jackpot control processing 2 When the opening command is set in (FIG. 53), it is set to OFF (S1332 in FIG. 53).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment in that the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is deleted, and the effect. The difference is that a counter 223f is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223e is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 48 to 57. Each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in the special symbol variation process (S104) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). Instead, the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 49) is executed, and the gate control process (S1104) is not executed in the main process (see FIG. 22), instead of the jackpot control process (S1105). The difference is that the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 53) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the timer interruption process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process 2 is a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interruption process 2, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, the information of the ball entering the left first prize hole 64a and the right first prize hole 64b is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, with the processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the special symbol variation process 2 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). .. After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b is executed (S105). In the start winning process (S105), the process relating to the special symbol 2 is not executed as compared with the first embodiment, so the detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S105 ends, the processes of S106 to S109 are executed as in the first embodiment, and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is If it is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S231). Next, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and the holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). ).

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the processing of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The details of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S217) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. More specifically, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, whether the big hit B or the big hit C is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit B, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit C. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (the result of the lottery this time) performed by the special symbol variation start process is special. It is determined whether it is a big hit of the symbol (S217). Then, if the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S217: Yes), a jackpot setting process is executed (S233), and the process proceeds to S222. The details of the jackpot setting process (S233) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203u is greater than 0 (S234), and the hour/hour counter 203u When it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S234: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S234), and the process proceeds to S235. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203u is 0 (S234: No), the process of S235 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

In the process of S222, which is executed after the process of S233, S234 or S235, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81 of the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 are displayed. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop (S222). When the process of S222 ends, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S213). The special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S213) in the second embodiment is different in that the process of S331 is executed instead of the process of S302 of the first embodiment, and the other points are the same. ..

Specifically, in the process of S302 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 to determine whether the probability variation is in progress. On the other hand, in the process of S331 in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the probability variation is in progress by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203r is ON.

In the process of S331, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203r is ON (that is, when it is determined that the probability variation is in progress) (S331: Yes), the process of S303 is executed, and the processes of S305 to S311 are performed. The process is executed and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203r is off (that is, when it is determined that the probability variation is not in progress) (S331: No), the process of S304 is executed, and the processes of S305 to S311 are performed. Is executed and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the jackpot setting process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process (S233). This jackpot setting process (S233) is a process performed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 49), and is a process for setting for starting the jackpot game.

In the jackpot setting process, first, the jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (S2501), and the opening scenario of the opening operation of the passage solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is determined based on the determined jackpot type. Is set (S2502). More specifically, in the case of the big hit type A, in the 13th round of the big hit game, the passage solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to open so that the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit C, the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set not to be opened (the game ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3).

Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S2503), the opening flag 203v is set to ON (S2504), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a main process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main process 2. In this main processing 2, the main processing of the game is executed.

In the main process 2, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device ( The external output processing to be transmitted to the peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 48) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device is determined based on the prize ball table 202e. The prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to 111. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the number of holding balls command, the variation pattern command necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102), the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot. The big hit control process 2 for executing the effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S1105). Details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the processing of S1105 is completed, the electric accessory opening/closing processing for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessories 645a and 645b associated with the passage port 645 is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric auditors is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

When the process of S1106 is finished, the processes of S1107 to S1116 are executed as in the first embodiment, and the present process is finished.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 53 to 57. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 2 (S1104). This jackpot control processing 2 (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and identification. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the opening flag 203v is on (S1331). When it is determined in the process of S1331 that the opening flag 203v is on (S1331: Yes), the opening flag 203v is turned off (S1332), the opening command is set (S1333), and this process is finished. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1331, if the opening flag 203v is not on (S1331: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301). The jackpot flag 203i is turned on, while the display showing the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is special, During the predetermined time after the jackpot game of symbols is included. In the process of S1301, if the jackpot flag 203i is not on (S1301: No), it is not a jackpot of the special symbol, so this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1334). If it is determined in the process of S1334 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1334), the jackpot operation setting process (S1335), which is a process of setting for starting a new round, is executed, and The process ends.

Here, in the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 54, S1335), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S2601). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S2601 (S2602). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S2601 (S2603). Then, this process is completed.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S1334, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1334: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the passage solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k (S1336). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1336: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1337). After that, the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1338). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1336, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1336: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1339). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed after the 15th round has ended. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1339: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1340). Then, this process is completed.

Here, details of the ending processing (S1340) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 55, S1340). In the ending process (FIG. 55, S1340), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S2701). Next, the jackpot flag is set to OFF (S2702), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203s is ON (S2703). When it is determined in the processing of S2703 that the probability variation setting flag 203s is ON (S2703: Yes), the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON (S2704). Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203s is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203r being set to ON. Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203s is not on (S2703: No), the time saving/medium counter is set to 100, and this process is ended.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203s is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203r is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65e3 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. You can play games with interest.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state is not reached, the time saving game state is given 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be given 50 times or 150 times. The time saving game state may be given 100 times together with the game state.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1339, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1339: No), winning processing is executed (S1341). Here, the winning process (S1341) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1341).

In the winning process (FIG. 56, S1341), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S2801). The round valid period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S2801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S2802: Yes), the winning number counter 203t2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S2803). After that, the processing of S2804 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S2802: No), the process of S2804 is executed.

In the process of S2804, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is 10 or more (S2804). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is 10 or more (S2804: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S2806). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON (S2807). Then, the process of S2808 is executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2804, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S2805). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S2805: Yes), the process of S2806 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2805: No), the process of S2808 is executed.

In the process of S2808, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203t3 is greater than 0 (S2808). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203t3 is larger than 0 (S2808: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203t3 is decremented by 1 and updated (S2809). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S2810). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S2810: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203t1 to update (S2811). The probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON (S2812). Then, the process of S2813 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S2810: No), the process of S2813 is executed. In the process of S2813, it is determined whether the operation counter 203t3 is 0 (S2813). When it is determined that the operation counter 203t3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S2814). The probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON (S2815). Then, this process is completed. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h has been switched, the probability variation game. Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2808, when it is determined that the operation counter 203t3 is 0 (S2808: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is on (S2816). If the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is off (S2816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is on (S2816: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is incremented by 1 and updated (S2817). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S2818). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is the upper limit value (S2818: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to OFF (S2819), and the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S2820). .. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S2818, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is not the upper limit value (S2818: No), the process of S2810 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, and thus the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the time for ball spitting. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65e3 from passing a game ball illegally and being given a probability variation game state.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 56, S1341) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1342). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1342) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1342). In the abnormality processing (S1342), processing for monitoring whether or not the gaming ball has been illegally passed to the probability variation switch 65e3 is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 57, S1342), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S2901). If it is outside the round valid period (S2901: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S2901: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S2902). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S2902: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S2903). Then, the process of S2904 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S2902: No), the process of S2904 is executed.

In the process of S2904, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is on (S2904). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is off (S2904: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is on (S2904: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203t5 is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S2905). The remaining ball timer 203t5 determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S2906). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S2906: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S2906: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203t1 and the discharged number counter 203t8) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203t2). It is determined whether or not (S2907).

If it is determined that they match (S2907: Yes), the process of S2909 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2907: No), an error command is set (S2908). Then, the process of S2909 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot C is a big hit.

In the process of S2909, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to OFF (S2909), and the remaining ball timer 203t5 is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S2910). After that, the winning number counter 203t2, the discharging number counter 203t8, and the probability variation passage counter 203t1 are reset to their initial values (S2911), and then this process is ended.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment, the command determination process 2 (S1611) is replaced with the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that it is changed to be executed, and the other points are the same.

With reference to FIG. 58, the command determination process 2 (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 2 (S1611). This command determination processing 2 (S1611) is executed in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is transmitted. judge. In addition, in this process, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1708 are executed as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1707, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1731). When it is determined that the prize information command is received (S1731: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted from the received command as prize information and stored in the first area of the prize information storage area 223a (S1732), Return to main processing 2. In the process of S1732, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area for the first special symbol is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S1731, when the winning information command is not received (S1731: No), it is then determined whether or not the command regarding the big hit is received from the main control device 110 (S1711). Here, examples of the command regarding the big hit include an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command.

In the process of S1711, when a command related to the big hit is received, the process corresponding to the command is executed (S1712), and the process returns to the main process 2. Specifically, for example, when the received command is the opening command, the display opening command is set. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the big hit effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1711, when it is determined that the command regarding the big hit has not been received (S1711: No), it is determined whether or not an error command has been received (S1733). In the process of S1733, when it is determined that the error command is received, the error process corresponding to the command is executed (S1734), and the process returns to the main process 2.

In the process of S1734, specifically, the error type is extracted from the received error command, and the display error command is set based on the error type. As a result, the occurrence of the error can be notified to the display control device 114 together with the error type. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, when the winning number mismatch error occurs in the main control unit, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives the error command and notifies the display control unit 114 of the error display (for example, winning number mismatch error). The characters are displayed) and an error signal is output to the hall computer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the first variable winning a prize device 65, and to prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if it is a big hit C.

In the process of S1734, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S1734: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( (S1719), and returns to the main process 2. In the processing of S1719, for example, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114. The command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, the game shop side adjusts the profit by adjusting the winning rate of the entrance for which the special symbol is drawn. In such a configuration, the chances of drawing special symbols are reduced, and there is a problem such as a period in which the special symbols are not changed, etc., and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is diminished. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming ball that has passed through the passage opening 645 enters either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, so that a big hit lottery can be performed. Done. The award ball table 202e (see FIG. 46(b)) is set so that the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b are different in the number of payout balls to be paid out when a game ball is entered. ing. Specifically, the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the left first prize hole 64a is one, whereas the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the right first prize hole 64b. Has three balls. Therefore, if a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter the right first winning opening 64b, it is advantageous for the player, and if not, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passing port 645 to the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, respectively. Has been. As a result, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the right first winning opening 64b a lot, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player. Further, since the number of prize balls paid out to the player (the number of prize balls with respect to the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645) can be changed by the adjusting nails t1 and t2, the rate of ball entry through the passage opening 645 is adjusted. There is no need, and the game ball can be easily won in the distribution winning apparatus 64. Therefore, for a game store, even if a large number of game balls are won in the distribution winning apparatus 64, profits can be secured by suppressing the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the player has more chances to be drawn for the special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game.

A front cover body 64c is provided on the front surface of the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b. The front cover body is made of an opaque member, or a pattern is attached to the front portion. By making it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether the game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 has entered the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. good. As a result, when many game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the left first prize opening 64a, the player visually recognizes them and wins a lot of the left first prize opening 64a (that is, for the player. It is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction, etc. by feeling that the adjustment is performed (inconvenient).

Furthermore, the position of the adjusting nails t1 and t2 may be made difficult for the player to visually recognize by forming the front cover body with an opaque member or providing a pattern on the front surface portion. As a result, the player visually recognizes the positions of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, and feels that the player is adjusted so as to win a large number of prizes in the left first winning opening 64a (that is, it is disadvantageous to the player). It is possible to reduce the feeling.

Further, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 may be configured to calculate and display the ratio of distribution to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b. Specifically, a game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 is detected by a sensor or the like, and the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are entered until the passing game ball reaches 100 balls. Memorize the number of game balls. After that, when the number of game balls passed is 100, the number of game balls stored is displayed, and the stored information is cleared. Here, the above-mentioned display showing the entry ratio may be displayed only when the switch is provided on the back side of the gaming machine and the switch is on, for example. Thus, when adjusting the entrance ratio at the store, by displaying and adjusting the entrance ratio, the adjustment of the entrance ratio can be easily performed, and the switch is turned off for the player. By setting, it is possible to prevent the entrance ratio from being displayed and to prevent the adjusted entrance ratio from being known.

It should be noted that the number of game balls that have passed through the passage port 645 is not detected, and only the number of game balls that have entered the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b is detected, and the total of these is detected. You may make it perform the said process, when it becomes 100 balls. Accordingly, the sensor of the passage port 645 can be eliminated, so that the cost of the game machine can be reduced. Further, the timing of calculating the above-mentioned incoming ball ratio is not limited to every 100 balls, and may be every 300 balls or every 50 balls, or may be calculated every predetermined time.

In addition, as described above, while the "normal symbol time saving state" is continued, when a new special symbol jackpot occurs, each time, a short time period (" Since the "duration period of ordinary symbol" is updated), when a special special jackpot newly arrives during the duration of "ordinary symbol shortening state", the ordinary symbol that remains until the new jackpot The short-term period becomes invalid. For example, when the "special symbol jackpot B" is reached and the "normal symbol normal state" shifts to the "ordinary symbol time saving state", the state is 100 for the special symbol lottery after the "jackpot B" end. It will continue until the end. However, immediately after that, when the "special symbol jackpot B" becomes again, the time saving period up to that point becomes invalid, and the "normal state of the ordinary symbol" is 100 times the special symbol lottery after the "jackpot B" ends. It will continue until the end.

Further, the electric auditors products 645a and 645b are arranged so that the game ball can easily enter the passage port 645, but the invention is not limited thereto. Only the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are provided with the game ball. You may make it easy to guide. In this case, the side wall forming the left first ball entrance 64a or the right first prize hole 64b of the base body 64c is composed of rotating blades (electrical accessory), and by rotating, a game ball May be easily inserted into the left first entrance 64a or the right first entrance 64b. With such a configuration, for example, by attaching an electric accessory to the right first winning opening 64b, a large number of game balls can be paid out during a time saving or a sudden change, and the player's possession of balls decreases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of shifting to the time saving game state or the probability variation game state.

In the present embodiment, the adjusting nails t1 and t2 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 64 are used to distribute the balls to either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. It is not limited. For example, instead of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning opening distributed by a switching valve movable by a solenoid or the like is switched. That is, one of the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b may be closed by the switching valve, and the ball may flow down to the other unopened winning opening. Further, in this case, the switching valve may be configured to be able to set a winning opening closed by a hall, may be switched at random, or may be configured to switch the winning opening closed at regular intervals. Good. Further, it may be configured to switch in a predetermined operation pattern each time a normal symbol is hit. Specifically, for example, the left first prize hole 64a with a small number of prize balls normally paid out is opened (the right first prize hole 64b is closed by a switching valve), and when a normal symbol is hit, a predetermined value is given. A configuration in which the right first winning a prize port 64b is opened (the left first winning a prize port 64a is closed by a switching valve) is set for a period (for example, a period in which the electric auditory goods 645a and 645b are opened or more). May be Further, the switching valve may be configured to execute a certain operation each time a normal symbol is hit. For example, the left first winning opening 64b is set to be open for a certain period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after being hit, and the right first winning opening after 1.5 seconds to 4.5 seconds. 64b may be set to be opened, and after 4.5 seconds, the left first winning opening 64a may be set to be opened again. And it is good also as a structure which provides a variation in the opening pattern (type of time saving state) of the electric accessory 645a, 645b in the case of hitting a normal symbol. That is, the electric power accessories 645a and 645b are electrically driven during the time period in which the electric accessory 645a, 645b is opened (time saving state 1) and the right first winning port 64b is opened, while the left first winning port 64a is opened. A configuration may be employed in which a time saving state (time saving state 2) of a pattern in which the accessory products 645a and 645b are opened.

Further, instead of providing the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b, different lottery is executed (for example, different jackpot types are determined when a big hit) It may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that the winning a prize entrance which can be entered is switchable. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to provide a winning opening in which a jackpot with a small number of prize balls is easily determined and a winning opening in which a jackpot with many prize balls is easily determined. By providing the winning openings having different degrees of advantage when the lottery is executed, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the balls will win the advantageous winning openings. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the distribution winning apparatus 64 is not limited to the winning opening. For example, each winning port is provided in a different part on the game board, and a plurality of operating ports for switching each winning port into a ball enterable state or an unballable state (A so-called non-electric accessory) may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that which of the working ports the ball is to be thrown into (which winning port is switched to a state in which the ball can be entered) is switched by a nail, a switching valve or the like.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 79. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b in which the number of payout balls based on the winning is different. To make a ball. The gaming machine that can adjust whether or not it is advantageous to the player by adjusting the incoming ball ratio with the adjusting nails t1 and t2 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the passage opening 645 is provided to either the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 having different expected numbers of payout balls when a big hit occurs. A game machine in which a game ball that has passed through enters will be described.

Here, based on the game ball entering the left first winning opening 64a, the first special symbol is drawn, and based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640, the second special symbol Lottery will be held. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to have different jackpot types selected when a jackpot is achieved. The jackpot based on the second special symbol is set so that a jackpot type advantageous to the player is easily selected as compared to the jackpot based on the first special symbol.

Further, the number of payout balls based on winning is also configured such that the second winning opening 640 is larger than the left first winning opening 64a, as in the second embodiment. Thereby, in the third embodiment, it is possible to adjust the strength of the player whether or not it is advantageous to the player, as compared with the second embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, a holding symbol indicating that the number of holding balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. Then, the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such complaints. It should be noted that in the above-described first embodiment, a holding symbol indicating that the number of holding balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) may be displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize.

In the third embodiment, in comparison with the second embodiment, the display of the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and the right first winning opening 64b is replaced by a second winning opening. The difference is that 640 is provided. Further, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 are changed. The other points are the same as in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 59, the game board 13 is provided with a second winning opening 640 instead of the right first winning opening 64b. The second winning opening 640 has the same structure as the right first winning opening 64b in the second embodiment, but the second special symbol is drawn based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. The selection ratio of the jackpot type is different between the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the expected value of the number of payout balls to be paid out to the player is different. Details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 60(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

In the present embodiment, a small area Ds4 is provided in the upper right of the screen in addition to each display area in the above-described second embodiment. This small area Ds4 displays identification information that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the number of holdings (see FIG. 60(b)), and is small until the number of holding balls reaches a predetermined value (4 in this embodiment). A holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls is displayed only in the area Ds1, and when the number of holding balls is larger than that, a holding symbol that is difficult for the player to recognize is displayed, which indicates the number of holding balls that is greater than the predetermined value. .. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is 4 balls or less, one reserved symbol is displayed for each one reserved ball number in the small area Ds1, and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. It Thereby, the player can easily recognize what the number of holding balls is by counting the number of holding symbols.

On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is more than four, four holding symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 and the holding ball number for the increase is displayed in the small area Ds4, which is recognized by the player. Difficult to hold design is displayed. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the increase is 1 (that is, the number of reserved balls is 5), "A", and the number of the reserved balls for increase is 2 (that is, the number of reserved balls is 6) "B" in the case of, "C" when the number of reserved balls for the increase is 3 (that is, the number of reserved balls is 7), and the number of the reserved balls for increase is 4 (that is, the number of reserved balls is 8) In the case of a ball, it is displayed as "D". This makes it easy to recognize only the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1, and thus it is possible to give the player the illusion that the maximum number of reserved balls is four. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. Then, the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such complaints.

Further, in this embodiment, the small area Ds4 is a smaller display area than other display areas (for example, the small area Ds1). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the number of holding balls based on only the holding symbols of the small area Ds1 which is a display area larger than the small area Ds4. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. Then, the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such complaints.

It should be noted that the reserved symbols that are difficult for the player to recognize in the small area Ds4 are not limited to this, and may be displayed with other symbols or symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. 64, the display (change) timing of the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds4 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment), it is configured to display a stop symbol indicating a continuous display suggesting that the variable effect is continuously executed. There is. As a result, the difference between the number of reserved balls recognized by the player and the actual number of reserved balls can be eliminated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

First, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, a case will be described in which the number of reserved balls becomes larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period can be replaced. FIG. 61 is a display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a small area Ds1 thereof when the number of holding balls is larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period can be replaced. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the pending design and the pending design displayed in the small area Ds4.

In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is 4, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. In this case, it is assumed that the fluctuating effect is being executed, and if the game ball newly enters the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 during the period in which the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect can be replaced, it is put on hold. The number of balls becomes 5. As a result, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from "-" to "A", and the symbols that are stopped and displayed are changed to those that suggest the continuation of the variation effect (see FIG. 62(a)). .. As a result, when this variation effect ends, a stop symbol indicating a continuous display suggesting that the variation effect is continuously executed is displayed (see FIG. 62(b)). Then, when the variation effect is started, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from "A" to "-", and the actual number of reserved balls is 4 (FIG. 62(c)).

Thereby, by displaying the stop symbol of the continuous display, the player can be made aware that the variation effect is continuously executed and the next variation effect is started without consuming the holding ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual number of reserved balls does not make the player feel uncomfortable. The number of balls can be reduced from 5 to 4 and the variation effect can be started.

FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. As described above, FIG. 62(a) is an example of a display screen when the game ball newly enters the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 during the period in which the stop symbol of the variable effect can be replaced. 62(b) is an example of a display screen when a continuous display is displayed after the display shown in FIG. 62(a), which indicates that the variation effect should be continued, and FIG. 62(c) shows , FIG. 62(b) is an example of a display screen when the variation effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, a case will be described in which the number of reserved balls becomes larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period cannot be replaced. 63 is a display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a small area Ds1 thereof when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period cannot be replaced. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the pending design and the pending design displayed in the small area Ds4.

In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is 4, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. In this case, it is assumed that the variable effect is being executed, and if the game ball newly enters the left first prize opening 64a or the second prize opening 640 during the period in which the stop symbols of the variable effect cannot be replaced, The number of reserved balls becomes 5. As a result, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from "-" to "A", and the symbol stopped and displayed in the next variation effect is changed to a continuous display that suggests continuation of the variation effect, Add 1 to the stop type change counter. As a result, the stop type of the next change effect of the change effect is changed to continuous display when it is received from the main control device 110, and the stop type change counter described above is decremented by one. As a result, in the variation effect to be executed next, a stop symbol indicating a continuous display suggesting that the variation effect is continuously executed is displayed (see FIG. 64(b)). Then, when the variation effect is started, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from "A" to "-", and the actual number of reserved balls is 4 (FIG. 64(c)).

As a result, even if the stop design of the fluctuating effect being executed is in a period that cannot be replaced, the stop effect of the fluctuating effect to be executed next is continuously displayed by displaying the stop design of the fluctuating effect. It is possible to let the player recognize that it is executed and the next variation effect is started without digesting the reserved ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual number of reserved balls does not make the player feel uncomfortable. The number of balls can be reduced from 5 to 4 and the variation effect can be started.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be described. 65A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202, and FIG. 65B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203.

First, regarding the ROM 202, the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b and the prize ball table 202e are different, and the other points are the same. The difference between the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 65A and 66, and the difference between the contents of the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 65B. To do. The first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c have the same contents as those in the second embodiment described above, and therefore their explanations are omitted.

First, the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b is provided with a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 selection table 202b2.

The toku-zu 1 selection table 202b1 is a table used to select a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit based on a ball hitting the left first winning opening 64a, and the toku-zu 2 selection table 202b2 is , Is a table used for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit based on a ball hitting the second winning opening 640. The selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 and the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 are defined with different jackpot types, and in the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, to the player The expected value of the number of balls to be paid out is set to be different.

Specifically, the contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 are capable of selecting jackpot B and jackpot C, respectively. Different ratios are set.

Specifically, in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the judgment value of the big hit B, and the value of “30 to 99” is set as the judgment value of the big hit C. (See FIG. 66(a)). In addition, in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, the value "0 to 69" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit B, and "70 to 99" is set as the determination value of the big hit C, respectively. (See FIG. 66(b)).

As described above, the “big hit B” is a big hit that is advantageous to the player, because the “big hit B” is a big hit in which lottery is performed to determine whether or not the probability will change. Therefore, the selection table for special figure 2 202b2 is a selection table which is more advantageous for the player than the selection table for special figure 1 202b1, and is based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 rather than the left first winning opening 64a. It is easy to select a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Further, similarly to the second embodiment, the number of payout balls based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 is set to be larger than that of the left first winning opening 64a. As a result, it can be adjusted to be more advantageous or disadvantageous to the player as compared with the second embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 is configured such that the jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be easily selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry into the left first winning opening 64a is achieved. The jackpot based on may be configured so that a jackpot advantageous to the player can be easily selected. As a result, in terms of the number of payout balls, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than the left first winning opening 64a, and in selecting the jackpot type, the left first winning opening is more than the second winning opening 640. It may be advantageous for the player to enter the mouth 64a. As a result, it is possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or too disadvantageous for the player.

Next, the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. In the prize ball table 202e, the number of payout balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening that has entered is defined. Specifically, the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a is one, and the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is three. Yes, the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 640 is 10, and the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the normal winning opening 63 is 5. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when the second first winning opening 640 is entered through the left first winning opening 64a is set to be large. As a result, if a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter the second winning opening 640, it is advantageous to the player, and if not, it is disadvantageous to the player.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 into the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640, respectively. ing. As a result, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the second winning opening 640 a lot, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is hit based on a ball hitting the second winning opening 640, a jackpot advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than a jackpot based on the left first winning opening 64a. Therefore, the player can be adjusted to be more advantageous or disadvantageous as compared with the second embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when entering the second winning opening 640 is larger than that to the left first winning opening 64a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second winning opening 640 is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the number of payout balls to be paid out when entering the left first winning opening 64a may be increased. As a result, in selecting the jackpot type, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than to the left first winning opening 64a, but in terms of the number of paid-out balls, the second winning opening 640 is on the left side. It is possible for the player to be more advantageous if he or she entered the first winning opening 64a. As a result, it is possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or too disadvantageous for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the second embodiment in that the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e, the variation execution flag 203w1, and the variation order storage area 203w2. Are provided, and other points are the same.

Like the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a described above. The only difference is that the left first winning opening 63a or the right first winning opening 63b (first special symbol) is changed to the second winning hole 640 (second special symbol), and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is a holding ball number counter dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), with respect to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d described above. The only difference is that the left first winning opening 63a or the right first winning opening 63b (first special symbol) is changed to the second winning hole 640 (second special symbol), and other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation execution flag 203w1 is a flag for setting which of the storage areas of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is to be used for the variation. This variation execution flag 203w1 is set based on the data of the variation order storage area 203w2 described later in the variation execution determination process (see FIG. 70), and is referred to in the processing of S252 and S253 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69). To be done. It should be noted that this flag is an area that is backed up even when the power is cut off, and in the initial state where the RAM is cleared, etc., it is set to execute a variation based on the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a.

The variable order storage area 203w2 is an area for storing the winning order for each of the reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c. Eight storage areas are set in the variation order storage area 203w2, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the winning order. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the second embodiment in that the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, the stop type change counter 223g, and the stop type changed counter 223h. The difference is that the reserved symbol storage area 223i is added. Other configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, similarly to the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that it is stored on the basis of the number of reserved balls command, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Stop type change counter 223g, when the sum of the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223f is larger than 4, the stop display displayed in the next change, the above-mentioned pseudo This is a counter for determining whether or not to change to the continuous display (see FIG. 62B) that suggests such continuous fluctuation. The stop type change counter 223g is a continuation display executed when the number-of-hold-balls command transmitted from the main control device 110 based on the entry into the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 is received. In the determination process (see FIG. 75), 1 is added when the stop symbol of the fluctuation currently being executed cannot be replaced. Further, in the stop type receiving process (see FIG. 74) executed when the stop type command is received, when the stop type is changed to the continuously displayed stop type (see S2252), 1 is subtracted. Further, when the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display, the display of the hold symbol also needs to be changed accordingly, so the stop type change counter 223g is referred to in the hold symbol setting process (see FIG. 76). Then, the processing corresponding to the value is executed.

The stop type changed counter 223h is for determining whether or not the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display (see FIG. 62(b)) indicating the pseudo continuous variation by the stop type counter 223g and the like described above. It is a counter. The stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 when the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display in the stop type receiving process (see S2053 in FIG. 74), and when the change is started in the change display setting process (that is, change). 1 is subtracted) (S2152 in FIG. 79). The stop type change counter 223g is referred to in the hold symbol setting process (see FIG. 76).

The reserved symbol storage area 223j is an area for storing information on the reserved symbols to be displayed on the display control device 114. In the reserved symbol storage area 223j, the number of reserved symbols (normally reserved symbols) displayed in the Ds1 area of the third symbol display device 81 described above and the reserved symbol (special reserved symbol) displayed in the Ds4 area There is an area for storing the display number of This reserved symbol storage area 223j is updated by the reserved symbol setting process (see FIG. 76) when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110. Specific contents will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
In the control processing in the third embodiment, part of the content of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that in the second embodiment. The other processing is the same as that of the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

A control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. The third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that a part of the special symbol variation process, the jackpot setting process, and the start winning process is changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 69, a special symbol variation process (SS104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The same processes as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is acquired (S203), and the variation execution determination process is executed (S251).

Here, the fluctuation execution determination process (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S251). This variation execution determination process (S251) is a process performed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69), and the effect pattern of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. (Variation effect pattern) is a process for determining whether to execute the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203c based on the value of various counters stored in which area. is there.

In the fluctuation execution determination process, first, the fluctuation execution flag 203w1 is set to 0 to perform initialization (S3001), and the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203w2 is acquired (S3002). After that, the data in the variable order storage area 203w2 is shifted (S3003). In the process of S3003, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the variable order storage area 203w2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first area→execution area, the second area→the first area, the third area→the second area, the fourth area→the reserved third area, the fifth area→the fourth area, the sixth area→ The data in each area is shifted such as the fifth area, the seventh area→the reserved sixth area, the eighth area→the reserved seventh area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S3004).

In the process of S3004, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S3004: Yes), the variation execution flag 203w1 is set to the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S3005), and the present process is terminated. , Return to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 1 (S3004: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (S3006). In the process of S3006, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (S3006: Yes), the variation execution flag 203w1 is set to the variation execution in the special figure 2 (S3007), and this process is ended. , Return to the special symbol variation process.

In the process of S3006, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special map 2 (S3006: No), there is no pending ball to be executed in a variable manner, and thus the process is terminated while the variable execution flag 203w1 remains in the initial state. , Return to the special symbol variation process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. After the processing of S251 is finished, it is determined whether or not the variable execution is performed in the special figure 2 (S252). Specifically, referring to the variation execution flag 203w1 set by the process of S251, if the variation execution flag 203w1 is the special figure 2, it is determined that the variation execution flag 203w1 is executed in the special figure 2.

In the processing of S251, when it is determined that the variation is executed in the special figure 2 (S252: Yes), in order to start the variation of the second special symbol, the same processing as the first embodiment described above is performed from S205 to S208. The process is executed and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable execution is not performed in the special figure 2 (S252: No), the process proceeds to S253.

In the process of S253, when it is determined that the change is not executed in the special figure 1 (S253: No), there is no reserve ball to be changed, and thus the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable execution is performed in the special figure 1 (S253: Yes), the processing from S210 to S213, which is the same processing as in the above-described first embodiment, is executed, and this processing is ended. In addition, in the present embodiment, whether or not the variation is executed in the special figure 2 is determined before the special figure 1, but whether or not the variation is executed in the special figure 1 is determined compared to the special figure 2. You may make it discriminate first. This makes it possible to set which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is to be preferentially determined.

In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S213), in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S208), the jackpot B and the jackpot C are set to be different in selection ratio. As described above, the jackpot B is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot C, and the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 has a higher selection ratio of the big jackpot B. Therefore, the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 is selected. It is more advantageous for the player to select the jackpot type based on. That is, the jackpot based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is more advantageous than the jackpot based on the ball entering the left first winning opening 64a.

As a result, by adjusting the adjusting nails t1 and t2 so that the game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 can be easily won into the second winning port 640, it can be adjusted to be advantageous to the player. If not adjusted, it can be adjusted to be disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the selection ratios of the jackpot types are set to be different between the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. For example, in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, “4 rounds” is set. The jackpot is selected, and the type of jackpot is selected so that “16 rounds of jackpots” are selected in the selection table for special figure 2 202b2, thereby adjusting whether or not it is advantageous to the player. You may be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the jackpot setting process 3 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 3 (S254). This jackpot setting process 3 (S254) is a process performed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69), and is a process of setting for starting the jackpot game. In the jackpot setting process 3 (S254) in the third embodiment, it is determined whether the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment is a jackpot of the first special symbol (S2551), and the determination is made. The difference is that the jackpot type is determined (S2552 or S2553) according to the result, and the other points are the same, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

First, in the jackpot setting process 3 (S233), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot for the first special symbol (S2551). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol by the process of S2551 (S2551: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the selection table for special figure 1 202b1, and the process proceeds to S2502. On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2551 that the first special symbol is not a big hit (the second special symbol is a big hit), the big hit type is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, and the process of S2502 is performed. Transition. By the processing of S2551 to S2553, the jackpot type according to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be determined, and the jackpot game can be executed based on the jackpot type.

When the process shifts to S2502, the processes of S2502 to S2504 are executed as in the second embodiment, and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) of the left first winning port 64a and the left first winning port 64a or the first winning port 64a. This is a process for determining whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) at the second winning opening 640, and if there is a starting winning, a process of holding the value indicated by each random number counter.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) the left first winning opening 64a (S501). Here, the ball entering the left first winning opening 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the left first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display pending in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, whether or not there is a winning in the left first winning opening 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the left first winning opening 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S503: No), the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the left first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 is held. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d changed by calculation is set to the holding sphere number command (S505).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a main process 2 (see FIG. 66) described later that is executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command in the process of S505, the special symbols for each value of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. The first special ball storage area 203a is stored (S506), the special map 1 is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203k (S551), and the process proceeds to S507. In the process of S551, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203c or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203w is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203k in the variation execution determination process (S251) described above, the starting opening varies the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even if there are two types of fluctuations, one that changes the symbols, the fluctuations can be started in the order in which the winning opening is won.

In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) (S507). When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S507: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e performs the same processing as when winning the left first winning opening 64a.

More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S509: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (N2) is incremented by 1 (S510), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S511). Then, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (S512), and the first area of the variation order storage area 203k is stored. Toku-zu 2 is set (S552), and this processing ends. The determination of the first area in S552 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S551.

Whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 640 (S507: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S509: No), the process proceeds to the prefetching process (S513), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 79. In the second control example, part of the command determination process 2 (S1611), the stop type reception process (S1705), and the variable display setting process (S1612) is changed from the first control example. Since the other configurations are the same except for the points, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination processing 3 (S1611) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the command determination processing 3 (S1611). In the third embodiment, as compared with the second embodiment, the stop type reception process (S1751) is executed instead of the processes of S1705 and S1706, and the continuous display determination process (instead of the process of S1708). (S1751), the difference is that it is changed to execute the reserved symbol setting process (S1752). Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination processing 3 (S1611), first, similarly to the second embodiment, the processing of S1701 to S1704 is executed. If it is determined in the process of S1704 that the stop type command has been received, the stop type receiving process is executed (S1705), and the present process ends.

Here, the stop type reception process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the stop type receiving process (S1705).

In the stop type reception process (S1705), first, the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3101), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103.

In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the stop type counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3103). In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the stop type counter 223i is 0 (S3103: No), it is not necessary to change the stop type, and thus this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3103, when it is determined that the stop type counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3103: Yes), it is necessary to change the stop type, so the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the continuous display. Change (S3104). After that, the stop type change counter 223h is incremented by 1 (S2053), the stop type change counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S3105), and this processing is ended.

Here, in the stop type change counter 223i, the number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more due to the game ball entering the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 during the period when the change effect cannot be replaced. In this case, 1 is added. By adding 1 to the stop type change counter 223i, the received stop type can be changed to the stop type for continuous display in the process of S3104. As a result, even when the game balls enter during the period in which the variable effect cannot be replaced and the number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more, the stop type of the next variable effect can be changed to the stop type of continuous display. .. Thereby, the player can be made aware that the variation effect is continuously executed and the next variation effect is started without consuming the holding balls. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual number of reserved balls does not make the player feel uncomfortable. The number of balls can be reduced from 5 to 4 and the variation effect can be started.

In addition, by adding 1 to the stop type changed counter 223h, in the pending symbol setting process (see FIG. 76) described later, whether to execute the increasing pending symbol setting process (see FIG. 77) or the decreasing pending symbol. It is possible to determine whether to execute the setting process (see FIG. 78).

Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S1704, when it is determined that the stop type command is not received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not the reserved ball number command is received (S1706). In the process of S1706, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1706: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the reserved ball number counter of the corresponding special symbol (S1707), The continuous display determination process is executed (S1751), the reserved symbol setting process is executed (S1752), and this process ends.

Here, the continuation determination process (S1751) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the continuation determination process (S1751). In this continuation determination process (S1751), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 receives the number of reserved balls transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has entered the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640. This is the process executed in some cases. In the continuation determination process (S1751), based on the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c (N2), the stop type is the stop type of the continuous display. This is a process of determining whether or not to change.

In the continuous display determination process (S1751), first, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c (N2) are acquired (S3201), and the total value thereof. It is determined whether (N1+N2) is greater than 4 (S3202). In the processing of S3202, when it is determined that the total value (N1+N2) is not larger than 4 (that is, 4 or less) (S3202: No), there is no need to change the stop type, so this processing is directly performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if it is determined that the total value (N1+N2) is larger than 4 (that is, 5 or more) (S3202: Yes), then the stop type changed counter 223h is 0? It is determined whether or not (S3203). In the process of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type changed counter 223h is not 0 (S3203: No), the stop type change counter is set because the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed has already been changed to continuous display. One is added (S3207), and this processing ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the stop symbols from being duplicated and changed to continuous display.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type changed counter 223h is 0 (S3203: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a stop symbol replaceable period (S3204). In the process of S3204, when it is determined that the stop symbol is not replaceable, as described above, the stop type change counter is incremented by 1 to change the stop symbol of the next variable effect (S3207), This process ends.

Here, in the process of S3204, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol can be replaced during the variable period, and the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (replaceable period) is previously set during the variable period. It is determined by each fluctuation pattern, and a timer (not shown) determines whether or not that period has elapsed.

In the process of S3204, when it is determined that the stop symbol can be replaced, the display stop type command (continuous display) is set (S3205), and the stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 (S3206). , This process ends. The display stop type command (continuous display) set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 52). In S1802), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command (continuous display), when the stop display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is continuously displayed. , The set stop type information is overwritten.

Further, since the stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 in the process of S3206, it is possible to suppress the duplicate change of the stop type in the process of S3203, as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the pending symbol setting process (S1752) executed after the continuous display determination process (S1751) will be described. FIG. 76 is a view showing a flowchart of this reserved symbol setting process (S1752). This hold symbol setting process (S1752) is a process executed when a hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110, and the hold ball number is changed based on a change in whether the hold ball number increases or decreases. This is a process for executing a process corresponding to a change in the number.

In the reserved symbol setting process, first, the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3301), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b (N1), and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c (N2). And are acquired (S3302). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has increased based on the value acquired by the processing of S3301 and S3302 (S3303).

Specifically, the total value of the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c (N2) is the display of the normal holding symbol in the holding symbol storage area 223i. If it is larger than the total of the number and the display number of special reserved symbols, it is determined to be an increase, and if it is small, it is determined to be a decrease.

Here, when the number of reserved balls changes due to the winning of the game balls or the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the number of reserved balls transmitted from the main controller 110 is transmitted. When this reserved ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are determined by the process of S1707 of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 73) ( N2) and the value are updated. Then, because the reserved symbol setting process (S1752) is executed, by comparing the total value of the reserved symbol number counters (223b, 223f) of the special symbol with the total value of the displayed numbers in the reserved symbol storage area 223i, It is possible to determine whether the number of retained balls has increased or decreased.

In the process of S3303, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has increased (S3303: Yes), an increase reserved symbol setting process is executed (S3304), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the number of reserved balls has increased (S3303: No), the decrease time reserved symbol setting process is executed (S3305), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the increase pending symbol setting process (S3304) will be described. FIG. 77 is a view showing a flowchart of the increase pending symbol setting process (S3304). This increase-time hold symbol setting process (S3304) is a hold ball transmitted from the main control device 110 when the number of hold balls is increased based on the ball entering the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640. It is the process when a number command is received, and updates the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i based on the increase in the number of reserved balls, and sets the display reserved ball number command for displaying the reserved symbol on the display control device 114. This is a process for doing.

In the increase pending symbol setting process, first, the data in the pending symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3401). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of normally reserved symbols stored in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is 4 (S3402). In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of the normal reserved symbols is four (S3402: Yes), the normal reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) has reached the upper limit value (4). , The number of special reserved symbols (reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds4) is incremented by 1 (S3403), and the process proceeds to S3405.

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of normally reserved symbols displayed is not 4 (S3402: No), the normally reserved symbols (reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1) reach the upper limit value (4). Therefore, the number of normally reserved symbols displayed is incremented by 1 (S3404), and the process proceeds to S3405.

When the process of S3402 or S3403 is completed, the display reserved sphere number command is set based on the reserved symbol storage area 223i updated by the process of S3402 or S3403 (S3405), and the process is terminated. The display reserved ball count command set in the process of S3405 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 (S1802). In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved sphere number command, it executes a process of updating the display of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, based on the fact that the main control device 110 detects the winning of the game ball, it is possible to update the display of the reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the reduction pending symbol setting process (S3305) will be described. FIG. 78 is a view showing a flowchart of the reduction pending symbol setting process (S3305). This decrease time hold symbol setting process (S3305) is a process when a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the hold ball number is reduced based on the start of variation of the special symbol, It is a process for updating the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i based on the decrease in the reserved number of balls, and setting a display reserved ball number command for displaying the reserved symbol on the display control device 114.

In the reduction symbol setting process (S3305), first, the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3501). Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (S3502). In the process of S3502, when it is determined that the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (S3502: Yes), the display number of the special reserved symbols in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is decremented by 1 (S3503), and the process of S3505 is performed. Transition. In the process of S3502, when the stop type change counter 223h is larger than 0, the stop type has been changed to the continuous display in the previous change of the special symbol, and the stop display before the start of the current change is the continuous display. This is the case.

Thereby, when the stop display of the variation of the special symbol started last time becomes the continuous display (see FIG. 62(b)), the display number of the special reserved symbol is subtracted by 1, so that the variation of the special symbol to be started this time Based on this, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved symbols in the small area Ds4 on the third symbol display device 81 by one. The player, the stop symbol of the previous variable display is a continuous display that suggests a continuous variation, so the variation of the special symbol is not reduced without reducing the reserved symbol in the small area Ds1 which is a mode that is easily recognized by the player. Even if you start it, you will not feel any discomfort. As a result, without making the player feel uncomfortable, the player can reduce the number of reserved symbols in the small area Ds4, which is a mode difficult for the player to recognize, to start changing the special symbol.

Here, the stop type change counter 223h is added by the stop type receiving process when the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (that is, when the number of holding balls is 5 or more and a special holding symbol is set). .. Therefore, when the stop type changed counter 223h becomes larger than 0, it means that there is a special reserved symbol. As a result, in the process of S3503, there is no problem that the number of special reserved symbols displayed cannot be subtracted because there is no special reserved symbol. If, in the process of S3503, the display number of special reserved symbols is 0 and cannot be subtracted, error processing may be performed. Specifically, a process of setting a display error command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 so as to perform a display indicating an error is exemplified. Thereby, due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to detect a malfunction in which the stop type changed counter is added even though the number of special reserved symbols displayed is 0.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3502, when it is determined that the stop type changed counter 223h is not 0 (S3502: No), in the previous change of the special symbol, the stop type is changed to continuous display. Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the special reserved symbol, the display number of the normally reserved symbol is decremented by 1 (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507.

As a result, in the case where there is no special reserved symbol, the normal reserved symbol (held symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) can be decreased by 1. Further, in the case where there is a special pending symbol, the stop type changed counter 223h is 0, that is, since the stop symbol of the variation of the special symbol started last time is not changed to the continuous display, the special pending symbol is Similarly to the case where there is not, it is possible to decrease the normal reserved symbol (held symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) by 1.

In this way, when the variation effect is stopped by the continuous display (see FIG. 62B), the special reserved symbol can be reduced by one and displayed by the process of S3503 at the start of the next variation effect. (See FIG. 62(c)). On the other hand, if the variation effect is not stopped by the continuous display, the normal reserved symbol can be reduced by one and displayed by the process of S3504 at the start of the next variation effect (see FIG. 64(a)).

In the present embodiment, whether or not the stop type has been changed can be determined by adding and subtracting the stop type changed counter 223h. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the stop type displayed as a stop can be determined. It may be stored in a ring buffer or the like so that it can be discriminated by referring to the stop type displayed in the previous stop display.

Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S1612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variable display setting process 3 (S1612). The variable display setting process 3 (S1612) in the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that a determination process of the stop type changed counter 223h and a subtraction process are added, and other processes. Are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

When the process of S2104 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the stop type changed counter 223h is larger than 0 (S2151). In the process of S2151, it is determined that the stop type changed counter is greater than 0, in the change of the special symbol started before the change of the special symbol which starts the change this time, when the stop type is changed. Therefore, the stop type changed counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S2152), and the process proceeds to S2105.

Thereby, since the stop type changed counter 223h can be subtracted after performing the variable display of the special symbol whose stop type has been changed to the continuous display, the variation of the next special symbol whose stop type has been changed to the continuous display Only at the start of display fluctuation, the special reserved symbol (reserved symbol of the small area Ds4) can be reduced by the process of S3503 of the above-described reduction pending symbol setting process (S3303). Therefore, when the stop symbol of continuous display is not displayed, the special reserved symbol (reserved symbol of the small area Ds4) which is a mode difficult for the player to recognize is not started to change the special symbol, that is, When the stop symbol of the continuous display is not displayed, the variation of the special symbol is started by decreasing the normal reserved symbol (reserved symbol of the small area Ds1), which is a mode that the player can easily see, so that the player can start the variation. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 645 enters either the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640. A jackpot lottery will be held. The award ball table 202e (see FIG. 65(d)) is set such that the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640 have different numbers of payout balls when a game ball is entered. There is. Specifically, the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a is one, whereas the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is It has 3 balls. Therefore, if a lot of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter the second winning opening 640, it is advantageous for the player, and if not, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Further, in the jackpot based on the left first winning opening 64a and the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640, the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640 is selected so that the jackpot type advantageous to the player is easily selected. The first hit type selection table 202b is set. Specifically, in the jackpot based on the left first winning opening 64a, "big hit C" is easier to select than "big winning B" (see FIG. 66(a)), and in the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640, "big hit" It is easier to select "big hit B" than "C" (FIG. 66(b)).

Here, as described above, the “big hit B” is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit C” because it is a big hit in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the probability will change. Therefore, the jackpot based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is more likely to be the “jackpot B” which is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, than the jackpot based on the entering the left first winning opening 64a.

As a result, the number of balls to be paid to the second winning port 640 is larger than the number of balls to be paid to the first winning port 64a on the left side, and a jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be selected easily. In comparison, it is a more advantageous entry for the player. As a result, by adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 into the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 by adjusting nails t1 and t2, it is possible to compare with the second embodiment. , It is possible to adjust the strength or weakness of whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 is configured such that the jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be easily selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry into the left first winning opening 64a is achieved. The jackpot based on may be configured so that a jackpot advantageous to the player can be easily selected. As a result, in terms of the number of payout balls, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than the left first winning opening 64a, and in selecting the jackpot type, the left first winning opening is more than the second winning opening 640. It may be advantageous for the player to enter the mouth 64a. As a result, it is possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or too disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the holding symbol indicating that the number of holding balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) is a special holding symbol (of the third symbol device 81) that is difficult for the player to recognize. It is displayed in the reserved area of the small area Ds4) (see FIG. 60(b)). Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. Then, the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such complaints.

Further, the electric auditors products 645a and 645b are arranged so that the game ball can easily enter the passage port 645, but the invention is not limited thereto. Only the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are provided with the game ball. You may make it easy to guide. In this case, the side wall forming the left first ball entrance 64a or the right first prize hole 64b of the base body 64c is composed of rotating blades (electrical accessory), and by rotating, a game ball May be easily inserted into the left first entrance 64a or the right first entrance 64b. With such a configuration, for example, by attaching an electric accessory to the right first winning opening 64b, a large number of game balls can be paid out during a time saving or a sudden change, and the player's possession of balls decreases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of shifting to the time saving game state or the probability variation game state.

In the present embodiment, when the left first winning port 64a is won, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is executed, and when the right first winning port 64b is won, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed. Here, when a big hit in the lottery for the special symbol 2, a big hit game that is more likely to be given a probability variation game is configured to be executed more easily than when a big hit occurs in the special symbol 1. Therefore, by arranging the electric accessory instead of the side wall of the right first winning opening 64b, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily executed during the probability variation or during the time saving, so that the probability variation or the time saving state can be performed. , The probability variation game can be easily given (the probability that the probability variation game is given can be increased).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 93. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of probability change states having different degrees of advantage for the player and a plurality of time saving states having different degrees of advantage are provided. More specifically, in the present embodiment, it is easier for the player to obtain more benefits when the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, in the case where there is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, compared to the case where the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, more prize balls can be obtained, and in addition, the special symbol The probability of shifting to the probability variation state is increased (the jackpot type that can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is easily selected). Then, as the probability variation state of the special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, a relatively disadvantageous) probability variation state 1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be performed in comparison with the probability variation state 1. A probabilistic state 2 (i.e., relatively advantageous) is provided. In addition, as a time-saving state of the normal symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous) time-saving state 1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in comparison with the time-saving state 1. An easy (i.e., relatively advantageous) time saving state 2 is provided. By varying the amount of award balls that can be obtained according to the state and the transition rate to the probability variation state, it is possible to play a game aiming at a more advantageous state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. The probability variation state 1 is a state where the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 1 are combined, and the probability variation state 2 is a state where the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration. The configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 is provided. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 is partially changed, a part of the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and a part of the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are performed in the first embodiment. This is a change from the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 88, the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, three ball entrances are provided in which a special symbol is drawn by entering a ball. Specifically, the first ball entrance 64a1 provided on the lower side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, and the right second ball entrance provided on the right side with respect to the variable display device unit 80 in front view. 64b and the right 1st entrance 64a2 provided in the front view right side with respect to the right 2nd entrance 64b are provided.

Both the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are subjected to a lottery for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the ball. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-mentioned two kinds of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the right first entrance 64a2 is provided with a first actuating member 645a. The first actuating member 645a is in an open state in which the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2 (easy) and cannot enter the ball in the right first ball entrance 64a2 ( Difficult) and closed state. The first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state when the ball enters the first operating port 704 provided inside the sorting winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a that has been switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

Similarly, the right second ball inlet 64b is provided with a second actuation accessory 645b. The second actuating member 645b is also in an open state in which the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b (easy), and cannot enter the ball in the right second ball entrance 64b ( Difficult) and closed state. The second operating accessory 645b that accompanies the second operating accessory 645b is switched to the open state when the ball enters the second operating port 707 provided inside the distribution winning apparatus 700. On the other hand, the second actuation accessory 645b that has been switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

A distribution winning apparatus 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball that has entered inside into either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first actuation port 704 (when the ball is entered), the first actuation accessory 645a attached to the right first entrance port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entrance The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second actuation opening 707 (entering the ball), the second actuation accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance opening is switched to the open state, and then to the right second entrance opening 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

Here, details of the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a front view of the distribution winning apparatus 700. A ball is allowed to flow down on the upper surface side of the distribution winning apparatus 700. As shown in FIG. 81, since the upper surface side of the distribution winning apparatus 700 is inclined to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, the sphere reaching the upper surface of the distribution winning apparatus 700 basically flows down to the lower left direction. To do. Further, an electric accessory 701 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the distribution winning apparatus 700. This electric accessory 701 is in an open state (immersed state) in which the ball can enter (easy) into the sorting prize winning apparatus 700 and a closed state (projected state) in which the ball cannot enter (difficult). ) And can be switched to. This electric accessory 701 is set to an open state when it is hit by a lottery for ordinary symbols.

The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 is branched into two channels, a first channel 703 and a second channel 706. Since the first operating port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow channel 703, the sphere that has flowed down the first flow channel 703 enters the first operating port 704. On the other hand, since the second operating port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow channel 706, the ball flowing down the second flow channel 706 enters the second operating port 707. In addition, at the position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are branched, a flow path through which a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is switched ( A variable flow path) 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches (slides and displaces) between a first switching state in which the sphere flows down into the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the sphere flows down into the second flow path 706. )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the left side in front view to close the upstream side of the second flow path and only the first flow path is opened. To the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the right when viewed from the front to close the upstream side of the first flow path, and only the first flow path is opened. , The sphere advances to the second flow path.

The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and a predetermined period (e.g., 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol hit state is reached after the normal symbol hits). ) Has elapsed, the first switching state is switched to the second switching state. Moreover, when a specific period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the switching to the second switching state, the switching to the first switching state is performed again.

If the ball can be thrown into the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the second switching state, the ball can be made to flow down toward the second operation port 707. When the ball enters the second operation port 707, the second operation accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability that the probability variation state of the special symbol is given when it is a big hit, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow-down direction (whether the flow is flowing down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707) of the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 81, a first operating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operating port 704. The first operating port 704 is composed of a known non-electrically-powered accessory, that is, the first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball entering the first operating port 704. You can Further, when the first actuating member 645a is in the open state, the first actuating member 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. The second operating mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operating mechanism 705. That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second operating port 707. Further, when the second actuating member 645b is in the open state, the second actuating member 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b.

In this way, by throwing a ball into the distribution winning apparatus 700, the ball is thrown into the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating accessory 645a or The two working accessory 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if the special design 2 lottery is a big hit, it is more advantageous than the special design 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first working opening 704 or the second working opening 707. You can let me know. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 82, the correspondence relationship between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 is provided with two types (opening pattern A and opening pattern B). When the opening pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is normally set to the open state for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second) immediately after the symbol hitting is started, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. To be done. Then, after the open state is set for 0.1 seconds, the hit state ends. During the opening period of 1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 during this period is distributed to the first operation port 704. .. On the other hand, during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 during this period is the second operation port 707. Be assigned to. However, since it is difficult to enter the ball during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, in many cases, the ball entering the sorting apparatus 700 while the opening pattern A is set is It is distributed to the first operating port 704 and the right first ball inlet 64a1 is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is normally set to the open state for an extremely short time (that is, 0.1 seconds) immediately after the start of the symbol hit, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. Set to state. Then, after the open state is set for a relatively long time (that is, one second), the hit state ends. During the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 during this period is sent to the first operating port 704. It is distributed. However, as described above, it is difficult to enter the ball during the extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, in the opening period of 1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 during this period is transferred to the second operation port 707. It is distributed. Therefore, in many cases, the ball that has entered the distribution device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is distributed to the second operation port 707, and the right second ball inlet port 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

In this way, the degree of advantage for the player can be changed depending on the set opening pattern, so that the opening pattern can be made to be interesting each time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, the opening pattern to be set is determined according to the game state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability variation non-time saving state), the time reduction state 1, and the probability variation state 1, when an ordinary symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the open pattern B is set when a normal drawing hits. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, it is difficult to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, the types of special symbols that are easy to be executed can be different according to the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower left side of the game board 13, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is made by the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry (prize) into the first entrance 64a1, the right first entrance 64a2, or the right second entrance 64b, After a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the jackpot is stopped, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed as the third symbol display device 81. , And the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 42 to 44) in the second embodiment. Since it is as described above in the second embodiment, details are omitted, but the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering device 65 during the big hit passes the probability variation switch 65e3 therein, and thus the big hit. After the end, the probability change state is added.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 90. First, FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 90(a) is a selection for special figure 1 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90B is a diagram showing the contents of the table 202b1, and FIG. 90B is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. The special table 1 selection table 202b1 is referred to for determining the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is the second special symbol lottery. When it becomes a jackpot in, it is referred to to determine the jackpot type.

First, the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 included in the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot type to be selected is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the big hit A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9". This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four, the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. .. The pattern that allows the probability variation switch 65e to pass includes, for example, that the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (providing the probability variation switch 65e in the variable winning device 65). The flow path is opened). Since the player continuously hits the ball toward the variable winning device 65 in the big hit, one or more balls can be made to flow down to the probability change switch 65e in 5 seconds. When the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e in the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot. That is, the probability variation state 1 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 1 are combined after the big hit is given. On the other hand, if the player does not hit the ball during the big hit and the big hit ends without the ball passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, only the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit ends. Although the jackpot A is prone to the probability variation state, the probability variation state to be given is the probability variation state 1, and the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed during the probability variation state, so the probability variation state 2 is likely to be provided. It is disadvantageous compared to jackpot B and jackpot F).

The jackpot B is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 49”. This jackpot B is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four, the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. .. When the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e in the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot. That is, after the big hit, the probability variation state 2 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined is given. On the other hand, when the player does not hit the ball during the big hit and the big hit ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e during the big hit, only the time saving state 2 is given after the end of the big hit B. The jackpot B is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, because the jackpot B easily shifts to the most probable variation state 2 for the player. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, the prize balls are disadvantageous because they are smaller than when the jackpot is won by lottery of the second special symbol.

The jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 94”. This jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four and the probability variation solenoid (flow passage solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit. is there. The pattern in which the probability variation switch 65e cannot pass means, for example, that the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the probability variation switch in the variable winning device 65). This is an operation pattern in which the flow path in which 65e is provided is opened). Even if the ball is entered at the same time when the specific winning opening 65a is opened after the fourth round is started, the ball cannot reach the flow path provided with the positive variation solenoid 65k within 0.5 seconds. The flow path is closed before the ball reaches the positive change solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the big hit C, the probability change state of the special symbol is not given after the big hit. That is, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given, and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, and the number of prize balls is also the second special symbol. Since the number of jackpots is small compared to when a jackpot is won in the lottery, it is the jackpot type most disadvantageous to the player.

The jackpot D is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 94”. This jackpot D is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the probability variation switch 65e cannot pass during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. The probability change state is not given, and the prize balls are less than in the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, but since the time saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is given, the jackpot D Is more advantageous than jackpot C.

Next, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 90(b). FIG. 90(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 90( b ), in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, similarly to the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot type to be selected is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2. ing. Specifically, the jackpot E is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit. .. Although the jackpot E is likely to be a probability variation state, the probability variation state to be given is the probability variation state 1, and since the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed during the probability variation state, the probability variation state 2 is likely to be provided. The state after the jackpot is disadvantageous compared to the jackpot B and the jackpot F).

The jackpot F is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 79”. This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 2 is given after the big hit. .. The jackpot F is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, because the jackpot F easily shifts to the most probable variation state 2 for the player. Also in terms of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a larger number of prize balls than in the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

The jackpot G is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 84”. This jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit. is there. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, the gaming state after the jackpot is most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, it is more advantageous than a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol.

The jackpot H is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “85 to 94”. This jackpot H is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the probability variation switch 65e cannot pass during the big hit and the time saving state 2 is given after the big hit. is there. Although the probability variation state is not given, the jackpot H is more advantageous than the jackpot C or the jackpot G because the time saving state 2 is given in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed. In addition, even the prize spherical surface is more advantageous than a big hit in the first special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the present embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Since each jackpot type has a different number of rounds and a gaming state after the jackpot, when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, the player can be made to pay attention to which jackpot type. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is a big hit or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the percentage of the big hit type that is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e are Different. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to win a lot of prize balls when the second special symbol is drawn in a lottery. Further, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the proportion of the big hit type (big hit E, F) which is an operation pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e is 80%, whereas the first In the lottery for special symbols, the proportion of the jackpot type (jackpot A, B) that is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e is 50%. Therefore, it is more likely that the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol will result in a positive change. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, so whether the lottery executed is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. You can make a game pay attention to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83, a game state transition method in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a jackpot is hit, a new game state is set after the jackpot is over. As shown in FIG. 83, when the jackpot A is reached in the normal state (non-probable variation non-time-saving state), basically (unless the ball launch is stopped during the jackpot), the transition is made to the confirmation variation state 1 and the jackpot B is reached. Then, the probability transition state 2 is entered. When the jackpot C is reached, the time is shortened to 1 and when the jackpot D is reached, the time is shortened to 2. Further, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming state is a time saving state 1 (time saving state in which lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed), and a probability variation state 1 (probability variation state in which lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) Performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-probable variation non-time saving state). Although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 1 or the probability variation state 1, when the lottery of special symbols for the time saving number is executed without a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming state is the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), when the jackpot E becomes the probability variation state 1 and the jackpot F becomes the jackpot. , The most advantageous definite change state 2 is entered, and when the big hit G is reached, the time is shortened to 1 and when the big hit H is reached, the time is shortened to 2 (the time shortened state 2 is looped). Further, as shown in FIG. 83, even in the probability variation state 2 (the probability variation state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), the same state transition as the time saving state 2 is performed. Although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 2 or the probability variation state 2, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of time saving is executed without a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 84, special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203s, probability variation passage counter 203t1, winning number counter 203t2, action counter 203t3, counter buffer 203h, remaining ball timer flag 203t4, remaining ball timer 203t5 It has at least a probability variation valid flag 203t6, a probability variation valid timer 203t7, a discharge number counter 203t8, a time saving medium counter 203u, a time saving identification flag 203x, a jackpot flag 203i, and another memory area 203z.

Of these, special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol Reservation sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, big hit flag 203i, and other memory area 203z are special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and special symbol 2 provided in RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, jackpot Since it is the same as the flag 203i and the other memory area 203z, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the probability variation passage counter 203t1, the winning number counter 203t2, the operation counter 203t3, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4, the remaining ball timer 203t5, the probability variation valid flag 203t6, the probability variation valid timer 203t7, and the discharge number counter 203t8 are each the second embodiment. The same as the probability variation passage counter 203t1, the winning number counter 203t2, the operation counter 203t3, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4, the remaining ball timer 203t5, the probability variation valid flag 203t6, the probability variation valid timer 203t7, and the discharge number counter 203t8 which are provided in the RAM 203. .. Since these details have been described in the description of the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving identification flag 203x is a flag for identifying the type of the time saving state. If the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0, it means that the time saving state 1 (probability change state 1) is set. In addition, also in the normal state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed similarly to the time saving state 1, the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0. On the other hand, when the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 1, it means that the time saving state 2 (probability change state 2) is set. When the normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set with reference to the time saving identification flag 203x. Specifically, when the time saving identification flag 203x is 0 and the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set, so the balls enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. By doing so, the ball enters the first actuation port 704, and the ball can enter the left first entrance port 64a2. On the other hand, when the time saving identification flag 203x is 1 and the normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern B is set, so that the ball is allowed to enter the sorting prize winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. The ball enters the second operation port 707, and the ball can enter the left second entrance port 64b. The time saving identification flag 203x is set to a value corresponding to the time saving state given after the big hit when the big hit ends. In addition, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends (that is, when the time saving medium counter 203u becomes 0), 0 is set.

In the normal state (non-probability variation non-time saving state), the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0. In the non time saving state, a ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right hitting) irregular game. This is to suppress the method. That is, if the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 1 in the normal state, there is a risk that the player will always make a right-handed stroke in order to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery. In the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, so it is difficult to put the ball into the right second ball entrance 64b, but in the case of a big hit, 80% of the special symbol Since it is in the probability change state, the merit in the case of a big hit becomes large. Therefore, an irregular game method may be triggered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, and the opening pattern A is set even if it becomes a hit. It is possible for the person to have no merit to perform right-handedness. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be left-handed, so that an irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed).

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the jackpot in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 91) is set, and set to OFF in the ending process executed at the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 91 to 93. First, with reference to FIG. 91, a special symbol variation process 4 (S164) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 49) in the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 4 (S164).

Of the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 91, S164), S201 to S218, S220. In each process of S222 to S224, first, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, first, S201 to S218, S220. And the same processing as each processing of S222-S224 is performed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 91) in the fourth embodiment, when the start of the big hit is set in the process of S218 (S280), the values of the time saving medium counter 203u and the probability variation counter 203g are set to initial values (the present value). In the embodiment, it is reset to 0) (S271), and the process proceeds to S222.

In addition, in the processing of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203u is greater than 0 (S272), and the hour/hour is saved. When it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203u is larger than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the time saving middle counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S273), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203u is 0 (S272: No), the process of S273 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223.

Here, the prefetching process 4 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing 4 (S513). The pre-reading process 4 (S513) is a process executed in place of the pre-reading process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment.

Of the prefetch processing 4 (S513) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S601 and S603, the same processing as that of each of S601 and S603 of the prefetch processing (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment is performed. Executed.

Further, in the prefetch process 4 in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S601 that there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a1 right first entrance 64a2 or right second entrance 64b. (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of fluctuation is a probability variation state of the special symbol (S671), and if it is not the probability variation state of the special symbol (S671: No), the low probability time first. The lottery result is acquired based on the per-random number table (S672), and the process proceeds to S674.

On the other hand, in the process of S671, when it is determined that the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol (S671: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S673), The process proceeds to S674. In the process of S674, a winning information command including the respective values of the first winning type counter C2 and the stop type selecting counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, is set based on the lottery result (S674).

After setting the winning information command by the process of S674, it is determined whether or not the winning/absence of the lottery predicted by the process of S672 or S673 is the probability variation jackpot of the special symbol (S675). When the winning/absence of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is the probability variation jackpot of the special symbol (S675: Yes), the prefetching probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON (S676), and this processing is performed. finish. This pre-reading probability changing flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state at the time of execution is a probability changing state. If it is on, it means that the lottery time is the probability changing state. If it is off, the lottery time is It means a low probability state.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning/unwinning of the lottery predicted in the process of S675 is not the probability variation jackpot of the special symbol (S675: No), the winning/unwinning of the lottery predicted in the process of S672 or S673 is the normal jackpot of the special symbol. It is determined (S677). When it is determined that the winning/absence of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is the normal jackpot of the special symbol (S677: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag (not shown) is set to OFF (S678), This process ends. On the other hand, when the winning/absence of the lottery predicted in the process of S672 or S673 is out of the normal of the special symbol (S677: No), the process of S678 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 4. This normal symbol variation process 4 is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment.

In this normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88), in each process of S701 to S714 and S718 to S725, S701 to S714 and S718 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S725 is performed. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol in the process of S714 (S714: Yes), the time saving identification flag. It is determined whether 203x is 0, that is, whether the time saving state is 1 (S771). When it is determined that the identification flag is 1 (time saving state 2) (S771: No), the electric accessory release pattern B is set (S772). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S714 that the time saving state is not set (S714: No), or when it is determined that the identification flag is 0 (time saving state 1) in the process of S771 (S771: Yes), the electric accessory release pattern is set. A is set (S773).

Here, as will be described later in detail, the electric accessory opening pattern A is the electric accessory 701 at a timing when the game ball is guided to the first operating port 704 when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 700. Is an open pattern in which is projected (opened). Therefore, the first operating accessory 645a is opened by the game ball entering the first operating port 704, the game ball easily enters the right first ball inlet 64a2, and the game ball enters the ball. By doing so, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. The setting of the time saving identification flag 203x is performed by the processing of S4106 and S4107 of the ending processing 4 (FIG. 93, S1379) described later at the end of the jackpot game, and the value is 0 or based on the executed jackpot type. 1 is set. As a result, when the jackpot is hit, the hour-shortening identification flag 203x is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, in the probability variation game (time-shortening game) that is subsequently executed depending on the jackpot type, the game ball is placed on the right first entrance 64a2. It can be set by switching between setting to enter the ball and setting to allow the game ball to enter the right second entrance 64b2. Therefore, since the number of rounds in the big hit game is set to be larger in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, even in the same probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state, the probability variation advantageous to the player It is possible to set a probability variation game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state and its probability variation game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S725 ends, then the operation control of the variable flow path 702 is set (S774), and the present process ends. The operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is constant for all the normal symbols, and for 1.5 seconds after the normal symbols are switched, the game balls are guided to the first flow channel. The valve 702 is moved to the left side and controlled so as to block the second flow path 706, and then moved to the right side to block the first flow path 703 and guide the game ball to the second flow path. Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a startup process 4 that is executed instead of the startup process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment will be described. Figure 89. It is a flow chart which shows this starting processing 4. Of the startup processing 4 (see FIG. 89) in the fourth embodiment, each processing of S1001 to S1014 is the same as each processing of S1001 to S1014 of the startup processing (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. In the startup process 4 (see FIG. 89) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S1010 is completed, the variable flow path 702 is initialized and the process proceeds to S1011.

Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 4 (S1105). This jackpot control process 4 (S1105) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, and opening of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. Alternatively, it is a process for closing.

In the jackpot control process 4, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), it is not necessary to control the big hit, and thus the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the big hit start timing (S1371). When it is determined in the process of S1371 that it is the big hit start timing (S1371: Yes), the opening command is set (S1372), and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S1371, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S1371: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1374). When it is determined in the process of S1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1374: Yes), the setting of the opening/closing operation of the first specific winning opening 64a and the setting of the switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k are performed. The jackpot operation setting process 4 is performed in order to perform (S1375), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375) will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1374 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1374: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376). ).

In the processing of S1376, when it is determined that it is the timing of the switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376: Yes), the state of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (S1377), and the main The process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1376, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376: No), it is then determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1378). ).

In the process of S1378, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1378: Yes), the ending process 4 is executed (S1379), and the present process is ended. Details of ending process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

In the process of S1378, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1378: No), the winning process 4 is executed (S1380), the abnormal process 4 is executed (S1381), and the present process is ended. The winning process 4 and the abnormal process 4 are the same as the winning process (see FIG. 56) and the abnormal process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, respectively. Since the contents are as described above in the description of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375 in FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 91. In the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S4001). The switching operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S4001 (S4002). Then, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S4001 (S4003). Then, this process is completed.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

Next, details of ending processing 4 (S1379 of FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process 4 (S1379). In ending processing 4 (S1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF (S4102), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203s is ON (S4103). When it is determined in the process of S4103 that the probability variation setting flag 203s is on (S4103: Yes), the probability variation counter 203g is set to 100 (S4104). Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203s is configured to be turned off based on the probability variation counter 203g being set to 100. Then, the process proceeds to S4105.

On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203s is not on (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed was a jackpot game based on any of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (S4105). When it is determined in the process of S4105 that one of the big hits A, C, E, or G has been made (S4105: Yes), the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4108.

On the other hand, in the process of S4105, when it is determined that none of the big hits A, C, E, G (S4105: No), the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 1 (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4108. To do.

By the process of S4106 or S4107, the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 or 1, so that the opening pattern of the electric accessory set in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) is switched.

When the process of S4106 or S4107 is completed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203u is set to 100 (S4108), and the present process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state (probability variation game state or time saving game state) is given, the type of the time saving state set by the jackpot type is set to be different. As a result, in the time saving state executed after the big hit game, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 700, the game ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. It is possible to switch the setting, and it is possible to set whether to enter the game ball into the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b according to the jackpot type. Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to switch whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the lottery is executed with the second special symbol, and the player is selected by lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By setting different advantages to be given to, it is possible to change the size of the privilege given to the player depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the probability of probability change, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of shortened times, the variation time, etc. are the first special symbol. The privilege may be set differently by changing the setting with the second special symbol. Further, by adopting the configuration of the present embodiment, even in the probability variation game state of the same jackpot probability, depending on the type of the time saving state to be given, the type of the special symbol that changes during the time saving (during the probability variation) is switched. It is possible to change the benefit that the player can receive in the probability variation game state. Therefore, it is possible to set a probability variation gaming state in which a plurality of granted benefits are different. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type to be guided to the probability variation switch 65e3 is set to be larger in the hit type of the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, so that a plurality of probability variation ratios can be set. Therefore, the probability change rate can be changed depending on the time saving state, and the player can be provided with a fresh game.

<Regarding Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows command determination processing 4 (S1671) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113, instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart. The command determination process 4 (S1671) is a process for determining the command received from the main control device 110.

The command determination process 4 (see FIG. 93) of the fourth embodiment is different only in that the processes of S1713 to S1718 in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment are deleted. The other processes are the same as the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and thus the details thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage is different depending on whether the jackpot is the big hit by the lottery for the first special symbol and the big jackpot is drawn by the lottery for the second special symbol. It is structured so that the player who wins the big prize in the lottery of the two special symbols becomes advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, that is, a time saving state 1 and a time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving states provided after the jackpot. Time saving state 1 is a time saving state in which a lottery for the first special symbol is easily performed (a ball easily enters the right first entrance 64a2), and time saving state 2 is a lottery for the second special symbol. Is easily executed (the ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b), which is a short time state. More specifically, in the time saving state 1, when a hit occurs, electric power is applied at a timing when the ball is likely to enter the first operation port 704 in the distribution winning apparatus 700 (the first operation accessory 645a is easily opened). The accessory 701 is released. Therefore, by making a right hit in the time saving state 1, the ball easily enters the right first entrance 64a1, and thus the first special symbol lottery is easily executed. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2, when the hit is achieved, the electric winning component 701 is likely to enter the second actuation opening 707 inside the sorting prize winning device 700 (the second actuation accessory 645b is easily opened). Is released. Therefore, by making a right hit in the time saving state 2, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right second entrance port 64b, and thus the lottery for the second special symbol is facilitated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability variation switch 65e3 is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and by changing the internal flow path, a jackpot type in which a ball can (easily) pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during a jackpot, A jackpot type in which a ball cannot pass (difficult) through the probability change switch 65e3 is provided. Then, depending on whether it is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, by changing the proportion of the big hit type that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability of the special symbol is changed. It is configured to change the ratio of transition to. In other words, the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol is easier to shift to the probability change state than the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the ball that has entered the distribution prize device 700 has which working port (first More attention can be paid to whether to enter the actuation port 704 or the second actuation port 707). Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the time saving state, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided in the probability variation state. That is, the probability variation state 1 in which the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed and the probability variation state 2 in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed are provided. The rate of transition to the probability variation state is different depending on whether it is a lottery for the first special symbol or a lottery for the second special symbol, and a plurality of probability variation states with different degrees of advantage for the probability variation state to be given. Is provided, it is possible to play a game aiming at a better condition. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 101 and FIG. 133. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 13, and the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. It was configured to give a probability change state after the jackpot.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different in that the first variable winning device 65 is deleted. The same components as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 133, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment executes a game (hereinafter, referred to as a normal game) aiming at the first entrance 64a1 in a normal game state. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won is executed. Also, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, there is a high probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the jackpot game is over, and furthermore, the probability variation game state (hereinafter, probability change state) that makes it easy to receive the lottery for the special map, or The probability of being a big hit does not change, but a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a lottery for special maps is given.

Here, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state, and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is provided. Moreover, the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is 1 or after the jackpot game is over). The number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game of the number of times is easy to transition to a gaming state where it is easy to win the jackpot)) is set.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game and the probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. As a result, for example, the ratio of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (it is easy to enter the probability variation state 1), and it is easier for the player to experience the game state (probability variation state) that is more likely to be hit than the normal game. As a result, it is possible to easily experience the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game effect or the probability variation state, and to entertain the game, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability variation state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has transitioned to the probability changing state 2 with a sense of superiority, and to improve the interest of the game for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, even in the time saving state, the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set similarly to the above-described probability variation state, and both of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are more than the normal game. A gaming state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (balls are easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special drawing in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time saving state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is substantially configured to execute the lottery of the special figure 2. Is set as a more advantageous game state for the player.

A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation states, and the time saving state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time saving states.

Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the jackpot game is over, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display device unit 80) is Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched to the right side area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and the vicinity of the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67 is reached. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. The electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and when the electric prize 710 is in an open state, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700. The electric accessory 710 is opened when the result of the lottery for ordinary symbols (general symbol lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 is successful. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 is different.

The detailed description is omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. 81 of the fourth embodiment described above, but the configuration inside the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the result of the universal drawing lottery that the winning (per the universal drawing) is won, and the first operation is performed depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate with each other as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second flow path 706 communicates with each other during the period from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after being won per universal figure (2 seconds). Thus, the switching valve 702 operates, and during the other periods, the first flow path 703 operates so as to communicate with each other.

A first operation port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow channel 703, while a second operation port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow channel 706, and each flow channel is The ball that has flowed down enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 133, the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 707 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 133, the first operating port 704 is connected to the first operating accessory 645a provided below the right side region of the game board 13 by the first operating mechanism 705, and enters the first operating port 704. By pressing the first contact piece provided on the one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up by the sphere. It is configured to come into contact with the operating accessory 645a and open the first operating accessory 645a.

Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 is ready to enter. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed similarly to the case of the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball is placed on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first actuation accessory 645a is closed.

As described above, a mechanism for changing the accessory to the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical structure is a known technique called a non-electric accessory. In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the configuration of the non-electric accessory is omitted, but any technology that has already been disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 similarly to the configuration of the above-mentioned non-electric auditors member, so that The second working accessory 645b is opened. By the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b which can enter the ball when the second actuating member 645b is opened, the lottery of the special map 2 which is set more advantageously than the special FIG. Executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory including the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the above-described first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating mechanism 705 are provided. Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electrical accessory that is composed of the working accessory 645a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, the second flow path 706 is provided only for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the switching valve 702 is elected per universal figure. The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during a period other than that (including a period in which a general figure is not elected) is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second actuating object 645b, the special figure 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. This is because.

Returning to FIG. 133, the description of the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b is ready to be entered by the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700, the game board 13 of the game board 13 does not enter the distribution winning apparatus 700. The ball that has flowed down the right side region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the ball entry ports that are ready to enter.

In this way, in the gaming state where the right-handed game is executed (probably changed state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

A switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700. The switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to a position where the second flow path is in communication for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have elapsed after winning the prize. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is performed with a constant operation regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

Next, the flow of balls entering the distribution prize winning device 700 for each electric role opening pattern will be described. First, when the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period in which the ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 is 1 second from the start of the game. The balls that enter during this period reach the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed, as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in the state where the first flow passage 1644 is in communication, so the ball is guided to the first flow passage 1644. As described above, while the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball entering the distribution winning apparatus 700 is guided to the first flow path 703 and enters the first operating port 704. As a result, the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. That is, when the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), the gaming state (time saving state 1, probability changing state 1) in which Toku-zu 1 is substantially changed in the time saving state or the probability changing state is Will be set. In the opening pattern A, the electric accessory 701 is released for 0.1 seconds after 1.5 seconds have passed after the big hit, but the opening for 0.1 seconds is a difficult interval for the ball to enter. And there is almost no ball coming in. In the unlikely event that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700, the ball will enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern B described later.

Next, when the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period in which the ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 is 1 second after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game. .. The balls that enter during this period reach the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed, as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is positioned in the state where the second flow passage 706 is in communication, so the ball is guided to the second flow passage 706. As described above, while the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the balls that enter the sorting prize winning device 700 are guided to the second flow path 706 and enter the second operating port 707. It acts to make a ball, so that the ball can enter the right second ball inlet 64b. That is, when the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory), the gaming state (time saving state 2, probability changing state 2) in which Toku-zu 2 is substantially changed in the time saving state or the probability changing state is Will be set. In the opening pattern B, the electric accessory 701 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the jackpot is won, but the opening for 0.1 seconds is a difficult interval for the balls to enter, and almost all the balls enter. There is no ball. In the unlikely event that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 during this period, the ball will enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 at the same timing as the above-described opening pattern A, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the ball entered in the opening pattern B is surely guided so that the ball entered in the opening pattern A is surely guided to the first flow path 703. The operation is performed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. As a result, it becomes possible to guide a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball moves from the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the universal figure is set to 3 seconds in a state where the variation time of the universal figure is shortened (time saving state, probability variation state). Therefore, in the state where the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, in order to reliably guide the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning apparatus 700 to the second flow path, the switching valve 702 is started from the normal position. Even if the second flow path is placed in communication for 3 seconds after the lapse of 1.5 seconds, the first flow path will be in communication by the time the game is executed again after the next universal figure change. Since it can be positioned, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 is guided to an unintended flow path over a plurality of times of a game per game.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory) is settable based on the jackpot type, and the set opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory) is set. Based on, it is possible to set a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially changes and a game state in which the special figure 2 substantially changes. In addition, the bonuses that are more advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 2 lottery are more than those when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 1 lottery. It is set that the ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed is high) is given.

As a result, the time saving state and the probability variation state are further advantageous to the game state (time saving state 2, probability variation state 2), and the player is more advantageous than the advantageous game state but is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variation state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, by setting a high transition ratio for shifting from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability changing state 1, the player can easily see the effect executed in the time saving state or the probability changing state. It is possible to give a superior feeling to the player who has transitioned to the probability variation state 2 by setting a low transition rate to transition to the probability variation state 2 which is the most advantageous game state for the player. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, two types of opening patterns A and B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the types of opening patterns can be changed. You may comprise so that 3 or more types can be set. As a result, it becomes possible to set more various game states.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern that guides the sphere to the second flow path 706 as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory). Although the pattern (opening pattern B) is set, for example, an opening pattern is provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. Is also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the sphere entering the electric accessory 701 guides, further improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is configured to enter any one of the operating ports (the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). , Out which is connected to the discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without providing a flow path for discharging again from the sorting prize winning device 700 to the game board 13 or entering each operation opening. A flow path for entering the mouth may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in the flow of the balls in the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the switching valve 702 is configured such that a predetermined constant operation is performed after the hit game is executed, but for example, a constant operation is always performed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It may be configured to be opened, or may be configured to switch the communicating flow paths when the number of balls entered into the distribution winning apparatus 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

In the fifth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). However, for example, the switching valve 702, which is a switching member, is actuated by contact of a ball, and a predetermined condition (for example, It may be configured such that the communicating flow path is switched when 10 balls are passed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the sphere guided to any one of the flow passages by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow passage and enter any one of the operation ports. A distribution member that distributes a sphere guided to any of the flow paths by 702 to a plurality of flow paths is provided, and the sphere distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member enters the corresponding working port. You may.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a fixed time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As a means for varying (extending) the time for a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 to reach the switching valve 702, a period until the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is set. It is also possible to provide a plurality of different routes and to provide a distribution unit that distributes a ball entering the distribution winning apparatus 700 to one of the routes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player, who can play a game while predicting when the ball entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 will reach the switching valve 702, from getting tired of the game early. The effect is that you can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the transition of the game state in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 95, the pachinko machine 10 wins a normal gaming state, a probability variation state 1 (inconvenient probability variation), a probability variation state 2 (advantageous probability variation), a time saving state 1 (disadvantageous time saving) and a time saving state 2 (advantageous time saving). It is configured to shift based on the jackpot type.

First, in the normal game state, the game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed, and when the big hit is won, 50% shifts to the probability variation state 1, 30% shifts to the probability variation state 2, and 15% shifts to the time saving state 1. To 5%, and 5% will move to the time saving state 2.

Next, in the probability variation state 1, the opening pattern A is set as the electric power combination opening pattern, so that the game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (the actual variation of the special figure 1). In the probability variation state 1, when the jackpot is won, the probability variation state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% shifts to the probability variation state 2, 15% shifts to the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. In this way, the probability variation state 1 is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates like the normal gaming state, so the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal gaming state, but the game after the jackpot is won. The state transition destination and its distribution are the same.

Since the opening pattern B is set as the electric power releasing pattern in the probability variation state 2, the game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (special figure 2 actual variation). In the probability variation state 2, when the jackpot is won, the probability variation state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% shifts to the time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 1. In this way, the probability variation state 2 is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the jackpot probability is set to be higher than the normal gaming state, so the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player Becomes

Next, in the time saving state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric-role combination opening pattern, the game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 actual fluctuation). If the big hit is won in the time saving state 1, 50% will shift to the probability variation state 1, 30% will shift to the probability variation state 2, 15% will loop the time reduction state 1, and 5% will shift to the time reduction state 2. In this way, the time saving state 1 is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates as in the normal gaming state, so the variation time of the special figure and the general figure is shortened, and the electric accessory 701 when the general figure hits Although the opening pattern is different from the normal gaming state, the destination and distribution of the gaming state after jackpot winning are the same.

In the time saving state 2, the opening pattern B is set as the electric-role combination opening pattern, so that the game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (special figure 2 actual variation). If the big hit is won in the time saving state 2, 80% will shift to the probability variation state 2, 15% will loop the time saving state 2, and 5% will shift to the time saving state 1. In this way, the time saving state 2 is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the probability of shifting to the probability variation state 2 which is most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won is the normal gaming state. It is a gaming state that is set to 2.5 times or more (so-called pullback zone). By providing such a game state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player shifts to the most advantageous game state (probability variation state 2) than the normal game state, and to make the player enthusiastically play the game. There is an effect that can be.

The game state transition destination after jackpot in each game state set in the fifth embodiment and the transition distribution ratio may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time saving state that shifts from the normal gaming state may be only the time saving state 2. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation of the player who has not been able to shift to the probable variation state although he or she has won the jackpot in the normal game state.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the destination of the game state and the distribution ratio are unified according to the type of special figure regardless of the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state according to the game state is changed. The transfer destination and the transfer distribution ratio may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game play, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state continues until the next big hit, and the configuration is such that ten times are shortened regardless of the gaming state as a time saving state, but for example, the probability variation state is a predetermined variable symbol display. It is designed to continue until it is executed a number of times (for example, 100 times), or by executing a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special map changes, and winning the lottery from the probability variation state to the normal game state. You may make it the structure which transfers. In this case, as a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous probability variation state, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that terminates the probability variation state, or the probability of transition from the probability variation state to the normal game state is made different. You may choose to do so.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 95, the fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the accessory motor 270 is deleted.

First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, and a special There are a symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, a big hit flag 203i, a probability variation flag 203r, a time saving counter 203r, a power combination release pattern storage area 203y, and another memory area 203z. doing.

Special symbol 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserve sphere counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserve sphere counter 203e, normal symbol reserve sphere number counter Since 203f, the big hit flag 203i, the probability variation flag 203r, and the other memory area 203z are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the time saving counter 203r is also the same as that provided in the RAM 203 of the second and fourth embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power combination release pattern storage area 203y is an area for storing the power combination release pattern stored in the power combination release pattern table 202de. The electric accessory 701 is moved based on the electric-role opening pattern stored in the electric-role opening pattern storage area 203y.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 97, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per random number table 202a, a first per random type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and an electric power release pattern table 202de. ing. The tables other than the first winning type selection table 202b and the electric power release pattern table 202de are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although not shown in the drawing, the electric role releasing pattern table 202de is a storage area in which an operation pattern (electric role releasing pattern) for moving the electric accessory 701 is stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 which compose the first hit type selection table 202b will be described. FIG. 98(b) is a diagram showing the details of the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 that is referred to when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), in the toku-zu 1 type selection table 202b1 of the present embodiment, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit type is "big hit A". Are associated with. This “big hit A” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, the probability variation state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric-role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”, “big hit B” is associated as the big hit type. The “big hit B” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, the definite change state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 94”, “big hit C” is associated as the big hit type. The "big hit C" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, only the time saving state of 10 times is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric-role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated as the big hit type. The “big hit D” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, and only the time saving state of 10 times is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric-role opening pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98(b), the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 that is referred to when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 98(b), in the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 of the present embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 74", and the big hit type is "big hit E". Are associated with. The "big hit E" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 15, the certainty variation state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric-role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 79", "big hit F" is associated as the big hit type. The "big hit F" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two, the definite change state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric hand opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 84”, “big hit C” is associated as the big hit type. When the "big hit C" is obtained in the lottery for the second special symbol, the number of rounds is 4 and only the time saving state of 7 times is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric hand opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated as the big hit type. When the “special jackpot D” is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of rounds is four, and only the time saving state of seven times is given after the jackpot, and the open pattern B is set as the electric power combination releasing pattern.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 99 to 100.

First, with reference to FIG. 99, the special symbol variation process 5 (S164) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 5 (S164). This special symbol variation process 4 (S164) is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the fourth embodiment, and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, it is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation process 5 (S164) in the fifth embodiment, in contrast to the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the above-described fourth embodiment, the subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203g is not performed, the electric combination The difference is that the open pattern storage area is set, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 5 (S164), similarly to the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86), the processes of S201 to S217 are executed. When it is determined in the process of S217 that the result of the lottery this time is a big hit (S217: Yes), the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S218), and the number of rounds corresponding to the big hit type is set in the round counter. The round start flag is set to ON (S281) and the round start flag is set to ON (S282). Then, the big hit start is set (S220), the hour and hour counter 203r is reset to 0 (S283), the electric-role opening pattern storage area 203y is cleared (S284), and the process proceeds to S222.

On the other hand, in the processing of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is larger than 0 (S272). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203r is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S213), and the process proceeds to S282.

In the processing of S272, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203r is 0 (S272: No), the electric power releasing pattern A is stored in the electric power releasing pattern storage area 203y (S285), and this processing is performed. To finish. As described above, in the case of the electric role opening pattern A, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is guided to the first operating port 704. That is, the game ball enters the right first ball inlet 64a2, and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (FIG. 100, S208) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (S208). This special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (S208), the special pattern 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14) in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state The difference is that the variation pattern is selected based on the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (S208), similar to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S301 to S305 are executed. In the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of place (S305: No), the outlying display mode is set (S308), and out of the variation pattern table corresponding to the current game state. The variation pattern is determined (S381), and the process proceeds to S310.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table and the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the variation pattern is determined based on the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table and the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the gaming state is the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the time saving state. Thereby, it is possible to set a variation pattern according to the gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, details of the special symbol 1 variation start process 5 (FIG. 101, S213) will be described. 101 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process 5 (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process 5 (S213), the special pattern 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), variation pattern table corresponding to the game state The difference is that the variation pattern is selected based on the above, and the other points are the same. The same portions will be denoted by the same reference numerals, detailed description thereof will be omitted, and the differences are the same as the special symbol 2 variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 100) described above. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the prefetch process 5 (S513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S513). In the pre-reading process 5 (see FIG. 102), in each process of S601 and good S672, the same process as the pre-reading process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment is executed.

Further, in the prefetching process 5 (see FIG. 102) of the fifth embodiment, when S672 ends, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S681), and this process ends.

In this embodiment, the jackpot determination value (“0”) at the low probability (normal game state) is included in the jackpot determination value (“0-9”) at the high probability (probability variation game state). Therefore, even if the lottery result is prefetched in the normal game state and then the probability variation game state is entered, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the lottery result is changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106). This normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device, and the like. Is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 701 associated with the passage opening 701a.

In this normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103), in each process of S701 to S713 and S718 to S725, S701 to S713 and S718 of the ordinary symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S725 is performed.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103 ), when the process of S713 is completed, then, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set based on the opening pattern stored in the electric-commitment opening pattern storage area 203y. (S781), the process proceeds to S719. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103) of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S725 ends, the operation of the switching valve is set and the present process ends (S782).

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing 5 (S1105). The jackpot control process 5 (S1105) is a process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, for executing various effects according to the jackpot. is there.

In the jackpot control process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), it is not necessary to control the big hit, and thus the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether the round start flag is on (S1381). The mouth (large opening mouth) 65a is opened (S1382), the round start flag is set to OFF (S1383), the round number command indicating a new round to be started is set (S1384), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the round start flag is off in the process of S1381 (S1381: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening is satisfied (S1385), and if it is satisfied (S1385: Yes), The large opening is closed (S1386), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1387), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the condition for closing the large opening is not satisfied (S1385: No), it is determined whether the value of the round counter is 0 (S1388), and if it is 0 (S1388: No), the round start flag is turned on. Is set (S1389), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1388, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is not 0 (S1388), the jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF (S1390), and the electric outlet opening pattern corresponding to the present jackpot type is opened. The data is read from the pattern table 202de and stored in the electric power release pattern storage area 203y (S1391). Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit this time is the probability variation big hit (S1392), and if it is the probability variation big hit (S1392: Yes), the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON (S1393), and this processing ends. .. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1392 that the jackpot is usually a big hit (S1392: No), the probability variation flag 203r is set to OFF (S1394), and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the balls that enter the sorting prize winning device 700 that can enter when the winning is won by the universal drawing lottery are changed by the switching valve 702 to the first flow path 703 or It is distributed to any of the second flow paths 706 and enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. When the balls enter the respective operation ports (704, 707), the corresponding operation accessories (645a, 645b) are opened. When the first actuating member 645a is in the open state, the right first entrance 64a2 can enter, and when the second actuating member 645b is in the open state, the right second entrance 64b can enter. Becomes

Then, depending on the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won by the special drawing lottery, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the sphere to the first flow path 703 as an opening pattern of the slide member (electric role) 710 of the distribution winning apparatus 700. And an open pattern (open pattern B) that guides the sphere to the second flow path 706. That is, the game state in which the special figure 1 substantially changes and the game state in which the special figure 2 substantially changes are set based on the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory) set based on the jackpot type. be able to. In addition, the bonuses that are more advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 2 lottery are more than those when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 1 lottery. It is set that the ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed is high) is given.

As a result, the time saving state and the probability variation state are further advantageous to the game state (time saving state 2, probability variation state 2), and the player is more advantageous than the advantageous game state but is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variation state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, two types of opening patterns A and B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the types of opening patterns can be changed. You may comprise so that 3 or more types can be set. As a result, it becomes possible to set more various game states.

In the fifth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern that guides the sphere to the second flow path 706 are used as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory). Although the pattern (opening pattern B) is set, for example, an opening pattern is provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. Is also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the sphere entering the electric accessory 701 guides, further improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 116. In the sixth embodiment, the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment is used. In the above-described fourth embodiment, a large amount of game value is imparted when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 650a provided in the second variable winning device 650 when a big hit occurs (1 ball. 15 balls are paid out for each prize), and the probability variation game state is given by the balls passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened in a part of the jackpot period. The pachinko machine 10 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a small hit is provided in addition to the big hit as the lottery result of the special symbol, and when the small hit occurs, the specific winning opening 65a provided in the variable winning device 65 The opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be opened/closed. In addition, a specific winning port 650a different from the variable winning a prize device 65a is provided, and the specific winning port 650a is configured to be opened and closed when a big hit occurs. Hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 that allows the game ball to enter when a small hit is called the first variable winning device 65, and the specific winning port 65a provided in the first variable winning device 65 is the first winning prize. The specific winning opening 65a will be called. In addition, the variable winning a prize device 650 which can enter the game ball when it becomes the big hit is called the 2nd variable winning a prize device 650, the specific winning a prize mouth 650 which is provided in the 2nd variable winning a prize device 650 is specified second. It will be referred to as a winning opening 650.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the gaming ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning a prize device 65, so that the probability variation gaming state is given.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 is called a jackpot switch 65e3, and the jackpot is awarded based on the fact that the game ball has passed the jackpot switch 65e3. Configured.

As a result, when a small hit occurs, a game ball can enter the variable winning device 65, and when the game ball passes through the big hit switch 65e3, a big hit is provided. Therefore, even if it is a small hit, a big hit may be given thereafter, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the characteristic game characteristics in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, there are two types of triggers for executing the jackpot game, one is a jackpot executed by winning the jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and another. The result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, and is a big hit executed by the ball passing through the big hit switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game.

In this way, a pachinko game with a game performance in which a jackpot game is executed with two types of triggers, such as a lottery result of a special symbol, and a ball passing through a specific area (big hit switch 65e3) within a specific period (small hit period). The machine 10 is called a type 1 type 2 mixer.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a gaming state (so-called probability variation state (hereinafter, referred to as a probability variation state)) in which the special symbol jackpot probability or the normal symbol hit probability is higher than normal probability After the jackpot game, which does not have, the variation time of the special figure and the universal figure is shortened, and further, the operation of the electric accessory (electric role) 701 is controlled when the jackpot is won as a result of the universal figure lottery. A time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state) is given when the opening pattern is changed.

In the 1-type/2-type mixer configured as described above, for example, the probability of a small hit is set to be higher in the special figure 2 without changing the big hit probability in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. By facilitating the lottery of Toku-zu 2 during the time saving state, it is possible to set the jackpot probability during the time saving state higher than that during the normal game. Furthermore, the jackpot game is further executed by setting the opening pattern of the electric role object (electric role) 701 in the time saving state to be an opening pattern in which it is easier to enter the sorting prize winning device 700 than in the normal game. It is possible to increase the probability.

Further, in the special maps 1 and 2, the opening pattern of the specific door 65f1 when the small hit is won is changed (the ratio of the advantageous opening pattern selected from the predetermined opening patterns is changed to the special map 2 By setting the small hit higher than the small hit in the special figure 1), it is possible to set the probability of executing the big hit game in the time saving state higher than in the normal game state.

As in the above-described fourth embodiment, the time saving state that is provided after the jackpot is completed includes the first time saving state in which the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is substantially executed and the fluctuation of FIG. The second shortened state is set corresponding to the jackpot type at the time of jackpot. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 106(b).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, details will be described with reference to FIG. 106(b), but the jackpot game won by the lottery of the Toku-zu 2 is more advantageous to the player than the Toku-zu 1. A game (a big hit game in which a player can obtain a large number of balls during a big hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to set a more advantageous state (second time saving state) and a disadvantageous state (first time saving state) in the time saving state more advantageous than the normal game state.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to set a plurality of stages of gaming states (normal gaming state, first saving time state, second saving time state) according to the degree of advantage to the player, in the playing state, the player It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

The structure in the distribution prize winning apparatus 700 and the mechanism for operating the first actuating member 645a and the second actuating member 645b are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

Although the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has been described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball passes (is easy to pass) the jackpot switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65. It may be changed depending on the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the opening 65a.

For example, when "small hit A" is selected, the opening (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is set to 1 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the game ball easily wins the first variable winning device 65. Set the release scenario to release for 5 seconds. On the other hand, when "small hit B" is selected, the ball (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is set to 0. 0 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the ball is difficult to win the first variable winning device 65. It suffices to set an opening scenario in which the operation of opening for 1 second is performed three times.

In this way, by changing the opening pattern of the door (attacker) 65f during the small hit game depending on each small hit type, a small hit and a disadvantage advantageous to the player in the small hit game for opening the first variable winning device 650. It is possible to set various small hits and provide a variety of playability.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, as the bonus after the big hit game, the time saving game state is given according to the big hit type, but another benefit may be given as the benefit given after the big hit game. Well, for example, a high probability state in which the special symbol big hit probability or small hit probability is set higher than the normal gaming state may be given for a predetermined period. As the predetermined period in this case, a period until the next big hit is won, a period until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), or a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5) is shifted to the normal game state. It is conceivable that there will be a lottery period until you win the lottery. In addition, as other benefits, the privilege to increase the winning probability of the normal symbol from the normal game state and the opening pattern of each winning device executed in the big hit game and the small hit game are changed to an open pattern advantageous to the player. Benefits etc. can be considered.

<Regarding electrical configuration in sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 119. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 106(a), a jackpot determination value is defined corresponding to the symbol type and the value of the first random number counter C1. Specifically, when the symbol type is special figure 1, it is determined to be a big hit when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0", and it is determined to be out of the case when the value is any other value.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is special figure 2, it is determined as a big hit when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and is small when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “1 to 399”. It is judged as a hit. In this way, the special figure 1 is not judged to be a small hit, and the special figure 2 is not judged to be out of position.

Next, the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 106(b), in the first hit type selection table 202b, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is determined as the determination value of the big hit A in correspondence with Toku-zu 1 of the big hit B. "50 to 99" is set as the determination value. In addition, corresponding to the special figure 2, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit C, and “50 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit D. The details of the jackpot C and the jackpot D will be described later, but they are also referred to when the jackpot type is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed by the ball passing through the jackpot switch 65e3.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot game is started, the opening/closing 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large amount of prize balls is obtained by inserting the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a. The game is played. In addition, a time saving game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished is given according to the jackpot type.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for four rounds (4R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the hour-shortening state 1 (electric role releasing pattern A is set as the hour-shortening state. The time saving state) is given until the special figure changes 100 times (100 times saving).

When the jackpot B is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for four rounds (4R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the hour-shortening state 2 (electric role releasing pattern B is set as the hour-shortening state). The time saving state) is given until the special figure changes 100 times (100 times saving).

When the jackpot C is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the hour-shortening state 1 (electricity-role opening pattern A is set as the hour-shortening state. The time saving state) is given until the special figure changes 100 times (100 times saving).

When the jackpot D is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the hour-short state 2 (electric role releasing pattern B is set as the hour-short state). The time saving state) is given until the special figure changes 100 times (100 times saving).

Next, the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 106(c), when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is "5 to 204", it is determined to be a winning.

In the electric role release pattern table 202ea, an open pattern A and an open pattern B are set as in the above-described fourth embodiment. Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first small hit type selection table 202eb will be described with reference to FIG. 106(d). As shown in FIG. 106(d), the first small hit type selection table 202eb is a table in which the relationship between the value of the first small hit type counter value C2 and the selected small hit is defined.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the small hit A is selected. In this small hit A, the number of rounds is one, the opening time of the attacker (the first specific winning opening 65a) is 1.5 seconds, and the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a passes the big hit. By passing through the switch 65e3, the jackpot C is a jackpot.

On the other hand, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit B is selected when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”. In this small hit B, the number of rounds is one, the opening time of the attacker (the first specific winning opening 65a) is 1.5 seconds, and the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a passes the big hit. A big hit D is given by passing through the switch 65e3.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 116, a description will be given of differences in the control processing of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment from the control processing of the main control device 110 in the above-described fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above executes processing capable of providing a probability variation state, but the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment does not have a probability variation state, and the hit type of the special figure. The difference is that the small hit is added as, and the control related to the small hit is added.

Specifically, in place of the special symbol variation process 4, a special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 107) is executed. Instead of the normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 108) is executed. In that point, the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 111) is executed instead of the big hit control process 4 in the main process (see FIG. 110), and the small hit control process (see FIG. 113) is added. Be different. The other configurations are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. The special symbol variation process 6 in the sixth embodiment is different from the special symbol variation process 4 in the fourth embodiment in that the processes of S291 to S296 are added and that some processes are deleted. There is. The other processes are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 6 is executed, the processes of S201 to S217 are executed similarly to the special symbol variation process 4. When it is determined that the lottery this time is a big hit in the process of S217 (S217: Yes), the opening flag 203v is set to ON (S241), the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S220), and the time saving medium counter is set. 203u is reset to 0 (S292), and the process proceeds to S222.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not the big hit (S217: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is the small hit (S293). When it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a small hit in the process of S293 (S293: Yes), a small hit setting process is executed (S294). A detailed description of this small hitting setting process will be given later with reference to FIG. 108.

When the process of S294 ends, or in the process of S293, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S293: No), then similarly to the special symbol variation process 4, S272, S273. The process of is executed. After the processing of S273 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr is 0 (S295), and when it is determined that the value of the counter is 0 (S295: Yes), the electric power release pattern is stored. The open pattern A is stored in the area 203ee, and the process proceeds to S282 described above. Further, in the processing of S295, when it is determined that the value of the counter is not 0, the processing of S245 is skipped and the above-described processing of S282 is performed. Then, when the processing ends in S282, the present processing ends.

Next, the small hitting setting process (S294) will be described with reference to FIG. When the small hit setting process is executed, first, the small hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table (S4501), and the opening scenario is set based on the small hit type (S4502). After that, the small hit flag 203ed is set to ON (S4503), and the small hit opening flag 203ec is set to ON. Then, the V-jumping big hit type is set according to the small hit type (S4505), and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the normal symbol variation process 6 (S106) will be described. This normal symbol variation process 6 is different from the normal symbol variation process 3 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that the process related to the high probability state (probability variation state) of the ordinary symbol is deleted, and the details of the detailed operation control are changed. The difference is the point, and the other configurations are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal symbol variation process 6 (S106) is executed, the processes of S701 to S707 are executed similarly to the normal symbol variation process 3. When the process of S707 is finished, then, a lottery result based on the normal symbol per random number table (second per random number table) 202c is acquired (S791). With reference to the lottery result acquired in the process of S791, the processes of S712 to S715, S717 and S718 are executed similarly to the normal symbol variation process 3.

In the processing of S715, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the big hit (S715: No), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are next based on the table stored in the electric accessory release pattern storage area 203ee. To set (S792). When the process of S792 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the present time is shortening (S719). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr is greater than 0. If it is determined that the present time is shortening in the processing of S719 (S719: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S719, when it is determined that the present is not in the time saving (S719: No), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds (S721), and this processing is ended.

Further, in the process of S702 executed in the normal symbol variation process 6 of FIG. 123, if it is determined that the normal symbol is currently changing (S702: Yes), then it is determined whether the variation time has elapsed. Yes (S722). When it is determined in the process of S722 that the variable time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S722, when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (S722: Yes), the processes of S723 to S725 are executed similarly to the normal symbol variation process 3, and the operation of the switching valve 702 is set ( S793), and this processing ends.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment does not have the probability changing function, the hit probability of the general figure cannot be changed. Therefore, a large difference is provided in the variation time of the universal figure between the normal game state and the time saving game state (180 seconds in the normal game state and 3 seconds in the time saving state), and by changing the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701. The game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the main process 6 executed by the main controller 110 of the sixth embodiment will be described. The main processing 6 of the sixth embodiment differs from the main processing 5 of the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the big hit control processing 3 are changed and that the small hit control processing (S1191) is added. The other configurations are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 6 is executed, the processes of S1161 to S1165 are executed similarly to the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot control process 5 is executed in the process of S1165, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

After finishing the process of S1165, a small hit control process is then executed (S1191). This small hit control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 112. When the process of S1191 ends, the processes of S1166 to S1176 are executed similarly to the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment, and the present process ends.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1165) executed in the main process 6 (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. When the big hit control process 5 (S1165) is executed, first, it is determined whether the opening flag 203v is on (S1391). When it is determined that the opening flag 203v is turned on in the process of S1391 (S1391: Yes), the opening flag 203v is turned off (S1392), the opening command is set (S1372), and the jackpot type is dealt with. An opening pattern is set (S1393), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening flag is not on in the process of S1391 (S1391: No), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203eb is on (S1301). When it is determined in S1301 that the jackpot flag is not on (S1301: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203eb is on (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the opening operation timing (S1394). If it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S1394: Yes), the opening solenoid is set to ON to open the second variable winning a prize device 650 (S1395), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1394, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1394: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1378), and it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing. In the case (S1378: Yes), the ending process 6 is executed (S1379). If it is determined in S1378 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1378: No), or if the process of S1379 ends, this process ends.

Next, the ending process 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In this ending process, the processes of S4101 to S4195 are executed as shown in FIG. 112, and the gaming state (whether or not the time saving state is given) and the opening pattern of the electric role are set after the jackpot is over.

Specifically, it is determined according to the regulation contents set corresponding to each jackpot type in the first hit type selection table 202b. For example, when the jackpot this time is the jackpot A in the special FIG. Is set to 100 (S4193), and pattern A is set as the electric power release pattern (S4194).

In this way, it is configured to be able to set the electric power release pattern during the time saving state and during the time saving state based on the specified contents (whether there is time, electric power opening pattern) set corresponding to the jackpot type. It becomes possible to easily set the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2 during the time saving state.

Next, the small hitting control process (S1191) executed in the main process 6 (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The small hit control process (S1191) is a process for controlling from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit, and in particular, the ball passes through the big hit switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit. It is characterized by the control that gives the big hit game given by the end of the small hit game.

When the small hit control process (S1191) is executed, the processes of S4601 to S4611 are executed as shown in FIG. 113, and thereafter, the same process as the abnormal process 4 executed in the fourth embodiment is executed. .. Specifically, the same processing as S1061 to S1670 shown in FIG. 89 is executed, and instead of the processing of S1671, the winning number counter 203t2 and the discharging number counter 203t8 are reset, and this processing is ended.

In the above-mentioned small hit control processing (S1191), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened at a predetermined timing (for example, 0.2 seconds after the small hit is started) (S4605 and S4606). Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the opening/closing door 65f1 was opened (as a period required for a ball entering the first variable winning device 65 to reach the flow path switching member 65h, for example, a small hit is started. 0.5 seconds after the start), the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to ON in order to operate the flow passage switching member 65h provided in the first variable winning device 65 to switch the flow passage (S4607 to S4608). ..

In this way, by performing the operation control of the various devices (the opening/closing door 65f1, the flow path switching member 65h) that is executed during the small hit in a series of control, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error in the operation timing of the various devices. It becomes possible to provide a proper small hit game. It should be noted that various operation controls executed by this small hit control are defined in one release scenario, and the release scenario is updated by a counter that is counted in a fixed cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds). You may comprise so that various operation controls may be performed based on the content. With this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the error in the timing when various operation controls are executed.

Next, the small hit winning process (S4611) executed in the above-described small hit control process (S1191) will be described with reference to FIG. 114. This small hit winning process (S4611) is a process for executing various processes based on a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit period. Regarding specific contents, the same process as the winning process 3 (S1270 in FIG. 88) executed in the fourth embodiment described above is executed. The difference between the small hit winning process (S4611) and the winning process 3 (S1270) is that in the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the big hit game and provided in the first variable winning device 65. In the sixth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the small hit and the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the small hit, while the positive change is given by the ball passing through the positive change switch 65e3 which is the specific area. Since the jackpot is provided by the ball passing through the jackpot switch 65e3, which is a specific area provided in the variable winning device 65, the names of various components are changed as shown in FIG. 114. is there.

When the small hit prize winning process S4611 is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4721 are executed as shown in FIG. 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the V-passing jackpot setting process (S4711) will be described. When this V passing jackpot setting processing (S4711) is executed, the jackpot type is first determined based on the V passing jackpot type value B1 (S4801), and then the open scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S4802). .. As a result, the big hit is executed after the small hit ends.

Next, the small hit winning completion process (S4721) will be described with reference to FIG. When this small hit winning completion process (S4721) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit setting flag 203β2 is on (S4901). When it is determined that the big hit setting flag 203β2 is on in the process of S4901 (S4901: Yes), the big hit flag 203eb is turned on (S4902), and the opening flag 203v is turned on (S4903). , S4904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the jackpot setting flag 203β2 is set to OFF, the process proceeds to S4904. In S4904, the jackpot type value at the time of V passage is cleared, and this processing ends.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. In the above-described fourth embodiment, a plurality of time-saving states having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided as the time-saving states provided when the jackpot is won. That is, when the jackpot is a jackpot type, it is difficult to select the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (probability variation state 1), and when the jackpot is the jackpot type, which is advantageous to the player and is easily selected, the jackpot type 2 ( Probability change state 2) was provided. By diversifying the game state by these multiple time saving states, the player's interest was improved.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, not only the advantageous degree of each time saving state is changed, but also the time saving period of the time saving state given according to the game state when a big hit is made different. As a result, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the short-time period will continue for a long time can be varied depending on the game state, so that the time-short period provided can be predicted in consideration of the game state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , And a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 117, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 117A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 117A, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment, a time saving number selection table 202h is provided. The time saving number selection table 202h is a data table for selecting a time saving number according to a game state as a time saving state of a normal symbol which is set after the end of the big hit when the special symbol becomes a big hit. The time saving number selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b).

FIG. 117(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hour/hour count selection table 202h. As shown in FIG. 117(b), the hour/short time count selection table 202h is associated with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the hour/short period of the normal symbol to be given after the jackpot is defined.

Specifically, when the winning jackpot is one of the jackpots A and B, and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state (non-probable variation non-shortening state), 50 times is set as the shorting period. That is, in the case of the jackpot A, the time saving state 1 of 50 times is set after the jackpot is finished, and basically (if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot), the probability state of the special symbol is given 100 times. To be done. In other words, the probability variation state 1 is 50 times after the jackpot A ends, and the probability variation non-time saving state (latency probability variation state) is 51 times to 100 times. When the latent probability changes, it is difficult to hit the normal pattern, and it is easy to lose balls. Therefore, there is a disadvantage in comparison with the probability variation state 1, so that the player can play the game in the hope that the player will be a big hit again during the probability variation state 1. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the game. Also, in the case of the big hit B, the time saving state 2 of 50 times is set after the big hit is ended, and basically (provided that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed during the big hit), the probability change state of the special symbol is given 100 times. It In other words, 50 times after the big hit B ends, the probability variation state 2 is reached, and from 51 times to 100 times, the probability variation non-time saving state (latent latency variation state) is achieved. In the latent probability variation state, it is difficult to normally hit the symbol, and even if it hits, the opening pattern A is set (the opening pattern in which it is easy to enter the first operating port 704), so the probability variation state is set. It is disadvantageous compared to 2. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater sense of tension to the game once to 50 times after the jackpot B is over.

When the jackpot A or the jackpot B is won in the latent probability variation state (probability variation non-time saving state), the time saving state is given 100 times. That is, in the case of the big hit A, the probability variation state 1 is basically given 100 times, and in the case of the big hit B, the probability variation state 2 is basically given 100 times. Therefore, since it does not switch to the latent probability change state, the game can be played with confidence until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which a long time and a short period are selected in the latent probability changing state, it is possible to reduce the disappointment for switching from the probability changing state 1 or the probability changing state 2 to the latent probability changing state, and to hit the jackpot A or the jackpot during the latent probability changing state. You can make B want to win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game in the latent probability change state.

When the big hit A or the big hit B is won in the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2 (non-probably variable time saving state), the time saving state is given 30 times. Therefore, in the case of the big hit A, the probability variation state 1 of 30 times is switched to the latent probability variation state of 70 times. In the case of the big hit B, the probability variation state 2 of 30 times is switched to the latent probability variation state of 70 times.

When the jackpot A or the jackpot B is won in the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2 (probability variation time saving state), the time saving state is given 20 times. Therefore, in the case of the big hit A, the probability variation state 1 of 20 times is switched to the latent probability variation state of 80 times. Further, in the case of the big hit B, the probability variation state 2 of 20 times is switched to the latent probability variation state of 80 times.

Further, even when the jackpots C and D are won, the distribution of the number of shortened times is changed according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the normal state (non-probable variation non-time saving state), when one of the big hits C and D is achieved, 100 time saving periods are provided. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, the time saving state 1 is given 100 times, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving state 2 is given 100 times. The reason why the relatively long time period is set in the normal state is to prevent excessive disadvantage to the player. That is, in the normal state, which is most unfavorable to the player, the jackpot that the probability variation state is not given, and when it is shortened to the short time period, the player's motivation for the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from decreasing by setting a relatively long time period.

Similarly, when the jackpots C and D are won in the latent probability variation state (probability variation non-time saving state), no time saving period is given. That is, it shifts to the most unfavorable normal state. As described above, when the big hits A and B occur in the latent probability change state, a relatively long (100 times) short time period is selected. On the other hand, in the jackpots C and D, the state shifts to the most unfavorable normal state. Therefore, in the latent latent variation state, the degree of advantage of the player greatly differs depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the latent probability variation state, the big hit type can be paid more attention. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When the jackpots C and D are achieved in the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2, 30 time saving periods are provided. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, the time saving state 1 is given 30 times, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving state 2 is given 30 times. Furthermore, when the jackpots C and D are achieved in the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2, ten time saving periods are given. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, the time saving state 1 is given 10 times, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving state 2 is given 10 times.

On the other hand, in the case of the big hits F to H (big hits by lottery of the second special symbol), the same short time period is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, when either of the big hits E or F is reached, 100 time saving periods are awarded regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the jackpot G or H is achieved, 20 time saving periods are awarded regardless of the gaming state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving period to be given is different according to the game state at the time of the big hit. With this configuration, the jackpot to be won can be changed according to the gaming state. That is, the degree of advantage of each jackpot can be changed according to the gaming state, so that more various game characteristics can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 118 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, in the present embodiment, a winning state storage area 203γ is provided in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment. The winning state storage area 203γ is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of the big hit at the start of the big hit. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is held until the end of the big hit, and is referred to when the short-time period is set at the end of the big hit. That is, at the end of the jackpot, the hour/hour count corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the information stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is read out from the hour/hour count selection table 202h described above, and is set to the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr. Is set. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. First, with reference to FIG. 119, the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 75) of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment.

In this special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119), in each process of S201 to S273, the same process as each of S201 to S273 of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 75) in the fourth embodiment is performed. Executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) in the present embodiment, when the process of S218 ends, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is determined and information corresponding to the winning state storage area 203γ is stored. The winning state determination process is executed (S299), and the processes after S220 are executed. Details of the winning state determination process (S299) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the winning state determination process (S299). When the winning state determination process (see FIG. 120) is started, first, the values of the probability variation counter 203ce and the time saving/measuring counter 203cr are read (S5001). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the probability variation counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S5002), and when it is determined that the value is 0 (not in the probability variation state) (S5002: No), the next read time saving It is determined whether or not the value of the middle counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5003).

In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour saving counter 203cr is 0 (not in the hour/hour state) (S5003: No), it is determined that the gaming state has won the jackpot in the normal state (non-probable variation non-time period state). Since this means “00H”, which is a value indicating the uncertain variation non-time saving state, it is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr is larger than 0 (S5003: Yes), the jackpot is hit in any state of the hour/hour state 1 or the hour/hour state 2 (non-probable variable hour/hour state). Since this means that the winning has been won, "01H", which is a value indicating the indeterminate variation short-time state, is stored in the winning-state storing area 203γ (S5005), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the processing of S5002, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S5002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5006), and the value is When it is determined that it is 0 (not in the time saving state) (S5006: No), it means that the jackpot has been hit in the latent latent variation state (probability variation non-time shortening state), so when the winning “02H” indicating the latent latency variation state is won. The state is stored in the state storage area 203γ (S5007), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5006, if it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5006: Yes), it means that the jackpot has been hit in either the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2. “03H” indicating the probability-variable time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5008), and this processing ends.

At the end of the jackpot, the value stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is referred to, the game state at the time when the jackpot is won is determined, and the number of saved times is selected. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of shortening times depending on the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the ending process 7 (S1379) will be described with reference to FIG. This ending process 7 (S1379) is a process that is executed in place of the ending process 3 (see FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment, and like the ending process 3 (see FIG. 87), a big hit ending and a big hit. This is a process for setting a later game state.

When this ending process 7 (see FIG. 121) is started, first, an ending command for starting the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is set (S4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203ct is set to OFF to set the jackpot end (S4102). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203cf is on (S4103), and if it is on (S4103: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203ce is set to 100 (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105. To do. With this, it is possible to set the probability change state of the special symbol 100 times after the big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203cf is off (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether the big hit this time is one of big hits A, C, E, and G (S4105). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type in which the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot, and when it is determined to be one of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (S4105: Yes), the time saving identification flag 203cs is set. On the other hand, 0 is set (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4191. On the other hand, in the processing of S4105, when it is determined that the jackpot A, C, E, or G is not one of the jackpots B, D, F, or H (S4105: No), the time saving identification is performed. The flag 203cs is set to 1 (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4191.

In the processing of S4191 executed after the processing of S4106 or S4107, the values stored in the time saving number selection table 202h and the winning state storage area 203γ are read (S4191), and the read winning state storage area 203γ is stored. The time saving frequency indicated by the value and the jackpot type of this time is specified from the time saving frequency selection table 202h (S4192). Then, the specified time saving count is set in the time saving intermediate counter 203cr (S4193), and this processing is ended.

By executing this ending process, it is possible to set a variety of time saving times according to the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of shortening times depending on the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the degree of advantage is made different depending on whether the jackpot is achieved by the lottery for the first special symbol or the jackpot due to the lottery for the second special symbol. It is structured so that the player who wins the big prize in the lottery of the two special symbols becomes advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, that is, a time saving state 1 and a time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving states provided after the jackpot. Time saving state 1 is a time saving state in which a lottery for the first special symbol is easily performed (a ball easily enters the right first entrance 64a2), and time saving state 2 is a lottery for the second special symbol. Is easily executed (the ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b), which is a short time state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times of saving time provided after the jackpot is finished is varied according to the gaming state. As a result, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the short-time period will continue for a long time can be varied depending on the game state, so that the time-short period provided can be predicted in consideration of the game state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

In addition, you may combine all or one part of each said embodiment and each control example, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in comparison with the first embodiment, the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 1640 is changed, the right first entrance 64a2 is provided, and the right second entrance 64b is provided. The difference is that the structure for entering the ball has been changed. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 39, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the normal game state, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) is executed. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won is executed. Also, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, there is a high probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the jackpot game is over, and furthermore, the probability variation game state (hereinafter, probability change state) that makes it easy to receive the lottery for the special map, or The probability of being a big hit does not change, but a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a lottery for special maps is given.

Here, the probability change state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state, and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is provided. Moreover, the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is 1 or after the jackpot game is over). The number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game of the number of times is easy to transition to a gaming state where it is easy to win the jackpot)) is set.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game and the probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. As a result, for example, the ratio of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (it is easy to enter the probability variation state 1), and it is easier for the player to experience the game state (probability variation state) that is more likely to be hit than the normal game. As a result, it is possible to easily experience the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game effect or the probability variation state, and to entertain the game, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability variation state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has transitioned to the probability changing state 2 with a sense of superiority, and to improve the interest of the game for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, even in the time saving state, the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set similarly to the above-described probability variation state, and both of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are more than the normal game. A gaming state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (balls are easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special drawing in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time saving state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is substantially configured to execute the lottery of the special figure 2. Is set as a more advantageous game state for the player.

A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation states, and the time saving state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time saving states.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the jackpot game is over, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display device unit 80) is Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched to the right side area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and the vicinity of the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67 is reached. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. The electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and when the electric prize 710 is in an open state, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700. The electric accessory 710 is opened when the result of the lottery for ordinary symbols (general symbol lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 is successful. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 is different.

The detailed description is omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. 40 of the third embodiment described above, but the configuration inside the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the result of the universal drawing lottery that the winning (per the universal drawing) is won, and the first operation is performed depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate with each other as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 44, the second flow path 706 communicates with each other from the time when 1.5 times elapses to the time when 3.5 seconds elapse (2 seconds) after being won per universal figure. Thus, the switching valve 702 operates, and during the other periods, the first flow path 703 operates so as to communicate with each other.

A first operation port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow channel 703, while a second operation port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow channel 706, and each flow channel is The ball that has flowed down enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 122, the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 707 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 122, the first actuation port 704 is connected to the first actuation accessory 645a provided below the right side region of the game board 13 by the first actuation mechanism 705, and enters the first actuation port 704. By pressing the first contact piece provided on the one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up by the sphere. It is configured to come into contact with the operating accessory 645a and open the first operating accessory 645a.

Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 is ready to enter. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed similarly to the case of the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball is placed on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first actuation accessory 645a is closed.

As described above, a mechanism for changing the accessory to the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical structure is a known technique called a non-electric accessory. In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the configuration of the non-electric accessory is omitted, but any technology that has already been disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 similarly to the configuration of the above-mentioned non-electric auditors member, so that The second working accessory 645b is opened. By the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b which can enter the ball when the second actuating member 645b is opened, the lottery of the special map 2 which is set more advantageously than the special FIG. Executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory including the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the above-described first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating mechanism 705 are provided. Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electrical accessory that is composed of the working accessory 645a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, the second flow path 706 is provided only for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the switching valve 702 is elected per universal figure. The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during a period other than that (including a period in which a general figure is not elected) is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second actuating object 645b, the special figure 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. This is because.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description of the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b is ready to be entered by the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700, the game board 13 of the game board 13 does not enter the distribution winning apparatus 700. The ball that has flowed down the right side region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the ball entry ports that are ready to enter.

In this way, in the gaming state where the right-handed game is executed (probably changed state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

First, with reference to FIG. 123, the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 is a front view of the game board 13 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, three ball entrances are provided in which a special symbol is drawn by entering a ball. Specifically, the first ball entrance 64a1 provided on the lower side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, and the right second ball entrance provided on the right side with respect to the variable display device unit 80 in front view. 64b and the right 1st entrance 64a2 provided in the front view right side with respect to the right 2nd entrance 64b are provided.

Both the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are subjected to a lottery for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the ball. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-mentioned two kinds of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 123, the right first ball inlet 64a2 is provided with a first working accessory 645a. The first actuating member 645a is in an open state in which the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2 (easy) and cannot enter the ball in the right first ball entrance 64a2 ( Difficult) and closed state. The first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state when the ball enters the first operating port 704 provided inside the sorting winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a that has been switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

Similarly, the right second ball inlet 64b is provided with a second actuation accessory 645b. The second actuating member 645b is also in an open state in which the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b (easy), and cannot enter the ball in the right second ball entrance 64b ( Difficult) and closed state. The second operating accessory 645b that accompanies the second operating accessory 645b is switched to the open state when the ball enters the second operating port 707 provided inside the distribution winning apparatus 700. On the other hand, the second actuation accessory 645b that has been switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

A distribution winning apparatus 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball that has entered inside into either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first actuation port 704 (when the ball is entered), the first actuation accessory 645a attached to the right first entrance port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entrance The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second actuation opening 707 (entering the ball), the second actuation accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance opening is switched to the open state, and then to the right second entrance opening 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

Here, details of the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a front view of the distribution winning apparatus 700. As shown in FIG. 124, the distribution winning apparatus 700 is provided with the electric accessory 701 on the upper right side thereof. In the game board 13, the electric accessory 701 is buried in the projecting position projecting to the flow channel on the right side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 and the wall surface on the left side of the flow channel without projecting to the flow channel. It can be switched to the buried position. When the electric accessory 701 is in the projecting position, only one sphere that has flowed down the flow path can be received and held on the upper part thereof. In addition, when the electric accessory 701 switches from the projecting position to the burying position, the sphere held at the upper part can flow into the distribution winning apparatus 700 through the opening 701a.

The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 and the opening 701a is branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. The first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are provided with detection sensors 703a and 706a for detecting passage of a sphere, respectively. Further, since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow channel 703, the sphere that has flowed down the first flow channel 703 enters the first working port 704. On the other hand, since the second operating port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow channel 706, the ball flowing down the second flow channel 706 enters the second operating port 707. In addition, at the position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are branched, a flow path through which a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is switched ( A variable flow path) 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches (slides and displaces) between a first switching state in which the sphere flows down into the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the sphere flows down into the second flow path 706. )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the left side in front view to close the upstream side of the second flow path and only the first flow path is opened. To the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the right when viewed from the front to close the upstream side of the first flow path, and only the first flow path is opened. , The sphere advances to the second flow path.

If the ball can be thrown into the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the second switching state, the ball can be made to flow down toward the second operation port 707. When the ball enters the second operation port 707, the second operation accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability that the probability variation state of the special symbol is given when it is a big hit, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow-down direction (whether the flow is flowing down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707) of the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124, a first operating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operating port 704. The first operating port 704 is composed of a known non-electrically-powered accessory, that is, the first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball entering the first operating port 704. You can Further, when the first actuating member 645a is in the open state, the first actuating member 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. The second operating mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operating mechanism 705. That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second operating port 707. Further, when the second actuating member 645b is in the open state, the second actuating member 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b.

In this way, by throwing a ball into the distribution winning apparatus 700, the ball is thrown into the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating accessory 645a or The two working accessory 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if the special design 2 lottery is a big hit, it is more advantageous than the special design 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first working opening 704 or the second working opening 707. You can let me know. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 125 is a view showing the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in comparison with the first embodiment, the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 1640 is changed, the right first entrance 64a2 is provided, and the right second entrance 64b is provided. The difference is that the structure for entering the ball has been changed. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 39, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the normal game state, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) is executed. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won is executed. Also, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, there is a high probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the jackpot game is over, and furthermore, the probability variation game state (hereinafter, probability change state) that makes it easy to receive the lottery for the special map, or The probability of being a big hit does not change, but a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a lottery for special maps is given.

Here, the probability change state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state, and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is provided. Moreover, the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is 1 or after the jackpot game is over). The number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game of the number of times is easy to transition to a gaming state where it is easy to win the jackpot)) is set.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game and the probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. As a result, for example, the ratio of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (it is easy to enter the probability variation state 1), and it is easier for the player to experience the game state (probability variation state) that is more likely to be hit than the normal game. As a result, it is possible to easily experience the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game effect or the probability variation state, and to entertain the game, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability variation state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has transitioned to the probability changing state 2 with a sense of superiority, and to improve the interest of the game for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, even in the time saving state, the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set similarly to the above-described probability variation state, and both of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are more than the normal game. A gaming state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (balls are easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special drawing in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time saving state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is substantially configured to execute the lottery of the special figure 2. Is set as a more advantageous game state for the player.

A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation states, and the time saving state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time saving states.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the jackpot game is over, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display device unit 80) is Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched to the right side area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and the vicinity of the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67 is reached. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. The electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and when the electric prize 710 is in an open state, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700. The electric accessory 710 is opened when the result of the lottery for ordinary symbols (general symbol lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 is successful. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 is different.

The detailed description is omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. 61 of the third embodiment described above, but the configuration inside the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the result of the universal drawing lottery that the winning (per the universal drawing) is won, and the first operation is performed depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate with each other as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 65, the second flow path 706 is in communication between 1.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning of the general figure. Thus, the switching valve 702 operates, and during the other periods, the first flow path 703 operates so as to communicate with each other.

A first operation port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow channel 703, while a second operation port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow channel 706, and each flow channel is The ball that has flowed down enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 125, the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 707 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 125, the first operating port 704 is connected to the first operating accessory 645a provided below the right side region of the game board 13 by the first operating mechanism 705, and enters the first operating port 704. By pressing the first contact piece provided on the one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up by the sphere. It is configured to come into contact with the operating accessory 645a and open the first operating accessory 645a.

Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 is ready to enter. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed similarly to the case of the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball is placed on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first actuation accessory 645a is closed.

As described above, a mechanism for changing the accessory to the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical structure is a known technique called a non-electric accessory. In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the configuration of the non-electric accessory is omitted, but any technology that has already been disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 similarly to the configuration of the above-mentioned non-electric auditors member, so that The second working accessory 645b is opened. By the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b which can enter the ball when the second actuating member 645b is opened, the lottery of the special map 2 which is set more advantageously than the special FIG. Executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory including the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the above-described first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating mechanism 705 are provided. Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electrical accessory that is composed of the working accessory 645a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, the second flow path 706 is provided only for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the switching valve 702 is elected per universal figure. The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during a period other than that (including a period in which a general figure is not elected) is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second actuating object 645b, the special figure 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. This is because.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description of the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b is ready to be entered by the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700, the game board 13 of the game board 13 does not enter the distribution winning apparatus 700. The ball that has flowed down the right side region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the ball entry ports that are ready to enter.

In this way, in the gaming state where the right-handed game is executed (probably changed state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

Next, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710 and the switching member 702 described above will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an opening pattern A and an opening pattern B as opening patterns for the electric power role (electrically-powered object) 710. The opening pattern of the electric role is configured to be set according to the type of jackpot won by the special drawing lottery. Note that the opening pattern A is set in the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 (when the RAM is cleared).

When the opening pattern A is set, it will be opened for 1 second (becomes in an open state) after being won in general, then closed for 1.4 seconds (becomes in a closed state), and then opened again (0.1 seconds). The operation of the electric accessory 710 is controlled (the winning period is 2.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory is opened for 0.1 second (open state), then closed for 1.4 seconds (closed state), and opened again (1 second). 710 is operationally controlled (the winning period is 2.5 seconds).

In this way, the electric accessory 710 is configured such that the control contents to be opened/closed differ depending on the set opening pattern. The opening pattern in which the operation control content of the electric accessory 710 is set is determined by the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won.

In the fourth embodiment, the hit period (2.5 seconds) in the hit game (game in which the figure is hit) executed by the hit figure and the opening period (total time) of the electric accessory 710 during the hit period. The number of times (2 times) the electric accessory 710 is opened during the winning period is the same regardless of whether the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B is set. This is for reducing the processing load of the operation control process in the winning game, and is expected to enter the distribution winning device 1640 for the player no matter which universal figure winning game is executed. This is because the degree is not changed.

It should be noted that, if the degree of expectation that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 does not change, another operation control content may be used as the control for operating the electric motor accessory 710. For example, it is possible to increase the number of times the ball is opened during a period in which it is difficult to enter (0.1 second), or to change the period in which the ball is in a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter.

Furthermore, in all the opening patterns of the electric accessory 710, it is not necessary to unify the expectation of the balls to enter the distribution prize winning device 700, and it is easy to enter the distribution prize winning device 700 and difficult to enter. A winning game may be provided. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the operation is controlled so that the electric accessory 710 is opened as soon as the universal figure jackpot is won, but this is because the winning game is won by immediately executing the hit game. This is to notify the player without delay. It should be noted that the operation control may be performed such that the electric accessory 710 is opened after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the winning of the general figure.

In the case of adopting such a configuration, it is preferable to use a configuration in which a player can visually recognize the winning by using a display device that can be visually recognized by the player like the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in advance that he or she has won the prize and that the ball is ready to enter the distribution winning apparatus 700. In addition, the technology of notifying the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol whether or not to win per universal symbol (identification symbol (identification information) when the stop symbol is displayed after variably displaying the identification symbol (identification information)) The technique may be used to notify the player of the lottery result (discrimination result) in accordance with the display mode. As a result, the player can enjoy the variable display of both the special symbol and the normal symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. A switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700. The switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to a position where the second flow path is in communication for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have elapsed after winning the prize. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is performed with a constant operation regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

Next, the flow of balls entering the distribution prize winning device 700 for each electric role opening pattern will be described. First, when the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period in which the ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 is 1 second from the start of the game. The balls that enter during this period reach the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed, as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in the state where the first flow passage 1644 is in communication, so the ball is guided to the first flow passage 1644. As described above, while the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball entering the distribution winning apparatus 700 is guided to the first flow path 703 and enters the first operating port 704. As a result, the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. That is, when the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), the gaming state (time saving state 1, probability changing state 1) in which Toku-zu 1 is substantially changed in the time saving state or the probability changing state is Will be set. In the opening pattern A, the electric accessory 701 is released for 0.1 seconds after 1.5 seconds have passed after the big hit, but the opening for 0.1 seconds is a difficult interval for the ball to enter. And there is almost no ball coming in. In the unlikely event that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700, the ball will enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern B described later.

Next, when the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period in which the ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 is 1 second after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game. .. The balls that enter during this period reach the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed, as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is positioned in the state where the second flow passage 706 is in communication, so the ball is guided to the second flow passage 706. As described above, while the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the balls that enter the sorting prize winning device 700 are guided to the second flow path 706 and enter the second operating port 707. It acts to make a ball, so that the ball can enter the right second ball inlet 64b. That is, when the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory), the gaming state (time saving state 2, probability changing state 2) in which Toku-zu 2 is substantially changed in the time saving state or the probability changing state is Will be set. In the opening pattern B, the electric accessory 701 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the jackpot is won, but the opening for 0.1 seconds is a difficult interval for the balls to enter, and almost all the balls enter. There is no ball. In the unlikely event that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 during this period, the ball will enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 at the same timing as the above-described opening pattern A, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the ball entered in the opening pattern B is surely guided so that the ball entered in the opening pattern A is surely guided to the first flow path 703. The operation is performed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. As a result, it becomes possible to guide a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball moves from the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the universal figure is set to 3 seconds in a state where the variation time of the universal figure is shortened (time saving state, probability variation state). Therefore, in the state where the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, in order to reliably guide the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning apparatus 700 to the second flow path, the switching valve 702 is started from the normal position. Even if the second flow path is placed in communication for 3 seconds after the lapse of 1.5 seconds, the first flow path will be in communication by the time the game is executed again after the next universal figure change. Since it can be positioned, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 is guided to an unintended flow path over a plurality of times of a game per game.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory) is settable based on the jackpot type, and the set opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory) is set. Based on, it is possible to set a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially changes and a game state in which the special figure 2 substantially changes. In addition, the bonuses that are more advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 2 lottery are more than those when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 1 lottery. It is set that the ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed is high) is given.

As a result, the time saving state and the probability variation state are further advantageous to the game state (time saving state 2, probability variation state 2), and the player is more advantageous than the advantageous game state but is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variation state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, by setting a high transition ratio for shifting from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability changing state 1, the player can easily see the effect executed in the time saving state or the probability changing state. It is possible to give a superior feeling to the player who has transitioned to the probability variation state 2 by setting a low transition rate to transition to the probability variation state 2 which is the most advantageous game state for the player. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of opening patterns A and B can be set as the opening patterns of the electric role (electric accessory), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the types of opening patterns can be changed. You may comprise so that 3 or more types can be set. As a result, it becomes possible to set more various game states.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern that guides the sphere to the second flow path 706 as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory). Although the pattern (opening pattern B) is set, for example, an opening pattern is provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. Is also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the sphere entering the electric accessory 701 guides, further improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is configured to enter any of the operation ports (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707). , Out which is connected to the discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without providing a flow path for discharging again from the sorting prize winning device 700 to the game board 13 or entering each operation opening. A flow path for entering the mouth may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in the flow of the balls in the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the switching valve 702 is configured such that a predetermined constant operation is performed after the hit game is executed, but for example, a constant operation is always performed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It may be configured to be opened, or may be configured to switch the communicating flow paths when the number of balls entered into the distribution winning apparatus 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

In the fourth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). However, for example, the switching valve 702, which is a switching member, is actuated by contact of a ball, and a predetermined condition (for example, It may be configured such that the communicating flow path is switched when 10 balls are passed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the sphere guided to any one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter any one of the operating ports. A distribution member that distributes a sphere guided to any of the flow paths by 702 to a plurality of flow paths is provided, and the sphere distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member enters the corresponding working port. You may.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a certain time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As a means for varying (extending) the time for a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 to reach the switching valve 702, a period until the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is set. It is also possible to provide a plurality of different routes and to provide a distribution unit that distributes a ball entering the distribution winning apparatus 700 to one of the routes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player, who can play a game while predicting when the ball entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 will reach the switching valve 702, from getting tired of the game early. The effect is that you can.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 132. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the distribution prize winning device 700, the right first ball entrance 64a2, and the right second ball entrance 64b are provided in the right side area (hereinafter, right hitting area) of the game board 13. It had been.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the left through gate 67a and the first entrance 64a1 are provided in the left area of the game board 13 (hereinafter referred to as the left hitting area LE). The right through gate 67b and the second ball entrance 64b1 are provided in the right hitting area RE of 13 and the lower side of the game board 13 through which both the left hitting area LE and the game balls launched in the right hitting area RE can pass. In a region (hereinafter referred to as central region CE), a third distribution winning device 7000 is provided in place of the distribution winning device 700, a variable winning device 165 is provided in the central region CE, and a third distribution winning device. The difference is that a central first ball entrance 64a3 and a central second ball entrance 64b3 into which game balls entered into 7000 can enter are provided, and the first variable winning device 65 is deleted. The same components as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 126, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment differs in a game aiming at the left hitting area LE (hereinafter referred to as a left hitting game) and a game aiming at a right hitting area RE (hereinafter referred to as a right hitting game). Have sex.

Specifically, in the left-handed game, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 is executed, and a special symbol 1 (special figure 1) is drawn based on the entry of the game ball into the first entrance 64a1. Executed. As a result of the lottery in Toku-zu 1, if the jackpot is won, the game state (time saving state) in which the game ball can easily enter the third distribution winning device 7000 after the end of the jackpot game is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Or until the next big win).

Similar to the above-described fourth embodiment, a time saving state (time saving state 1, time saving state 2) having different degrees of advantage for the player is set in this time saving state, and a lottery is executed in the left-handed game. After winning the jackpot as a result of the lottery of Special Figure 1, the time saving state 1 (the ball that entered the third distribution winning device 7000 is the entrance for executing the lottery of Special Figure 1 (the first entry Only the short-time condition (flowing down to the mouth 64a2) is settable.

On the other hand, in the right-handed game, a game aiming at the second entrance 64b1 is executed, and the lottery for the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) is executed based on the entrance of the game ball into the second entrance 64b1. .. When the specific jackpot is won as a result of the lottery of the special map 2, after the jackpot game is over, the game ball is easy to enter the third distribution prize winning device 7000 (time saving state) as a time saving state 2 ( It is configured such that a ball that has entered the third distribution winning device 7000 flows down to a ball entrance (second ball entrance 64b2) for executing the lottery of the special drawing 2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player arbitrarily selects whether to perform the left-handed game or the right-handed game, thereby selecting one of the different game characteristics and executing the game. it can.

By using such a structure, for example, in the left-handed game, as a result of the lottery (special jackpot probability 1/100) of the special drawing 1, when the jackpot is won, there is a high probability (including 100%) of the time saving state (time saving state 1 ) (For example, with a probability of 30%, shift to a short-term state (time-saving state 1) until the next big hit, and with a probability of 70% until special figure fluctuation is executed 50 times (time-saving state 1 )), and during that time saving game (time saving game 1), it is possible to execute a game aiming for a further big hit (game with low gambling).

On the other hand, in the right-handed game, as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery (big hit probability 1/100 (the same as the big hit probability of special drawing 1)), a predetermined probability when the big hit is won (when the big hit is won in the special drawing 1) To the time saving state (time saving state 2) with a probability (eg, 30%) lower than the probability that the time saving state (time saving state 1) is given to (for example, the time saving state (time saving state 2) until the next jackpot. It becomes possible to execute a game (a game with high gambling ability) aiming for a further big hit during the time saving state (time saving state 2) that is given) and during the time saving state (time saving state 2).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery of special figure 2 is a big hit during the time saving state 2, the probability is higher than when the lottery of special figure 2 is a big hit in the non-time saving state (for example, 80 %), it is configured to shift to a time-saving state (time-saving state 2), so that once the time-saving state 2 is entered, a game in which the jackpot and the time-saving state 2 are looped with high probability (high gambling) It is possible to execute a game).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can select and execute a game with a low gambling probability and a game with a high gambling property by selecting a game that shoots a game ball. Since it is configured, it is possible to eliminate the action of the player moving to a different pachinko machine 10 in order to execute a game with different gambling characteristics. Further, since the player can play the game while selecting the gambling property in accordance with the investment amount of the game and the number of coins acquired, the variation of the game can be increased.

Here, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. Although a detailed description will be given later, the probability variation state of the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the jackpot probability of the special figure is almost the same as that of the normal state that is not the probability variation state (for example, the jackpot probability of the normal state is The probability of jackpot in the probability variation state is 1/100, and it is 5/400). This is a case where the lottery result of special figure 2 in the right-handed game in the normal state is a big hit, and a case where the lottery result of special figure 2 in the right-handed game in the probability variation state is a big hit. This is because the probability of shifting to a state that is advantageous to

Returning to FIG. 126, the description will be continued. When the lottery result of the special symbol (special map 1 or special map 2) is a big hit, the variable winning device 165 that allows the game ball to enter the big hit game to be executed is provided in the central area CE. The game ball that has passed through the right hitting area RE and the left hitting area LE is configured to be able to enter.

As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot game using the same variable winning device 165 depending on whether the right hitting game results in a big hit or the left hitting game results in a big hit. It is possible to reduce the number of parts that configure the machine 10.

In this embodiment, the same variable winning device 165 is used for the right-handed game and the left-handed game, but other configurations may be used, for example, a variable for the right-handed game. A winning device (right variable winning device) is provided in the right hitting area RE, a variable winning device for left hitting game (left variable winning device) is provided in the left hitting area LE, and a game ball is entered in each variable winning device. In this case, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) paid out may be different. In this case, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered in the right variable winning device is larger than that in the left variable winning device. Thereby, there is an effect that the level of gambling can be made clearer.

Returning to FIG. 126, the description will be continued. In the central area CE, a ball that has passed through the variable winning device 165 without entering the variable winning device 165 can enter the ball (lower side (downstream side) of the variable winning device 165), the third distribution winning. A device 7000 is provided. Here, the configuration of the third distribution winning apparatus 7000 will be described with reference to FIG. 127.

FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the third distribution-winning device 7000. In FIG. 127(a), the ball that has entered the third distribution-winning device 7000 is the first working port 704. FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram showing a flow in the case of entering a ball, and FIG. 127(b) is a flow in the case of a ball entering the third distribution winning device 7000 entering the central first entrance 64a3 It is the schematic diagram which showed.

The third distribution winning device 7000 is different from the second distribution winning device 700 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that the central first winning entrance 64a3 and the central second winning entrance are provided in the third distributing winning device 7000. The point where 64b3 is provided, the ball entering the third distribution winning apparatus 7000 and flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first actuation port 704 or the central first ball entry port 64a3, and The difference is that a ball that flows down the two flow paths 706 is provided to enter the second operation port 707 or the central second ball entry port 64b3. Other configurations are the same as those of the second distribution/winning device 700 according to the above-described fourth embodiment, and therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 127(a), the switching valve 702 is in a movable state (that is, the time saving state) so that the game ball that has entered the third distribution winning apparatus 7000 can flow down the first flow path 703. In 1), when the game ball enters the third distribution winning device 7000, first, the game ball flows down the first flow path 703 and enters the first operation port 704. Then, when the game ball enters the first operating port 704, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the first operating accessory 645a is opened, and then the game ball entering the third distribution winning device 7000. Enters the central first entrance 64a3.

In this way, whether the gaming ball that has entered the third distribution prize device 7000 flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is a type of a set time saving state (time saving state 1 Since it is determined by the time saving state 2), the game balls that enter the third distribution winning device 7000 during the same time saving state flow down the same flow path (the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706). Will be done. Therefore, the ball that entered the third distribution prize device 7000 enters the operation port (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707), and then enters the third distribution prize device 7000. The balls can be alternately entered into the entrance (the central first entrance 64a3 or the central second entrance 64b3).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the central first entrance 64a3 and the central second entrance 64b3 are provided in the third distribution winning apparatus 7000, but other configurations may be used, and left hitting. In the central area CE through which the game ball flowing down the area LE or the right-handed area RE can pass, if the game can be entered regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is played, the third distribution prize It may be provided outside the device 7000.

Returning to FIG. 126, the ball flow of the game balls flowing down the game board 13 provided with the above-described components will be described. First, when the left hitting game is executed and the game ball flows down the left hitting area LE, it passes through the left through gate 67a. Then, the game ball that has passed through the left through gate 67a is, with the nails Q1, Q2, and Q3 provided above the first ball entrance 64a, the general prize hole 63, the first ball entrance 64a, and the variable winning device 165 ( Alternatively, the flow can be easily distributed to any of the third distribution winning devices 7000).

In other words, for example, if the nail Q3 is adjusted to the left in order to reduce the rate of entry into the first entry port 64a, the proportion of entry into the variable winning device 165 (or the third distribution winning device 7000). When the nail Q2 is adjusted to the right in order to reduce the rate of entry into the first entry port 64a, the proportion of the entry into the general winning opening 63 is increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a disadvantageous nail adjustment. The second ball entrance 64b and the nails Q4, Q5, Q6 in the right hitting area RE are also configured in the same relationship, but since the contents are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the game ball that has passed through the left through gate 67a enters the first ball entrance 64a, the lottery of special figure 1 is executed, passes through the left through gate 67a, and is directed toward the variable winning device 165. The game ball flowing down enters the variable winning device 165 during the big hit game, passes through the variable winning device 165 except during the big hit game, and flows down to the third distribution prize device 7000. Then, in a state where the electric accessory 701 closes the passage opening 701a of the third distribution winning apparatus 7000, the third distribution winning apparatus 7000 does not enter the ball, but the ball enters the out opening 71 and the game board. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of 13.

On the other hand, in a state where the electric accessory 701 opens the passage port 701a of the third distribution prize device 7000, the game ball enters the third distribution prize device 7000 and is made passable by the switching valve 702. Flow path (the first flow path 703, the second flow path 706) is flowed down, and the operation port (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707) or the ball entrance (the center first ball entrance 64a3 or the center) Enter the second entrance 64b3).

In the present control example, the game ball that has entered the third distribution prize device 7000 is the operating opening (first operating opening 704 or second operating opening 707) or the incoming opening (central first incoming opening 64a3). Although a configuration for entering a ball in any of the central second ball inlets 64b3) is used, a configuration other than that may be used, for example, an out port may be provided, or the game board 13 may be discharged again. It may be configured to be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player's gaming state (left-handed game or right-handed game) is configured to be discriminable (for example, it is discriminated by detecting a game ball entering each entrance). The player is able to identify the area in which the player is playing the game (left hitting area LE or right hitting area RE).

Specifically, by changing the brightness of various left decoration LEDs provided in the left hitting area LE and various right decoration LEDs provided in the right hitting area RE in accordance with the game state (left hitting game or right hitting game). The LED provided in the game area where the game is currently being played is configured to have high brightness. This allows the player to be notified of the game state in an easy-to-understand manner.

It should be noted that a configuration other than the above may be used, for example, the glass unit 16 that covers the game board 13 is configured with a half mirror, and only the area where the game is currently being performed is transparent (the game board 13 can be visually recognized by the player. It is also possible to use a control of transmitting the light.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric prize 701 that allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 165 and the third distribution winning device 7000 is provided in the central area CE to be shared (left hitting game and right hitting game). The number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 is reduced by making them common to the batting game, but the variable winning device 165 and the electric accessory 701 are provided separately for the left batting game and the right batting game. Alternatively, the third prize-winning device 7000 may be provided separately for the left-handed game and the right-handed game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the central area CE is provided as an area in which both the game ball flowing down the left hitting area LE and the game ball flowing down the right hitting area RE are allowed to flow down, but left hitting on the game board 13 The area LE and the right hitting area RE may be completely separated. This can prevent the game ball from flowing down to an unintended area.

Further, the handle 51 is provided with adjusting means (adjusting button or the like) for adjusting the launching force of the game ball. The player may easily aim at a desired area (left hitting area LE or right hitting area RE).

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the transition of the game state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition. As shown in FIG. 128, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal state in which the electric accessory 701 is difficult to open (a game without electric support), a latent change probability state, and a time saving state 1 (special time variation time saving state ( It is configured to shift the disadvantageous time saving)) and the time saving state 2 (time saving state for changing special figure 2 (advantageous time saving)) based on the type of jackpot that was won.

First, the case where the left-handed game is executed in the normal state will be described. In the left-handed game, a game in which the variation of the special map 1 (lottery) is executed is performed, and if you win the jackpot, 30% will change to a certainty/time saving state 1 (until the next jackpot) and 50% will change (until the next jackpot) ) ・Transition to time saving state 1 (50 times), and 20% shift to normal time saving state 1 (50 times).

Next, when the time saving (game with electric power support) state shifts, the respective game states are transferred at the respective ratios shown, and when the time saving state ends, the game shifts to a game without electric power support as shown in the figure.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when the right-handed game is executed, the game in which the variation (lottery) of the special map 2 is executed is performed, and if you win the jackpot, 30% will be a certainty change/time saving state 2 (until the next jackpot) 50% shifts to probability change (until the next big hit) and no time saving (that is, latent latency change state), and 20% shifts to normal state.

Then, when the jackpot is won in the time saving state 2 (game with electric power support), 80% shifts to the probability variation/time saving state 2 (until the next big jackpot), and 20% shifts to the normal state. In other words, the left-handed game moves from the normal state to the time-saving state (time-saving state 1) with a probability of 100%, whereas the right-handed game moves from the normal state to the time-saving state (time-saving state 2) with a probability of only 30%. It is set not to migrate. That is, the left-handed game can execute a game in which the time saving game is more likely to be given from the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time saving state (game with electric support), the left hitting game has a 30% probability of shifting to the game state in which the time saving condition is set until the next big hit, whereas the right hitting game has the time saving state. Is set to a high probability of 80% that the game state shifts to the next big hit. In other words, once the game shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to execute a game in which the right hitting game is easier to continue in the time saving state.

As described above, when the player selects the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), the player easily shifts from the normal state to the time saving state, and easily shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. Perform a game (left hitting game with low gambling), or a game that does not easily shift from the normal state to the time saving state, and that does not easily shift from the time saving state to the normal state (right hitting game with high gambling) be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to save the trouble of moving to a different pachinko machine 10 when a player executes a game with different gambling characteristics.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 130. The eighth embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a first random number 2 table 202a is provided in place of the first per random number table 202a, and a first per type selection table 202b is replaced with the first per random type selection table 202b. The difference is that the hit type selection 2 table 202b is provided. Other configurations are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first random number 2 table 202a, and FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per-type selection 2 table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), in the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399, and when the special symbol has a low probability (in the normal state). , There are four random numbers that are jackpots for special symbols, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are stored in the first random number table 202a as determination values for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low (during a normal state), the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 4. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/ 100".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol (at the time of probability change state), there are five random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the value "0-5" is high probability in the first random number table 202a. It is stored as a judgment value for. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols (at the time of probability change state), the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 5, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/ 80".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the normal state and the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the probability changing state are set so as not to cause a large difference. This will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. In addition, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the normal state, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the probability changing state, if the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to be higher than in the normal state, set another value Alternatively, for example, the total number of random number values is 4000, the total number of random number values that are jackpots in the normal state is 40 (the jackpot probability is 1/100), and the total number of random number values that are jackpots in the probable variation state is 41 ( The jackpot probability may be set to about 1/98).

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(b), in the first hit type selection 2 table 202b in this embodiment, there are a special 2 selection 2 table 202b3 and a special 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4. 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5 is set.

Here, the contents of the selection 2 table for special figure 1 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 selection 2 table 202b3. In this pachinko machine 10, three types of jackpot types from jackpot A to jackpot C are set as jackpot types selected when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery (discrimination) of Toku-zu 1.

As shown in FIG. 130(a), the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit A, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit B. "30 to 79" is set, and for the big hit C, the value "80 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

Here, when the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is given as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is finished, the probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won, and the electric power is released. The time saving state (time saving state 1) in which the open pattern A is set as the pattern is given until the next big hit. When the jackpot A is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

When the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is given as the jackpot game, the probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game is finished, and the opening pattern A is used as the electric power releasing pattern. Time saving state (time saving state 1) is set until the special symbol is changed 50 times. When the big hit B is executed, about 500 gaming balls are paid out during the big hit game.

When the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 4 rounds is given as the jackpot game, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric power releasing pattern without the probability variation state being given after the jackpot game ends. Time saving state (time saving state 1) is given until the special symbol is changed 50 times. In addition, when the big hit C is executed, about 250 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

Next, the contents of the selection 2 table for special figure 2 (normal) 202b4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the selection 2 table (normal) for special figure 2 202b4. This special 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4 is referred to in the case of a big hit in the lottery (discrimination) of the special drawing 2 in the normal state, and from the big hit D as the big hit type to be selected. Three types of jackpots up to jackpot F are set.

As shown in FIG. 130(b), the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit D, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit E. “30 to 79” is set, and for the big hit F, the value “80 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

Here, when the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is given as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is finished, the probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won, and the electric power is released. The time saving state (time saving state 2) in which the open pattern B is set as the pattern is given until the next big hit. When the big hit D is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

When the jackpot E is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 8 rounds is given as the jackpot game, and the probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won, without the time saving state being given after the jackpot game ends. It When the big hit B is executed, about 500 gaming balls are paid out during the big hit game.

When the big hit F is selected as the big hit type, a big hit game of four rounds is given as a big hit game, and it is set so that the time saving state and the probability variation state are not given after the end of the big hit game. In addition, when the big hit C is executed, about 250 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

Next, the contents of the selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5 for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5. The selection 2 table for special figure 2 (time saving) 202b5 is referred to when a big hit occurs in the lottery (discrimination) of special figure 2 in the time saving state. It differs from (normal) 202b4 in that a jackpot G is set instead of the jackpot E. The description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 131, when the big hit G is selected in the special 2 table for selection 2 (time saving) 202b5, a big hit game of 8 rounds is given as a big hit game, and the next big hit is won after the end of the big hit game. The probability variation state is given up to, and further, the time saving state (time saving state 2) in which the opening pattern B is set as the electric power releasing pattern is given until the next big hit. When the big hit G is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5 is provided with the time saving state (time saving state 2) at a distribution rate of 80%, and the special drawing 2 selection 2 table is provided. In (normal) 202b4, the time saving state (time saving state 2) is set at a distribution rate of 30%. As a result, the probability that a time-saving state (time-saving state 2) is given by the jackpot of special figure 2 in the normal state (that is, first hit) and the big hit of special figure 2 in the time-shortening state (that is, big jackpot in the condominium) Can be different.

Therefore, it is possible to provide a difference between the rate at which the gaming state shifts to the gaming state (time saving state 2) that is advantageous to the player and the rate at which the gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state 2) is looped. Therefore, even though the game state shifts to the gaming state (time saving state 2) that is advantageous for the player and the transition probability is set to be low, it immediately shifts to another gaming state (for example, a normal state). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player is dissatisfied.

As described above, in the above-described eighth embodiment, the player performs the game by aiming at the left hitting area LE of the game board 13 and the case where the player aims at the right hitting area RE of the game board 13. Different games (games with different gambling characteristics) can be executed depending on whether or not to execute. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the action of the player moving to a different pachinko machine 10 in order to execute a game with different gambling abilities. Further, since the player can play the game while selecting the gambling property in accordance with the investment amount of the game and the number of coins acquired, the variation of the game can be increased.

In addition, the variable winning a prize device 165 which becomes the opening state where the game ball can enter during the big hit game which is executed when the big hit of the special design in the left hitting game or the right hitting game, left hitting area LE or right hitting Since any of the game balls that flow down the area RE are provided in the central area CE that can flow down, the number of parts that configure the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the third distribution winning device 7000 is provided in the central area CE, it is possible to reduce the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, which of the central first ball entrance 64a3 and the second central ball entrance 64b3 the ball entered into the third distribution winning device 7000 enters is determined by the type of time saving state being executed (time saving state. Since it is determined by 1 or the time saving state 2), in the case of executing the game in which the ball is thrown into the third distribution prize winning device 7000 in the time saving state, it is executed by either the left hitting game or the right hitting game. It is possible to obtain the same game result (the result of entering the game ball in the third distribution winning device 7000).

Therefore, for example, when a time-saving state (time-saving state 2) is reached as a result of performing a right-handed game, a left-handed game is performed rather than a right-handed game being performed and a game ball being entered in the third distribution prize device 7000. When it is easier to play the game and enter the game balls into the third allocation prize device 7000, the game method can be changed from the right-handed game to the left-handed game. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) suitable for the current game state (normal state, time-saving state) and play the game, thereby increasing the motivation for the game.

As a cause of the difference in the ease of entering the third distribution winning device 7000 between the left-handed game and the right-handed game, adjustment of the nails planted in the game board 13 is conceivable. The through-gate 67a makes nail adjustment easier for the game ball to pass than the right-through gate 67b, and the guide nail that guides the game ball flowing down the left hitting area LE toward the third distribution winning device 7000 is right-handed. It is conceivable to make the nail adjustment that makes it easier to guide the game ball than the guide nail that guides the game ball flowing down the area RE toward the third distribution winning device 7000.

Next, a modified example of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a schematic view schematically showing a front view of the game board 13 of the modified example of the eighth embodiment. In this modified example, a plurality of (two) passage openings into which the game balls can enter the distribution device 7000 are provided in the distribution device 7000, and the game balls enter the respective passage openings. A variable electric accessory (left electric accessory 701a, right electric accessory 701b) is provided at a permissible position for restricting and a restricting position for restricting, which is executed by the game ball passing through the left through gate 67a. Based on the normal symbol lottery (left ordinary symbol lottery), the left electric accessory 701a is controlled to be opened, and based on the ordinary symbol lottery (right ordinary symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the right through gate 67b. The difference is that the right electric accessory 701b is controlled to be opened. The other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 132, the left electric accessory 701a is provided in the left hitting area LE, and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery (left ordinary symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the left through gate 67a is It is configured to be opened (allowable position) when it hits. The left electric accessory 701a is controlled to be opened so that the game ball can easily enter when the time saving state 1 is set.

On the other hand, if the right electric role object 701b is provided in the right hitting area RE, and the result of the normal symbol lottery (right ordinary symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the right through gate 67b is a win. It is configured to be opened (allowable position). This right electric accessory 701b is controlled to be opened so that the game ball can easily enter when the time saving state 2 is set.

In this way, for the third distribution winning device 7000, passage openings (left passage opening, right passage opening) through which game balls can enter are provided for left-handed gaming and right-handed gaming, respectively, and left-handed passing. By providing the left electric accessory 701a for the mouth and the right electric accessory 701b for the right passage opening, it is possible to reliably separate the right-handed game and the left-handed game even in the time saving state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time saving state 1 is set for the left electric accessory 701a that is controlled to be opened based on the normal symbol lottery (left ordinary symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the left through gate 67a. , The game ball is configured to be easy to enter, the right electric accessory 701b controlled to be opened based on the normal symbol lottery (right normal symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the right through gate 67b. , When the time saving state 2 is set, the game ball is controlled to be opened so that the player can easily enter the ball. Therefore, the game is performed on the electric accessory 701a in the state where the time saving state 2 that is most advantageous for the player is set. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball.

In addition, in this modification, the same configuration as that of the above-described eighth embodiment is used in the third distribution winning device 7000, and the left electric accessory 701a or the right electric accessory 701b is opened (allowed). Although the game balls that have passed through the respective passage ports in the state where they are present are configured to be guided onto the switching valve 702, other configurations may be used.

For example, the left electric accessory 701a is opened, the ball entering from the left passage port flows down the first flow path 703, the right electric accessory 701b is opened, and the ball entering from the right passage port is the second flow. It may be configured to flow down the path 706. As a result, the left-handed game and the right-handed game can be reliably separated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game that is not intended by the player from being executed.

The configurations of the eighth embodiment and the modification of the eighth embodiment described above may be combined with the configurations of the control examples and the embodiments described above.

<First Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a first modification of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described. The first modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a distribution winning device 7000 is provided instead of the distribution winning device 700. Details of the distribution winning apparatus 7000 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a front view showing the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 7000 in the first modified example of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 133, the distribution winning apparatus 7000 includes a distribution winning apparatus 650 (see FIG. 35) in the modification of the first embodiment and a distribution winning apparatus 700 (see FIG. 81) in the fourth embodiment. It is a combination of. The basic functions of the distribution winning apparatus 7000 are the same as those of the distribution winning apparatus 700, and when a ball enters (is distributed to) the first operating port 7040 of the distribution winning apparatus 7000, The first working accessory 645a associated with the right first ball entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball is ready to enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. On the other hand, when the ball is distributed to the second operation port 7070 provided inside the distribution winning device 7000 (when the ball is entered), the second operation accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance port is opened. Then, the ball is ready to enter the right second entrance 64b.

When the ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high rate of being given the probability variation state of the special symbol when it is a big hit, so for the player Be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation opening (whether to enter the first operation opening 7040 or the second operation opening 7070) through which the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 enters. it can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 133, an electric accessory 7010 is provided on the upper surface side of the distribution winning apparatus 7000. Like the electric prize 701 of the distribution prize winning apparatus 700 in the modified example of the first embodiment, the electric prize 7010 is in an open state in which a ball can enter (easy) into the distribution prize winning apparatus 7000. It is configured to be switchable between a (immersed state) and a closed state (protruding state) where the ball cannot enter (is difficult). This electric accessory 7010 is set to an open state when it is hit by a lottery for ordinary symbols.

Inside the distribution winning apparatus 7000, a guide flow path 7020 through which a sphere can flow is provided, and a magnetic sensor 7020a that detects passage of the sphere is provided downstream of the guide flow path 7020. A first rotating body 7090 is provided below the magnetic sensor 7020a. This first rotating body 7090 is provided with four recesses (rotating ball entrances 7090a to 7090d) around which game balls can enter, similar to the probability variation rotating body 900 in the modification of the first embodiment. There is. Of these recesses, the rotary ball entrance 7090a is configured to guide the game ball to the back side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 7000 enters the rotary entrance 7090a, the first rotating body rotates clockwise in a front view, and the first operating opening is provided on the back side of the rotary entrance 7090a. When 7040 is placed in the positional relationship, the game ball rolls from the rotary entrance 7090a toward the back side thereof and enters the first actuation opening 7040. In this case, the first actuation accessory 645a associated with the right first ball entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, the rotary ball entrances 7090b to 7090d are provided with wall portions that prevent the balls from being guided to the back side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the rotary ball inlet ports 7090b to 7090d is blocked by the wall portion even if the first rotating body 7090 rotates to the front surface side of the first operating port 7040, and the first operating port 7040 is blocked. I can't enter. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the rotary ball entrances 7090b to 7090d is guided to the guide flow path 7060 that continues to the second rotary body 7091.

The guide passage 7060 is provided with a magnetic sensor 7060a for detecting a passing game ball, and the game ball detected by the magnetic sensor 7060a flows down to the second rotating body 7091. Similarly to the first rotating body 7090, the second rotating body 7091 is also provided with four recesses (rotating ball inlets 7091a to 7091d) into which game balls can enter, and only the rotating ball inlet 7091a is a game ball. Is configured to be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball enters the rotary entrance 7091a, the second rotating body rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and the second actuating opening 7070 is arranged in front of the rotary entrance 7091a. In this case, the game ball rolls toward the back side and enters the second operating port 7070. In this case, the second actuation accessory 645b associated with the right second ball entrance 64b is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the rotating ball entrance ports 7091b to 7091d, the game ball is not guided to the second operation port 7070, and thus is guided to the discharge flow path 656 and discharged from the discharge port 657. It is discharged to the outside.

The first rotary body 7090 and the second rotary body 7091 always rotate at a constant speed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on until the power is cut off. More specifically, the first rotating body 7090 rotates clockwise in front view at a rotation speed of 1 rotation in 5 seconds, and the second rotating body 7091 rotates counterclockwise in front view at a rotation speed of 1 rotation in 3 seconds. , Have been rotated respectively. As a result, the normal design hits, the game ball enters the first operating port 7040 in accordance with the timing when the electric accessory 7010 is opened, and the game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000. Whether to enter the ball (enter the rotary entrance 7090a), the second actuation opening 7070 (enter the rotary entrance 7091a), or the exit 657. change. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the arrangement of each rotating body (first rotating body 7090, second rotating body 7091) when the game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 7000. it can. That is, when the game ball reaches the first rotating body 7090, the game ball flows down to the second rotating body 7091 without being guided to the first operating port 7040 (the game ball rotates into the ball inlet port 7090b. 7090d). In addition, when the game ball reaches the second rotating body 7091, it is expected that the game ball is guided to the second operation port 7070 (the game ball enters the rotating ball entrance 7091a). You can

As described above, in this modification, the distribution winning device 7000 that makes it easy to enter the ball in the time saving state of the normal symbol causes the game ball to be directed to one of the first operating port 7040, the second operating port 7070, and the discharge port 657. It is configured to be distributed. Further, the operation port (or the discharge port) to which the game balls are distributed changes depending on the rotational positions of the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interestingly observe the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000 and the arrangement of the rotating bodies (the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091). Then, when the game ball is distributed to the second operation port 7070, the player can be pleased.

In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, in the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091, a rotation ball entrance (rotation ball entrance 7090a, which can guide the game ball to the back side). Although only one rotary entrance 7091a) is provided for each, the invention is not limited to this, and any number may be set. For example, if the number of recesses that guide the game ball toward the back side of the first rotating body 7090 is increased (for example, if the number of the rotating ball entrances 7090a and 7090b is increased to two), the first operating port in the time saving state Since it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball will enter 7040 (the probability that the first operating accessory 645a associated with the right first entrance 64a2 will switch to the open state), in the case of a big hit in the time saving state It is possible to execute a lot of lottery for the first special symbol which is difficult to be provided with the probability variation state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the probability change state is too continuous and an unexpected disadvantage is given to the hole. Further, for example, if the number of recesses that guide the game ball to the back side in the first rotating body 7091 is increased (for example, if the number is increased to three of the rotating ball entrances 7091a to 7091c), the second in the time saving state. Since it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the actuation opening 7070 (the probability that the second actuation accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance 64b will switch to the open state), it was a big hit in the time saving state. In this case, it is possible to execute a lot of lottery for the second special symbol which is likely to be given the probability variation state. Therefore, the probability that the probability variation state is given after the jackpot ends can be increased, so that the expectation for the probability variation state can be further increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091 are rotated at a constant speed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation speed may be randomly changed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize at what timing the game ball should enter the sorting prize winning device 7000 in order to enter the second operation port 7070. it can. As a result, when a game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 7000, the whereabouts of the game ball can be watched more interestingly. Further, the rotation speed may be regularly changed instead of being randomly changed. Specifically, for example, the rotation speed of the first rotating body 7090 is increased within a range in which the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 7000 can enter the rotary entrance 7090a, and the rotary entrance 7090a. The rotation speed of the first rotating body 7090 may be slowed down in a range in which the ball cannot enter (the ball can enter the rotary entrances 7090b to 7090d). With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the rotary entrance 7090a, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the first operation port 7040. Therefore, the game ball relatively moves to the second operation port 7070. It is possible to make it easy to enter a game ball. In addition, for example, the rotational speed of the second rotating body 7091 is slowed down at a rotational position within a range in which the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 7060 can enter the rotary ball entrance 7091a, and the ball enters the rotary ball entrance 7091a. The rotational speed of the second rotating body 7091 may be increased at a rotational position in a range where the ball cannot be thrown (the ball can enter the rotary entrances 7091b to 7091d). With this configuration, the game ball can easily enter the rotary ball entrance 7091a, so that the second actuation accessory 645b associated with the right second ball entrance 64b can be easily opened. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the right second ball inlet 64b, and the advantageous second special symbol lottery is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the time saving state.

In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, the game balls that enter the rotary entrance balls 7091b to 7091d of the second rotating body 7091 are guided to the exit port 657, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, an operation port having the same function as the first operation port 7040 (the first operation accessory 645a is operated by the game ball entering the opening state) may be provided. With such a configuration, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000, either the first operating accessory 645a or the second operating accessory 645b can be operated in an open state. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the probability changing state and the time saving state.

In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, four recesses into which balls can enter are provided for the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091, but the number of recesses is four. The number is not limited to individual and may be set arbitrarily. Further, the ratio of the recesses that can guide the game balls to the back side of each rotating body may be arbitrarily set. With this configuration, the probability (ratio) of the game ball being guided to the first operating port 7040 and the second operating port 7070 can be set more finely, so that the probability changes in the probability changing state or the time saving state. The ratio of entering the state can be set more freely (finely).

In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the internal structure of the distribution winning apparatus 7000 has the same structure as the distribution winning apparatus 650 (see FIG. 35) in the modification of the first embodiment. It is not limited to. For example, the distribution winning device 650 (see FIG. 3) in the first embodiment may be adopted.

The distribution winning device 7000 in this modification may be applied to the distribution winning device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 having the board surface configuration shown in FIGS. 126 to 133. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

<Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a second modification of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described. The second modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a distribution winning device 8000 is provided instead of the distribution winning device 700. As shown in FIG. 134, the distribution winning apparatus 8000 includes a distribution winning apparatus 64c in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 40A and 40B) and a distribution winning apparatus 700 in the fourth embodiment (FIG. (See 81)). The basic function of the distribution winning apparatus 8000 is the same as that of the distribution winning apparatus 700 (see FIG. 81), and a ball has entered the first working opening 8040 of the distribution winning apparatus 8000 (sorting). In this case, the first actuation accessory 645a associated with the right first ball entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. On the other hand, when the ball is distributed to the second operation port 8070 provided inside the distribution winning device 8000 (when the ball is entered), the second operation accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance port is opened. Then, the ball is ready to enter the right second entrance 64b.

When the ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high rate of being given the probability variation state of the special symbol when it is a big hit, so for the player Be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation port (whether to enter the first operation port 8040 or the second operation port 8070) through which the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 enters. it can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 134, on the upper surface of the distribution winning apparatus 8000, an electric auditors product 8010 having the same configuration as the electric auditors product 701 of the distribution winning apparatus 700 in the fourth embodiment is provided. This electric accessory 8010, like the electric accessory 701 described above, is in an open state (immersion state) in which a ball can enter (easy) and a closed state (projection in which a ball cannot enter (difficult). State) and can be switched to. This electric accessory 8010 is set to an open state when it is hit by a lottery for a normal symbol.

The game sphere that has entered from the electric accessory 8010 into the distribution winning apparatus 8000 flows down the guide flow path 8020. The guide passage 8020 is provided with a magnetic sensor 8030a for detecting the passage of game balls (the number of game balls entering the distribution winning apparatus 8000). Further, adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are provided below the magnetic sensor 8030a. The game ball that has passed through the opening 8030c between the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b enters either the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070 provided downstream thereof. As described above, when the ball enters (is distributed) to the first operating port 8040, the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first entering port 64a2 switches to the open state, and the right first entering The ball can enter the ball opening 64a2. On the other hand, when the ball is distributed to the second operation port 8070 provided inside the distribution winning device 8000 (when the ball is entered), the second operation accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance port is opened. Then, the ball is ready to enter the right second entrance 64b.

The adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are configured so that the inclination can be adjusted by a clerk of a game store or the like, like the adjusting nails t1 and t2 in the first embodiment. As the adjusting nail 8030a is adjusted so as to be inclined downward, the upper side of the first operating port 8070 is blocked by the adjusting nail 8030b, and as a result, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to advance to the second operating port 8070. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the first operation port 8040. On the contrary, as the game nail 8030b is adjusted to be inclined downward, the upper part of the second operation port 8040 is blocked by the adjustment nail 8030b, and as a result, the game ball is less likely to advance to the first operation port 8040. It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the first operation port 8070.

As described above, in this modification, the operating port (the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070) that facilitates ball entry in the time saving state can be changed by adjusting the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b. .. That is, whether the ball easily enters the right first entrance 64a2 or the right second entrance 64b when right-handed in the time saving state (and the probability variation state). Since it can be changed, it is possible to change the probability (ratio) of the probability variation state being given in the case of a big hit. More specifically, by tilting the adjusting nail 8030b downward so as to prevent the ball from entering the first operating port 8040, and when right-handing is performed in a probable state, only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Can be configured. Therefore, the continuation rate of the probability variation state can be set to 80%. On the other hand, by tilting the adjusting nail 8030a downward so as to prevent the ball from entering the second operation port 8070, when the player strikes right in a probable state, only the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the continuation rate of the probability variation state can be set to 50%. As described above, in the present modification, the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are configured to be adjustable, so that the probability variation plunge ratio of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the gaming shop.

Further, when adjusting the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b, the ball entering one of the operating ports (the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070) is completely blocked, and the game ball enters only the other operating port. Instead of being configured to be capable of balls, it is possible to allow game balls to enter both operation ports and make adjustments so as to make the ratio of entering balls different.

For example, as the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are tilted to the right in the front view, it is possible to increase the ratio of the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 8000 and that enter the first operating port 8040. On the other hand, as the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are tilted to the left when viewed from the front, it is possible to increase the proportion of the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 8000 and that enter the second operating port 8070. Therefore, by varying the degree of adjustment of the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b, it is necessary to provide an individual in which the probability variation state is likely to continue (a game ball easily enters the second operation port 8070) or an individual in which the probability variation state is difficult to continue. You can Therefore, the player can be made to select the table more seriously, so that the player's interest can be improved at the stage of selecting the table before the game is performed.

In addition, in the distribution winning apparatus 8000 of this modified example, since the switching valve 702 is deleted, it is not possible to switch the type of the time saving state during the game, but the configuration can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, since the time saving identification flag 203cs can be deleted, the processing for switching the opening pattern of the electric accessory 8010 with reference to the time saving identification flag 203cs in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the value of the time saving identification flag 203cs at the end of the jackpot are set. It is possible to delete the processing set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

The distribution winning apparatus 8000 according to the present modification may be applied to the distribution winning apparatus 700 of the pachinko machine 10 having the board configuration shown in FIGS. 126 to 133. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

Further, the present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is not provided. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

A pachinko machine in which some or all of the above-described embodiments are combined may be used.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Below, in addition to the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Switch between V confirmation lottery route and continuous lottery route in the attacker)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery means for executing the lottery, the winning opening to which the first benefit which is advantageous to the player by the entering of the playing ball is given, and the playing ball enters the winning opening. A variable means for changing between a possible first state and a second state that is more difficult to enter than the first state, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the variable means is changed to the second state. In a gaming machine having a variable control means for changing the state from the first state to a first state, a first ball entering area which is arranged inside the winning port and into which a game ball entering the winning port can enter, A second benefit different from the first benefit area and a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first benefit area is provided. 2 Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entering area, a privilege granting unit that grants a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege, and the variable unit is changed by the variable control unit. And a switching means for switching between a first ball entering state in which the ball can enter the first ball entering area and a second ball entering state in which the ball can enter the second ball entering area depending on the timing. A gaming machine A1 characterized by the above.

Here, for example, after a predetermined display mode appears, by passing the game ball through a predetermined region provided on the game board, a lottery for the type of jackpot game based on the predetermined region through which the game ball has passed. There is known a gaming machine in which the jackpot game is started by the type of the jackpot game that has been drawn. The lottery ratio of the type of jackpot game is different for each of the plurality of predetermined areas provided, and by the player selecting one of the plurality of predetermined areas and passing the game ball. A gaming machine in which the type of jackpot game is selected by lottery has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In this case, it is possible to increase the interest of the player until the jackpot game which is a bonus game is given, but after the jackpot game is given, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired early. was there.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the specific lottery result is obtained, it is possible to give the second benefit or the third benefit in addition to the first benefit at the timing when the variable means is changed by the variable control means. Therefore, even after a specific lottery result is obtained, it is possible to be interested in the privilege to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A1, a first flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the first ball entry area and a second flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the second ball entry area are provided in the winning opening. The switching means has a distribution member that is variable between a first distribution state that distributes the game balls that have entered the winning opening to the first flow path and a second distribution state that distributes the game ball to the second flow path, A gaming machine A2 comprising at least variable control means for varying the distribution member to one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state at a predetermined timing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the flow paths to be sorted are variable depending on the state of the sorting member, so that the enjoyment of predicting the state of the sorting member is provided after a specific lottery result is obtained. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first rotating body which is arranged in the winning opening and has a plurality of ball-entering areas around which game balls including the first ball-entering area can enter And a second rotating body having a plurality of ball entry areas around which a game ball including the second ball entry area can enter, and at least during a period in which the game ball can enter at least the winning opening. A gaming machine A3 having one rotation body and rotation control means for rotating the second rotation body in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A2, the first entry area of the first rotating body that rotates in the predetermined direction and the second rotating body of the second rotating body that rotates in the predetermined direction. It is possible to pay attention to which of the entry areas the player enters. As a result, the player pays attention to the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a specific winning opening configured so that a gaming ball different from the winning opening can be entered, and a winning state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening and the winning A specific variable means that can be changed to a regulated state that is more difficult to enter than the state, and the variable control means, when the specific lottery result is determined by the lottery means, the variable One of the means or the specific variable means is selected to variably control the second state to the first state or the regulated state to the ball entering state.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the winning opening to which the second benefit or the third benefit is given can be changed by the changing means, or the specific winning opening which is not Any one of the variable by the specific variable means is selected. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the prize-winning port and the special prize-winning port can be changed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

<Characteristic B group> (V confirmation and continuous lottery)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery means for executing the lottery, the winning opening to which the first benefit which is advantageous to the player by the entering of the playing ball is given, and the playing ball enters the winning opening. A variable means for changing between a possible first state and a second state that is more difficult to enter than the first state, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the variable means is changed to the second state. In a gaming machine having a variable control means for changing the state from the state to the first state until a predetermined condition is established, a gaming ball placed inside the winning opening and into which the gaming ball entered the winning opening can enter. A first benefit area, a second benefit area different from the first benefit area, and a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first benefit area. And a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit, based on the first deciding means for deciding whether or not to grant the game ball and the game ball entering the second entry area. Second determining means for deciding whether or not to perform, and the first ball entering area is arranged upstream of the second ball entering area, and the game ball enters the first ball entering area and the first ball entering area 1. A gaming machine B1 having a guiding path for guiding the entered game ball to the second ball entering area when the second privilege is not given by the 1 determining means.

Here, for example, after a predetermined display mode appears, by passing the game ball through a predetermined region provided on the game board, a lottery for the type of jackpot game based on the predetermined region through which the game ball has passed. There is known a gaming machine in which the jackpot game is started by the type of the jackpot game that has been drawn. The lottery ratio of the type of jackpot game is different for each of the plurality of predetermined areas provided, and by the player selecting one of the plurality of predetermined areas and passing the game ball. A gaming machine in which the type of jackpot game is selected by lottery has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In this case, it is possible to increase the interest of the player until the jackpot game which is a bonus game is given, but after the jackpot game is given, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired early. was there.

According to the gaming machine B1, even when the player enters the first ball-entering area and the second privilege is not given, the game ball is guided to the second ball-entering area to give the third benefit. The player may be given the opportunity to decide whether or not to be decided. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect as to whether the second benefit or the third benefit is further given to the player even during the game in which the first benefit is given to the player. Therefore, various effects can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress an inconvenience of getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine B1, a first rotating body, which is arranged in the winning opening and has a plurality of entering areas around which a game ball including the first entering area can enter, is arranged in the winning opening. A second rotating body having a plurality of ball entry areas around which a game ball including the second ball entry area can enter, and the first rotation at least during a period in which the game ball can enter the winning opening. A gaming machine B2 having a body and a rotation control means for rotating the second rotating body in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, a first ball entering area of the first rotating body rotating in a predetermined direction and a second ball entering area of the second rotating body rotating in the predetermined direction. You can focus on which one you enter. As a result, the player pays attention to the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific winning opening configured so that a gaming ball different from the winning opening can be entered, and a winning state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening and the winning state Specific changing means that can be changed to a regulation state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and the variable control means, when the lottery means determines that the specific lottery result, the variable means or the A gaming machine B3, wherein either one of the specific changing means is selected and variably controlled from the second state to the first state or from the regulation state to the ball entering state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the winning opening to which the second benefit or the third benefit is given is changed by the changing means, or the specific winning opening other than that is specified changing means. Either one of them is selected. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the prize-winning port and the special prize-winning port can be changed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

The gaming machine Z1 wherein each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball becomes a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a large amount of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

<Characteristic C group> (Selectable pachinko)
A passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first area where a game ball passing through the passage opening can enter, a second area different from the first area, and the first area Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first game value, the first giving means capable of giving the first game value, and based on the fact that the game ball entered the second area, A ratio of a second giving means capable of giving a second game value different from the game value, and a game ball having passed through the passage opening entering each of the first region and the second region. An adjusting unit capable of adjusting the game machine C1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of ball entrances into which a game ball can enter are arranged, and when a game ball enters the ball entrance, the game ball enters the ball entrance in advance. There is known a gaming machine configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-269071). In this case, the game store side cannot set the number of prize balls, etc., and must purchase a game machine in which the number of prize balls, the jackpot probability, etc. that match the business method of the game store are preset. Instead, in order to change the business method, it was necessary to newly purchase a game machine suitable for the business method.

According to the gaming machine C1, the adjusting means can adjust the ratio of the game ball that has passed through the passage opening into each of the first area and the second area. Therefore, for example, if the adjusting means adjusts the ball entry rate to the first area to be higher than the second area, it is possible to set the gaming machine to which the first game value is easily given, and by the adjusting means. It is possible to set the gaming machine to which the second game value is easily given, by adjusting the ball entry rate to the second area to be higher than the first area. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the game value that can be given to the player, it is possible to change the game value at a lower cost than installing a new game machine.

The gaming machine C1 has a payout means capable of paying out a game ball to the player, and the first number of game balls are based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first area. A second number of game balls different from the first number is paid out as one of the first game values by the payout means and a game ball enters the second area. A gaming machine C2, which is paid out as one of the second gaming values by the above.

According to the gaming machine C2, a different number of game balls are paid out to the player in the first area and the second area, so that the profit on the game shop side can be easily adjusted by adjusting the entry rate by the adjusting means. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a lottery means for executing the same lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first area and the second area, respectively, and a specific lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine C3, comprising: a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first entry area and the second entry area, different game values are given even though the same lottery is executed, so whether the privilege game is executed even if the entry ratio is adjusted by the adjusting means. The lottery can be configured so that the lottery is evenly performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played without changing the degree of expectation of the privilege game even if the game value to be given is adjusted.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the adjusting means has an adjusting portion that can be adjusted directly from the outside of the gaming machine, and the adjusting portion is covered from the front side to adjust the adjusting portion. A gaming machine having a cover body that can be changed between a difficult first state and a second state in which the adjustment unit is easier to adjust than the first state. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the illegal adjustment of the adjusting means can be suppressed by setting the cover body in the first state. is there.

In the gaming machine C4, the cover body has a visually difficult means that makes it difficult to visually recognize the adjusting portion when the cover body is changed to the first state.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the state of the adjusting section becomes difficult to see because the cover body is changed to the first state by the difficult-to-recognize means. There is an effect that a game can be played without worrying that the game machine is owned.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust a ball entry width into the first region and a ball entry width into the second region. Gaming machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C5, the entering rate can be adjusted by changing the entering width, so that the entering rate can be adjusted by an easy operation. is there.

In the gaming machines C1 to C6, counting means for counting the number of gaming balls that have respectively passed through the first area and the second area, and the first area in a predetermined period based on the count value by the counting means. For each of the second area, a calculating means for calculating a ball entry rate for the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, and a notifying means for notifying the calculation result by the calculating means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine C7 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C6, it is possible to notify the entry rate of the first area and the second area when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the adjustment means adjusts the entry rate. There is an effect that it is possible to actually confirm the ball entry rate.

<Feature D group>
A passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first area where a game ball passing through the passage opening can enter, a second area different from the first area, and the first area Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first game value, the first giving means capable of giving the first game value, and based on the fact that the game ball entered the second area, The ratio of the second giving means capable of giving a second game value different from the game value and the game ball having passed through the passage opening entering each of the first area and the second area. An adjusting device capable of adjusting, and a gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the game ball passing through the passage opening into each of the first region and the second region by the adjusting means. Therefore, for example, if the adjusting means adjusts the ball entry rate to the first area to be higher than the second area, it is possible to set the gaming machine to which the first game value is easily given, and by the adjusting means. It is possible to set the gaming machine to which the second game value is easily given, by adjusting the ball entry rate to the second area to be higher than the first area. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the game value that can be given to the player, it is possible to change the game value at a lower cost than installing a new game machine.

The gaming machine D1 has a lottery means for executing a lottery, and the lottery is executed by the lottery means as the first game value and the second game value, and the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In this case, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the lottery as the second game value is more likely to be provided with a privilege that is advantageous to the player than the lottery as the first game value.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, a lottery is executed as the first gaming value and the second gaming value, and the size of the privilege given according to the lottery result is different. There is an effect that the gambling property can be adjusted by adjusting by.

In the gaming machine D2, display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means, and then stop display with the identification information indicating the lottery result Display means, first storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of identification information indicating the lottery result for the first game value are stored, and dynamic identification information indicating the lottery result for the second game value. Second storage means in which a plurality of display modes are stored, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means from the first storage means or the second storage means A gaming machine D3 characterized by having a mode determining means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the identification displayed on the display means depending on whether the game ball enters the first area or when the game ball enters the second area. The dynamic display mode of information can be made different, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a fresh game by adjusting the adjusting means.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the lottery means has a probability setting means for setting a probability of being drawn with the specific lottery result, and has a probability of being set as the second game value rather than a lottery as the first game value. A gaming machine D4, wherein a lottery is more likely to be set to a higher lottery probability than the normal time by the probability setting means when the specific lottery result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the first region and the second region are set such that the proportions of the lottery probabilities higher than those in the normal time are set differently. There is an effect that it is possible to easily adjust the profit of the amusement store by adjusting it according to the store.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the adjusting means has an adjusting portion that can be adjusted directly from outside the gaming machine, and the adjusting portion is covered from the front side to adjust the adjusting portion. A gaming machine having a cover body that can be changed between a difficult first state and a second state in which the adjustment unit is easier to adjust than the first state. D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, it is possible to prevent the adjustment means from being illegally adjusted by setting the cover body in the first state. is there.

In the gaming machine D5, the cover body has a visually difficult means that makes it difficult to visually recognize the adjusting portion when the cover body is changed to the first state.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, the state of the adjusting section becomes difficult to see because the cover body is changed to the first state by the difficult-to-see means, so that the player is provided with the adjusting section. There is an effect that a game can be played without worrying that the game machine is owned.

One of the gaming machines D1 to D6 is characterized in that the adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust a ball entry width into the first region and a ball entry width into the second region. Gaming machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the game machines D1 to D6, since the ball entrance rate can be adjusted by changing the ball entrance width, the effect that the ball entrance rate can be adjusted by an easy operation is provided. is there.

In the gaming machines D1 to D7, counting means for counting the number of gaming balls that have respectively passed through the first gaming area and the second gaming area, and the first gaming area based on the count value by the counting means. Calculation means for calculating a ball entry rate in a predetermined period for the game balls that have passed through the passage openings in the second game area, and an informing means capable of informing the calculation result by the calculation means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine D8 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the entry rate of the first area and the second area can be notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the adjustment means adjusts. There is an effect that it is possible to actually confirm the ball entry rate.

<Characteristic E group> (2 types of non-electricity and V accuracy and multiple accuracy changes)
A variable ball entering means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state, and the variable ball entering means to satisfy the opening condition. Based on the variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state based on the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path of the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means. Based on a game ball entering the first flow path, the game ball can enter the first ball entering means, and based on the game ball entering the second flow path, the game ball To the second ball entering means and the second ball entering means for executing the first judgment based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered, a second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination and the first discriminating means gives a first privilege when a specific first discrimination result is obtained, and the second discrimination means is provided. A gaming machine E1 comprising: a privilege granting unit that grants a second privilege, which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, when the determination unit has a specific second determination result.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege granted by the privilege granting means is made different between the specific first determination result and the specific second determination result, so that the player can use the first flow path and the second flow path. There is an effect that the degree of expectation can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1, the game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means are distributed to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and to the variable ball entering means. A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed in the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed in the second flow path, Characteristic gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the distribution between the first flow path and the second flow path can be changed depending on the distribution state set by the distribution state setting means. There is an effect that interest can be improved by making the user interested in which one of the distribution states is set.

In the gaming machine E2, the sorting state setting means determines the first sorting state or the second sorting state based on the determination of the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second distribution state based on the specific second determination result rather than the specific first determination result. ..

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, there is an effect that the player can expect the player to expect a specific second determination result and improve the interest.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a second variable ball entering means capable of changing between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. And a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game state that sets a game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area Setting means, and the privilege granting means changes the second variable ball entering means as the first privilege or the second privilege from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in the case of the second privilege, the game machine E4 makes it easier to enter the specific area than the first privilege.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not a gaming ball enters a specific area, thereby providing a novel gaming property. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine E4, the game state setting means determines the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result as the game state advantageous to the player, or the second determination means determines the specific state. A gaming machine E5, characterized in that the probability of being discriminated as the second discrimination result is set higher than usual.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the probability of being discriminated as the specific second determination result by the gaming state setting means is set to be high, so that the second determination specific to the player in a short period of time. Since the result is easily discriminated, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early because of a change in the game.

In the gaming machine E4, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state in which a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the gaming state in which the privilege game is executed is set by the gaming state setting means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a rut of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first flow path, the first ball entering means is brought into a state in which the game ball can enter the first ball entering means. Means for setting the first ball entering means into a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered, and based on the fact that the game ball entered the first flow path. It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a predetermined number of game balls have entered the first ball entering means. A game machine E7, characterized in that the game machine E7 has means for setting the state.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, it is possible to stably enter a predetermined number of game balls into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, which is stable. There is an effect that the played game can be executed.

<Feature F group> (G type)
A variable ball entering means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state, and the variable ball entering means to satisfy the opening condition. Based on the variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state based on the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path of the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means. Sorting means capable of sorting the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means into one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the first Sorting state setting means for setting a first sorting state that is easily sorted to the flow path and a second sorting state that is easily sorted to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path. Based on, the first ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter, and the second ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the second flow path. , Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, a first judging means for executing a first judgment, and based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, Second discrimination means for executing two discriminations, and the first discrimination means executes the first privilege game when the first discrimination result becomes the specific first discrimination result, and the second discrimination means becomes the specific second discrimination result. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed when the specific second determination result is obtained rather than the specific first determination result, the second distribution state is set. There is an effect that the game can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the distribution state setting means according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine F2 characterized by having a ratio changing means for changing a setting ratio set to and.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the first distribution state and the second distribution state are determined according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. Since the ratio set to any one of the states is variable, there is an effect that the game can be diversified depending on the game state as well as the determination result.

In the gaming machine F2, a plurality of game states are set as the game states, and one of the plurality of game states is set based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A gaming machine F3 having selection setting means for selecting and setting the gaming state of.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the selection setting means selects and sets one gaming state based on the result of the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved by not only the determination result but also the set game state.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a second variable ball entering means capable of changing between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. And a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a privilege giving means for giving a benefit to the player when the game ball enters the specific area A gaming machine F4 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is an effect that a game can be played that expects whether or not a player will enter a specific area, so that the game can be diversified.

In the gaming machine F4, the privilege granted by the privilege granting means sets the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result to be high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, the probability of being discriminated as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result can be varied, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. ..

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the specific first condition is satisfied until the end condition is satisfied based on the specific condition being satisfied. A gaming machine F6 having special state setting means for setting a determination result or a probability of being determined as the specific second determination result higher than usual.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, it is possible to make the player worry about whether or not the ending condition is satisfied, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. is there.

<Characteristic G group> (Ratio variable depending on the number of times saved)
A variable ball entering means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state, and the variable ball entering means to satisfy the opening condition. Based on the variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state based on the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path of the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means. Sorting means capable of sorting the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means into one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the first Sorting state setting means for setting a first sorting state that is easily sorted to the flow path and a second sorting state that is easily sorted to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path. Based on, the first ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter, and the second ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the second flow path. , Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, a first judging means for executing a first judgment, and based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, Second discrimination means for executing two discriminations, and the first discrimination means executes the first privilege game when the first discrimination result becomes the specific first discrimination result, and the second discrimination means becomes the specific second discrimination result. In the case of, a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and after the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means is finished, Advantageous setting means for facilitating the opening condition to be satisfied until an ending condition is satisfied, and setting means for setting the ending condition by making the specific first determination result different from the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G1, the advantage and disadvantage of the player can be varied depending on the difference in the period until the end condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the ending condition is satisfied based on that the number of times the first determination and the second determination are performed is the number set by the setting means. A gaming machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the end condition is set by the number of times the first determination and the second determination are executed, so the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. There is an effect that the probability of being discriminated as the discrimination result can be easily changed depending on the termination condition.

In the gaming machine G2, the setting means is configured to change and set the set number of times according to a game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. Gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, since the number of times of setting is variably set according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is given, the player is interested in the gaming state to be set. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the distribution state setting means determines the first distribution state and the distribution state according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine G4, characterized by having a ratio changing means for changing a setting ratio set to the second distribution state.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the ratio at which the first distribution state and the second distribution state are set is variable between the first determination and the second determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in which one of the discriminations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Gives shorter time even after rushing with mixer)
The game ball is a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path, a distribution means capable of distributing the game ball to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which distribution is easy to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which distribution is easy to the second flow path, and a game ball enters the first flow path. Based on the fact that the game ball can enter, the first ball entering means, and the game ball can enter the ball based on the game ball entering the second flow path. Means, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, the first judging means for executing the first judgment, and based on the game ball having entered the second ball entering means. A privilege game advantageous to the player when the second determination means for performing the second determination and the first determination result specific by the first determination means or the specific first determination result by the second determination means are obtained. When the special second discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result by the privilege game executing means for executing the above and the second discriminating means is given, the player is given the right to execute the privilege game. Special game execution means for executing a special game to enter the game ball into the area where the game ball can enter the specific area, and the special game is executed when the special game is given by the special game. After being played, a gaming machine H1 having a setting means for setting one of the first sorted state and the second sorted state.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to switch between the first distribution state and the second distribution state when the special game is given through the special game, so that the game can be diversified. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, it is possible to move an opening into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball can enter, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. A gaming machine H2 comprising a movable member and a movable means for moving the movable member from the second state to the first state based on execution of the special game.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the game ball can enter the opening by the execution of the special game, so that a special state can be given to the player, There is an effect that it can have a fresh taste.

The gaming machine H2 has a switching means for switching between a guiding state for guiding the game ball entering the opening to the specific area and a non-guide state for not guiding the game ball to the specific area. Machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the state of entering the specific area can be switched, so that the gambling performance can be easily controlled.

In the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to change between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the entered game ball is the first one. A variable ball entering means that is distributed by the distributing means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the variable ball entering means is changed from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an opening condition. A gaming machine H4 comprising variable control means for varying and a state setting means for setting a state where the opening condition is easily established until an ending condition is established.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H3, a state in which the opening condition is easily established is set, so that a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is obtained depending on the period during which the ending condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the probability of being a discrimination result can be substantially changed to make the game diverse.

In the gaming machine H4, the ending condition is satisfied when the number of times the first determination and the second determination are executed reaches the number set by the state setting means. Machine H5.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, it is established when the end condition is the number of times the first determination and the second determination are executed, which is the number set by the state setting means. There is an effect that the number of times set by the state setting means can be interested.

In the gaming machine H5, the state setting means sets the number of times predetermined by the setting means as the end condition when the first distribution state is set after the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine H6 characterized by setting a state in which an opening condition is easily established.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H5, the state setting means sets the number of times predetermined by the setting means when the first distribution state is set after the privilege game is executed. Since the state in which the release condition is set as the end condition is set easily is set, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

<Characteristic I group> (divided)
Launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area, a first flow-down area in which the game ball can flow down, and a second area in which the game ball flowing down the first flow-down area is difficult to flow down and the game ball can flow down. By partitioning means for partitioning the game area, and varying the firing intensity of the launching means based on the operation of the player, the game ball is directed toward either the first flow-down area or the second area. A launch adjusting means capable of being launched by the launching means, a first ball entering means provided in the first flow-down area, into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball provided in the second flow-down area, A second ball entering means capable of entering a ball, a first judging means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. Second discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on having entered the ball, and a first game state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the first discriminating means discriminates the specific first discrimination result. First setting means capable of setting either one of the second game state, which is disadvantageous to the first game state, and the second determination means, which is determined as a specific second determination result. The second setting means capable of determining one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the first gaming state, the first setting means and the second setting means, A gaming machine I1 characterized by different proportions for setting.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine I1, the ratio of setting the first game state is different depending on which of the first flow-down area and the second flow-down area the game ball is flowed down to. There is an effect that it can be enjoyed and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1, a third ball entering means different from the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, a first state in which a game ball can enter the third ball entering means, and a first state thereof. A variable member that can be changed to a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball, and a predetermined condition is established from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of an opening condition for the variable member. Variable means for changing up to, the first guiding flow path which is advantageous to the player and the second guiding flow which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first guiding flow path for the game ball entered in the third ball entering means. When the first gaming state and the sorting means for sorting to either one of the roads are set, the first guiding flow is set by the sorting means more than when the second gaming state is set. A game machine I2 having a distribution control means for easily distributing a game ball to a road.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, in the case where the first gaming state is set, the gaming balls are easily distributed to the first guiding flow path by the distribution means. There is an effect that the player can be expected to execute the game more expecting that the game state is set.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, means for setting a normal game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state in a normal game, and the first game state or the second game state being set. Based on the above, means for facilitating establishment of the opening condition, and a gaming machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set, so that the opening condition is easily established, so that the advantage of the gaming is achieved step by step. There is an effect that can be changed.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, a first variable ball entering means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and an open state in which the game ball can enter and difficult to enter. The second variable ball entering means that can be changed to the closed state, and the first variable ball entering means can be changed from the closed state to the open state based on the game ball entering the first guiding flow path. Then, in the open state, the first variable means for changing the closed state after the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable ball entering means, and the game ball in the second guiding flow path Based on the fact that the second variable ball entering means is changed from the closed state to the open state, and in the open state, the second variable ball entering means has a predetermined number of game balls. The second variable means for changing the closed state after entering the ball, and, based on the game ball entered the first variable ball entering means, the determination is executed by the first determining means, A gaming machine I4, wherein a discrimination is executed by the second discriminating means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second variable ball admission means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the game ball is stably thrown into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means to stabilize the first determination or the second determination. Thus, there is an effect that the player can be given more discrimination opportunities.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination of the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A gaming machine I5 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the privilege game is executed, so that it is the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. The effect is that you can expect it.

In the gaming machine H5, the privilege game execution means performs the privilege game executed based on the specific second determination result rather than the privilege game executed based on the specific first determination result. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being executed more favorably by a person.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H5, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by expecting a specific second determination result.

In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the first variable ball entering means is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow-down area is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area. The second variable ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the first flow-down area. A gaming machine I7 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the player can enter the game ball into the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means without changing the operation. The effect is that you can.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I8, a first visual recognition state and a first visual recognition state in which it is easy to visually recognize the first flow-down area and the second flow-down area, each having a performance means capable of executing a predetermined performance The visual recognition changing means that can be changed to a second visual recognition state that is more difficult to visually recognize, and either the first flow-down area or the second flow-down area based on the selection operation by the player. A visual recognition variable control means for changing the state to the first visual recognition state, and a gaming machine I8.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the player can visually recognize the first downflow region or the second downflow region by the selection operation, and thus the downflow selected by the player. There is an effect that the area can be recognized easily.

In the gaming machine I8, the selection operation is based on a flow-down area in which a game ball has flowed down by the launching means, and the game machine I9.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I8, there is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize which flow-down area the game ball shot by the launching means has flowed down.

A game machine I10, characterized in that the game machine I8 has operation means operable by a player, and the selection operation operates the operation means.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I8, there is an effect that the flow-down area selected by the player can be recognized in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine Z1 wherein each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball becomes a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a large amount of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
64a First ball entrance (first ball means)
64b Right second entrance (second entrance means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the win/loss of the game is drawn, and if the result of the lot is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A game machine such as a pachinko machine was proposed.

JP, 2003-265765, A

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems , and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the game ball can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state. A ball control means, a variable control means for changing the variable ball control means from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an opening condition, and a game ball that can flow into the variable ball control means. One flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means can be distributed to one of the first flow path and the second flow path. The distribution means, a first distribution state in which the game balls entered in the variable ball insertion means are easily distributed in the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed in the second flow path are set. The distribution state setting means, the first ball entering means for changing the open state in which the game ball can enter and the closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the game ball Second ball entering means that is variable between an open state in which the ball can be entered and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and that the game ball has entered the first flow path. On the basis of, the first ball entering means is changed to the open state, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the first ball entering means is changed to the closed state. 1 Based on the variable means and the game ball entering the second flow path, the second ball entering means is changed to the open state, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. On the basis of the second variable means for changing the second ball entering means to the closed state and the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the first judgment for executing the first judgment is made. Means, a second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball-entering means, and the first discriminating result by the first discriminating means is the first specific The first benefit is given when the result of the determination is determined, and the first benefit is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the specific result of the second determination. 2 has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means can enter a game ball that has not entered the variable ball entering means. It is arranged at a position outside the variable ball entrance means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1 , a variable ball entering means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state, A variable control means for changing the variable ball entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an opening condition, a first flow path through which a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can flow down, and A second flow path different from the first flow path, and a distribution means capable of distributing the game spheres entered in the variable ball insertion means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which the game balls entered in the variable ball-in means are easily distributed in the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is easily distributed in the second flow path. Then, the first ball entering means for changing the open state in which the game ball can enter and the closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the game ball can enter Based on the opening of the game ball into the open state and the closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the game ball entering the first flow path, First variable means for changing the first ball entering means to the open state, and changing the first ball entering means to the closed state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, Based on the game ball entering the second flow path, the second ball entering means is changed to the open state, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, Second changing means for changing the second ball entering means to the closed state; first judging means for executing a first judgment based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; 2 Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means, the second determining means for performing the second determining and the result of the first determining by the first determining means are the specific first determining results. In this case, the first benefit is given, and when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, the second benefit more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is given. The first ball entering means and the second ball entering means can have a game ball that has not entered the variable ball entering means, and a privilege giving means. It is arranged at a position that is external. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a front view of the inside of a distribution winning a prize device in a 1st embodiment, (b) is a partial enlarged view of a distribution entrance mouth in a 1st embodiment, (c) is a. It is a perspective view of the rotating body in one embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 1st Embodiment. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing various counters in a 1st embodiment, and an outline of a reservation sphere storage area. It is a figure which shows the content of RAM in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the content of ROM in the main-control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is correspondence with the 1st random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value of a special symbol in 1st Embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the type of the big hit in 1st Embodiment, and (d). FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit value of a normal symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of disengagement (normal) in 1st Embodiment, FIG. 6D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probability change) in the first embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram shown. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the special design 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the special design 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a gate control process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning a prize detection processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize detection ending processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory related processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of continuous winning which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the probability variation winning a prize processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the inside of the distribution winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which illustrated the display screen which shows the continuation opportunity in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a display screen which shows the probability variation chance in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which illustrated. (A) is a schematic diagram which illustrated the display screen which shows continuation determination in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a display screen which shows probability change determination in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which illustrated. (A) is a front view of the inside of a distribution winning a prize device in a modification of a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the inside of a distribution winning a prize device in a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a front sectional view of the distribution winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is an upper surface sectional view of the distribution winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is an exploded perspective view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device of La-La section in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional view, (c) is 1st in 3rd Embodiment. It is a top view of a variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the main controller in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the type of big hit in the second embodiment, and (c) is a winning opening and payout balls in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with a number typically. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the abnormal processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in 3rd Embodiment, and (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 3rd Embodiment. .. It is a timing chart of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram of the display mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram of the display mode in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the main controller in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation execution determination processing processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot setting process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning a prize processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification receiving process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous display determination process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation design setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the increase time hold symbol setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time reduction symbol setting process at the time of reduction performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the electric power combination opening pattern in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition transfer of the game state in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 selection table in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 2 selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition transfer of the game state in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed typically the electric constitution in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a special figure 1 type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a special figure 2 type selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol 2 change start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing 5 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th execution form. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the 1st per random number table in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the 1st per classification type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram of the 2nd per random number table. And (d) is a schematic diagram of a first small hit type selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hitting setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the usual symbol change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit prize winning processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the V passage jackpot setting processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit prize completion processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the time saving number selection table in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning state determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board in an eighth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the distribution winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the transition transfer of the game state in 8th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram of the 1st per random number table in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of a 1st per classification type selection table. It is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figures 1 in 8th Embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figures 2. It is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special maps 2 in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view showing a game board of a modification in an 8th embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in a modification. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in a modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3A to 3C are distribution winning apparatus 650. 4 is a detailed view of FIG. 4, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, and a distribution winning device 650 having a probability varying rotating body 900 and a continuous rotating body 901 and the like can be attached to and detached from the back side of the inner frame 12. Be attached to. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1 ), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22, for example, inputs game information on the game information input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, changes the stage of the effect, and effects of super reach. It is operated by the player when changing the contents.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in association with a ball (starting prize) into the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, which will be described later, are adapted to the theme given to each stage. Designed to be done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “a stage in the city”→“ It is repeatedly changed in the order of "Sky Stage" → "Island Stage" → "City Stage" →... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is expanded to the super reach, a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. A display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. Be seen. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first prize. The winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the normal winning opening 67, the distribution winning device 650, the variable winning device 165, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. Be done. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the normal winning opening 67, the variable winning device 165, the variable display unit 80, and the distribution winning device 650 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and a shot ball is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70. It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64a, a special symbol 1 (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and when the ball enters the second winning opening 64b. The special symbol 2 (one of the first symbols) is selected by lottery. A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is selected. In the lottery for the special symbol that is performed for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the jackpot game, jackpots of up to 16 rounds are executed. In the present embodiment, at least 8 rounds of jackpots are guaranteed, and if a winning is made in the continuation opening 901a of the continuous rotating body 901 during 8 rounds, 8 rounds of jackpot games are added, and a total of 16 rounds of jackpot games are played. Granted to the person.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first round to the eighth round are configured to have a maximum of 15 seconds, and the total of the game balls won in the second specific entrance 650a is 5 seconds after 15 seconds have elapsed. The distribution winning apparatus 650 is set to an open state until the ball is reached. From the first round to the eighth round, the interval time between the rounds is set to 5 seconds. Here, since both the probability varying rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 arranged in the distribution winning apparatus 650 are rotated at a speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, when the interval of 5 seconds elapses, the probability varying rotation is performed. The game ball held and rotated by the body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 can be in a discharged state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from being held by the probability varying rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 over the rounds.

In the present embodiment, the distribution prize winning device 650 is set to be opened from the first round to the eighth round, and the variable winning device 165 is set to be opened from the ninth round to the 16th round. No, until 15 seconds elapse from the start of one round, the distribution winning apparatus 650 is set to the open state and the variable winning apparatus 165 is set to the closed state, until 15 seconds to 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the one round. Alternatively, the distribution winning apparatus 650 may be set in a closed state, and the variable winning apparatus 165 may be set in an open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to divide a period in which the game balls are won in the distribution prize winning device 650 and a period in which the game balls are entered in the variable winning device 165, and the winning device won by the player is selected. You can choose and play the game. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening width of the second specific ball entrance 650a of the distribution variable winning a prize device 1650 is made smaller than the opening width of the specific ball entrance 165a of the variable award winning device 165 to make it difficult for a game ball to enter. It is configured. As a result, the digestion time of the jackpot game becomes long, but since the variable winning device 165 in which the game ball easily enters after 15 seconds has elapsed, the digestion time of the jackpot game can be shortened.

It should be noted that the winning device that is opened from the start of one round to 15 seconds and thereafter is set to be switched, but it is not limited to this, and may be set to be switched every 3 seconds, for example. You may comprise so that it may set with a cycle other than. Further, the opening cycle is the same in all rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening cycle (timing) may be changed for each round.

Further, the variable winning device 165 may be opened based on the fact that the player has entered the continuation opening 901a. If the player has entered the continuation opening 901a, he/she will enter the probability variation opening 900a described later. If not, the distribution winning device 650 may be continuously opened, and the variable winning device 165 may be opened only when the game ball has already entered the probability variation opening 900a.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b. become. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

As the big hit type of the special symbol, one kind of big hit type “big hit A” is set (see FIG. 9C). As described above, the jackpot type of this "jackpot A" is a jackpot game of at least 8 rounds and a jackpot game of up to 16 rounds can be executed. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit, the start of the "big hit A" is always determined. Then, in this jackpot A, the distribution winning apparatus 650 is opened from the first round to the eighth round. In the 8 round jackpot game, when the game ball enters the continuation opening 901a, the game ball is detected by the continuation switch (not shown), and when the 9th to 16th round jackpot games are awarded, the variable winning is achieved. The device 165 is opened.

From the 1st round to the 8th round, the slide member 670 of the distribution prize winning device 650 is slid toward the back side of the game board 13 to open the game ball into the second specific entrance 650a. Is set. This open state is set to a closed state when five game balls enter the second specific ball inlet 650a or when the open state continues for 15 seconds, and one round of jackpot game is completed. From the first round to the eighth round, the interval time between the rounds is set to 5 seconds.

From the 9th round to the 16th round, the opening/closing door of the variable winning device 165 is rotated to the front side to be in an open state, and the opening/closing door receives the game ball flowing down on the front side of the game board 13 to make a specific entrance. It is configured to guide the game ball into the inside of the mouth 165a. Here, when the variable winning device 165 is in the open state, 10 game balls enter the specific ball inlet 165a, or when the open state has passed for 30 seconds, the open/close door is turned to the upright state and closed. Set to state. The interval time between the 9th round and the 16th round is set to 3 seconds. As a result, the time between the 9th round and the 16th round is shorter than the time between the 1st round and the 8th round. Further, since the opening width of the specific ball entrance 165a of the variable winning device 165 is set to be larger than that of the distribution winning device 650, it is easy for the game ball to enter the ball and the digesting time of one round can be shortened. it can. The size of the specific ball entrance 650a of the distribution winning device 650 is set so that one game ball can enter, as shown in FIG. 3(a), and it is difficult to enter. Is becoming

Details of the distribution winning apparatus 650 arranged on the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 3A to 3C are views for explaining the details of the distribution winning apparatus 650. The distribution winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13 in a state of being inserted into an opening hole processed by a router. The distribution winning device 650 is configured from the front side of the base plate 651 to have substantially the same outer shape as the base plate 651, and by fitting with the base plate 651, a front cover in which a region in which game balls can flow down is formed. And a body 652.

FIG. 3A is a front view of the distribution winning apparatus 650 with the front cover body 652 removed. On the upper part of the base plate 651, one game ball is formed, and a specific ball entrance 650a which is an opening into which a ball can enter is formed so as to project to the front side. Above the specific ball entrance 650a, a slide member 670 for varying the game ball into the specific ball entrance 650a into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter is slid in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10. It is arranged as possible. This slide member 670 is connected to a solenoid arranged on the back side of the base plate 651 by a connecting member, and in a non-actuated state where the solenoid is not excited, the slide member 670 is projected to the front side of the game board to identify it. It is set so as to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance 650a. When the solenoid is excited and operated, the slide member 670 is moved to the back side of the game board 13 by the connecting member, and the specific entrance 650a is set to an open state.

The flow path through which the game ball that has entered the specific ball inlet 650a can flow down is formed by the flow path wall portion 653 that projects to the front side. The flow path wall portion 653 is formed with a width (15 mm in this embodiment) in which one game ball (diameter 11 mm) can flow down, and a flow path is formed in the direction directly below from the distribution ball inlet 650a. Then, after that, a flow path for branching down the game ball flowing down to the left flow path 654 or the right flow path 655 is formed. A magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path immediately below the distribution entrance 650a so as to detect the game sphere entering the distribution entrance 650a. No wall portion is formed on the surface of the flow path that is opposite to the branch point, and the rotation distribution member 800 is arranged. The rotation distributing member 800 has the same width as the protruding width of the flow path wall portion 653, and has a shaft portion 800a for rotatably fixed to the base plate 651. A distribution motor 270a, which is a motor for rotating the rotation distribution member 800, is provided on the back surface side of the base plate 651.

The distribution motor 270a is rotationally controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 rotates the rotary distribution member 800 30 degrees to the right (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 3A) and rotates 30 degrees to the left (the position indicated by the solid line). The distribution motor 270a is driven and rotated every 5 seconds to the position shown by the dotted line in FIG. 3(a). That is, the state of distributing the game balls to the left channel 654 and the state of distributing the game balls to the right channel 655 are switched every 5 seconds. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is turned on every 5 seconds by turning on the pachinko machine 10 and executing a gate control process (S1104) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later. The distribution motor 270a is drive-controlled to repeatedly rotate the rotation distribution member 800. As will be described in detail later, the gate clock counter 203k of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured to be backed up even when the power is cut off. The counting is restarted from the state of 1 and the rotation distribution member 800 is rotated.

Therefore, the rotational distribution member 800 is not driven at the same timing every time the power is turned on, but can be changed depending on the state when the power is cut off. Therefore, even if the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are powered on at the same time, the operation timing of the rotary distribution member 800 can be different.

In the present embodiment, the rotation cycle of the rotary distribution member 800 is fixed at 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be driven so as to be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the drive cycle from being synchronized with another pachinko machine 10. Therefore, depending on the selection of the pachinko machine 10, different playability can be provided.

Below the left flow path opening 654a, which is the lower end of the left flow path, a continuous rotator 901 is rotatably supported with respect to the base body 651. The continuous rotation body 901 is rotated leftward at a rotation speed of 5 seconds by the first rotation motor 270b arranged on the back side of the base body 651. In addition, a positive variable rotating body 900 is rotatably supported by a base body 651 at a right flow passage port 655a which is a lower end portion of the right flow passage 655. The probability varying rotating body 900 is rotated to the right by the second rotation motor 270c arranged on the back side of the base body 651 at a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds. The probability varying rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 have the same shape.

Here, the shapes of the probability varying rotor 900 and the continuous rotor 901 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3C is a perspective view of the probability varying rotating body 900 (continuous rotating body 901). The probability varying rotating body 900 has a circular outer shape, and has a thickness equivalent to one game ball. Around the periphery, recesses into which game balls can enter are formed at four locations, up, down, left and right. The concave portion provided in the periphery is composed of one probability variation opening 900a and three rotation entrances 900b to 900d. The probability variation port 900a is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the back side of the probability variation rotating body 900 so that the game ball can be guided to the probability variation flow path port 901k provided in the base plate 651. In addition, the rotation ball entrances 900b to 900d are provided with wall portions on the back side that prevent guiding the game ball to the probability variation channel opening 901k. Further, the continuous rotating body 901 also has the same configuration as that of the probability varying rotor 900, and in the continuous rotating body 901, the probability varying port 900a is formed as the continuous port 901a.

In a state where the probability varying rotor 900 is rotated to a position where the opening of the probability variation port 900a faces the right flow channel port 655a, the game ball flowing down the right flow channel 655 can enter the probability variation port 900a. The probability varying rotating body 900 is always rotated to the right at a rotation speed of one rotation for 5 seconds, and when a game ball enters the probability varying opening 900a while rotating, the game ball is held in the probability varying opening 900a. When the probability variation opening 900a is turned downward in the above state and the probability variation opening 900a faces downward (the position shown in FIG. 3A), the game ball in the probability variation opening 900a flows down to the probability variation passage opening 900k. The game ball that has flowed into the probability variation channel opening 900k is detected by a probability variation switch (magnetic sensor) (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 13. When a game ball is detected by this probability variation switch, a probability variation flag 203p described later is set to ON by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and 100 is set to the probability variation counter 203g at the end of the jackpot game (timing of ending). In the period until the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot game, a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability is set.

Further, when the game ball flowing down the right flow path 655 enters any of the rotation entrance ball openings 900b to 900d of the probability variation rotating body 900, the probability variation rotating body 900 rotates to the left, and the probability variation channel opening 900k. Even if it is rotated to the position, the game ball cannot flow down to the probability variation channel port 900k due to the back side wall portion of the rotary ball inlet port 900b, and the game ball within the rotary ball port 900b to 900d is discharged to the discharge channel 656. Discharge. The game ball discharged to the discharge flow path 656 flows down the discharge flow path 656, and is discharged to the back surface side of the game board 13 through a discharge port 657 formed at the lower end of the discharge flow path 656, and the game board 13 is discharged. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (on the side of the island facility) by a flow path (not shown) arranged on the back side.

In this way, the probability variable rotating body 900 is constantly rotated at a speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, and the distribution member 800 is also rotated every 5 seconds to switch the distribution direction. Therefore, in the case of a big hit game, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the probability variation entrance 900k is set once in one round, and the player's expectation for the probability variation game is increased. You can Therefore, it is possible to be interested in whether or not the probability variation game is given even during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot of the special symbol is achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the jackpot. is there.

The continuous rotating body 901 is constantly rotated leftward at a rotation speed of 5 seconds per rotation. Therefore, similar to the probability varying rotating body 900, when the game ball flowing down the left flow path 654 enters the continuation opening 901a, the game ball is held in the continuation opening 901a and rotated leftward, and the continuous flow path is formed. The game ball inside the continuation opening 901a is made to flow down to the continuation flow path 901k at a position facing 901k. The game ball that has flowed into the continuous old flow path 901k flows down to the back side of the game board 13 and is detected by a continuation switch (magnetic sensor) not shown, and then to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (to the side of the island facility). Is discharged.

Here, when a game ball is detected by the continuation switch, a round start flag 203m described later is set to ON by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 113. When the round start flag 203m is set to ON, the start of the next round is set if the current number of rounds is less than 16.

In this way, the continuous rotating body 901 is rotated at a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, and the distribution member 800 also switches the distribution direction every 5 seconds. Therefore, during one round of the jackpot game, the right flow path is surely generated. Since the continuation opening 901a faces the left channel opening 654a in the state where the game balls are distributed to 654, the player can be expected to set (continue) the next round. Therefore, even during the big hit game, it is possible to make the player play the game with an interest in the flow of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the big hit.

Further, the probability varying rotating body 900 is rotated by the first rotating motor 270b (see FIG. 6) formed of a stepping motor as described above. Similarly, the continuous rotation body 901 is rotated by the second rotation motor 270c (see FIG. 6) configured by a stepping motor. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, in the process of S1011 in the startup process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the probability variation rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are initially set. The operation settings are executed. For the setting of this initial operation, the origin positions of the first rotary motor 270b and the second rotary body motor 270c (the origin positions of the probability varying rotary body 900 and the continuous rotary body) are set.

The probability variable rotating body 900 is provided with a detection piece (not shown) fixed to the rotating shaft 900z on the back surface side of the base plate 651. When the probability variation port 900a of the probability variation rotating body 900 is rotated to a position facing the above-described probability variation flow path port 900k (see FIG. 3A), a detection piece (not shown) is detected by the photosensor. Is configured. In the initial operation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, based on the fact that the positive variable rotating body 900 is rotated rightward and the photo sensor (not shown) detects the detection piece (not shown), The operation of the first rotary motor 270b is stopped and the step counter is set to zero. The step counter is a counter for controlling the operation of the first rotation motor 270b, and is configured to be able to determine the rotational position of the probability varying rotating body 900 by the number of counters. Similarly, for the initial operation of the continuous rotating body 900, when the photosensor detects the detection piece by rotating the second rotary motor 270c to the left, the operation is stopped, and the step for the second rotary motor 270c is performed. The counter is set to zero. Also in the continuous rotating body 901, the position where the detection piece is detected by the photosensor is the position where the continuous flow path 901k and the continuous opening 901a face each other.

In the present embodiment, the rotational speeds of the probability varying rotor 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are constant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on, the rotational speeds of the probability varying rotor 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are respectively determined by lottery. You may comprise so that it may be determined by lottery. Further, the rotation speed may be changed depending on the time (for example, every one hour) after the power is turned on. In such a configuration, when the rotation speed is set to be set fast for one hour when the power is turned on, there are many opportunities to enter the probability variation opening 900a or the continuation opening 901a in the time zone immediately after the rotation. Therefore, it is possible to set a period advantageous to the player.

In the probability variation game state (high probability game state) where the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to high probability, the lottery probability of the special symbol is low probability game state (normal game state until the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot game) ) Time 1/400 to 1/40 in the high probability game state (probability variation game state). Further, in the probability variation gaming state, a time-saving gaming state (probability of a normal symbol is set to a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory 64c becomes long, and the number of times of opening is set to a large number) is also set. Therefore, in the probability variation game state, it becomes easy to enter the second winning opening 64b, and by winning the second winning opening 64b to the player, the frequency of paying out the winning balls increases, thereby The decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. Therefore, the player can suppress the consumption of balls and play the probability variation game state, and by winning the jackpot in the probability variation game state, the player can further accumulate the game balls obtained during the jackpot game.

Here, "probability variation game state of special symbols (high probability state)" means a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols has increased, the so-called special symbol probability state (probably changing special symbols), in other words, special It is a game state in which it is easy to shift to the game state. On the other hand, if the "high probability state of the special symbol" is not the "normal game state of the special symbol (low probability state)", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. It shows that the jackpot probability is in a normal state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "the time saving state of the normal symbol" (time saving of the regular symbol) means that the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the electric accessory 64c provided in association with the second winning opening 64b plays the game ball. It is a game state in which the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 64b (inverted C shape (see FIG. 2)) and a ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", which means that the winning probability of ordinary symbol is normal, that is, the winning probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

Instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, as the time to open the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b and the number of times to open the electric accessory 64c per hit of the normal symbol is changed. Is also good. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, "high probability state of the special symbol" and "time saving state of the normal symbol", but after the "high probability state of the special symbol" ends, "time saving state of the normal symbol" It may be configured such that Instead of the special symbol lottery number, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to distribute the sphere entering the specific entrance 650a to either the probability varying rotator 900 or the continuous rotator 901. The configuration is not limited to the distribution winning apparatus 650 in which balls can be entered in the big hit. For example, the distribution prize winning device 650 is configured to be opened other than a big hit, and further, in place of the probability varying rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901, a ball entrance for triggering a lottery for a special symbol is provided, respectively. Good. In this case, the entrances may be entrances with different degrees of advantage (for example, different award balls that can be obtained in the case of a big hit or different probability changes). For example, a ball entrance provided in the arrangement of the probability varying rotor 900 may be advantageous. Further, as the timing of opening the distribution winning a prize device 650, for example, it may be configured to be opened when a normal symbol is hit. In this case, in the case of hitting one normal symbol, the opening pattern in which the specific entrance 650a is opened only during the period when the rotation distribution member 800 is inclined to the right, and the rotation distribution member 800 is on the left side. The opening pattern in which the specific entrance port 650a is opened only during the state of being inclined to the position may be provided. That is, as the time saving state (and the probability change state), a time saving state in which a lottery can be executed with an advantageous entrance and a time saving in which a lottery can be executed with a relatively disadvantageous entrance are provided. Good.

With such a configuration, since it is possible to focus on the ball entrance into which the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 650 enters, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

On the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2), a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided with a first symbol. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are variably displayed by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol, which is performed in association with the entry into the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (starting winning), is being executed by a lighting state. Or, as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, shows a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol in a lighting state, or is inserted into the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not yet been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

If the ball enters the first winning opening 64a while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times of entering the ball is held up to four times, The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown by the third symbol display device 81. Even when the player enters the second winning opening 64b, the number of times of entering the ball is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as reduced working hours. Further, the LED 37a indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as the stopped symbol after the end of the fluctuation.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64a (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is out of the range, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

The variable display of the special symbol showing the lottery result of the lottery game of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is not performed at the same time, but only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol 2 is set with priority.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom for periodical display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64a, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64a while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entered balls is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the corresponding sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, the reserved balls of the second winning opening 64b are set in the same manner by using the number of reserved balls different from the first winning opening 64a (for example, a symbol).

In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 is being performed, and the variation ends. As a later stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the sphere passes through the normal entrance 67, a variation in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. .. Four second design holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, as in the case of the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The number of times may be set more than once (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64a and a second winning opening 64b into which balls can enter are arranged. When a ball enters the first winning opening 64a, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for the special symbol 1 is made at 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Similarly for the second winning opening 64b, when a ball enters, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A lottery for the special symbol 2 is made by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b are also one of the winning openings for paying out five balls as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, as will be described later in detail, the number of winning balls, which is the number of balls won in the switch reading process (S101) of the main controller 110 due to the turning on of the first winning hole switch or the second winning hole switch, The number of acquired balls, which is the number of balls paid out as prize balls, is stored in the winning detection information area (not shown) of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

A variable winning device 165 is provided on the upper right of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b. In the open state of the variable winning device 165, a game ball that has been launched so that the game ball passes through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a game ball that has been launched by a right hit) is arranged at a position where it is easy to win. .. Specifically, the variable winning device 165 is a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing door that covers the specific ball entrance 165a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. ) And. The specific ball entrance 165a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific ball inlet 165a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the state. As described above, the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state when the ninth to 16th rounds are executed during the big hit game.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific entrance 165a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific entrance 165a is opened for a predetermined time, A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific entrance 165a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball enters the specific entrance 165a during opening of the specific entrance 165a. May be formed as a special game state.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate or an identification label are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate or the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is provided on the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, on the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box side are closed. Cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used in the lottery of the special symbol and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 22). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b each including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are adjusted in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b. Are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is stored. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of being a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability of a high probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol than at the time of that low probability (special. It is divided into two types: for the period when the symbol has a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (FIG. 9B) includes a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The numbers of random numbers that are jackpots are different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of alignment, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first per random number table 202a for low probability. (See FIG. 9B). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/400”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-9” is the first random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 9(b ) Reference). In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "1/40".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The value of the first hit type counter C2 and the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 9C). In this embodiment, the value “0 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit A, and the big hit A is always selected when the big hit occurs.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type set in the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 9(c)) is only one type of the jackpot A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be selected. You may comprise. Further, the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot type selected respectively for the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set to have different types and proportions.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol "disconnect reach." "(For example, the range of 90 to 99)" and "complete disconnection" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 stores the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a special symbol, or the like.

For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow and for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely out".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table (see FIGS. 10B to 10D) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main controller 110. Is provided in the ROM 202.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10C). And a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) are set. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various normal reach types (30 seconds), super reach types (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as jackpot variation patterns. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, "0 to 50" for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "51 to 179" for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and various special reach (90 seconds) ), the variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, hits the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach “198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out during the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined and is acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation game state is higher than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when it is out of the normal is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every time a timer interrupt process is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the normal entrance (through gate) 67 on either side. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 10D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When the second random number table (see FIG. 10(d)) matches the value of the random number that is the winning number, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table, for low probability of normal symbols (time period in which the normal state of normal symbols), and high probability when the probability of hitting normal symbols is higher than that for low probability (normal symbols) It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state) and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10D, when the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are the symbols of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is within the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first winning opening 64a is opened only for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first winning port 64a is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first winning opening 64a is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further the release period of the first winning opening 64a. Is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64a. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first winning opening 64a is opened for "1 second×2 times", but the opening time The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 22) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 21). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 8, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, big hit flag 203i, winning detection period storage area 203j, gate clock counter 203k, round start flag 203m, a round counter 203n, a round continuation flag 203p, a probability variation flag 203r, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64a (special symbol 1), and one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) Each of these areas stores the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64a (starting winning) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting winning, immediately the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that various types of information include win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning/prohibiting, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as the prize information, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 233 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From this, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state is always predicted in the prefetch determination. This is, in the present embodiment, whether or not the game ball that has won the distribution prize winning device 650 during the jackpot game enters the probability variation port 900a (whether or not the game ball is detected by the probability variation switch (not shown)). Since it is determined whether the probability variation game state is set after the jackpot game, it is difficult to correctly predict the game state at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol for the won game ball when the game ball is won. Is. The probability variation game is in progress, and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is equal to or greater than the number of holding balls at the time of winning the prize (the number including the number of holdings that have already been won and held before winning), and the fluctuation starts first. If there is no big hit in the hold, it may be configured to execute the pre-reading in the big hit determination in the probability variation gaming state.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2), and the first prize hole 64a (special symbol 1) with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storing area 203a described above. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2), only detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). The vacant areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

Special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting prize) into the first winning opening 64a (third symbol display) This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first winning opening 64a and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 1 They are added (see S504 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 13).

The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display holding in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding sphere number command (see S211 in FIG. 13 and S505 in FIG. 16). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the command of the number of reserved balls to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of holding balls of the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 203d in that the first winning opening 64a (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2). Only the other points are the same and the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is incremented by 1 in the process of S510 in FIG. 16, and is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 13). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 13, S511 of FIG. 16). reference).

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of 4 (See S804 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 of FIG. 18).

When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (FIG. 19). S803: No).

The probability variation counter 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is a probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability variation counter 203g has an initial value set to zero, and in the main controller 110, the timing of closing the specific entrance (large opening) 65a or the second specific entrance 650a in the final round of the jackpot ( That is, the probability variation flag 203r described later is turned on at the end timing of the jackpot), that is, 100 is set when the game ball enters the probability variation port 900a and is detected by the probability variation switch (not shown). To be done.

When the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 15, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 14, S208) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 15, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 14, S208), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referenced, and if the value is greater than 0, at high probability Based on the first per random number table 202a for special symbols is drawn, while the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability, special symbol lottery Is done.

The counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for counting each counter value, as described above.

The big hit flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is on, the jackpot game 650 or the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state by the jackpot control process (FIG. 24, S1105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Is executed.

The winning detection period storage area 203j counts a period determined to be valid when a game ball is detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown) of the distribution winning device 650 in the jackpot game. It is a storage area. When the jackpot game of "jackpot A" is started, a counter value of 3750 (corresponding to 15 seconds) is set at the start of the round from the first round to the eighth round. Then, at the end of the round, the counter value of 1250 (corresponding to 5 seconds) is reset. Here, at the end of the round, even if the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0, that is, even if the detection period remains, the counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is forcibly reset. To be done. As a result, if it is determined that the game balls of five balls, which are the closing conditions, have won the second specific entrance 650a before the maximum opening period of 15 seconds of the second specific entrance 650a, the interval time is determined. A count value corresponding to 5 seconds corresponding to is set.

Thereby, even after the second specific entrance 650a is closed, the winning detection period longer than the interval time is set, and the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown) is set over the rounds. It is possible to suppress a defect in which the detection is determined to be effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second specific entrance 650a is closed, a value corresponding to the same time as the interval time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) is stored in the winning detection period storage area 203j. Since it is set, in this case, it is possible to effectively detect the game ball entering the probability variation opening 900a or the continuation opening 901a. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the closed state is set, the count value corresponding to 5 seconds is configured to be set in the winning detection period storage area 203j, but not limited to this, the second specific entrance 650a. It is configured to set a counter value corresponding to a period obtained by adding 5 seconds to the period required for the game ball that entered into the right channel opening 655a or the left channel opening 654a in the winning detection period storage area 203j. Good. With such a configuration, when the game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a at the end of the round is detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown), it is effective. You can It should be noted that this period may be set to a period required for the gaming ball entering the second specific ball entrance 650a to be detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown). ..

Further, as in the present embodiment, a valid period of 5 seconds is set at the end of the round, and when that period has elapsed, the variable probability rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 is quickly rotated in the direction opposite to the normal direction. Then, the held game balls may be discharged to the discharge channel 656. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the game ball entered at the end of the round will be judged as invalid even though it is detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown). be able to. Further, the probability variation rotating body 900 and the continuous rotation body 901 may be configured to rotate in opposite directions based on the round end timing, so as to prevent detection by the probability variation switch or the continuation switch. ..

When the ninth round to the 16th round are executed, a value of 7500 corresponding to the round period (30 seconds) is set at the start of the round. In this case, 0 is set at the end of the round. As a result, the end of the round can be determined by the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j.

The winning detection period storage area 203j is updated by being subtracted by 1 in S1402 in the winning detection process (S1302 of FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The gate clock counter 203k is a counter for determining the cycle of rotating the rotation distribution member 800. The gate time counter 203k is incremented by 1 in the process of S1201 of the gate control process (S1104 of FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Then, when the value of the gate clock counter 203k reaches a value of 1250 corresponding to 5 seconds, the rotation distribution member 800 is rotated to guide the game ball to the right flow passage 655 or the left flow passage 654. Can be switched. When the value of the gate clock counter 203k reaches 1250, it is reset to 0 which is the initial value.

The round start flag 203m is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the round during the jackpot game. When the round start flag 203m is turned on, it is determined that it is time to start the round. This round start flag 203m is turned on in S219 in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 13, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and in S1427 in the winning detection end process (FIG. 26, S1413). Here, it is set to ON when it is determined that there is a new round to be started. It is set to off at the start of the round.

The round counter 203n is a counter that indicates the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game. This round counter 203n is set to 8 at the start of the jackpot A (S219 in the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 13, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110). Here, the minimum number of rounds, 8, is set. Further, when it is determined that the ball enters the continuation opening 901a in the distribution winning apparatus 650 and is detected by a continuation switch (not shown) (winning detection processing (FIG. 25, S1302) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110). In the case of Yes in S1404), 8 is added to the value of the round counter 203n in S1406. As a result, the jackpot game is set to be executed up to 16 rounds.

The round continuation flag 203p is a big hit game of 1 (1st round to 8th round), the game ball enters the continuation opening 901a, the game ball is detected by the continuation switch (not shown), and the number of rounds is increased. It is a flag indicating that the addition has been made. The round continuation flag 203p is set to ON in S1405 in the winning detection process (S1302 of FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, it is set to OFF in S1424 (at the end of the jackpot game) in the winning detection end processing (FIG. 26, S1413).

The probability variation flag 203r is a flag indicating that the game ball entered the probability variation mouth 900a during the jackpot game of 1 (first round to eighth round) and the game ball was detected by the probability variation switch (not shown). Is. The probability variation flag 203r is set to ON in S1410 in the winning detection process (FIG. 25, S1302) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is set to OFF in S1425 (at the end of the jackpot game) in the winning detection end processing (FIG. 26, S1413).

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. As for the ROM 202, as shown in FIG. 9A, a first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B), a first per type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9C), and a second per random number. At least a table 202c (see FIG. 9D) and a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 10A to 10D) are provided. Since each table has already been described, detailed description will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific entrance 165a. As a shaft, a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side, a solenoid for sliding the slide member 670 of the distribution winning apparatus 650, a solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64c, etc. are connected. The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Each switch 208 includes a sensor (not shown) for detecting a winning ball.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out one award ball. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). The rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, the payout of the prize balls is stopped for a predetermined period (1 second) every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out. Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls such as a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from continuously paying out the prize balls and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from failing due to the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 melting due to the heat generation of the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the accessible portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion such as the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51 that the player touches), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. Can be suppressed. Note that the number of payouts and the pause period of payout until the payout motor 216 stops payout of prize balls are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to suspend the payout each time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. Further, for example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (a speaker not shown) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation pattern effect ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. At least the variation pattern selection table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The fluctuation pattern selection table will be briefly described because it is already known, but based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command are shown. Further detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the type (reach, out, etc.). Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation contents instructed from the main control device 110, one fluctuation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery.

FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a power off flag 223y, and others At least a memory area 223z is provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is changed to the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is an area number in the vacant areas of the four special symbols (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 They are stored in order from the (first to fourth) small areas. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64a, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 29). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Further, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, holds the number of holding spheres (waiting number) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main control device 110 at maximum 4 It is a counter that counts up to times. With the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the number of holding balls is added by the ball entering the second winning opening 64b, and the special symbol different from the display of the holding sphere number symbol of the special symbol 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The only difference is that it is used for displaying the number of reserved balls of No. 2 and the other is the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 223c of the main controller 110. You can change it while doing it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 29), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 33). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 29), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2107 in FIG. 33). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop design according to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed in the third symbol display device 81, so that the stop display of the variable effect is displayed. Is controlled.

The power-off flag 223y sends a power-off command to the voice lamp controller 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the voice lamp controller 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y turns on. The setting is made, and power-off processing is executed (S1616 in FIG. 28). Then, in the startup process (FIG. 27) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the data read process is executed, and the power-off flag 223y is set to off. (S1510 in FIG. 27). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process when the power is cut off can be used again by the data reading process in the startup process when the power is restored, and the navigation game is continuously executed. be able to.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, a variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (variation). (Direction) and notice production are controlled. The display control device 114 has a known configuration, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 12 to 26. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. In this switch reading process (S101), for example, in order to calculate the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in the jackpot game according to the number of game balls that have won in the distribution prize port 650a, the distribution prize device 650 is used. The state of the magnetic sensor 659 provided is detected.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and thereafter. The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64a is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15 and 16.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is If it is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (change in the special symbol 2) The display hold count N2) is acquired (S203).

Next, it is determined whether there is a variable display pending ball in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is 0. If it is determined (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209), and the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1). ) Is determined to be 0 (S209: No), it is determined that there is no variable display holding ball in the special symbol, and this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (S205). ), the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set a holding ball number command (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol 2 variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (N1) is determined to be greater than 0 (S209: Yes), for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1, the same process as the process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 described above is performed. The special symbol 1 variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 14 or a special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 2 fluctuation start process or special symbol 1 fluctuation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b or the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 or the special symbol 1 is set.

After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (the result of the lottery this time) performed by the special symbol variation start process is special. It is determined whether it is a big hit of the symbol (S217). Then, if the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S218), 8 is set to the round counter 203n, and the round start flag 203m is set to ON ( S219). Then, the jackpot start command is set (S220), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is reset (S221), and the process proceeds to S222.

With the jackpot flag 203i set to ON in the processing of S218, the jackpot game processing is executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 24) of the main processing (see FIG. 22) described later. A specific description will be given in a jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) described later.

Further, the round counter 203n is set to 8 and the round start flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S219, so that it is set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later. The special game of the round (8 rounds) is executed according to the value. Although details will be described later, by setting 8 in the round counter 203n by the processing of S219, a special game of eight rounds is executed, and during the execution of the special game, it is determined that the continuous winning is achieved by the prize detection processing (FIG. 25). If determined, 8 is additionally set to the round counter 203n (S1406), and the special game of 8 rounds (total 16 rounds) will be executed.

The jackpot start command set in the process of S220 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the external process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp controller 113 transmits the display jackpot start command to the display controller 114. As a result, a display suggesting the start of the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can recognize that the special game state has been entered.

On the other hand, in the process of S217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S223), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is If it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S223: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S223: No), the process proceeds to S222.

In the process of S222, which is executed after the process of S221, S223 or S224, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81 of the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 are displayed. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop (S222). When the process of S222 ends, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol 2 variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 of the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b. Each value of is acquired (S301). Next, in order to determine whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S301 is a big hit of the special symbol 2, it is determined whether or not it is in probability variation (S302). Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0.

When it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the lottery result of whether or not it is a jackpot is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability of the first random number table 202a (S303). ), and the process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability of the first per random number table 202a (FIG. 9B). The determination is made by comparing each value (winning value) that has been set one by one (S303). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "10 to 399", it is determined to be out (see FIG. 9B). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is not on (S302: No), the lottery result of whether or not it is a jackpot is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the time of the low probability of the first random number table 202a ( S304), the process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of low probability of the first per random number table 202a (FIG. 9(b)). The determination is made by comparing each value (winning value) that has been set one by one (S304). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "1 to 399", it is determined to be out (see FIG. 9B).

In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S303 or S304 is a jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S305: Yes), a jackpot. The display mode of is set (S306). In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the jackpot symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Determine the stop type to be displayed in. For example, as the stop type, "outside reach", "completely outside", etc. are defined.

Next, in the process of S307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the display mode set in the process of S306. Further, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S307). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the big symbol symbol stops on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203j of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Specifically, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, the normal reach is reached, if it is in the range of “51 to 179”, the super reach is reached, and if it is in the range of “180 to 198”, the special reach is given. The fluctuation pattern is determined (see FIG. 10B).

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out of position (S305: No), the display mode of out of position is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Determine the stop type to be displayed in. For example, as the stop type, "outside reach", "completely outside", etc. are defined.

Next, the deviation variation pattern is determined based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 of the variation pattern selection table 202d or the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 of the deviation pattern 202d (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is checked based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the time.

When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 22). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol 1 variation start process, the same process as the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is performed for the special symbol 1. The data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the special symbol 1 is acquired by the process of S401, and then the same process as the process in the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is performed on the special symbol 1. Since the specific contents are the same as the process in the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64a, and if there is a starting winning, It is a process for executing pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the process of holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (starting winning) (S501). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64a is detected over the three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display pending in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d changed by calculation is set to the holding sphere number command (S505).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S505, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are acquired, The symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere storage area (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (starting winning) (S507). When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (S507: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e performs the same process as when winning the first winning opening 64a.

More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S509: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (N2) is incremented by 1 (S510), and the holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is set (S511). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 are acquired and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area (S512), and the process proceeds to S513.

Whether there is no winning in the second winning opening 64b (S507: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S509: No), the process proceeds to S513.

Here, the prefetch processing of S513 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing (S513). The prefetching process (S513) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 16).

In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (S602). Then, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S603), and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the big hit game of the big hit A, the positive change game state is achieved by the game ball passing through the positive change switch (not shown) in the positive change passage opening 900k. In the case of this probability variation gaming state, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the big hit judgment value for high probability in the first hit random number table 202a. Here, at the time when the prefetching process is executed, it can be determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot A, but in the jackpot game, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch (not shown) in the probability variation passage opening 900k. Whether or not it cannot be determined. That is, at the time when the prefetching process is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probability variation gaming state is set.

Therefore, when determining the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit in the prefetch process (S507), the determination value for the low probability in the first random number table is set regardless of whether the probability variation gaming state is set or not. I will use it. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the first hit random number table 202a, it is specified that the big hit judgment value for high probability includes the big hit judgment value for low probability. Specifically, the jackpot determination value for high probability is “0 to 9”, and the jackpot determination value for low probability is “0”. As a result, the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit when the probability is low, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch (not shown) in the probability variation channel opening 900k and enters the probability variation game state. If the value is “0”, which is the determination value, it can be determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the electric motor attached to the second winning opening 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S701). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is performed. In the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the processing of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S708). Whether or not the time is being shortened is determined by whether or not the probability is changing (whether the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0). In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving game state and the probability variation game state are configured to be set at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time variation game state may be provided separately from the probability variation game state.

In the process of S708, when it is determined that it is in time saving (the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S709). ). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit and it is configured to be difficult. This is during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to try to win the specific ball entrance 165a. In this case, when the electric accessory 64c that accompanies the second winning opening 64b is opened, the ball that is trying to win the specific winning opening 165a easily enters the second winning opening 64b. It becomes difficult to make a prize in the specific ball entrance 165a. Therefore, during the big hit of the special symbol, the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is made difficult to be opened, and the game ball is easily won into the specific winning opening 165a. In addition, since the specific winning opening 165a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64a, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first winning opening 64a during the big hit of the special symbol, the first winning opening Many balls enter the mouth 64a. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first winning port 64a becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol is not in the big hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the high hit probability second hit random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 9D).

In the process of S708, when it is not during the time saving (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the low value. Based on the second random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 9D).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S712), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S712: Yes) , The display mode of winning is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the time saving (S714), and if it is during the time saving (S714: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present time is during the big hit of the special symbol (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 64b as much as possible, even if the hit of the normal symbol is the same as the case of the deviation of the normal symbol. , The number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened and the opening time are set.

In the process of S715, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 64b. The opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S714, when it is not during the time saving (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S712: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S719, it is determined whether or not it is during the time saving (S719), and when it is during the time saving (S719: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds ( S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning port 64b becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 64b. It becomes a state.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S722). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S722, if the variation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery for the normal symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S723, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1108) of the main process (see FIG. 22) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variable display being executed is started in the second symbol display device 83, the lottery result of the normal symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is set (S725), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1106) of the main process (see FIG. 22) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 12), judges whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through-gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 If not (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. In the area (S805), and this processing ends. In the process of S805, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1012. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the initial operation of the distribution motor 270a, the first rotary motor 270b, and the second rotary motor 270c is set (S1020). In this initial operation, each motor is rotated in a predetermined direction, the operation is stopped at the origin position (the position where the detection piece is detected by the photo sensor), and each step counter is set to 0. To be done. Here, the origin position of the rotation distribution member 800 is a position for guiding the game ball to the right flow path 655 (the solid line position in FIG. 3A), and the probability variation rotor 900 has the probability variation port 900a as the probability variation flow path. It is a position facing 900k (the turning position of the probability varying rotating body 900 shown in FIG. 3A), and the continuous rotating body 901 has a position where the continuous opening 901 faces the continuous flow path 901k (see FIG. 3A). It is a position rotated 180 degrees from the position shown). The interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

In this way, the initial position (origin position) of the probability varying rotor 900, the continuous rotating body 901, and the rotation distribution member 800 is set by the start-up process (see FIG. 21), so the probability varying rotor 900, continuous rotating body 901. The position of the rotation distribution member 800 can be accurately determined by the step counter. In this way, by determining each position and notifying the position to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command, the voice lamp control device 113 can set an effect for notifying the player of each position. it can. Specifically, the rotation distribution member 800 informs which flow path the game ball is guided to, and whether the game ball can enter the certainty variation opening 900a and the continuation opening 901a. It is possible to perform a notice. Thereby, the player can expect the game ball to enter the probability variation opening 900a and the continuation opening 901a by the effect during the jackpot game, or can aim the game ball at the aim.

In addition, whether or not this effect is notified to the player when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 executes a predetermined lottery and is elected, or a plurality of jackpot types are set and the jackpot type is notified. Alternatively, it may be set to be variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1101 to S1109 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1111 and S1112 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special lamp variation process (see FIG. 13) and the hold ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 16) and the winning information command set in the prefetch process (see FIG. 17) are used as the voice lamp control device 113. Send to. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The jackpot start command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) and the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and the gate control process is executed (S1104). Details of the process of S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed, and the big hit control process for opening or closing the specific entrance (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 165 is executed (S1105). In the jackpot control process, the specific ball entrance 165a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific ball entrance 165a has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won in the specific ball entrance 165a. To do. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific ball entrance 165a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific ball entrance 165a are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific ball entrance 165a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1105) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the process of S1105 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors product 64c is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18), the opening/closing control of the electric auditors product 64c is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

When the process of S1106 is finished, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1107). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. , The first symbol display device 37 is started. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) ends, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the first symbol display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1108). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1110). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1110: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1110: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1111, S1112).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1111). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1112).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1109 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the first fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1109, if the RAM 203 stores the information about the occurrence of power failure (S1109: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 20 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1113 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1113), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1114). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1115), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1116), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1109 is at the timing of the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1108, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1111 and S1112 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut down, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the gate control processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this gate control processing (S1104). This gate control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol big hit state, by switching the position of the rotary distribution member 800, the distribution is performed. This is a process for distributing the game balls that have entered the ball inlet 650a to the left channel 654 or the right channel 655.

In the gate control process, first, 1 is added to the gate clock counter 203k (S1201). Next, it is determined whether the gate time counter 203k is larger than 1250 (S1202). When it is determined that the gate time counter 203k is larger than 1250 (S1202: Yes), the position of the rotary distribution member 800 is switched by driving the accessory motor 270a (S1203), and the gate time counter 203k is changed. It is initialized to 0 (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

Here, since the gate control process is repeatedly executed every 4 ms in the main process, the position of the distribution member can be switched every time the value of the gate timing counter 203k becomes 1250 (that is, every 5 s). it can. In addition, the position of the rotation distribution member 800 is a position where the game balls that have entered the distribution inlet 650a are distributed to the left channel 654 (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 3A) or the right channel 655. It is switched by the accessory motor 270a so as to be located at one of the positions to be distributed to (the position shown by the broken line in FIG. 3A).

When the processing of S1202 or S1205 is completed, the first rotation data is set (S1206) and the second rotation data is set (S1207). After that, a rotator command is set (S1208), and this processing ends.

The drive of the first rotation motor 270b is controlled by the first rotation data set in the process of S1206. Note that, for example, in the case of a big hit, the rotation speed of the first rotary motor 270b may be changed according to the big hit type. As a result, a change occurs in the rotation operation of the continuous rotating body 901, and the interest of the player can be improved as compared with a monotonous gaming machine in which the continuous rotating body 901 rotates at a constant speed. In addition, if the setting is made so that the continuous rotating body 901 rotates slowly, it is possible for the player to easily play a game aiming for continuous winning, and the continuous rotating body 901 is set to rotate faster. By doing so, a continuous winning prize can be drawn in a short time, that is, a gaming machine that can execute a lot of continuous winning prizes in one round.

Further, in the processing of S1206 and S1207, the rotation speeds of the rotary motors (270b, 270c) set may be changed at a predetermined timing. For example, the rotation speed is fast every hour after the power is turned on. Alternatively, the low rotation speed and the low rotation speed may be set alternately. Furthermore, the first rotation data and the second rotation data may be data of a plurality of rotation speeds and their switching timings. For example, half rotations may be high rotation speeds and remaining half rotations may be low rotation speeds. This makes it possible to set the half rotation where each winning opening (900a, 901a) of each rotating body (900, 901) is the upper half to be a slow rotation speed, and the remaining half rotation to be a high rotation speed. As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the prizes to the respective winning openings (900a, 901a), and if not so, it is possible to make the prizes difficult to adjust.

The second rotation data set in the process of S1207 is different from the process of S1206 in that the drive of the second rotation motor 270c is controlled to adjust the rotation operation of the positive variation rotor 900, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S1206 and the processing of S1207 described above, the rotational speeds of the rotary motors (270b, 270c) may be set to be different or the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, the gate control process is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether the jackpot game is being executed, The gate control process may be executed only while the jackpot game is being executed.

The rotating body command set by the processing of S1208 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 sets a sound effect based on the reception of the rotating body command, and transmits the display rotating body command to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to output a sound effect and a display that match the operations of the accessory motor 270a, the first rotary motor 270b, and the second rotary motor 270c set based on the process of the gate control process (S1104). ..

Specifically, the position of the rotation distribution member 800 is a position where the game balls that have entered the distribution ball opening 650a of the distribution winning device 650 are distributed to the left flow path 654, and the continuous rotating body 901 has The continuation opening 901a becomes a position (upward position) where the game ball easily enters, that is, a timing at which the game ball entering the distribution entrance opening 650a with high probability becomes a continuous winning, and Generate a rotating body command to notify the timing. As a result, at a timing at which it is easy to continue winning, a sound effect for notifying the player is output and a performance display is displayed (see FIG. 36(a)). This timing is calculated based on the operation timing of the rotation distribution member 800 based on the gate timing counter 203k and the rotation speed of the continuous rotating body 901 based on the first rotation data set by the process of S1206. The position of the continuous rotating body 901 is calculated by the origin sensor which is a photo sensor (not shown) as described above.

Further, similarly for the probability variation winning, the position of the rotation distribution member 800 is the position where the game sphere that has entered the distribution entrance 650a of the distribution prize device 650 is distributed to the right flow path 655, and When the continuation opening 900a of the probability varying rotating body 900 is located at a position where the game ball is easy to enter (position in which the gaming ball is directed upward), an effect display for notifying the same is displayed (see FIG. 36(b)). This timing is calculated based on the operation timing of the rotary distribution member 800 based on the gate time counter 203k and the rotational speed of the positive variation rotor 900 based on the second rotation data set by the process of S1207. The position of the probability varying rotating body 901 is calculated by the origin sensor which is a photo sensor (not shown) as described above.

This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily determine the timing of winning a game ball into the distribution entrance 650a of the distribution winning apparatus 650.

Further, in the present embodiment, the determination value of the gate timing counter 203k is set to 1250 (the value at which the switching timing becomes 5 seconds), but it may be a smaller value or a larger value.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1105). This jackpot control processing (S1105) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 22), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific entrance This is a process for opening or closing the 165a or the second specific entrance 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1105). In the process of S1105, if the jackpot flag 203i is off (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), it is a jackpot of the special symbol, so the winning detection process is executed (S1302). This winning detection process (S1302) is a process for performing a continuous winning or a probability variation winning, a process according to the end of the winning detection period, etc. in the winning detection period provided in each round in the jackpot game. 25 will be described later.

When the process of S1302 is completed, it is determined whether the round start flag 203m is on (S1303). If the round start flag 203m is on (S1303: Yes), it is the start timing of a new round, and thus the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is opened according to the number of newly started rounds. The winning detection period storage area 203j is set based on the number of newly started rounds (S1304) (S1305).

Specifically, as described above, in the 1-8 round jackpot game, the second specific entrance 650a is opened so that the sorting lottery is executed, and in the 9-16 round jackpot game, the The lottery is not executed and the specific entrance 165a is opened.

Further, the round start flag 203m is set to ON because the condition for closing the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309), and the winning detection period based on the number of completed rounds ends. This is the case (see S1427 in FIG. 26). Here, the winning detection period set when the closing condition of the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied is 5 seconds in the first to eighth rounds (1250 is set in the prize detection period storage area 203j. ) Is 3 seconds in the 9th to 16th rounds (750 is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j), so that in the 1st to 8th rounds, the interval time until the start of the next round is 5 seconds. In the 9th to 16th rounds, the interval time is 3 seconds. In the present embodiment, as described above, the interval time and the winning detection period are set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning detection period may be longer than the interval time, or vice versa. The winning detection period may be shorter than the interval time.

Here, in the jackpot game of the 9th to 16th rounds, since the specific entrance 165a is opened and the second specific entrance 650a is not opened, it is not necessary to detect continuous winning or probability variation winning. Further, in this case, if a continuous winning or a probability variation winning is detected, there is a possibility that the game ball has been illegally won, so by configuring to notify an error, such fraud is suppressed. be able to. Further, in the jackpot game of the 9th to 16th rounds, it is not necessary to detect the continuous winning or the probability variation winning. Therefore, by setting the winning detection period storage area 203j to 0, each winning is not detected. Good. In this case, in order to measure the opening elapsed time of the specific ball entrance (65a, 650a), a separate timer or counter may be provided and the closing condition may be determined based on the timer or counter.

In addition, in this embodiment, although it set as mentioned above in the process of S1304 and S1305, it is not restricted to this, and the specific ball entrance 165a may be opened in the 1st to 8th rounds or may be opened. The interval may be set to 3 seconds or 10 seconds, or the winning detection period storage area 203j may be set to 2000 or 7500, and the second specific entrance 650a may be opened similarly in the 9th to 16th rounds. Alternatively, the set value of the interval or the winning detection period storage area 203j may be changed appropriately. The number of rounds may be divided into 1 to 3 rounds and 4 to 16 rounds, may be set differently in each round, or may be set to be the same in all rounds.

After that, the round start flag 203m is turned off (S1306), and the round counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S1307). Here, when the round counter 203n set at the start of the jackpot becomes 0 by subtracting 1 from the round counter 203n (when eight rounds are finished), the jackpot detection ending process (see FIG. 26) described later is performed. You can execute the settings at the end. Further, the round counter 203n is incremented by 8 in the process of S1406 when there is a continuous winning in the winning detection process (see FIG. 25) described later. In that case, the round counter 203n becomes 0 for 16 rounds. When the game ends, 16 rounds of jackpot games can be executed.

When the process of S1307 ends, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1308), and this process ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1303, if the round start flag 203m is off (S1303: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed after opening the specific ball entrance 165a or the second specific ball entrance 650a (when the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j becomes 0), or the specific ball When a predetermined number of balls are won after opening the mouth 165a or the second specific ball entrance 650a, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. Here, in the process of S1303, as described above, if the jackpot game is 1 to 8 rounds, 15 seconds have elapsed (when the winning detection period storage area 203j set to 3750 has become 0), or It is determined that the closing condition is established when five game balls are won in the second specific ball entrance 650a. On the other hand, in the case of 9 to 16 rounds, when 30 seconds have elapsed (when the winning detection period storage area 203j set to 7500 becomes 0), or when 10 game balls win the specific ball entrance 165a. It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. Although the present embodiment is set as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to eighth rounds may be 30 seconds elapsed, the ninth to 16th rounds may be 15 seconds elapsed, and the first to eighth rounds may be 10 balls winning. The 9th to 16th rounds may be when the 5 balls are won. Also, the way of dividing the rounds is not limited to this, and may be defined as 1 to 2 rounds and 3 to 16 rounds, different closing conditions may be set for each round, or the same closing for all rounds. It may be a condition.

In the processing of S1309, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second specific entrance 650a is not satisfied (S1309: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1309, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309: Yes), the second specific entrance 650a is closed (S1310), and the round ended this time. Based on the number, the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset (S1311), and this processing ends.

Specifically, the process of S1309 resets the winning detection period storage area 203j to 1250 at the end of the 1st to 8th rounds, and resets the winning detection period storage area 203j to 750 at the end of the 9th to 16th rounds. It is something to set. This is because, in the 1st to 8th rounds, the second specific ball entrance 650a is opened, so that at the end of the 1st to 8th rounds, the game balls may remain inside the distribution winning apparatus 650. is there.

Here, since the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset based on the satisfaction of the closing condition (S1309: Yes), even after the second specific entrance 650a is closed by the processing of S1310, the game ball is The game balls remaining inside the distribution winning device 650 (such as the distribution ball opening 650a, the left flow path 654 or the right flow path 655) may pass through the continuous flow path opening 901k and the probability variation flow path opening 900k. In this case, by resetting the winning detection period storage area 203j to 1250, it is possible to detect the winning based on the passage of each flow path opening for 5 seconds after the closing condition is established. As a result, the game balls remaining inside the distribution winning device 650 (such as the distribution ball inlet 650a, the left channel 654 or the right channel 655) enter the continuous channel port 901k or the probability variation channel port 900k. In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the continuous winning or the probability variation winning does not occur.

In addition, since the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset in the 9th to 16th rounds, it is possible to detect that the prize has been illegally won at the second specific entrance 650a.

The value of the winning detection period storage area 203j set here may be appropriately changed depending on the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650. For example, until the left flow path 654 and the right flow path 655 of the distribution winning device 650 are long, and the game ball entering the distribution entrance 650a enters either the continuous passage opening 901k or the probability variation winning opening 900k. In the case where it takes about 10 seconds at maximum, it may be set to be 10 seconds, or may be set to remain at 5 seconds and the winning after 5 seconds is not regarded as winning.

Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not there is a game ball remaining inside the distribution winning apparatus 650, and if it is determined that there is no game ball, end the winning detection period. For example, the number of game balls that enter the distribution ball port 650a of the distribution winning device 650 after the closing condition is satisfied, and the number of game balls that pass the continuous flow path port 901k, the probability variation flow path port 900k, and the discharge port 657. It may be determined whether they match, and if they match, it may be determined that there is no game ball remaining inside the distribution winning apparatus 650. Thereby, when there is no game ball remaining inside the distribution winning apparatus 650, the winning detection period can be ended, and thus it is difficult to illegally make a continuous winning or a probability variation winning. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution ball inlet 650a is determined by using the magnetic sensor 659, and the game balls that have entered the continuous flow path port 901 are switched to the continuous switch ( (Not shown), the gaming balls that have entered the probability variation passage port 900k can be detected by using the probability variation switch (not shown).

Next, the winning detection process (S1302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a view showing a flowchart of the winning detection end processing (S1105). This winning detection process (S1302) is a process executed when the big hit game is being executed in the big hit control process (FIG. 24), and whether or not there is a game ball win in the distribution winning device 650. This is a process for detecting.

In the winning detection process (S1302), first, it is determined whether or not the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0 (S1401). In the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1401: No), it is a period in which the winning detection is unnecessary due to the interval between rounds, so this processing is ended as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0 (S1401: Yes), the winning detection period storage area 203j is decremented by 1 (S1402), and the process proceeds to S1403. Here, since the winning detection process (S1302) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) in the main process (see FIG. 22) that is executed every 4 ms, 1 is subtracted from the winning detection period storage area 203j. It will be every 4 ms. As described above, the winning detection period storage area 203j is set based on the number of new rounds to be started in the process of S1305 of the jackpot control process (S1105). If the number of rounds is 1 to 8, 3750 is set. Therefore, the opening time of the second specific entrance 650a for the first to eighth rounds is 15 seconds. If the number of rounds is 9 to 16, since 7500 is set, the opening time of the specific entrance 165a for 9 to 16 rounds is 30 seconds.

When the process of S1402 is finished, it is determined whether or not the round continuation flag 203p is on (S1403). If the round continuation flag 203p is on (S1403: Yes), the process based on the continuous winning (S1405 to S1407) has already been executed, so the processes of S1404 to S1407 are skipped and the process of S1408 is performed. Transition.

On the other hand, if the round continuation flag 203p is not on (off) (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous winning (S1404). Here, the continuous winning is when the game ball enters the continuous flow path opening 901k, and when the game ball enters the continuous flow path opening 901k, the passage of the game ball is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). Based on the detection by the switch reading process (S101) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is stored as winning detection information. In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous winning, based on the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101).

In the process of S1404, if there is no continuous winning (S1404: No), the processes of S1405 to S1407 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if there is a continuous winning (S1404: Yes), as a process based on the continuous winning, the round continuation flag 203p is set to ON (S1405), and 8 is added to the round counter 203n (S1406). ), a continuous winning command is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408.

As described above, the round continuation flag 203p set by the processing of S1405 can prevent the processing of the continuous winning-based processing (S1405 to S1407) from being duplicated. In addition, the round counter 203n added by the processing of S1406 allows the jackpot game to be executed up to 16 rounds based on the entry of the game ball into the continuous flow path opening 901k. Further, the continuous winning command set by the processing of S1407 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving this continuous winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a continuous winning sound and transmits the display continuous winning command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display continuous winning command, the display control device 114 displays, on the third symbol display device 81, a display indicating that the continuous winning has been achieved. Thereby, based on the entry of the game ball into the continuous flow path opening 901k, the player can be informed of the continuous winning by the winning sound and the display on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203r is on (S1408). In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203r is ON (S1408: Yes), it is after the process based on the probability variation winning (S1410 to S1411) has already been executed, as in the process of S1403. , S1409 to S1411 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not on (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a probability variation winning (S1409). This probability variation prize is determined in the same manner as whether or not there is a continuous prize in the process of S1404, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S1409 that there is no positive variation prize, the process of S1410 and S1411 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1412. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1409 that there is a probability variation winning combination, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON (S1410), the probability variation winning command is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

In the processing of S1412, it is determined whether or not the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1412). If it is determined by the processing of S1412 that the winning detection period storage area 203j is not 0 (S1412: No), it is not the time to end the detection of winning, so the processing of S1413 is skipped and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1412, when it is determined that the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1412: Yes), since it is the timing to end the winning detection, the winning detection end processing is executed (S1413). , This process ends.

Here, the winning detection end processing (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a view showing a flowchart of the winning detection end processing (S1413). The winning detection end process (S1413) is a process executed when the winning detection period storage area 203j becomes 0 in the above-described winning detection process (see FIG. 25), which is the end timing of the winning detection.

In the winning detection end processing (S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the round counter 203n is 0 (S1420). In the process of S1420, if it is determined that the round counter is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1420: No), it means that the round to be executed in the jackpot game still remains, so the round start flag 203m is set. The process is turned on (S1427), and this process ends.

With the round start flag 203m set here, as described above, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24), the processes (S1304 to S1308) related to the round start are executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1420, when it is determined that the round counter 203n is 0, it is the end timing of the jackpot game, so it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203r is on (S1421), and it is on. If there is, the probability variation counter is set to 100 (S1422), and if not turned on, the process of S1422 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1423.

The probability variation flag 203r is set to ON when a game ball enters the probability variation channel opening 900k in the distribution winning apparatus 650, as described above. As a result, the probability variation game state can be set for 100 times based on the entry of the game sphere into the probability variation channel opening 900k. In the present embodiment, the probability variation game state is given 100 times, but the invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation game state may be maintained until the next big hit.

In the process of S1423, the jackpot end is set (S1423), the round continuation flag 203p, the probability variation flag 203r and the jackpot flag 203i are set to OFF (S1424, S1425), and the jackpot end command is set based on the number of rounds. (S1426), this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 33. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 27, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1616 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the startup processing this time ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 28), it executes the power-off process in S1616. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1502: No), the startup processing this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1616 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written by the process of S1406. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1616 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1502: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1616, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1504, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1506). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 28). That is, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1508 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is the moment when the current startup process is performed. This is the case after the occurrence of a general power outage and in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1511).

Next, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1511), the interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1504 to S1506 is passed to S1508. This is the case when the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), after skipping the processing of S1509 to S1510 which is the work area clearing processing of the RAM 223, the processing shifts to S1511, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1511), The interrupt permission is set (S1513), and the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1509 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1504 when the processing of S1508 is reached through the processing of S1504 through S1506. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is S1602 to S1610 which is mainly a process related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variable display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1603 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1602). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later is set (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1605 without performing the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on the reservation lamp according to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a predetermined period such as a period in which the variation effect is not executed, by pressing the frame button 22 when the notice character appears at the start of the variation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the variation this time. Is displayed, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect, it is changed to an effect that has a feeling of expectation for the jackpot, and the frame button 22 is an enter button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. Also good.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the lamp edit process is executed (S1608), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution management process. The sound edit/output process of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. After executing the processing of S1610, the processing shifts to the processing of S1611.

In the processing of S1611, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1613 (S1613: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1615), and the power-off processing is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1614: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Here, for the sake of convenience, the detailed description of each process in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described after the details of the command determination process (S1611) are described first. The variable display setting process (S1612) will be sequentially described.

Next, the command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination process (S1611) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 28) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1611), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area, analyzed, and the main control device 110 changes pattern. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1701). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on (S1702), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The number of holdings N1 of variable display in the symbol 1 or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings N2 of variable display in the special symbol 2) is extracted, and the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp controller 113 is extracted. It stores in the number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c (S1708), and returns to the main process. Further, in the process of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set.

Here, since the number of reserved balls is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first winning opening 64a (start winning) or when the special symbol is drawn, the starting winning is Every time it is detected or each time the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed by the processing of S1708. The value of can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved sphere counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1708 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1707, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1709). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1709: Yes), the lottery result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command, and the winning information storage area of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is extracted. It is stored in the first area of 223a (S1710), and the process returns to the main process. In the process of S1710, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

On the other hand, in the process of S1709, when the winning information command has not been received (S1709: No), it is then determined whether or not a command regarding the big hit has been received (S1711). When a command related to the big hit is received (S1711: Yes), a process related to the big hit corresponding to the received command is executed (S1712), and the process returns to the main process.

Examples of the jackpot commands include a jackpot start command, a round number command, and a jackpot end command. Specifically, for example, when the received command is a jackpot start command, the sound information at the time of jackpot start is set, and the opening command for display is set. The display opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the big hit effect on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, at the start of the big hit, the sound and display of the big hit effect can be output to notify the player. Similar processing is executed for the round number command and the jackpot end command.

In the process of S1711, when the command regarding the jackpot is not received (S1711: No), it is determined whether or not the command regarding the accessory is received from the main control device 110 (S1713). When the command related to the accessory is received (S1713: Yes), the accessory-related process is executed (S1714), and the process returns to the main process. Details of this accessory related processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1713, when the command regarding the accessory is not received (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1715). When the continuous winning command is received (S1715: Yes), the continuous winning time process is executed (S1716), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the continuous winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1715, when the continuous winning command is not received (S1715: No), it is determined whether or not the probability variation winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1717). When the probability variation winning command is received (S1717: Yes), the probability variation winning time process is executed (S1718), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the probability variation winning time process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

On the other hand, in the process of S1717, when the probability variation winning command is not received (S1717: No), the process according to the received other command is executed (S1719), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an accessory-related process (S1714) which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the accessory-related process (S1714). The accessory-related process (S1714) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp controller 113, and determines the command related to the accessory received from the main controller 110. , Execute the process according to the command.

In the accessory-related process (S1714), first, it is determined whether a switching command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1801). When the switching command is received (S1801: Yes), the switching sound is set (S1802), the display switching command is set (S1803), and the process returns to the command determination process.

The display switching command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display switching command, the display control device 114 displays a display suggesting switching on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball that has entered the distribution ball inlet 650a of the distribution winning device 650 by the rotation distribution member 800 is distributed to the left flow path 654, it is "left. When the voice "Yo" is output, the display "Under continuous lottery" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the voice is distributed to the right flow path 655, the voice "Right" is output. Along with the output, the display of "during probability variation lottery" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display is not limited to this, and the suggestion may be performed in another mode (character, screen color, etc.). Further, without displaying a display that suggests switching, the game ball that entered the distribution entrance ball opening 650a of the distribution winning device 650 is the left flow path 654 and the right flow path 655 for the player. You may not be able to recognize which one is assigned.

In the processing of S1801, when the switching command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the rotating body command has been received (S1804). When the rotator command is received (S1804: Yes), the sound effect is set based on the received rotator command (S1805), the display rotator command is set (S1806), and the process returns to the command determination process. ..

The display rotator command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display switching command, the display control device 114 executes the display based on the display rotating body command in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as described above, the notification is made of the timing which is set in the gate control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and in which it is easy to make continuous winning or easy probability variation winning. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily determine the timing of winning a game ball into the distribution entrance 650a of the distribution winning apparatus 650.

On the other hand, in the process of S1804, when the rotating body command is not received (S1804: No), the processes of S1805 and S1806 are skipped, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a description will be given of the continuous winning prize process (S1716) which is one of the processes in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the continuous winning process (S1716). This continuous winning process (S1716) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp controller 113, and is a process corresponding to the continuous winning command received from the main controller 110. To execute.

In the continuous winning process (S1716), first, a continuous winning sound is set (S1901), then a continuous winning command for display is set (S1902), and the process returns to the command determination process. The display continuous winning command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display continuous winning command, the display indicating that the continuous winning has occurred is executed (FIG. 37(a)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous winning has been achieved, and the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous winning is achieved, the process of S1901 and S1902 notifies the player of the occurrence of the continuous winning by displaying a sound and a display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be so arranged that the notification is made only by the display or only by the display, or may not be made. If the player does not notify the continuous winning, the player will determine whether or not the jackpot game will continue depending on whether or not the ninth round will start. Therefore, the player will continue the jackpot game until the ninth round. We will focus on whether or not. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a probability variation winning time process (S1718), which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the probability variation winning award processing (S1718). The probability variation winning time process (S1718) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process according to the probability variation winning command received from the main control device 110. To execute.

In the probability variation winning time process (S1718), first, the probability variation winning sound is set (S2001), the display probability variation winning command is set (S2002), and the process returns to the command determination process. The display probability variation winning command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display probability variation winning command, the display control device 114 performs a display indicating that the probability variation winning command has occurred (FIG. 37(b)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous winning has been achieved, and the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation prize is won, the process of S2001 and S2002 notifies the player of the occurrence of the probability variation prize by sound and display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be so arranged that the notification is made only by the display or only by the display, or may not be made. If the notification is not made, the player cannot determine whether or not it is in the probability variation game state, and thus it is difficult to stop the game until 100 times of games in which the probability variation game state may occur are completed. This can encourage the player to play the game for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, details of the variable display setting process (S1612) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1612). This variable display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S2106. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2102), and then in the processing of S1703 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2104). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize information storage area 223a of the special symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is shifted to the execution area side in order. .. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2106.

In the process of S2106, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2106). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2106: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2106: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2107), and then in the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2108).

Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110.

In the process of S2110, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2110). , This process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

Thus, in the configuration of the first embodiment, depending on the start timing of the big hit game, whether the game ball is easily guided to the probability varying rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 is easily guided. Is configured to be variable depending on the rotation position and rotation timing of the rotation distribution member 800. Therefore, it can be configured such that the expectation to the probability change and the expectation to the 16-round jackpot can be changed depending on the start timing (timing to hit the jackpot) of the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the special symbol determination result is a big hit, the player can play the game with an interest in whether the probability variation is given or 16 rounds are given.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the jackpot, the distribution winning device 650 in which the 16 round lottery (continuous lottery) and the probability variation lottery of the 8 round jackpot game are executed are set to the open state. Also, the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state in the case of the jackpot of 16 rounds and the jackpots of 9 rounds and thereafter. Therefore, from the first round to the eighth round, the game is performed by opening the sorting prize winning device 650, which is more difficult to win the game ball than the variable winning device 165, so that the player can play the probability variation opening 900a and the continuation opening 901a. You can concentrate on how you can enter the game. Also, in the 9th to 16th round jackpot games, since the variable winning device 165 in which the game balls are easy to enter is opened and the games are played, the jackpot games can be played efficiently.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to be rotated every 5 seconds, the player decides whether to aim at the probability variation rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 to play the game. You can also do Therefore, it is possible to decide which of the five lottery balls that can be entered into the second specific entry slot 650a is used for the lottery, that is, probability variation and continuation (16 round jackpot).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening period of the second specific entrance 650a of the first to eighth rounds is set to 15 seconds, but by setting it to 5 seconds, the rotating body that can be aimed in one round is limited, and the round starts. Alternatively, the privilege that can be given to the player can be changed depending on the start timing of the jackpot game.

In addition, by repeatedly configuring the open state and the closed state of the second specific ball entrance 650a for one round in a short time (for example, 1 second), the player can change the probability variation rotor 900 and the continuous rotor 901. It may be configured such that it is difficult to intentionally aim at either one.

<First Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 35, a pachinko machine 10 in a first modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the rotational distribution member 800 is configured so that the game ball that has entered the second specific ball inlet 650a enters either the probability varying rotor 900 or the continuous rotor 901. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the first embodiment, the game ball is guided to the continuous rotating body 901 when the game ball does not enter the probability variation opening 900a of the probability variation rotating body 900. The configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. The same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the game board 13 in the first modified example of the first embodiment. The first modified example of the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 is changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 in the first modified example of the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 35 is a front view of the distribution winning apparatus 650 with the front cover body 652 removed. With the distribution winning device 650 (see FIG. 3A) in the first embodiment, the gaming sphere that has entered the second specific inlet 650a is flow path wall portion so as to be guided to the probability varying rotating body 900. 653 is formed, and a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path in the direct downward direction from the distribution ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the distribution ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning apparatus 650.

In addition, when the game balls that enter the rotary ball inlets 900b to 900d of the probability varying rotating body 900 are discharged to the discharge flow path 662, the discharge flow path 662 guides the game ball to the continuous rotating body 901. The difference is that you did. The description of the same configuration will be omitted.

All the game balls that have entered the second specific ball inlet 650a are guided to the probability variation rotor 900, and when the probability variation slot 900a is won, the probability variation rotor 900 rotates to the right toward the probability variation channel opening 900k. You will be guided by. After that, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON by being detected by the probability variation switch (not shown). Note that, as in the first embodiment, up to five balls are entered into the second specific ball entrance 650a in one round, so if the balls are continuously entered into the second specific ball entrance 650a, the probability changes A game ball is easily inserted into the mouth 900a. In the first modified example of the first embodiment, the maximum opening time of the second specific entrance 650a is set to 5 seconds from the first round to the eighth round, and the second specific entrance. The period in which the game ball can enter the mouth 650a is short. It should be noted that since 100 shots of game balls are shot by the launching device in 1 minute, 1.6 shots are made in 1 second, and approximately 8 game balls can be shot in 5 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the five game balls into the second specific ball entrance 650a, considering that the game balls are sorted by the game nail.

Further, since the continuous rotator 901 is guided by the game balls other than the game balls that have entered the probability variation opening 900a, when the game balls enter the probability variation opening 900a, the game balls that are guided to the continuous rotation body 901 are That will be less. Therefore, the probability of the lottery on whether to enter the continuation opening 901a is lower than that of the lottery on whether to enter the probability variation opening 900a.

With such a configuration, the player first enjoys the lottery as to whether or not to enter the probability variation opening 900a, and then the game balls that have not entered the probability variation opening 900a enter the continuation opening 901a. You can enjoy the lottery. Therefore, the maximum player can enjoy the two-stage lottery. In addition, since the game ball is first guided to the probability variation rotating body 900, the probability variation lottery can be prioritized and executed over the continuous lottery, and the probability variation can be easily given.

In the present embodiment, the probability varying rotor 900 is arranged on the upstream side of the continuous rotating body 901. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous rotating body 901 may be disposed on the upstream side of the probability varying rotating body 900. Further, the number of balls to be entered into the second specific ball entrance 650a in one round is five, but the number is not limited to this, and may be one or less, or ten or more. May be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to distribute the sphere entering the specific entrance 650a to either the probability varying rotator 900 or the continuous rotator 901. The configuration is not limited to the distribution winning apparatus 650 in which balls can be entered in the big hit. For example, the distribution winning device 650 is configured to be opened except for jackpots, and instead of the probability variation opening 900a of the probability variation rotating body 900 and the continuation opening 901a of the continuous rotating body 901, it becomes a trigger for the special symbol lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which each entrance is provided. In this case, the entrances may be entrances with different degrees of advantage (for example, different award balls that can be obtained in the case of a big hit or different probability changes). For example, the ball entrance (i.e., the ball entrance on the downstream side) provided in the arrangement of the continuation port 901 may be advantageous. Further, as the timing of opening the distribution winning a prize device 650, for example, it may be configured to be opened when a normal symbol is hit. In this case, in one normal pattern hit, in the opening pattern and the position of the probability variation opening 900a, the slide member 670 is opened during a period in which the slide member 670 can enter the entry opening disposed at the position of the probability variation opening 900a. An opening pattern may be provided in which the slide member 670 is opened only during a period in which the ball cannot be entered (a state in which the ball can enter the downstream entrance). That is, as the time saving state (and the probability change state), a time saving state in which a lottery can be executed with an advantageous entrance and a time saving in which a lottery can be executed with a relatively disadvantageous entrance are provided. Good.

With such a configuration, since it is possible to focus on the ball entrance into which the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 650 enters, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first modified example of the first embodiment as well, the same effect and control as in the first embodiment are executed, but the detailed description thereof is the same as that described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second modified example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38(a), the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 is changed, and thus the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 in the first embodiment ( 3(a)). The distribution winning device 650 in the second modified example of the first embodiment is a protrusion for holding the game ball entered in the second specific entrance 650a below the slide member 670 as compared with the first embodiment. The difference is that the member 700 is provided. During this round, a solenoid (not shown) is actuated so as to project forward during the round, and the game ball that has entered the second specific ball inlet 650a is held so that it cannot flow downward. Become. After that, at the end of the round, the slide member 670 is slid forward, and at the same time, the protruding member 700 is also changed to the back side to allow the held game ball to flow downstream. In addition, a detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided on the upper portion of the projecting portion 700, and the prize ball is paid out by the detection by the sensor, and the round is finished. Executed. Further, when the game ball is held by the protruding portion 700, even if the second specific ball entrance 650a is in an open state, it is prevented that the held game ball enters the second specific ball entrance 650a. Then, it flows down on the upper portion of the front cover body 652 and flows down below the distribution winning apparatus 650.

Further, a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path in the direction directly below the distribution ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the distribution ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning apparatus 650, as in the above-described embodiment.

Here, in the second modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is switched and rotated every 5 seconds. Further, both the probability varying rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are similarly rotated. Further, the interval period from 1 round to 8 rounds is set to 8 seconds. The maximum time required for the gaming ball held on the protrusion to be detected by the probability variation switch or the continuation switch is 7 seconds. In this modification, the winning detection period storage area 203j is configured to have a period of up to 7 seconds at the end of the round. Specifically, when the round maximum period is set to 15 seconds at the start of the round, and one game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a (in the modified example, the maximum number of prizes in one round is one), A period of 7 seconds is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j.

With this configuration, it is effective when the game ball entering the second specific entrance 650a during the round game is detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown). Can be judged as Therefore, it is possible to enjoy whether the player wins the probability variation mouth 900a or the continuation mouth 901a.

Further, depending on the timing of the end of the round, whether to be guided to the right flow passage 655 or the left flow passage 654 changes depending on the rotation position of the rotation distribution member 800, and it is possible to change the expectation for a certain change or continuation (16 rounds). it can.

In the present embodiment, the projecting portion 700 is changed to the back side at the round end timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing 0.5 seconds after the end of the round or a plurality of times is selected by lottery, and It may be configured to be variable after time. With such a configuration, the timing of the holding release by the protruding portion 700, the rotation position of the rotation distribution member 800, the rotation position of the probability varying rotation body 900, and the rotation position of the continuous rotation body 901 are provided to the player. It can give different interests.

Further, in the second modified example, the number of balls entered into the second specific entrance port 650a is one ball in one round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second specific entrance port 650a is held for three seconds in one round. The game ball may be opened to enter one game ball, closed for 8 seconds to allow the game ball to flow down to be drawn, and again opened for 3 seconds to enter and close the game ball. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to enter a plurality of game balls in one round and to make a lottery of a plurality of times, thereby improving the interest of the player.

<Third Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a third modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(b) is a front view showing the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 650 of the third modified example of the first embodiment. In the third modified example of the first embodiment, in contrast to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the second specific ball inlet 650a, it is prevented that the game ball flows down to the probability varying rotor 900. It is different in that a protruding portion 700 is provided. This protrusion is changed by a solenoid (not shown) so as to protrude to the front side during the first to eighth rounds. When a game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown). In this modified example, from the first round to the eighth round, the maximum opening period of the second specific ball entrance 650a in the first round is set to 3 seconds, and the slide member at the timing when the three game balls enter the ball. 670 is moved to the closed position. Here, in a state in which the game balls are held in the protruding portion 700, the game balls are configured to have a size that allows up to four balls to enter the second specific ball entrance 650a. Therefore, if more game balls enter before the slide member 670 is closed at the timing when three balls enter the second specific entrance port 650a, a maximum of four balls enter the second specific entrance port 650a in one round. It is configured to be able to play a ball.

Further, a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path in the direction directly below the distribution ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the distribution ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning apparatus 650, as in the above-described embodiment.

One second after the end of one round, the projecting member 700 is changed to the back side so that the game ball flows down to the probability varying rotating body 900. Here, if four game balls have entered the second specific entrance port 650a, it will definitely enter the probability variation port 900a, and it is determined that the probability variation is always given to the player. In addition, thereafter, three game balls are guided to the continuous rotating body 901, and can be inserted into the continuous opening 901a with a probability of 3/4. In the present modification, the maximum period until the game ball held in the protruding portion 700 is detected by the continuation switch (not shown) even in the interval period from 1 round to 8 rounds (10 in the present embodiment). Seconds) is set as the winning detection period in the winning detection period storage area 203j.

A command indicating the number of game balls that have entered the second specific entrance 650a is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and an effect based on the command is executed. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which a display mode showing that the probability change is confirmed to be given at the timing when the fourth ball enters the ball is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Second Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 39 to FIG. 58, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the game board 13 according to the second embodiment, a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front has a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a wind turbine (movable member 310). Others are not shown), rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a left first winning opening 64a, a right first winning opening 64b, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device ( (Not shown), a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the front surface side of the base plate 60 on the rear surface side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a on the left, the first winning opening 64b on the right, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through-hole formed in and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 10) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the left first winning opening 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the right first winning opening 64b, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device provides a round of jackpots. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b is won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots to be determined here, "bonus B (16R probability variation lottery jackpot)" and "jackpot C (16R probability variation no jackpot)" are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "big hit B" is a big hit with a maximum round number of 16 rounds, so that the probability variation switch 65e3 is controlled so that the game ball can pass during the big hit game, and the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. It is a jackpot that has been set. On the other hand, the "big hit C" is a big hit with a maximum round number of 16 rounds, and is a big hit game in which it is difficult for a game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit game. Therefore, in the jackpot C, it is a jackpot in which the time saving game state is mainly given after the jackpot game.

Further, the "probability variation game state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the completion of the jackpot, that is, when the probability is changing (probability variation), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. Also, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving time) is a state where the jackpot probability is normal, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the left first winning opening. 64a or the right first winning opening 64b refers to a game state in which a ball easily wins. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

During probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory parts 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are opened is changed. The normal time is set longer than that in the middle. When the electric power accessories 645a and 645b are in the opened state (open state), the left first winning opening 64a is more than when the electric power accessories 645a and 645b are in the closed state (closed state). Alternatively, the ball easily enters the right first winning opening 64b. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening time of the electric accessory 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b is not changed, or the opening time is changed during the probability change or the shortening of time. In addition to this, the number of times the electric accessory parts 645a and 645b are opened per hit may be changed to be larger than that in the normal case. Further, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time and 1 when the electric auditors goods 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times the electric accessory parts 645a and 645b are opened per hit. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the electric accessory 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b is opened for a period of time, or the electric accessory 645a, 645b is hit once. It is possible to change the number of times to release the number of times, and to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to increase compared to the normal state.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B by using the winning (starting winning) to the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b as a trigger, and the third A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 10 ), for example, upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 10) is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

The pachinko machine 10 is attached to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"). The electric accessories 645a and 645b thus operated are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditory goods 645a and 645b of the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortening of the working hours, the ball can easily enter the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b.

It should be noted that the left first prize during the probability change or the time saving may be increased by other methods such as increasing the winning probability during the time change or the time saving, and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 645a, 645b per hit. In the case where the sphere is likely to win the mouth 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessories 645a and 645b may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution winning port 64 is arranged. Here, the details of the sorting winning port 64 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40(a)-(b) is a front view of the distribution winning port 64 with the front cover body 64c removed, and FIG. 41(a) is a game board in the left-right direction above the sorting winning port 64. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view taken from above by cutting 13; 41(b) is a cross-sectional view of the IVb cross section in FIG. 41(a).

The distribution winning port 64 is inserted into an opening formed in the game board 13 by a router and is fixed to the game board 13 from the front side with a screw. As shown in FIG. 41( a ), a detachable front cover body is arranged on the front side of the distribution winning port 64. Locking pieces 64d and 64e are provided on the left and right sides of the front cover body 64c, and claw portions protruding outward are formed at the tips of the locking pieces 64d and 64e. By fitting the front cover body 64c from the front side of the distribution winning opening 64, the claw portions of the locking pieces 64d, 64e are engaged with the engagement walls 64g, 64h of the base body 641 of the distribution winning opening 64. As a result, the front cover body 64c is fixed to the distribution winning opening 64. Further, when the front cover body 64c is pulled forward, the engagement between the claw portions of the locking pieces 64d and 64e and the engagement walls 64g and 64h is released, and the front cover body 64c can be removed from the distribution winning opening 64. it can.

The front cover body 64c is made of a transparent resin, and has a spiral pattern on the front surface. Due to this pattern, the inside of the distribution winning port 64 looks distorted through the front cover body 64c, which makes it difficult to visually recognize.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), a base body 641 for fixing the distribution winning opening 64 to the game board 13 is formed with an opening portion 64i into which one game ball can be inserted, and the opening thereof is formed. The left entrance hole 64a is on the left side and the right entrance hole 64b is on the right side so that the game balls entered from the portion 64i can flow down. Has been formed. The connecting portion 64j is formed in a convex shape protruding upward, and is configured to restrict the movement of the game ball to the other entrance.

The left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b are each configured to have an inclined surface that receives a game ball entered through the opening 64i and flows down to the back side of the game board 13. .. On the back side of the game board 13, as shown in FIG. 41(a), a left downflow gutter member 64t and a right downflow gutter member 64u are arranged, respectively. As shown in FIG. 41(b), the left downflow gutter 64t is arranged so that the game ball that has entered the left first winning opening 64a flows down below the game board 13 on the back side of the game board 13. .. The left downflow trough 64t is provided with a detection switch 64s1 capable of detecting a game ball, and it is detected that the game ball has entered the left first winning opening 64a.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the right downflow gutter 64u flows down below the game board 13 when the game ball entering the right first winning opening 64b flows down to the back side of the game board 13. It is arranged to. The right downflow trough 64u is provided with a detection switch 64s2 capable of detecting a game ball, and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right first winning opening 64b.

The distribution adjustment of the distribution winning apparatus 64 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game balls are set to be easily distributed to the left first winning opening 64a, and FIG. 40(b) is easy to distribute the game balls to the right first winning opening 64b. It is a figure showing the set state.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the game nails are arranged on the upper side of the opening 64i formed in the base body 641 of the distribution winning apparatus 64c with a width that allows one game ball to pass right and left. Thus, the passage port 645 is formed. The passage opening 645 has a passage formed around the apex of the connecting portion 64j. Among the game nails forming the passage opening 645, the adjustment nails t1 and t2 closest to the base body 641 adjust the ratio of allocating the game balls to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b. Is set to. As shown in FIG. 40(a), by adjusting the game nail t2 so as to be inclined downward, the width of the opening w2 in the right first prize hole 64b is narrowed, and the game ball is in the left first prize hole 64a. It is set to be easily distributed. Here, if the width of the opening w2 is adjusted to be narrower than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, the game ball can be distributed only to the left first winning opening 64a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40(b), by tilting the game nail t1 downward to narrow the width of the opening w1 of the left first prize-winning port 64a, the proportion of game balls distributed to the right first prize-winning port 64b. Can be set a lot. Also, by adjusting the width of the opening w1 to be narrower than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, it is possible to adjust the game ball to be distributed only to the right first winning opening 64b.

Here, in the state in which the front cover body 64c is attached to the distribution winning apparatus 64, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the front cover body 64 covers the adjustment nails t1 and t2 from the front side, and the player is informed. However, it is difficult to identify how the nail is adjusted. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine the distribution adjustment of the distribution winning apparatus 64. In addition, the surface of the front cover body 64c facing the adjusting nails t1 and t2 is formed in a concave shape so as to prevent interference.

Electric parts 645a and 645b are arranged in the passage port 645. When the electric parts 645a and 645b are actuated and the blades are opened outward, the game balls are guided to the passage port 645. Easy to configure.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can play the game by recognizing the passage opening 645 formed on the upper portion of the distribution winning apparatus 64 as a ball entrance and entering the game ball. In addition, when the game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a, one prize ball is paid out to the player. Further, when a game ball enters the right first winning opening 64b, three prize balls are set to be paid out to the player (see FIG. 46(b)). Therefore, the game store side can change and adjust the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player by changing the ratio of distributing the game balls to the left first prize hole 64a and the right first prize hole 64b. Therefore, by adjusting the adjusting nails t1 and t2, the game store side can easily adjust the profit and the like. In this case, the profit can be adjusted without changing the rate of entry into the passage opening 645, and the player can play a game by setting more game balls into the distribution winning opening 64.

In addition, by the game ball entering the left first winning opening 64a, the right first winning opening 64b, the special symbol lottery is executed, the variable display of the third symbol showing the lottery result is the third symbol display device. At 81. Therefore, the player can play the game while maintaining the special symbol lottery opportunity. Therefore, the interest of the player can be increased.

When a ball wins the left first winning opening 64a, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 10) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the left first winning opening 64a in a front view, a right first winning opening 64b in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the right first winning opening 64b, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. 110 (see FIG. 10) is a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In the present embodiment, the adjusting nails t1 and t2 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 64 are used to distribute the balls to either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. It is not limited. For example, instead of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning opening distributed by a switching valve movable by a solenoid or the like is switched. That is, one of the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b may be closed by the switching valve, and the ball may flow down to the other unopened winning opening. Further, in this case, the switching valve may be configured to be able to set a winning opening closed by a hall, may be switched at random, or may be configured to switch the winning opening closed at regular intervals. Good. Further, it may be configured to switch in a predetermined operation pattern each time a normal symbol is hit. Specifically, for example, the left first prize hole 64a with a small number of prize balls normally paid out is opened (the right first prize hole 64b is closed by a switching valve), and when a normal symbol is hit, a predetermined value is given. A configuration in which the right first winning a prize port 64b is opened (the left first winning a prize port 64a is closed by a switching valve) is set for a period (for example, a period in which the electric auditory goods 645a and 645b are opened or more). May be Further, the switching valve may be configured to execute a certain operation each time a normal symbol is hit. For example, the left first winning opening 64b is set to be open for a certain period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after being hit, and the right first winning opening after 1.5 seconds to 4.5 seconds. 64b may be set to be opened, and after 4.5 seconds, the left first winning opening 64a may be set to be opened again. And it is good also as a structure which provides a variation in the opening pattern (type of time saving state) of the electric accessory 645a, 645b in the case of hitting a normal symbol. That is, the electric power accessories 645a and 645b are electrically driven during the time period in which the electric accessory 645a, 645b is opened (time saving state 1) and the right first winning port 64b is opened, while the left first winning port 64a is opened. A configuration may be employed in which a time saving state (time saving state 2) of a pattern in which the accessory products 645a and 645b are opened.

Further, instead of providing the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b, different lottery is executed (for example, different jackpot types are determined when a big hit) It may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that the winning a prize entrance which can be entered is switchable. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to provide a winning opening in which a jackpot with a small number of prize balls is easily determined and a winning opening in which a jackpot with many prize balls is easily determined. By providing the winning openings having different degrees of advantage when the lottery is executed, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the balls will win the advantageous winning openings. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the distribution winning apparatus 64 is not limited to the winning opening. For example, each winning port is provided in a different part on the game board, and a plurality of operating ports for switching each winning port into a ball enterable state or an unballable state (A so-called non-electric accessory) may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that which of the working ports the ball is to be thrown into (which winning port is switched to a state in which the ball can be entered) is switched by a nail, a switching valve or the like.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower left side of the game board 13, and the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b is a big hit. Then, a predetermined dynamic display is executed on the first symbol display device 37A, the first symbol display device 37B, or the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is likely to win the first variable winning device 65. In this special game state, the first variable winning device 65, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first variable winning device 65 is closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the first variable winning device 65 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the details of the first variable winning a prize device 65 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 42, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b projectingly arranged on the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, and the first variable A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and opening/closing for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening/closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h protruding to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked to the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back cover thereof. A flow passage solenoid 65k fixed to the back surface side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for fixing the flow passage solenoid 65k from the back surface side to the back cover body 65j with a screw. It is composed of.

FIG. 43(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 at the La cross section (see FIG. 43(b)). 43(c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 43(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 43(b), the first variable winning device 65 has a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 43(b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 43(b).

As shown in FIG. 43(b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening/closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and a non-entering state. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning a prize device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable award winning device 65 to the second winning a prize port 65 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b with the right hit state, and after the big hit game. You can immediately reduce the time and effort to change the game method to the left. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

43(a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 43(b). As shown in FIG. 43(a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection opening 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection opening 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b), a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later will be described. ..

FIG. 44(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge passage 65e2. As shown in FIG. 44(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), the game sphere guided from the detection opening 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. It The game sphere that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is formed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. To be done.

Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the first variable winning port 65 during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the player's interest even during the jackpot game. You can The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. There is. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning port 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the big hit C is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning port 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot B, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot C, it is not possible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, the probability variation imparting ratio can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent excessive disadvantage from occurring.

With reference to FIG. 44(b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge passage 65e1 will be described. FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the winning ball is won in the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot C is won in the 13th round in a state where the gaming balls won before the 13th round are not discharged.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (for one ball winning in the present embodiment). 15 prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the first variable winning a prize device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp controller 113. The difference is that a part is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment.

The ROM 202 in the present embodiment differs from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment in that the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b are changed and the contents of the prize ball table 202e are added, and in other respects. It is the same.

Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 46(a)) is set so that the big hit B and the big hit C can be respectively selected. Specifically, the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit B, and “30 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit C.

Here, as described above, the "big hit B" is configured such that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state). However, since the “big hit C” is configured such that it cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, the lottery for determining whether or not the probability variation state is reached is not performed), the “big hit C” is performed. The "big hit B" is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B".

Next, the contents of the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. In the prize ball table 202e (see FIG. 46(b)), the game balls enter each of the above-described winning holes (general winning hole 63, left first winning hole 64a, right first winning hole 64b, specific winning hole 65a). This is a table that defines the number of game balls to be paid out in the case of playing. The prize ball table 202e is referred to for calculating the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out, based on the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 48). The prize ball command is generated based on the number of prize balls calculated here, and is transmitted to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. When the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 receives this prize ball command, the payout motor 216 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls according to the received command.

Specifically, one ball is defined as the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a, and 3 as the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the right first winning opening 64b. 10 balls are defined as the number of balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered into the specific winning opening 640, and 5 balls are provided as the number of balls to be paid out when the gaming balls are entered into the normal winning opening 63. ing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the right first prize opening 64b is set to be larger than the number of payout balls than the left first prize opening 64a. As a result, if a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter the right first prize winning opening 64b, it is advantageous to the player, and if not, it is disadvantageous to the player.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passing port 645 to the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, respectively. Has been. As a result, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the right first winning opening 64b a lot, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. FIG. 45B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45(b), the RAM 203 in the present embodiment has a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f. , Counter buffer 203h, jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203r, probability variation setting flag 203s, probability variation passage counter 203t1, winning number counter 203t2, action counter 203t3, remaining ball timer flag 203t4, remaining ball timer 203t5, probability variation valid flag 203t6, probability variation It has at least an effective timer 203t7, a discharge number counter 203t8, a time saving medium counter 203u, an opening flag 203v, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a left first winning opening. The respective values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on winning the prize in the 64a or the right first winning opening 64b are stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, and the acquired data is Among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the case of the winning stored in another reserved area The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is a first special symbol (first prize) that is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) to the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the symbol) up to 4 times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, the ball enters the left first prize hole 64a or the right first prize hole 64b and the number of spheres of variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S204 in FIG. 17).

The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S205 of FIG. 17, see S505 of FIG. 20). .. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the command of the number of reserved balls to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a variable display holding ball number of the normal symbol (second symbol) that is performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67 (the number of waiting times. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the normal starting opening 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S804 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 22).

When the sphere normally passes through the starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S803 in FIG. 23). : No).

The counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for holding each counter value, as in the first embodiment described above.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the jackpot setting processing (S233), which is executed when the jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17) is set (S2503 in FIG. 51), and is executed at the end of the jackpot. It is set to OFF in the ending process (FIG. 55) performed (S2702 in FIG. 55).

The probability variation flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). If the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low-probability gaming state (including a time saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON when the probability variation setting flag 203s described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S2704 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. It should be noted that, in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power cutoff occurs, the state immediately before the power cutoff is backed up.

The probability variation setting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 44(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON (S2812 in FIG. 56). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203r is set to OFF based on the ON setting. The probability variation setting flag 203s is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. 203s may be configured to be officially set to on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203t1 described later has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an irregularity in which only the probability variation setting flag 203s is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203t1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot B in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the first variable winning port 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203t1 and a discharge number counter 203t8, which will be described later. This probability variation passage counter 203t1 is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S2811 in FIG. 56). In addition, after executing the processing as to whether the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S2911 in FIG. 57). The probability variation passage counter 203t1 is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203t2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 42) provided in the first variable winning device 65, the game balls are incremented by one and updated (see FIG. 56). S2803). On the other hand, when one round is finished, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203t2) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203t8 and the probability variation passage counter 203t1) are given to the first variable winning device 65. After it is determined that the two match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203t2 is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203t3 is a counter for counting (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds in the jackpot B based on the start of 13 rounds, and the passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds in the jackpot C based on the start of 13 rounds. Is set. In the big counter B, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds, and in the big counter C, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set to the operation counter 203t3 (S2602 in FIG. 54). On the other hand, in the process of S2809 of the winning process (S1341 of FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203t3 is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203t3 is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203t3 and controlling the flow passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, it means that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. When the remaining sphere timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, the remaining sphere timer 203t5 described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S2905 in FIG. 57). The remaining ball timer 203t5 is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for discharging the game ball in the first variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

The remaining ball timer 203t5, when the preset round 1 is completed and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 65 are discharged. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the remaining ball timer 203t5. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203t5, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match. (S2907 in FIG. 57). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is clogged in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65, give a shock at the start timing of the 13th round, make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and hit the jackpot C. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the fraud of passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203s is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability variation valid flag 203t6 is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 44A) is based on the channel solenoid 65k being ON, and the probability variation switch It is shown that the time is less than or equal to the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

The probability variation valid timer 203t7 is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203t6 described above is set to ON. The probability variation effective timer 203t7 can determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge passage 65e2 to pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 illegally, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is allowed to enter and the probability variation switch 65e3 is allowed to pass the game ball, or the piano wire or the like is inserted from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up the game ball to allow it to pass therethrough or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

The discharge number counter 203t8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 44(a)) in one round. The discharged number counter 203t8 is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the discharged number are determined (S2911 in FIG. 57).

The time saving counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. The time saving medium counter 203u is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probability variation game state is not set after the jackpot game, the time shift game state of 100 times is entered.

The opening flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit has occurred. This opening flag 203v is set to ON in the jackpot setting processing (FIG. 51), which is executed when the jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17) is set (S2504 in FIG. 51), and jackpot control processing 2 When the opening command is set in (FIG. 53), it is set to OFF (S1332 in FIG. 53).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment in that the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is deleted, and the effect. The difference is that a counter 223f is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223e is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 48 to 57. Each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in the special symbol variation process (S104) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). Instead, the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 49) is executed, and the gate control process (S1104) is not executed in the main process (see FIG. 22), instead of the jackpot control process (S1105). The difference is that the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 53) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the timer interruption process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process 2 is a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interruption process 2, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, the information of the ball entering the left first prize hole 64a and the right first prize hole 64b is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, with the processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the special symbol variation process 2 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). .. After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b is executed (S105). In the start winning process (S105), the process relating to the special symbol 2 is not executed as compared with the first embodiment, so the detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S105 ends, the processes of S106 to S109 are executed as in the first embodiment, and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is If it is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S231). Next, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and the holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). ).

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the processing of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The details of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S217) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. More specifically, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, whether the big hit B or the big hit C is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit B, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit C. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (the result of the lottery this time) performed by the special symbol variation start process is special. It is determined whether it is a big hit of the symbol (S217). Then, if the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S217: Yes), a jackpot setting process is executed (S233), and the process proceeds to S222. The details of the jackpot setting process (S233) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203u is greater than 0 (S234), and the hour/hour counter 203u When it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S234: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S234), and the process proceeds to S235. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203u is 0 (S234: No), the process of S235 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

In the process of S222, which is executed after the process of S233, S234 or S235, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81 of the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 are displayed. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop (S222). When the process of S222 ends, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S213). The special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S213) in the second embodiment is different in that the process of S331 is executed instead of the process of S302 of the first embodiment, and the other points are the same. ..

Specifically, in the process of S302 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 to determine whether the probability variation is in progress. On the other hand, in the process of S331 in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the probability variation is in progress by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203r is ON.

In the process of S331, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203r is ON (that is, when it is determined that the probability variation is in progress) (S331: Yes), the process of S303 is executed, and the processes of S305 to S311 are performed. The process is executed and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203r is off (that is, when it is determined that the probability variation is not in progress) (S331: No), the process of S304 is executed, and the processes of S305 to S311 are performed. Is executed and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the jackpot setting process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process (S233). This jackpot setting process (S233) is a process performed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 49), and is a process for setting for starting the jackpot game.

In the jackpot setting process, first, the jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (S2501), and the opening scenario of the opening operation of the passage solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is determined based on the determined jackpot type. Is set (S2502). More specifically, in the case of the big hit type A, in the 13th round of the big hit game, the passage solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to open so that the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit C, the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set not to be opened (the game ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3).

Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S2503), the opening flag 203v is set to ON (S2504), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a main process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main process 2. In this main processing 2, the main processing of the game is executed.

In the main process 2, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device ( The external output processing to be transmitted to the peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 48) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device is determined based on the prize ball table 202e. The prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to 111. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the number of holding balls command, the variation pattern command necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102), the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot. The big hit control process 2 for executing the effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S1105). Details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the processing of S1105 is completed, the electric accessory opening/closing processing for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessories 645a and 645b associated with the passage port 645 is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric auditors is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

When the process of S1106 is finished, the processes of S1107 to S1116 are executed as in the first embodiment, and the present process is finished.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 53 to 57. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 2 (S1104). This jackpot control processing 2 (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and identification. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the opening flag 203v is on (S1331). When it is determined in the process of S1331 that the opening flag 203v is on (S1331: Yes), the opening flag 203v is turned off (S1332), the opening command is set (S1333), and this process is finished. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1331, if the opening flag 203v is not on (S1331: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301). The jackpot flag 203i is turned on, while the display showing the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is special, During the predetermined time after the jackpot game of symbols is included. In the process of S1301, if the jackpot flag 203i is not on (S1301: No), it is not a jackpot of the special symbol, so this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1334). If it is determined in the process of S1334 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1334), the jackpot operation setting process (S1335), which is a process of setting for starting a new round, is executed, and The process ends.

Here, in the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 54, S1335), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S2601). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S2601 (S2602). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S2601 (S2603). Then, this process is completed.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S1334, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1334: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the passage solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k (S1336). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1336: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1337). After that, the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1338). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1336, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1336: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1339). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed after the 15th round has ended. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1339: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1340). Then, this process is completed.

Here, details of the ending processing (S1340) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 55, S1340). In the ending process (FIG. 55, S1340), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S2701). Next, the jackpot flag is set to OFF (S2702), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203s is ON (S2703). When it is determined in the processing of S2703 that the probability variation setting flag 203s is ON (S2703: Yes), the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON (S2704). Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203s is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203r being set to ON. Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203s is not on (S2703: No), the time saving/medium counter is set to 100, and this process is ended.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203s is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203r is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65e3 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. You can play games with interest.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state is not reached, the time saving game state is given 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be given 50 times or 150 times. The time saving game state may be given 100 times together with the game state.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1339, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1339: No), winning processing is executed (S1341). Here, the winning process (S1341) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1341).

In the winning process (FIG. 56, S1341), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S2801). The round valid period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S2801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S2802: Yes), the winning number counter 203t2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S2803). After that, the processing of S2804 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S2802: No), the process of S2804 is executed.

In the process of S2804, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is 10 or more (S2804). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is 10 or more (S2804: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S2806). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON (S2807). Then, the process of S2808 is executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2804, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S2805). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S2805: Yes), the process of S2806 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2805: No), the process of S2808 is executed.

In the process of S2808, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203t3 is greater than 0 (S2808). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203t3 is larger than 0 (S2808: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203t3 is decremented by 1 and updated (S2809). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S2810). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S2810: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203t1 to update (S2811). The probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON (S2812). Then, the process of S2813 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S2810: No), the process of S2813 is executed. In the process of S2813, it is determined whether the operation counter 203t3 is 0 (S2813). When it is determined that the operation counter 203t3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S2814). The probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON (S2815). Then, this process is completed. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h has been switched, the probability variation game. Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2808, when it is determined that the operation counter 203t3 is 0 (S2808: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is on (S2816). If the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is off (S2816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is on (S2816: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is incremented by 1 and updated (S2817). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S2818). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is the upper limit value (S2818: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to OFF (S2819), and the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S2820). .. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S2818, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is not the upper limit value (S2818: No), the process of S2810 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, and thus the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the time for ball spitting. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65e3 from passing a game ball illegally and being given a probability variation game state.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 56, S1341) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1342). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1342) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1342). In the abnormality processing (S1342), processing for monitoring whether or not the gaming ball has been illegally passed to the probability variation switch 65e3 is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 57, S1342), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S2901). If it is outside the round valid period (S2901: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S2901: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S2902). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S2902: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S2903). Then, the process of S2904 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S2902: No), the process of S2904 is executed.

In the process of S2904, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is on (S2904). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is off (S2904: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is on (S2904: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203t5 is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S2905). The remaining ball timer 203t5 determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S2906). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S2906: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S2906: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203t1 and the discharged number counter 203t8) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203t2). It is determined whether or not (S2907).

If it is determined that they match (S2907: Yes), the process of S2909 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2907: No), an error command is set (S2908). Then, the process of S2909 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot C is a big hit.

In the process of S2909, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to OFF (S2909), and the remaining ball timer 203t5 is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S2910). After that, the winning number counter 203t2, the discharging number counter 203t8, and the probability variation passage counter 203t1 are reset to their initial values (S2911), and then this process is ended.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment, the command determination process 2 (S1611) is replaced with the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that it is changed to be executed, and the other points are the same.

With reference to FIG. 58, the command determination process 2 (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 2 (S1611). This command determination processing 2 (S1611) is executed in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is transmitted. judge. In addition, in this process, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1708 are executed as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1707, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1731). When it is determined that the prize information command is received (S1731: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted from the received command as prize information and stored in the first area of the prize information storage area 223a (S1732), Return to main processing 2. In the process of S1732, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area for the first special symbol is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S1731, when the winning information command is not received (S1731: No), it is then determined whether or not the command regarding the big hit is received from the main control device 110 (S1711). Here, examples of the command regarding the big hit include an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command.

In the process of S1711, when a command related to the big hit is received, the process corresponding to the command is executed (S1712), and the process returns to the main process 2. Specifically, for example, when the received command is the opening command, the display opening command is set. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the big hit effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1711, when it is determined that the command regarding the big hit has not been received (S1711: No), it is determined whether or not an error command has been received (S1733). In the process of S1733, when it is determined that the error command is received, the error process corresponding to the command is executed (S1734), and the process returns to the main process 2.

In the process of S1734, specifically, the error type is extracted from the received error command, and the display error command is set based on the error type. As a result, the occurrence of the error can be notified to the display control device 114 together with the error type. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, when the winning number mismatch error occurs in the main control unit, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives the error command and notifies the display control unit 114 of the error display (for example, winning number mismatch error). The characters are displayed) and an error signal is output to the hall computer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the first variable winning a prize device 65, and to prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if it is a big hit C.

In the process of S1734, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S1734: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( (S1719), and returns to the main process 2. In the processing of S1719, for example, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114. The command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, the game shop side adjusts the profit by adjusting the winning rate of the entrance for which the special symbol is drawn. In such a configuration, the chances of drawing special symbols are reduced, and there is a problem such as a period in which the special symbols are not changed, etc., and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is diminished. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming ball that has passed through the passage opening 645 enters either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, so that a big hit lottery can be performed. Done. The award ball table 202e (see FIG. 46(b)) is set so that the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b are different in the number of payout balls to be paid out when a game ball is entered. ing. Specifically, the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the left first prize hole 64a is one, whereas the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the right first prize hole 64b. Has three balls. Therefore, if a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter the right first winning opening 64b, it is advantageous for the player, and if not, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passing port 645 to the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, respectively. Has been. As a result, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the right first winning opening 64b a lot, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player. Further, since the number of prize balls paid out to the player (the number of prize balls with respect to the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645) can be changed by the adjusting nails t1 and t2, the rate of ball entry through the passage opening 645 is adjusted. There is no need, and the game ball can be easily won in the distribution winning apparatus 64. Therefore, for a game store, even if a large number of game balls are won in the distribution winning apparatus 64, profits can be secured by suppressing the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the player has more chances to be drawn for the special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game.

A front cover body 64c is provided on the front surface of the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b. The front cover body is made of an opaque member, or a pattern is attached to the front portion. By making it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether the game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 has entered the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. good. As a result, when many game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the left first prize opening 64a, the player visually recognizes them and wins a lot of the left first prize opening 64a (that is, for the player. It is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction, etc. by feeling that the adjustment is performed (inconvenient).

Furthermore, the position of the adjusting nails t1 and t2 may be made difficult for the player to visually recognize by forming the front cover body with an opaque member or providing a pattern on the front surface portion. As a result, the player visually recognizes the positions of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, and feels that the player is adjusted so as to win a large number of prizes in the left first winning opening 64a (that is, it is disadvantageous to the player). It is possible to reduce the feeling.

Further, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 may be configured to calculate and display the ratio of distribution to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b. Specifically, a game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 is detected by a sensor or the like, and the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are entered until the passing game ball reaches 100 balls. Memorize the number of game balls. After that, when the number of game balls passed is 100, the number of game balls stored is displayed, and the stored information is cleared. Here, the above-mentioned display showing the entry ratio may be displayed only when the switch is provided on the back side of the gaming machine and the switch is on, for example. Thus, when adjusting the entrance ratio at the store, by displaying and adjusting the entrance ratio, the adjustment of the entrance ratio can be easily performed, and the switch is turned off for the player. By setting, it is possible to prevent the entrance ratio from being displayed and to prevent the adjusted entrance ratio from being known.

It should be noted that the number of game balls that have passed through the passage port 645 is not detected, and only the number of game balls that have entered the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b is detected, and the total of these is detected. You may make it perform the said process, when it becomes 100 balls. Accordingly, the sensor of the passage port 645 can be eliminated, so that the cost of the game machine can be reduced. Further, the timing of calculating the above-mentioned incoming ball ratio is not limited to every 100 balls, and may be every 300 balls or every 50 balls, or may be calculated every predetermined time.

In addition, as described above, while the "normal symbol time saving state" is continued, when a new special symbol jackpot occurs, each time, a short time period (" Since the "duration period of ordinary symbol" is updated), when a special special jackpot newly arrives during the duration of "ordinary symbol shortening state", the ordinary symbol that remains until the new jackpot The short-term period becomes invalid. For example, when the "special symbol jackpot B" is reached and the "normal symbol normal state" shifts to the "ordinary symbol time saving state", the state is 100 for the special symbol lottery after the "jackpot B" end. It will continue until the end. However, immediately after that, when the "special symbol jackpot B" becomes again, the time saving period up to that point becomes invalid, and the "normal state of the ordinary symbol" is 100 times the special symbol lottery after the "jackpot B" ends. It will continue until the end.

Further, the electric auditors products 645a and 645b are arranged so that the game ball can easily enter the passage port 645, but the invention is not limited thereto. Only the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are provided with the game ball. You may make it easy to guide. In this case, the side wall forming the left first ball entrance 64a or the right first prize hole 64b of the base body 64c is composed of rotating blades (electrical accessory), and by rotating, a game ball May be easily inserted into the left first entrance 64a or the right first entrance 64b. With such a configuration, for example, by attaching an electric accessory to the right first winning opening 64b, a large number of game balls can be paid out during a time saving or a sudden change, and the player's possession of balls decreases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of shifting to the time saving game state or the probability variation game state.

In the present embodiment, the adjusting nails t1 and t2 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 64 are used to distribute the balls to either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. It is not limited. For example, instead of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning opening distributed by a switching valve movable by a solenoid or the like is switched. That is, one of the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b may be closed by the switching valve, and the ball may flow down to the other unopened winning opening. Further, in this case, the switching valve may be configured to be able to set a winning opening closed by a hall, may be switched at random, or may be configured to switch the winning opening closed at regular intervals. Good. Further, it may be configured to switch in a predetermined operation pattern each time a normal symbol is hit. Specifically, for example, the left first prize hole 64a with a small number of prize balls normally paid out is opened (the right first prize hole 64b is closed by a switching valve), and when a normal symbol is hit, a predetermined value is given. A configuration in which the right first winning a prize port 64b is opened (the left first winning a prize port 64a is closed by a switching valve) is set for a period (for example, a period in which the electric auditory goods 645a and 645b are opened or more). May be Further, the switching valve may be configured to execute a certain operation each time a normal symbol is hit. For example, the left first winning opening 64b is set to be open for a certain period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after being hit, and the right first winning opening after 1.5 seconds to 4.5 seconds. 64b may be set to be opened, and after 4.5 seconds, the left first winning opening 64a may be set to be opened again. And it is good also as a structure which provides a variation in the opening pattern (type of time saving state) of the electric accessory 645a, 645b in the case of hitting a normal symbol. That is, the electric power accessories 645a and 645b are electrically driven during the time period in which the electric accessory 645a, 645b is opened (time saving state 1) and the right first winning port 64b is opened, while the left first winning port 64a is opened. A configuration may be employed in which a time saving state (time saving state 2) of a pattern in which the accessory products 645a and 645b are opened.

Further, instead of providing the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b, different lottery is executed (for example, different jackpot types are determined when a big hit) It may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that the winning a prize entrance which can be entered is switchable. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to provide a winning opening in which a jackpot with a small number of prize balls is easily determined and a winning opening in which a jackpot with many prize balls is easily determined. By providing the winning openings having different degrees of advantage when the lottery is executed, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the balls will win the advantageous winning openings. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the distribution winning apparatus 64 is not limited to the winning opening. For example, each winning port is provided in a different part on the game board, and a plurality of operating ports for switching each winning port into a ball enterable state or an unballable state (A so-called non-electric accessory) may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that which of the working ports the ball is to be thrown into (which winning port is switched to a state in which the ball can be entered) is switched by a nail, a switching valve or the like.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 79. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b in which the number of payout balls based on the winning is different. To make a ball. The gaming machine that can adjust whether or not it is advantageous to the player by adjusting the incoming ball ratio with the adjusting nails t1 and t2 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the passage opening 645 is provided to either the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 having different expected numbers of payout balls when a big hit occurs. A game machine in which a game ball that has passed through enters will be described.

Here, based on the game ball entering the left first winning opening 64a, the first special symbol is drawn, and based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640, the second special symbol Lottery will be held. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to have different jackpot types selected when a jackpot is achieved. The jackpot based on the second special symbol is set so that a jackpot type advantageous to the player is easily selected as compared to the jackpot based on the first special symbol.

Further, the number of payout balls based on winning is also configured such that the second winning opening 640 is larger than the left first winning opening 64a, as in the second embodiment. Thereby, in the third embodiment, it is possible to adjust the strength of the player whether or not it is advantageous to the player, as compared with the second embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, a holding symbol indicating that the number of holding balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. Then, the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such complaints. It should be noted that in the above-described first embodiment, a holding symbol indicating that the number of holding balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) may be displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize.

In the third embodiment, in comparison with the second embodiment, the display of the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and the right first winning opening 64b is replaced by a second winning opening. The difference is that 640 is provided. Further, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 are changed. The other points are the same as in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 59, the game board 13 is provided with a second winning opening 640 instead of the right first winning opening 64b. The second winning opening 640 has the same structure as the right first winning opening 64b in the second embodiment, but the second special symbol is drawn based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. The selection ratio of the jackpot type is different between the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the expected value of the number of payout balls to be paid out to the player is different. Details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 60(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

In the present embodiment, a small area Ds4 is provided in the upper right of the screen in addition to each display area in the above-described second embodiment. This small area Ds4 displays identification information that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the number of holdings (see FIG. 60(b)), and is small until the number of holding balls reaches a predetermined value (4 in this embodiment). A holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls is displayed only in the area Ds1, and when the number of holding balls is larger than that, a holding symbol that is difficult for the player to recognize is displayed, which indicates the number of holding balls that is greater than the predetermined value. .. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is 4 balls or less, one reserved symbol is displayed for each one reserved ball number in the small area Ds1, and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. It Thereby, the player can easily recognize what the number of holding balls is by counting the number of holding symbols.

On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is more than four, four holding symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 and the holding ball number for the increase is displayed in the small area Ds4, which is recognized by the player. Difficult to hold design is displayed. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the increase is 1 (that is, the number of reserved balls is 5), "A", and the number of the reserved balls for increase is 2 (that is, the number of reserved balls is 6) "B" in the case of, "C" when the number of reserved balls for the increase is 3 (that is, the number of reserved balls is 7), and the number of the reserved balls for increase is 4 (that is, the number of reserved balls is 8) In the case of a ball, it is displayed as "D". This makes it easy to recognize only the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1, and thus it is possible to give the player the illusion that the maximum number of reserved balls is four. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. Then, the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such complaints.

Further, in this embodiment, the small area Ds4 is a smaller display area than other display areas (for example, the small area Ds1). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the number of holding balls based on only the holding symbols of the small area Ds1 which is a display area larger than the small area Ds4. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. Then, the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such complaints.

It should be noted that the reserved symbols that are difficult for the player to recognize in the small area Ds4 are not limited to this, and may be displayed with other symbols or symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. 64, the display (change) timing of the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds4 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment), it is configured to display a stop symbol indicating a continuous display suggesting that the variable effect is continuously executed. There is. As a result, the difference between the number of reserved balls recognized by the player and the actual number of reserved balls can be eliminated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

First, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, a case will be described in which the number of reserved balls becomes larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period can be replaced. FIG. 61 is a display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a small area Ds1 thereof when the number of holding balls is larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period can be replaced. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the pending design and the pending design displayed in the small area Ds4.

In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is 4, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. In this case, it is assumed that the fluctuating effect is being executed, and if the game ball newly enters the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 during the period in which the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect can be replaced, it is put on hold. The number of balls becomes 5. As a result, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from "-" to "A", and the symbols that are stopped and displayed are changed to those that suggest the continuation of the variation effect (see FIG. 62(a)). .. As a result, when this variation effect ends, a stop symbol indicating a continuous display suggesting that the variation effect is continuously executed is displayed (see FIG. 62(b)). Then, when the variation effect is started, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from "A" to "-", and the actual number of reserved balls is 4 (FIG. 62(c)).

Thereby, by displaying the stop symbol of the continuous display, the player can be made aware that the variation effect is continuously executed and the next variation effect is started without consuming the holding ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual number of reserved balls does not make the player feel uncomfortable. The number of balls can be reduced from 5 to 4 and the variation effect can be started.

FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. As described above, FIG. 62(a) is an example of a display screen when the game ball newly enters the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 during the period in which the stop symbol of the variable effect can be replaced. 62(b) is an example of a display screen when a continuous display is displayed after the display shown in FIG. 62(a), which indicates that the variation effect should be continued, and FIG. 62(c) shows , FIG. 62(b) is an example of a display screen when the variation effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, a case will be described in which the number of reserved balls becomes larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period cannot be replaced. 63 is a display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a small area Ds1 thereof when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period cannot be replaced. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the pending design and the pending design displayed in the small area Ds4.

In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is 4, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. In this case, it is assumed that the variable effect is being executed, and if the game ball newly enters the left first prize opening 64a or the second prize opening 640 during the period in which the stop symbols of the variable effect cannot be replaced, The number of reserved balls becomes 5. As a result, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from "-" to "A", and the symbol stopped and displayed in the next variation effect is changed to a continuous display that suggests continuation of the variation effect, Add 1 to the stop type change counter. As a result, the stop type of the next change effect of the change effect is changed to continuous display when it is received from the main control device 110, and the stop type change counter described above is decremented by one. As a result, in the variation effect to be executed next, a stop symbol indicating a continuous display suggesting that the variation effect is continuously executed is displayed (see FIG. 64(b)). Then, when the variation effect is started, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from "A" to "-", and the actual number of reserved balls is 4 (FIG. 64(c)).

As a result, even if the stop design of the fluctuating effect being executed is in a period that cannot be replaced, the stop effect of the fluctuating effect to be executed next is continuously displayed by displaying the stop design of the fluctuating effect. It is possible to let the player recognize that it is executed and the next variation effect is started without digesting the reserved ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual number of reserved balls does not make the player feel uncomfortable. The number of balls can be reduced from 5 to 4 and the variation effect can be started.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be described. 65A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202, and FIG. 65B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203.

First, regarding the ROM 202, the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b and the prize ball table 202e are different, and the other points are the same. The difference between the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 65A and 66, and the difference between the contents of the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 65B. To do. The first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c have the same contents as those in the second embodiment described above, and therefore their explanations are omitted.

First, the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b is provided with a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 selection table 202b2.

The toku-zu 1 selection table 202b1 is a table used to select a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit based on a ball hitting the left first winning opening 64a, and the toku-zu 2 selection table 202b2 is , Is a table used for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit based on a ball hitting the second winning opening 640. The selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 and the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 are defined with different jackpot types, and in the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, to the player The expected value of the number of balls to be paid out is set to be different.

Specifically, the contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 are capable of selecting jackpot B and jackpot C, respectively. Different ratios are set.

Specifically, in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the judgment value of the big hit B, and the value of “30 to 99” is set as the judgment value of the big hit C. (See FIG. 66(a)). In addition, in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, the value "0 to 69" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit B, and "70 to 99" is set as the determination value of the big hit C, respectively. (See FIG. 66(b)).

As described above, the “big hit B” is a big hit that is advantageous to the player, because the “big hit B” is a big hit in which lottery is performed to determine whether or not the probability will change. Therefore, the selection table for special figure 2 202b2 is a selection table which is more advantageous for the player than the selection table for special figure 1 202b1, and is based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 rather than the left first winning opening 64a. It is easy to select a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Further, similarly to the second embodiment, the number of payout balls based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 is set to be larger than that of the left first winning opening 64a. As a result, it can be adjusted to be more advantageous or disadvantageous to the player as compared with the second embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 is configured such that the jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be easily selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry into the left first winning opening 64a is achieved. The jackpot based on may be configured so that a jackpot advantageous to the player can be easily selected. As a result, in terms of the number of payout balls, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than the left first winning opening 64a, and in selecting the jackpot type, the left first winning opening is more than the second winning opening 640. It may be advantageous for the player to enter the mouth 64a. As a result, it is possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or too disadvantageous for the player.

Next, the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. In the prize ball table 202e, the number of payout balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening that has entered is defined. Specifically, the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a is one, and the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is three. Yes, the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 640 is 10, and the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the normal winning opening 63 is 5. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when the second first winning opening 640 is entered through the left first winning opening 64a is set to be large. As a result, if a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter the second winning opening 640, it is advantageous to the player, and if not, it is disadvantageous to the player.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 into the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640, respectively. ing. As a result, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the second winning opening 640 a lot, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is hit based on a ball hitting the second winning opening 640, a jackpot advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than a jackpot based on the left first winning opening 64a. Therefore, the player can be adjusted to be more advantageous or disadvantageous as compared with the second embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when entering the second winning opening 640 is larger than that to the left first winning opening 64a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second winning opening 640 is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the number of payout balls to be paid out when entering the left first winning opening 64a may be increased. As a result, in selecting the jackpot type, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than to the left first winning opening 64a, but in terms of the number of paid-out balls, the second winning opening 640 is on the left side. It is possible for the player to be more advantageous if he or she entered the first winning opening 64a. As a result, it is possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or too disadvantageous for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the second embodiment in that the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e, the variation execution flag 203w1, and the variation order storage area 203w2. Are provided, and other points are the same.

Like the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a described above. The only difference is that the left first winning opening 63a or the right first winning opening 63b (first special symbol) is changed to the second winning hole 640 (second special symbol), and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is a holding ball number counter dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), with respect to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d described above. The only difference is that the left first winning opening 63a or the right first winning opening 63b (first special symbol) is changed to the second winning hole 640 (second special symbol), and other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation execution flag 203w1 is a flag for setting which of the storage areas of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is to be used for the variation. This variation execution flag 203w1 is set based on the data of the variation order storage area 203w2 described later in the variation execution determination process (see FIG. 70), and is referred to in the processing of S252 and S253 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69). To be done. It should be noted that this flag is an area that is backed up even when the power is cut off, and in the initial state where the RAM is cleared, etc., it is set to execute a variation based on the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a.

The variable order storage area 203w2 is an area for storing the winning order for each of the reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c. Eight storage areas are set in the variation order storage area 203w2, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the winning order. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the second embodiment in that the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, the stop type change counter 223g, and the stop type changed counter 223h. The difference is that the reserved symbol storage area 223i is added. Other configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, similarly to the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that it is stored on the basis of the number of reserved balls command, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Stop type change counter 223g, when the sum of the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223f is larger than 4, the stop display displayed in the next change, the above-mentioned pseudo This is a counter for determining whether or not to change to the continuous display (see FIG. 62B) that suggests such continuous fluctuation. The stop type change counter 223g is a continuation display executed when the number-of-hold-balls command transmitted from the main control device 110 based on the entry into the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 is received. In the determination process (see FIG. 75), 1 is added when the stop symbol of the fluctuation currently being executed cannot be replaced. Further, in the stop type receiving process (see FIG. 74) executed when the stop type command is received, when the stop type is changed to the continuously displayed stop type (see S2252), 1 is subtracted. Further, when the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display, the display of the hold symbol also needs to be changed accordingly, so the stop type change counter 223g is referred to in the hold symbol setting process (see FIG. 76). Then, the processing corresponding to the value is executed.

The stop type changed counter 223h is for determining whether or not the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display (see FIG. 62(b)) indicating the pseudo continuous variation by the stop type counter 223g and the like described above. It is a counter. The stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 when the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display in the stop type receiving process (see S2053 in FIG. 74), and when the change is started in the change display setting process (that is, change). 1 is subtracted) (S2152 in FIG. 79). The stop type change counter 223g is referred to in the hold symbol setting process (see FIG. 76).

The reserved symbol storage area 223j is an area for storing information on the reserved symbols to be displayed on the display control device 114. In the reserved symbol storage area 223j, the number of reserved symbols (normally reserved symbols) displayed in the Ds1 area of the third symbol display device 81 described above and the reserved symbol (special reserved symbol) displayed in the Ds4 area There is an area for storing the display number of This reserved symbol storage area 223j is updated by the reserved symbol setting process (see FIG. 76) when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110. Specific contents will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
In the control processing in the third embodiment, part of the content of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that in the second embodiment. The other processing is the same as that of the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

A control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. The third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that a part of the special symbol variation process, the jackpot setting process, and the start winning process is changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 69, a special symbol variation process (SS104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The same processes as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is acquired (S203), and the variation execution determination process is executed (S251).

Here, the fluctuation execution determination process (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S251). This variation execution determination process (S251) is a process performed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69), and the effect pattern of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. (Variation effect pattern) is a process for determining whether to execute the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203c based on the value of various counters stored in which area. is there.

In the fluctuation execution determination process, first, the fluctuation execution flag 203w1 is set to 0 to perform initialization (S3001), and the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203w2 is acquired (S3002). After that, the data in the variable order storage area 203w2 is shifted (S3003). In the process of S3003, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the variable order storage area 203w2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first area→execution area, the second area→the first area, the third area→the second area, the fourth area→the reserved third area, the fifth area→the fourth area, the sixth area→ The data in each area is shifted such as the fifth area, the seventh area→the reserved sixth area, the eighth area→the reserved seventh area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S3004).

In the process of S3004, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S3004: Yes), the variation execution flag 203w1 is set to the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S3005), and the present process is terminated. , Return to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 1 (S3004: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (S3006). In the process of S3006, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (S3006: Yes), the variation execution flag 203w1 is set to the variation execution in the special figure 2 (S3007), and this process is ended. , Return to the special symbol variation process.

In the process of S3006, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special map 2 (S3006: No), there is no pending ball to be executed in a variable manner, and thus the process is terminated while the variable execution flag 203w1 remains in the initial state. , Return to the special symbol variation process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. After the processing of S251 is finished, it is determined whether or not the variable execution is performed in the special figure 2 (S252). Specifically, referring to the variation execution flag 203w1 set by the process of S251, if the variation execution flag 203w1 is the special figure 2, it is determined that the variation execution flag 203w1 is executed in the special figure 2.

In the processing of S251, when it is determined that the variation is executed in the special figure 2 (S252: Yes), in order to start the variation of the second special symbol, the same processing as the first embodiment described above is performed from S205 to S208. The process is executed and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable execution is not performed in the special figure 2 (S252: No), the process proceeds to S253.

In the process of S253, when it is determined that the change is not executed in the special figure 1 (S253: No), there is no reserve ball to be changed, and thus the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable execution is performed in the special figure 1 (S253: Yes), the processing from S210 to S213, which is the same processing as in the above-described first embodiment, is executed, and this processing is ended. In addition, in the present embodiment, whether or not the variation is executed in the special figure 2 is determined before the special figure 1, but whether or not the variation is executed in the special figure 1 is determined compared to the special figure 2. You may make it discriminate first. This makes it possible to set which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is to be preferentially determined.

In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S213), in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S208), the jackpot B and the jackpot C are set to be different in selection ratio. As described above, the jackpot B is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot C, and the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 has a higher selection ratio of the big jackpot B. Therefore, the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 is selected. It is more advantageous for the player to select the jackpot type based on. That is, the jackpot based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is more advantageous than the jackpot based on the ball entering the left first winning opening 64a.

As a result, by adjusting the adjusting nails t1 and t2 so that the game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 can be easily won into the second winning port 640, it can be adjusted to be advantageous to the player. If not adjusted, it can be adjusted to be disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the selection ratios of the jackpot types are set to be different between the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. For example, in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, “4 rounds” is set. The jackpot is selected, and the type of jackpot is selected so that “16 rounds of jackpots” are selected in the selection table for special figure 2 202b2, thereby adjusting whether or not it is advantageous to the player. You may be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the jackpot setting process 3 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 3 (S254). This jackpot setting process 3 (S254) is a process performed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69), and is a process of setting for starting the jackpot game. In the jackpot setting process 3 (S254) in the third embodiment, it is determined whether the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment is a jackpot of the first special symbol (S2551), and the determination is made. The difference is that the jackpot type is determined (S2552 or S2553) according to the result, and the other points are the same, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

First, in the jackpot setting process 3 (S233), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot for the first special symbol (S2551). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol by the process of S2551 (S2551: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the selection table for special figure 1 202b1, and the process proceeds to S2502. On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2551 that the first special symbol is not a big hit (the second special symbol is a big hit), the big hit type is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, and the process of S2502 is performed. Transition. By the processing of S2551 to S2553, the jackpot type according to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be determined, and the jackpot game can be executed based on the jackpot type.

When the process shifts to S2502, the processes of S2502 to S2504 are executed as in the second embodiment, and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) of the left first winning port 64a and the left first winning port 64a or the first winning port 64a. This is a process for determining whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) at the second winning opening 640, and if there is a starting winning, a process of holding the value indicated by each random number counter.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) the left first winning opening 64a (S501). Here, the ball entering the left first winning opening 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the left first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display pending in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, whether or not there is a winning in the left first winning opening 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the left first winning opening 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S503: No), the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the left first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 is held. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d changed by calculation is set to the holding sphere number command (S505).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a main process 2 (see FIG. 66) described later that is executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command in the process of S505, the special symbols for each value of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. The first special ball storage area 203a is stored (S506), the special map 1 is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203k (S551), and the process proceeds to S507. In the process of S551, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203c or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203w is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203k in the variation execution determination process (S251) described above, the starting opening varies the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even if there are two types of fluctuations, one that changes the symbols, the fluctuations can be started in the order in which the winning opening is won.

In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) (S507). When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S507: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e performs the same processing as when winning the left first winning opening 64a.

More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S509: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (N2) is incremented by 1 (S510), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S511). Then, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (S512), and the first area of the variation order storage area 203k is stored. Toku-zu 2 is set (S552), and this processing ends. The determination of the first area in S552 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S551.

Whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 640 (S507: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S509: No), the process proceeds to the prefetching process (S513), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 79. In the second control example, part of the command determination process 2 (S1611), the stop type reception process (S1705), and the variable display setting process (S1612) is changed from the first control example. Since the other configurations are the same except for the points, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination processing 3 (S1611) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the command determination processing 3 (S1611). In the third embodiment, as compared with the second embodiment, the stop type reception process (S1751) is executed instead of the processes of S1705 and S1706, and the continuous display determination process (instead of the process of S1708). (S1751), the difference is that it is changed to execute the reserved symbol setting process (S1752). Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination processing 3 (S1611), first, similarly to the second embodiment, the processing of S1701 to S1704 is executed. If it is determined in the process of S1704 that the stop type command has been received, the stop type receiving process is executed (S1705), and the present process ends.

Here, the stop type reception process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the stop type receiving process (S1705).

In the stop type reception process (S1705), first, the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3101), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103.

In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the stop type counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3103). In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the stop type counter 223i is 0 (S3103: No), it is not necessary to change the stop type, and thus this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3103, when it is determined that the stop type counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3103: Yes), it is necessary to change the stop type, so the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the continuous display. Change (S3104). After that, the stop type change counter 223h is incremented by 1 (S2053), the stop type change counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S3105), and this processing is ended.

Here, in the stop type change counter 223i, the number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more due to the game ball entering the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 during the period when the change effect cannot be replaced. In this case, 1 is added. By adding 1 to the stop type change counter 223i, the received stop type can be changed to the stop type for continuous display in the process of S3104. As a result, even when the game balls enter during the period in which the variable effect cannot be replaced and the number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more, the stop type of the next variable effect can be changed to the stop type of continuous display. .. Thereby, the player can be made aware that the variation effect is continuously executed and the next variation effect is started without consuming the holding balls. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual number of reserved balls does not make the player feel uncomfortable. The number of balls can be reduced from 5 to 4 and the variation effect can be started.

In addition, by adding 1 to the stop type changed counter 223h, in the pending symbol setting process (see FIG. 76) described later, whether to execute the increasing pending symbol setting process (see FIG. 77) or the decreasing pending symbol. It is possible to determine whether to execute the setting process (see FIG. 78).

Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S1704, when it is determined that the stop type command is not received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not the reserved ball number command is received (S1706). In the process of S1706, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1706: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the reserved ball number counter of the corresponding special symbol (S1707), The continuous display determination process is executed (S1751), the reserved symbol setting process is executed (S1752), and this process ends.

Here, the continuation determination process (S1751) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the continuation determination process (S1751). In this continuation determination process (S1751), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 receives the number of reserved balls transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has entered the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640. This is the process executed in some cases. In the continuation determination process (S1751), based on the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c (N2), the stop type is the stop type of the continuous display. This is a process of determining whether or not to change.

In the continuous display determination process (S1751), first, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c (N2) are acquired (S3201), and the total value thereof. It is determined whether (N1+N2) is greater than 4 (S3202). In the processing of S3202, when it is determined that the total value (N1+N2) is not larger than 4 (that is, 4 or less) (S3202: No), there is no need to change the stop type, so this processing is directly performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if it is determined that the total value (N1+N2) is larger than 4 (that is, 5 or more) (S3202: Yes), then the stop type changed counter 223h is 0? It is determined whether or not (S3203). In the process of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type changed counter 223h is not 0 (S3203: No), the stop type change counter is set because the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed has already been changed to continuous display. One is added (S3207), and this processing ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the stop symbols from being duplicated and changed to continuous display.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type changed counter 223h is 0 (S3203: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a stop symbol replaceable period (S3204). In the process of S3204, when it is determined that the stop symbol is not replaceable, as described above, the stop type change counter is incremented by 1 to change the stop symbol of the next variable effect (S3207), This process ends.

Here, in the process of S3204, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol can be replaced during the variable period, and the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (replaceable period) is previously set during the variable period. It is determined by each fluctuation pattern, and a timer (not shown) determines whether or not that period has elapsed.

In the process of S3204, when it is determined that the stop symbol can be replaced, the display stop type command (continuous display) is set (S3205), and the stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 (S3206). , This process ends. The display stop type command (continuous display) set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 52). In S1802), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command (continuous display), when the stop display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is continuously displayed. , The set stop type information is overwritten.

Further, since the stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 in the process of S3206, it is possible to suppress the duplicate change of the stop type in the process of S3203, as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the pending symbol setting process (S1752) executed after the continuous display determination process (S1751) will be described. FIG. 76 is a view showing a flowchart of this reserved symbol setting process (S1752). This hold symbol setting process (S1752) is a process executed when a hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110, and the hold ball number is changed based on a change in whether the hold ball number increases or decreases. This is a process for executing a process corresponding to a change in the number.

In the reserved symbol setting process, first, the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3301), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b (N1), and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c (N2). And are acquired (S3302). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has increased based on the value acquired by the processing of S3301 and S3302 (S3303).

Specifically, the total value of the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c (N2) is the display of the normal holding symbol in the holding symbol storage area 223i. If it is larger than the total of the number and the display number of special reserved symbols, it is determined to be an increase, and if it is small, it is determined to be a decrease.

Here, when the number of reserved balls changes due to the winning of the game balls or the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the number of reserved balls transmitted from the main controller 110 is transmitted. When this reserved ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are determined by the process of S1707 of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 73) ( N2) and the value are updated. Then, because the reserved symbol setting process (S1752) is executed, by comparing the total value of the reserved symbol number counters (223b, 223f) of the special symbol with the total value of the displayed numbers in the reserved symbol storage area 223i, It is possible to determine whether the number of retained balls has increased or decreased.

In the process of S3303, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has increased (S3303: Yes), an increase reserved symbol setting process is executed (S3304), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the number of reserved balls has increased (S3303: No), the decrease time reserved symbol setting process is executed (S3305), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the increase pending symbol setting process (S3304) will be described. FIG. 77 is a view showing a flowchart of the increase pending symbol setting process (S3304). This increase-time hold symbol setting process (S3304) is a hold ball transmitted from the main control device 110 when the number of hold balls is increased based on the ball entering the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640. It is the process when a number command is received, and updates the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i based on the increase in the number of reserved balls, and sets the display reserved ball number command for displaying the reserved symbol on the display control device 114. This is a process for doing.

In the increase pending symbol setting process, first, the data in the pending symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3401). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of normally reserved symbols stored in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is 4 (S3402). In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of the normal reserved symbols is four (S3402: Yes), the normal reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) has reached the upper limit value (4). , The number of special reserved symbols (reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds4) is incremented by 1 (S3403), and the process proceeds to S3405.

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of normally reserved symbols displayed is not 4 (S3402: No), the normally reserved symbols (reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1) reach the upper limit value (4). Therefore, the number of normally reserved symbols displayed is incremented by 1 (S3404), and the process proceeds to S3405.

When the process of S3402 or S3403 is completed, the display reserved sphere number command is set based on the reserved symbol storage area 223i updated by the process of S3402 or S3403 (S3405), and the process is terminated. The display reserved ball count command set in the process of S3405 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 (S1802). In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved sphere number command, it executes a process of updating the display of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, based on the fact that the main control device 110 detects the winning of the game ball, it is possible to update the display of the reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the reduction pending symbol setting process (S3305) will be described. FIG. 78 is a view showing a flowchart of the reduction pending symbol setting process (S3305). This decrease time hold symbol setting process (S3305) is a process when a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the hold ball number is reduced based on the start of variation of the special symbol, It is a process for updating the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i based on the decrease in the reserved number of balls, and setting a display reserved ball number command for displaying the reserved symbol on the display control device 114.

In the reduction symbol setting process (S3305), first, the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3501). Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (S3502). In the process of S3502, when it is determined that the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (S3502: Yes), the display number of the special reserved symbols in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is decremented by 1 (S3503), and the process of S3505 is performed. Transition. In the process of S3502, when the stop type change counter 223h is larger than 0, the stop type has been changed to the continuous display in the previous change of the special symbol, and the stop display before the start of the current change is the continuous display. This is the case.

Thereby, when the stop display of the variation of the special symbol started last time becomes the continuous display (see FIG. 62(b)), the display number of the special reserved symbol is subtracted by 1, so that the variation of the special symbol to be started this time Based on this, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved symbols in the small area Ds4 on the third symbol display device 81 by one. The player, the stop symbol of the previous variable display is a continuous display that suggests a continuous variation, so the variation of the special symbol is not reduced without reducing the reserved symbol in the small area Ds1 which is a mode that is easily recognized by the player. Even if you start it, you will not feel any discomfort. As a result, without making the player feel uncomfortable, the player can reduce the number of reserved symbols in the small area Ds4, which is a mode difficult for the player to recognize, to start changing the special symbol.

Here, the stop type change counter 223h is added by the stop type receiving process when the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (that is, when the number of holding balls is 5 or more and a special holding symbol is set). .. Therefore, when the stop type changed counter 223h becomes larger than 0, it means that there is a special reserved symbol. As a result, in the process of S3503, there is no problem that the number of special reserved symbols displayed cannot be subtracted because there is no special reserved symbol. If, in the process of S3503, the display number of special reserved symbols is 0 and cannot be subtracted, error processing may be performed. Specifically, a process of setting a display error command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 so as to perform a display indicating an error is exemplified. Thereby, due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to detect a malfunction in which the stop type changed counter is added even though the number of special reserved symbols displayed is 0.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3502, when it is determined that the stop type changed counter 223h is not 0 (S3502: No), in the previous change of the special symbol, the stop type is changed to continuous display. Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the special reserved symbol, the display number of the normally reserved symbol is decremented by 1 (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507.

As a result, in the case where there is no special reserved symbol, the normal reserved symbol (held symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) can be decreased by 1. Further, in the case where there is a special pending symbol, the stop type changed counter 223h is 0, that is, since the stop symbol of the variation of the special symbol started last time is not changed to the continuous display, the special pending symbol is Similarly to the case where there is not, it is possible to decrease the normal reserved symbol (held symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) by 1.

In this way, when the variation effect is stopped by the continuous display (see FIG. 62B), the special reserved symbol can be reduced by one and displayed by the process of S3503 at the start of the next variation effect. (See FIG. 62(c)). On the other hand, if the variation effect is not stopped by the continuous display, the normal reserved symbol can be reduced by one and displayed by the process of S3504 at the start of the next variation effect (see FIG. 64(a)).

In the present embodiment, whether or not the stop type has been changed can be determined by adding and subtracting the stop type changed counter 223h. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the stop type displayed as a stop can be determined. It may be stored in a ring buffer or the like so that it can be discriminated by referring to the stop type displayed in the previous stop display.

Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S1612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variable display setting process 3 (S1612). The variable display setting process 3 (S1612) in the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that a determination process of the stop type changed counter 223h and a subtraction process are added, and other processes. Are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

When the process of S2104 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the stop type changed counter 223h is larger than 0 (S2151). In the process of S2151, it is determined that the stop type changed counter is greater than 0, in the change of the special symbol started before the change of the special symbol which starts the change this time, when the stop type is changed. Therefore, the stop type changed counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S2152), and the process proceeds to S2105.

Thereby, since the stop type changed counter 223h can be subtracted after performing the variable display of the special symbol whose stop type has been changed to the continuous display, the variation of the next special symbol whose stop type has been changed to the continuous display Only at the start of display fluctuation, the special reserved symbol (reserved symbol of the small area Ds4) can be reduced by the process of S3503 of the above-described reduction pending symbol setting process (S3303). Therefore, when the stop symbol of continuous display is not displayed, the special reserved symbol (reserved symbol of the small area Ds4) which is a mode difficult for the player to recognize is not started to change the special symbol, that is, When the stop symbol of the continuous display is not displayed, the variation of the special symbol is started by decreasing the normal reserved symbol (reserved symbol of the small area Ds1), which is a mode that the player can easily see, so that the player can start the variation. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 645 enters either the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640. A jackpot lottery will be held. The award ball table 202e (see FIG. 65(d)) is set such that the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640 have different numbers of payout balls when a game ball is entered. There is. Specifically, the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a is one, whereas the number of payout balls when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is It has 3 balls. Therefore, if a lot of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 enter the second winning opening 640, it is advantageous for the player, and if not, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Further, in the jackpot based on the left first winning opening 64a and the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640, the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640 is selected so that the jackpot type advantageous to the player is easily selected. The first hit type selection table 202b is set. Specifically, in the jackpot based on the left first winning opening 64a, "big hit C" is easier to select than "big winning B" (see FIG. 66(a)), and in the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640, "big hit" It is easier to select "big hit B" than "C" (FIG. 66(b)).

Here, as described above, the “big hit B” is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit C” because it is a big hit in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the probability will change. Therefore, the jackpot based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is more likely to be the “jackpot B” which is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, than the jackpot based on the entering the left first winning opening 64a.

As a result, the number of balls to be paid to the second winning port 640 is larger than the number of balls to be paid to the first winning port 64a on the left side, and a jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be selected easily. In comparison, it is a more advantageous entry for the player. As a result, by adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 into the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 by adjusting nails t1 and t2, it is possible to compare with the second embodiment. , It is possible to adjust the strength or weakness of whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 is configured such that the jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be easily selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry into the left first winning opening 64a is achieved. The jackpot based on may be configured so that a jackpot advantageous to the player can be easily selected. As a result, in terms of the number of payout balls, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than the left first winning opening 64a, and in selecting the jackpot type, the left first winning opening is more than the second winning opening 640. It may be advantageous for the player to enter the mouth 64a. As a result, it is possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or too disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the holding symbol indicating that the number of holding balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) is a special holding symbol (of the third symbol device 81) that is difficult for the player to recognize. It is displayed in the reserved area of the small area Ds4) (see FIG. 60(b)). Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. Then, the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such complaints.

Further, the electric auditors products 645a and 645b are arranged so that the game ball can easily enter the passage port 645, but the invention is not limited thereto. Only the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are provided with the game ball. You may make it easy to guide. In this case, the side wall forming the left first ball entrance 64a or the right first prize hole 64b of the base body 64c is composed of rotating blades (electrical accessory), and by rotating, a game ball May be easily inserted into the left first entrance 64a or the right first entrance 64b. With such a configuration, for example, by attaching an electric accessory to the right first winning opening 64b, a large number of game balls can be paid out during a time saving or a sudden change, and the player's possession of balls decreases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of shifting to the time saving game state or the probability variation game state.

In the present embodiment, when the left first winning port 64a is won, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is executed, and when the right first winning port 64b is won, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed. Here, when a big hit in the lottery for the special symbol 2, a big hit game that is more likely to be given a probability variation game is configured to be executed more easily than when a big hit occurs in the special symbol 1. Therefore, by arranging the electric accessory instead of the side wall of the right first winning opening 64b, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily executed during the probability variation or during the time saving, so that the probability variation or the time saving state can be performed. , The probability variation game can be easily given (the probability that the probability variation game is given can be increased).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 93. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of probability change states having different degrees of advantage for the player and a plurality of time saving states having different degrees of advantage are provided. More specifically, in the present embodiment, it is easier for the player to obtain more benefits when the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, in the case where there is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, compared to the case where the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, more prize balls can be obtained, and in addition, the special symbol The probability of shifting to the probability variation state is increased (the jackpot type that can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is easily selected). Then, as the probability variation state of the special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, a relatively disadvantageous) probability variation state 1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be performed in comparison with the probability variation state 1. A probabilistic state 2 (i.e., relatively advantageous) is provided. In addition, as a time-saving state of the normal symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous) time-saving state 1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in comparison with the time-saving state 1. An easy (i.e., relatively advantageous) time saving state 2 is provided. By varying the amount of award balls that can be obtained according to the state and the transition rate to the probability variation state, it is possible to play a game aiming at a more advantageous state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. The probability variation state 1 is a state where the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 1 are combined, and the probability variation state 2 is a state where the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration. The configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 is provided. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 is partially changed, a part of the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and a part of the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are performed in the first embodiment. This is a change from the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 88, the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, three ball entrances are provided in which a special symbol is drawn by entering a ball. Specifically, the first ball entrance 64a1 provided on the lower side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, and the right second ball entrance provided on the right side with respect to the variable display device unit 80 in front view. 64b and the right 1st entrance 64a2 provided in the front view right side with respect to the right 2nd entrance 64b are provided.

Both the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are subjected to a lottery for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the ball. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-mentioned two kinds of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the right first entrance 64a2 is provided with a first actuating member 645a. The first actuating member 645a is in an open state in which the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2 (easy) and cannot enter the ball in the right first ball entrance 64a2 ( Difficult) and closed state. The first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state when the ball enters the first operating port 704 provided inside the sorting winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a that has been switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

Similarly, the right second ball inlet 64b is provided with a second actuation accessory 645b. The second actuating member 645b is also in an open state in which the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b (easy), and cannot enter the ball in the right second ball entrance 64b ( Difficult) and closed state. The second operating accessory 645b that accompanies the second operating accessory 645b is switched to the open state when the ball enters the second operating port 707 provided inside the distribution winning apparatus 700. On the other hand, the second actuation accessory 645b that has been switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

A distribution winning apparatus 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball that has entered inside into either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first actuation port 704 (when the ball is entered), the first actuation accessory 645a attached to the right first entrance port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entrance The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second actuation opening 707 (entering the ball), the second actuation accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance opening is switched to the open state, and then to the right second entrance opening 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

Here, details of the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a front view of the distribution winning apparatus 700. A ball is allowed to flow down on the upper surface side of the distribution winning apparatus 700. As shown in FIG. 81, since the upper surface side of the distribution winning apparatus 700 is inclined to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, the sphere reaching the upper surface of the distribution winning apparatus 700 basically flows down to the lower left direction. To do. Further, an electric accessory 701 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the distribution winning apparatus 700. This electric accessory 701 is in an open state (immersed state) in which the ball can enter (easy) into the sorting prize winning apparatus 700 and a closed state (projected state) in which the ball cannot enter (difficult). ) And can be switched to. This electric accessory 701 is set to an open state when it is hit by a lottery for ordinary symbols.

The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 is branched into two channels, a first channel 703 and a second channel 706. Since the first operating port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow channel 703, the sphere that has flowed down the first flow channel 703 enters the first operating port 704. On the other hand, since the second operating port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow channel 706, the ball flowing down the second flow channel 706 enters the second operating port 707. In addition, at the position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are branched, a flow path through which a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is switched ( A variable flow path) 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches (slides and displaces) between a first switching state in which the sphere flows down into the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the sphere flows down into the second flow path 706. )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the left side in front view to close the upstream side of the second flow path and only the first flow path is opened. To the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the right when viewed from the front to close the upstream side of the first flow path, and only the first flow path is opened. , The sphere advances to the second flow path.

The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and a predetermined period (e.g., 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol hit state is reached after the normal symbol hits). ) Has elapsed, the first switching state is switched to the second switching state. Moreover, when a specific period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the switching to the second switching state, the switching to the first switching state is performed again.

If the ball can be thrown into the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the second switching state, the ball can be made to flow down toward the second operation port 707. When the ball enters the second operation port 707, the second operation accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability that the probability variation state of the special symbol is given when it is a big hit, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow-down direction (whether the flow is flowing down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707) of the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 81, a first operating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operating port 704. The first operating port 704 is composed of a known non-electrically-powered accessory, that is, the first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball entering the first operating port 704. You can Further, when the first actuating member 645a is in the open state, the first actuating member 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. The second operating mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operating mechanism 705. That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second operating port 707. Further, when the second actuating member 645b is in the open state, the second actuating member 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b.

In this way, by throwing a ball into the distribution winning apparatus 700, the ball is thrown into the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating accessory 645a or The two working accessory 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if the special design 2 lottery is a big hit, it is more advantageous than the special design 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first working opening 704 or the second working opening 707. You can let me know. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 82, the correspondence relationship between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 is provided with two types (opening pattern A and opening pattern B). When the opening pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is normally set to the open state for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second) immediately after the symbol hitting is started, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. To be done. Then, after the open state is set for 0.1 seconds, the hit state ends. During the opening period of 1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 during this period is distributed to the first operation port 704. .. On the other hand, during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 during this period is the second operation port 707. Be assigned to. However, since it is difficult to enter the ball during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, in many cases, the ball entering the sorting apparatus 700 while the opening pattern A is set is It is distributed to the first operating port 704 and the right first ball inlet 64a1 is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is normally set to the open state for an extremely short time (that is, 0.1 seconds) immediately after the start of the symbol hit, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. Set to state. Then, after the open state is set for a relatively long time (that is, one second), the hit state ends. During the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 during this period is sent to the first operating port 704. It is distributed. However, as described above, it is difficult to enter the ball during the extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, in the opening period of 1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 during this period is transferred to the second operation port 707. It is distributed. Therefore, in many cases, the ball that has entered the distribution device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is distributed to the second operation port 707, and the right second ball inlet port 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

In this way, the degree of advantage for the player can be changed depending on the set opening pattern, so that the opening pattern can be made to be interesting each time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, the opening pattern to be set is determined according to the game state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability variation non-time saving state), the time reduction state 1, and the probability variation state 1, when an ordinary symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the open pattern B is set when a normal drawing hits. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, it is difficult to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, the types of special symbols that are easy to be executed can be different according to the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower left side of the game board 13, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is made by the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry (prize) into the first entrance 64a1, the right first entrance 64a2, or the right second entrance 64b, After a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the jackpot is stopped, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed as the third symbol display device 81. , And the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 42 to 44) in the second embodiment. Since it is as described above in the second embodiment, details are omitted, but the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering device 65 during the big hit passes the probability variation switch 65e3 therein, and thus the big hit. After the end, the probability change state is added.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 90. First, FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 90(a) is a selection for special figure 1 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90B is a diagram showing the contents of the table 202b1, and FIG. 90B is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. The special table 1 selection table 202b1 is referred to for determining the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is the second special symbol lottery. When it becomes a jackpot in, it is referred to to determine the jackpot type.

First, the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 included in the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot type to be selected is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the big hit A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9". This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four, the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. .. The pattern that allows the probability variation switch 65e to pass includes, for example, that the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (providing the probability variation switch 65e in the variable winning device 65). The flow path is opened). Since the player continuously hits the ball toward the variable winning device 65 in the big hit, one or more balls can be made to flow down to the probability change switch 65e in 5 seconds. When the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e in the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot. That is, the probability variation state 1 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 1 are combined after the big hit is given. On the other hand, if the player does not hit the ball during the big hit and the big hit ends without the ball passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, only the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit ends. Although the jackpot A is prone to the probability variation state, the probability variation state to be given is the probability variation state 1, and the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed during the probability variation state, so the probability variation state 2 is likely to be provided. It is disadvantageous compared to jackpot B and jackpot F).

The jackpot B is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 49”. This jackpot B is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four, the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. .. When the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e in the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot. That is, after the big hit, the probability variation state 2 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined is given. On the other hand, when the player does not hit the ball during the big hit and the big hit ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e during the big hit, only the time saving state 2 is given after the end of the big hit B. The jackpot B is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, because the jackpot B easily shifts to the most probable variation state 2 for the player. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, the prize balls are disadvantageous because they are smaller than when the jackpot is won by lottery of the second special symbol.

The jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 94”. This jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four and the probability variation solenoid (flow passage solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit. is there. The pattern in which the probability variation switch 65e cannot pass means, for example, that the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the probability variation switch in the variable winning device 65). This is an operation pattern in which the flow path in which 65e is provided is opened). Even if the ball is entered at the same time when the specific winning opening 65a is opened after the fourth round is started, the ball cannot reach the flow path provided with the positive variation solenoid 65k within 0.5 seconds. The flow path is closed before the ball reaches the positive change solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the big hit C, the probability change state of the special symbol is not given after the big hit. That is, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given, and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, and the number of prize balls is also the second special symbol. Since the number of jackpots is small compared to when a jackpot is won in the lottery, it is the jackpot type most disadvantageous to the player.

The jackpot D is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 94”. This jackpot D is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the probability variation switch 65e cannot pass during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. The probability change state is not given, and the prize balls are less than in the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, but since the time saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is given, the jackpot D Is more advantageous than jackpot C.

Next, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 90(b). FIG. 90(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 90( b ), in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, similarly to the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot type to be selected is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2. ing. Specifically, the jackpot E is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit. .. Although the jackpot E is likely to be a probability variation state, the probability variation state to be given is the probability variation state 1, and since the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed during the probability variation state, the probability variation state 2 is likely to be provided. The state after the jackpot is disadvantageous compared to the jackpot B and the jackpot F).

The jackpot F is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 79”. This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 2 is given after the big hit. .. The jackpot F is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, because the jackpot F easily shifts to the most probable variation state 2 for the player. Also in terms of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a larger number of prize balls than in the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

The jackpot G is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 84”. This jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit. is there. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, the gaming state after the jackpot is most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, it is more advantageous than a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol.

The jackpot H is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “85 to 94”. This jackpot H is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the probability variation switch 65e cannot pass during the big hit and the time saving state 2 is given after the big hit. is there. Although the probability variation state is not given, the jackpot H is more advantageous than the jackpot C or the jackpot G because the time saving state 2 is given in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed. In addition, even the prize spherical surface is more advantageous than a big hit in the first special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the present embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Since each jackpot type has a different number of rounds and a gaming state after the jackpot, when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, the player can be made to pay attention to which jackpot type. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is a big hit or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the percentage of the big hit type that is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e are Different. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to win a lot of prize balls when the second special symbol is drawn in a lottery. Further, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the proportion of the big hit type (big hit E, F) which is an operation pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e is 80%, whereas the first In the lottery for special symbols, the proportion of the jackpot type (jackpot A, B) that is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e is 50%. Therefore, it is more likely that the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol will result in a positive change. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, so whether the lottery executed is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. You can make a game pay attention to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83, a game state transition method in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a jackpot is hit, a new game state is set after the jackpot is over. As shown in FIG. 83, when the jackpot A is reached in the normal state (non-probable variation non-time-saving state), basically (unless the ball launch is stopped during the jackpot), the transition is made to the confirmation variation state 1 and the jackpot B is reached. Then, the probability transition state 2 is entered. When the jackpot C is reached, the time is shortened to 1 and when the jackpot D is reached, the time is shortened to 2. Further, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming state is a time saving state 1 (time saving state in which lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed), and a probability variation state 1 (probability variation state in which lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) Performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-probable variation non-time saving state). Although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 1 or the probability variation state 1, when the lottery of special symbols for the time saving number is executed without a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming state is the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), when the jackpot E becomes the probability variation state 1 and the jackpot F becomes the jackpot. , The most advantageous definite change state 2 is entered, and when the big hit G is reached, the time is shortened to 1 and when the big hit H is reached, the time is shortened to 2 (the time shortened state 2 is looped). Further, as shown in FIG. 83, even in the probability variation state 2 (the probability variation state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), the same state transition as the time saving state 2 is performed. Although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 2 or the probability variation state 2, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of time saving is executed without a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 84, special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203s, probability variation passage counter 203t1, winning number counter 203t2, action counter 203t3, counter buffer 203h, remaining ball timer flag 203t4, remaining ball timer 203t5 It has at least a probability variation valid flag 203t6, a probability variation valid timer 203t7, a discharge number counter 203t8, a time saving medium counter 203u, a time saving identification flag 203x, a jackpot flag 203i, and another memory area 203z.

Of these, special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol Reservation sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, big hit flag 203i, and other memory area 203z are special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and special symbol 2 provided in RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, jackpot Since it is the same as the flag 203i and the other memory area 203z, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the probability variation passage counter 203t1, the winning number counter 203t2, the operation counter 203t3, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4, the remaining ball timer 203t5, the probability variation valid flag 203t6, the probability variation valid timer 203t7, and the discharge number counter 203t8 are each the second embodiment. The same as the probability variation passage counter 203t1, the winning number counter 203t2, the operation counter 203t3, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4, the remaining ball timer 203t5, the probability variation valid flag 203t6, the probability variation valid timer 203t7, and the discharge number counter 203t8 which are provided in the RAM 203. .. Since these details have been described in the description of the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving identification flag 203x is a flag for identifying the type of the time saving state. If the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0, it means that the time saving state 1 (probability change state 1) is set. In addition, also in the normal state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed similarly to the time saving state 1, the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0. On the other hand, when the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 1, it means that the time saving state 2 (probability change state 2) is set. When the normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set with reference to the time saving identification flag 203x. Specifically, when the time saving identification flag 203x is 0 and the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set, so the balls enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. By doing so, the ball enters the first actuation port 704, and the ball can enter the left first entrance port 64a2. On the other hand, when the time saving identification flag 203x is 1 and the normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern B is set, so that the ball is allowed to enter the sorting prize winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. The ball enters the second operation port 707, and the ball can enter the left second entrance port 64b. The time saving identification flag 203x is set to a value corresponding to the time saving state given after the big hit when the big hit ends. In addition, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends (that is, when the time saving medium counter 203u becomes 0), 0 is set.

In the normal state (non-probability variation non-time saving state), the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0. In the non time saving state, a ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right hitting) irregular game. This is to suppress the method. That is, if the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 1 in the normal state, there is a risk that the player will always make a right-handed stroke in order to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery. In the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, so it is difficult to put the ball into the right second ball entrance 64b, but in the case of a big hit, 80% of the special symbol Since it is in the probability change state, the merit in the case of a big hit becomes large. Therefore, an irregular game method may be triggered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, and the opening pattern A is set even if it becomes a hit. It is possible for the person to have no merit to perform right-handedness. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be left-handed, so that an irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed).

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the jackpot in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 91) is set, and set to OFF in the ending process executed at the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 91 to 93. First, with reference to FIG. 91, a special symbol variation process 4 (S164) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 49) in the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 4 (S164).

Of the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 91, S164), S201 to S218, S220. In each process of S222 to S224, first, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, first, S201 to S218, S220. And the same processing as each processing of S222-S224 is performed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 91) in the fourth embodiment, when the start of the big hit is set in the process of S218 (S280), the values of the time saving medium counter 203u and the probability variation counter 203g are set to initial values (the present value). In the embodiment, it is reset to 0) (S271), and the process proceeds to S222.

In addition, in the processing of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203u is greater than 0 (S272), and the hour/hour is saved. When it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203u is larger than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the time saving middle counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S273), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203u is 0 (S272: No), the process of S273 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223.

Here, the prefetching process 4 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing 4 (S513). The pre-reading process 4 (S513) is a process executed in place of the pre-reading process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment.

Of the prefetch processing 4 (S513) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S601 and S603, the same processing as that of each of S601 and S603 of the prefetch processing (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment is performed. Executed.

Further, in the prefetch process 4 in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S601 that there is a new winning at the first entrance 64a1 right first entrance 64a2 or right second entrance 64b. (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of fluctuation is a probability variation state of the special symbol (S671), and if it is not the probability variation state of the special symbol (S671: No), the low probability time first. The lottery result is acquired based on the per-random number table (S672), and the process proceeds to S674.

On the other hand, in the process of S671, when it is determined that the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol (S671: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S673), The process proceeds to S674. In the process of S674, a winning information command including the respective values of the first winning type counter C2 and the stop type selecting counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, is set based on the lottery result (S674).

After setting the winning information command by the process of S674, it is determined whether or not the winning/absence of the lottery predicted by the process of S672 or S673 is the probability variation jackpot of the special symbol (S675). When the winning/absence of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is the probability variation jackpot of the special symbol (S675: Yes), the prefetching probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON (S676), and this processing is performed. finish. This pre-reading probability changing flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state at the time of execution is a probability changing state. If it is on, it means that the lottery time is the probability changing state. If it is off, the lottery time is It means a low probability state.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning/unwinning of the lottery predicted in the process of S675 is not the probability variation jackpot of the special symbol (S675: No), the winning/unwinning of the lottery predicted in the process of S672 or S673 is the normal jackpot of the special symbol. It is determined (S677). When it is determined that the winning/absence of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is the normal jackpot of the special symbol (S677: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag (not shown) is set to OFF (S678), This process ends. On the other hand, when the winning/absence of the lottery predicted in the process of S672 or S673 is out of the normal of the special symbol (S677: No), the process of S678 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 4. This normal symbol variation process 4 is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment.

In this normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88), in each process of S701 to S714 and S718 to S725, S701 to S714 and S718 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S725 is performed. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol in the process of S714 (S714: Yes), the time saving identification flag. It is determined whether 203x is 0, that is, whether the time saving state is 1 (S771). When it is determined that the identification flag is 1 (time saving state 2) (S771: No), the electric accessory release pattern B is set (S772). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S714 that the time saving state is not set (S714: No), or when it is determined that the identification flag is 0 (time saving state 1) in the process of S771 (S771: Yes), the electric accessory release pattern is set. A is set (S773).

Here, as will be described later in detail, the electric accessory opening pattern A is the electric accessory 701 at a timing when the game ball is guided to the first operating port 704 when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 700. Is an open pattern in which is projected (opened). Therefore, the first operating accessory 645a is opened by the game ball entering the first operating port 704, the game ball easily enters the right first ball inlet 64a2, and the game ball enters the ball. By doing so, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. The setting of the time saving identification flag 203x is performed by the processing of S4106 and S4107 of the ending processing 4 (FIG. 93, S1379) described later at the end of the jackpot game, and the value is 0 or based on the executed jackpot type. 1 is set. As a result, when the jackpot is hit, the hour-shortening identification flag 203x is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, in the probability variation game (time-shortening game) that is subsequently executed depending on the jackpot type, the game ball is placed on the right first entrance 64a2. It can be set by switching between setting to enter the ball and setting to allow the game ball to enter the right second entrance 64b2. Therefore, since the number of rounds in the big hit game is set to be larger in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, even in the same probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state, the probability variation advantageous to the player It is possible to set a probability variation game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state and its probability variation game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S725 ends, then the operation control of the variable flow path 702 is set (S774), and the present process ends. The operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is constant for all the normal symbols, and for 1.5 seconds after the normal symbols are switched, the game balls are guided to the first flow channel. The valve 702 is moved to the left side and controlled so as to block the second flow path 706, and then moved to the right side to block the first flow path 703 and guide the game ball to the second flow path. Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a startup process 4 that is executed instead of the startup process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment will be described. Figure 89. It is a flow chart which shows this starting processing 4. Of the startup processing 4 (see FIG. 89) in the fourth embodiment, each processing of S1001 to S1014 is the same as each processing of S1001 to S1014 of the startup processing (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. In the startup process 4 (see FIG. 89) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S1010 is completed, the variable flow path 702 is initialized and the process proceeds to S1011.

Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 4 (S1105). This jackpot control process 4 (S1105) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, and opening of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. Alternatively, it is a process for closing.

In the jackpot control process 4, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), it is not necessary to control the big hit, and thus the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the big hit start timing (S1371). When it is determined in the process of S1371 that it is the big hit start timing (S1371: Yes), the opening command is set (S1372), and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S1371, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S1371: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1374). When it is determined in the process of S1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1374: Yes), the setting of the opening/closing operation of the first specific winning opening 64a and the setting of the switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k are performed. The jackpot operation setting process 4 is performed in order to perform (S1375), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375) will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1374 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1374: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376). ).

In the processing of S1376, when it is determined that it is the timing of the switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376: Yes), the state of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (S1377), and the main The process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1376, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376: No), it is then determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1378). ).

In the process of S1378, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1378: Yes), the ending process 4 is executed (S1379), and the present process is ended. Details of ending process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

In the process of S1378, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1378: No), the winning process 4 is executed (S1380), the abnormal process 4 is executed (S1381), and the present process is ended. The winning process 4 and the abnormal process 4 are the same as the winning process (see FIG. 56) and the abnormal process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, respectively. Since the contents are as described above in the description of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375 in FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 91. In the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S4001). The switching operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S4001 (S4002). Then, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S4001 (S4003). Then, this process is completed.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

Next, details of ending processing 4 (S1379 of FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process 4 (S1379). In ending processing 4 (S1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF (S4102), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203s is ON (S4103). When it is determined in the process of S4103 that the probability variation setting flag 203s is on (S4103: Yes), the probability variation counter 203g is set to 100 (S4104). Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203s is configured to be turned off based on the probability variation counter 203g being set to 100. Then, the process proceeds to S4105.

On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203s is not on (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed was a jackpot game based on any of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (S4105). When it is determined in the process of S4105 that one of the big hits A, C, E, or G has been made (S4105: Yes), the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4108.

On the other hand, in the process of S4105, when it is determined that none of the big hits A, C, E, G (S4105: No), the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 1 (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4108. To do.

By the process of S4106 or S4107, the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 or 1, so that the opening pattern of the electric accessory set in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) is switched.

When the process of S4106 or S4107 is completed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203u is set to 100 (S4108), and the present process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state (probability variation game state or time saving game state) is given, the type of the time saving state set by the jackpot type is set to be different. As a result, in the time saving state executed after the big hit game, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 700, the game ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. It is possible to switch the setting, and it is possible to set whether to enter the game ball into the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b according to the jackpot type. Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to switch whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the lottery is executed with the second special symbol, and the player is selected by lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By setting different advantages to be given to, it is possible to change the size of the privilege given to the player depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the probability of probability change, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of shortened times, the variation time, etc. are the first special symbol. The privilege may be set differently by changing the setting with the second special symbol. Further, by adopting the configuration of the present embodiment, even in the probability variation game state of the same jackpot probability, depending on the type of the time saving state to be given, the type of the special symbol that changes during the time saving (during the probability variation) is switched. It is possible to change the benefit that the player can receive in the probability variation game state. Therefore, it is possible to set a probability variation gaming state in which a plurality of granted benefits are different. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type to be guided to the probability variation switch 65e3 is set to be larger in the hit type of the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, so that a plurality of probability variation ratios can be set. Therefore, the probability change rate can be changed depending on the time saving state, and the player can be provided with a fresh game.

<Regarding Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows command determination processing 4 (S1671) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113, instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart. The command determination process 4 (S1671) is a process for determining the command received from the main control device 110.

The command determination process 4 (see FIG. 93) of the fourth embodiment is different only in that the processes of S1713 to S1718 in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment are deleted. The other processes are the same as the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and thus the details thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage is different depending on whether the jackpot is the big hit by the lottery for the first special symbol and the big jackpot is drawn by the lottery for the second special symbol. It is structured so that the player who wins the big prize in the lottery of the two special symbols becomes advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, that is, a time saving state 1 and a time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving states provided after the jackpot. Time saving state 1 is a time saving state in which a lottery for the first special symbol is easily performed (a ball easily enters the right first entrance 64a2), and time saving state 2 is a lottery for the second special symbol. Is easily executed (the ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b), which is a short time state. More specifically, in the time saving state 1, when a hit occurs, electric power is applied at a timing when the ball is likely to enter the first operation port 704 in the distribution winning apparatus 700 (the first operation accessory 645a is easily opened). The accessory 701 is released. Therefore, by making a right hit in the time saving state 1, the ball easily enters the right first entrance 64a1, and thus the first special symbol lottery is easily executed. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2, when the hit is achieved, the electric winning component 701 is likely to enter the second actuation opening 707 inside the sorting prize winning device 700 (the second actuation accessory 645b is easily opened). Is released. Therefore, by making a right hit in the time saving state 2, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right second entrance port 64b, and thus the lottery for the second special symbol is facilitated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability variation switch 65e3 is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and by changing the internal flow path, a jackpot type in which a ball can (easily) pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during a jackpot, A jackpot type in which a ball cannot pass (difficult) through the probability change switch 65e3 is provided. Then, depending on whether it is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, by changing the proportion of the big hit type that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability of the special symbol is changed. It is configured to change the ratio of transition to. In other words, the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol is easier to shift to the probability change state than the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the ball that has entered the distribution prize device 700 has which working port (first More attention can be paid to whether to enter the actuation port 704 or the second actuation port 707). Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the time saving state, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided in the probability variation state. That is, the probability variation state 1 in which the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed and the probability variation state 2 in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed are provided. The rate of transition to the probability variation state is different depending on whether it is a lottery for the first special symbol or a lottery for the second special symbol, and a plurality of probability variation states with different degrees of advantage for the probability variation state to be given. Is provided, it is possible to play a game aiming at a better condition. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 101 and FIG. 133. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 13, and the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. It was configured to give a probability change state after the jackpot.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different in that the first variable winning device 65 is deleted. The same components as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 133, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment executes a game (hereinafter, referred to as a normal game) aiming at the first entrance 64a1 in a normal game state. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won is executed. Also, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, there is a high probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the jackpot game is over, and furthermore, the probability variation game state (hereinafter, probability change state) that makes it easy to receive the lottery for the special map, or The probability of being a big hit does not change, but a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a lottery for special maps is given.

Here, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state, and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is provided. Moreover, the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is 1 or after the jackpot game is over). The number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game of the number of times is easy to transition to a gaming state where it is easy to win the jackpot)) is set.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game and the probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. As a result, for example, the ratio of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (it is easy to enter the probability variation state 1), and it is easier for the player to experience the game state (probability variation state) that is more likely to be hit than the normal game. As a result, it is possible to easily experience the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game effect or the probability variation state, and to entertain the game, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability variation state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has transitioned to the probability changing state 2 with a sense of superiority, and to improve the interest of the game for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, even in the time saving state, the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set similarly to the above-described probability variation state, and both of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are more than the normal game. A gaming state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (balls are easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special drawing in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time saving state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is substantially configured to execute the lottery of the special figure 2. Is set as a more advantageous game state for the player.

A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation states, and the time saving state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time saving states.

Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the jackpot game is over, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display device unit 80) is Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched to the right side area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and the vicinity of the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67 is reached. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. The electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and when the electric prize 710 is in an open state, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700. The electric accessory 710 is opened when the result of the lottery for ordinary symbols (general symbol lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 is successful. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 is different.

The detailed description is omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. 81 of the fourth embodiment described above, but the configuration inside the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the result of the universal drawing lottery that the winning (per the universal drawing) is won, and the first operation is performed depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate with each other as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second flow path 706 communicates with each other during the period from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after being won per universal figure (2 seconds). Thus, the switching valve 702 operates, and during the other periods, the first flow path 703 operates so as to communicate with each other.

A first operation port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow channel 703, while a second operation port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow channel 706, and each flow channel is The ball that has flowed down enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 133, the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 707 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 133, the first operating port 704 is connected to the first operating accessory 645a provided below the right side region of the game board 13 by the first operating mechanism 705, and enters the first operating port 704. By pressing the first contact piece provided on the one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up by the sphere. It is configured to come into contact with the operating accessory 645a and open the first operating accessory 645a.

Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 is ready to enter. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed similarly to the case of the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball is placed on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first actuation accessory 645a is closed.

As described above, a mechanism for changing the accessory to the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical structure is a known technique called a non-electric accessory. In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the configuration of the non-electric accessory is omitted, but any technology that has already been disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 similarly to the configuration of the above-mentioned non-electric auditors member, so that The second working accessory 645b is opened. By the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b which can enter the ball when the second actuating member 645b is opened, the lottery of the special map 2 which is set more advantageously than the special FIG. Executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory including the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the above-described first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating mechanism 705 are provided. Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electrical accessory that is composed of the working accessory 645a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, the second flow path 706 is provided only for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the switching valve 702 is elected per universal figure. The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during a period other than that (including a period in which a general figure is not elected) is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second actuating object 645b, the special figure 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. This is because.

Returning to FIG. 133, the description of the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b is ready to be entered by the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700, the game board 13 of the game board 13 does not enter the distribution winning apparatus 700. The ball that has flowed down the right side region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the ball entry ports that are ready to enter.

In this way, in the gaming state where the right-handed game is executed (probably changed state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

A switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700. The switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to a position where the second flow path is in communication for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have elapsed after winning the prize. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is performed with a constant operation regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

Next, the flow of balls entering the distribution prize winning device 700 for each electric role opening pattern will be described. First, when the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period in which the ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 is 1 second from the start of the game. The balls that enter during this period reach the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed, as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in the state where the first flow passage 1644 is in communication, so the ball is guided to the first flow passage 1644. As described above, while the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball entering the distribution winning apparatus 700 is guided to the first flow path 703 and enters the first operating port 704. As a result, the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. That is, when the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), the gaming state (time saving state 1, probability changing state 1) in which Toku-zu 1 is substantially changed in the time saving state or the probability changing state is Will be set. In the opening pattern A, the electric accessory 701 is released for 0.1 seconds after 1.5 seconds have passed after the big hit, but the opening for 0.1 seconds is a difficult interval for the ball to enter. And there is almost no ball coming in. In the unlikely event that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700, the ball will enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern B described later.

Next, when the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period in which the ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 is 1 second after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game. .. The balls that enter during this period reach the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed, as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is positioned in the state where the second flow passage 706 is in communication, so the ball is guided to the second flow passage 706. As described above, while the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the balls that enter the sorting prize winning device 700 are guided to the second flow path 706 and enter the second operating port 707. It acts to make a ball, so that the ball can enter the right second ball inlet 64b. That is, when the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory), the gaming state (time saving state 2, probability changing state 2) in which Toku-zu 2 is substantially changed in the time saving state or the probability changing state is Will be set. In the opening pattern B, the electric accessory 701 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the jackpot is won, but the opening for 0.1 seconds is a difficult interval for the balls to enter, and almost all the balls enter. There is no ball. In the unlikely event that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 during this period, the ball will enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 at the same timing as the above-described opening pattern A, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the ball entered in the opening pattern B is surely guided so that the ball entered in the opening pattern A is surely guided to the first flow path 703. The operation is performed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. As a result, it becomes possible to guide a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball moves from the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the universal figure is set to 3 seconds in a state where the variation time of the universal figure is shortened (time saving state, probability variation state). Therefore, in the state where the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, in order to reliably guide the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning apparatus 700 to the second flow path, the switching valve 702 is started from the normal position. Even if the second flow path is placed in communication for 3 seconds after the lapse of 1.5 seconds, the first flow path will be in communication by the time the game is executed again after the next universal figure change. Since it can be positioned, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 is guided to an unintended flow path over a plurality of times of a game per game.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory) is settable based on the jackpot type, and the set opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory) is set. Based on, it is possible to set a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially changes and a game state in which the special figure 2 substantially changes. In addition, the bonuses that are more advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 2 lottery are more than those when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 1 lottery. It is set that the ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed is high) is given.

As a result, the time saving state and the probability variation state are further advantageous to the game state (time saving state 2, probability variation state 2), and the player is more advantageous than the advantageous game state but is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variation state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, by setting a high transition ratio for shifting from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability changing state 1, the player can easily see the effect executed in the time saving state or the probability changing state. It is possible to give a superior feeling to the player who has transitioned to the probability variation state 2 by setting a low transition rate to transition to the probability variation state 2 which is the most advantageous game state for the player. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, two types of opening patterns A and B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the types of opening patterns can be changed. You may comprise so that 3 or more types can be set. As a result, it becomes possible to set more various game states.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern that guides the sphere to the second flow path 706 as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory). Although the pattern (opening pattern B) is set, for example, an opening pattern is provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. Is also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the sphere entering the electric accessory 701 guides, further improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is configured to enter any one of the operating ports (the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). , Out which is connected to the discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without providing a flow path for discharging again from the sorting prize winning device 700 to the game board 13 or entering each operation opening. A flow path for entering the mouth may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in the flow of the balls in the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the switching valve 702 is configured such that a predetermined constant operation is performed after the hit game is executed, but for example, a constant operation is always performed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It may be configured to be opened, or may be configured to switch the communicating flow paths when the number of balls entered into the distribution winning apparatus 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

In the fifth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). However, for example, the switching valve 702, which is a switching member, is actuated by contact of a ball, and a predetermined condition (for example, It may be configured such that the communicating flow path is switched when 10 balls are passed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the sphere guided to any one of the flow passages by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow passage and enter any one of the operation ports. A distribution member that distributes a sphere guided to any of the flow paths by 702 to a plurality of flow paths is provided, and the sphere distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member enters the corresponding working port. You may.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a fixed time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As a means for varying (extending) the time for a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 to reach the switching valve 702, a period until the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is set. It is also possible to provide a plurality of different routes and to provide a distribution unit that distributes a ball entering the distribution winning apparatus 700 to one of the routes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player, who can play a game while predicting when the ball entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 will reach the switching valve 702, from getting tired of the game early. The effect is that you can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the transition of the game state in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 95, the pachinko machine 10 wins a normal gaming state, a probability variation state 1 (inconvenient probability variation), a probability variation state 2 (advantageous probability variation), a time saving state 1 (disadvantageous time saving) and a time saving state 2 (advantageous time saving). It is configured to shift based on the jackpot type.

First, in the normal game state, the game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed, and when the big hit is won, 50% shifts to the probability variation state 1, 30% shifts to the probability variation state 2, and 15% shifts to the time saving state 1. To 5%, and 5% will move to the time saving state 2.

Next, in the probability variation state 1, the opening pattern A is set as the electric power combination opening pattern, so that the game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (the actual variation of the special figure 1). In the probability variation state 1, when the jackpot is won, the probability variation state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% shifts to the probability variation state 2, 15% shifts to the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. In this way, the probability variation state 1 is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates like the normal gaming state, so the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal gaming state, but the game after the jackpot is won. The state transition destination and its distribution are the same.

Since the opening pattern B is set as the electric power releasing pattern in the probability variation state 2, the game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (special figure 2 actual variation). In the probability variation state 2, when the jackpot is won, the probability variation state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% shifts to the time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 1. In this way, the probability variation state 2 is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the jackpot probability is set to be higher than the normal gaming state, so the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player Becomes

Next, in the time saving state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric-role combination opening pattern, the game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 actual fluctuation). If the big hit is won in the time saving state 1, 50% will shift to the probability variation state 1, 30% will shift to the probability variation state 2, 15% will loop the time reduction state 1, and 5% will shift to the time reduction state 2. In this way, the time saving state 1 is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates as in the normal gaming state, so the variation time of the special figure and the general figure is shortened, and the electric accessory 701 when the general figure hits Although the opening pattern is different from the normal gaming state, the destination and distribution of the gaming state after jackpot winning are the same.

In the time saving state 2, the opening pattern B is set as the electric-role combination opening pattern, so that the game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (special figure 2 actual variation). If the big hit is won in the time saving state 2, 80% will shift to the probability variation state 2, 15% will loop the time saving state 2, and 5% will shift to the time saving state 1. In this way, the time saving state 2 is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the probability of shifting to the probability variation state 2 which is most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won is the normal gaming state. It is a gaming state that is set to 2.5 times or more (so-called pullback zone). By providing such a game state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player shifts to the most advantageous game state (probability variation state 2) than the normal game state, and to make the player enthusiastically play the game. There is an effect that can be.

The game state transition destination after jackpot in each game state set in the fifth embodiment and the transition distribution ratio may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time saving state that shifts from the normal gaming state may be only the time saving state 2. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation of the player who has not been able to shift to the probable variation state although he or she has won the jackpot in the normal game state.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the destination of the game state and the distribution ratio are unified according to the type of special figure regardless of the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state according to the game state is changed. The transfer destination and the transfer distribution ratio may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game play, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state continues until the next big hit, and the configuration is such that ten times are shortened regardless of the gaming state as a time saving state, but for example, the probability variation state is a predetermined variable symbol display. It is designed to continue until it is executed a number of times (for example, 100 times), or by executing a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special map changes, and winning the lottery from the probability variation state to the normal game state. You may make it the structure which transfers. In this case, as a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous probability variation state, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that terminates the probability variation state, or the probability of transition from the probability variation state to the normal game state is made different. You may choose to do so.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 95, the fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the accessory motor 270 is deleted.

First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, and a special There are a symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, a big hit flag 203i, a probability variation flag 203r, a time saving counter 203r, a power combination release pattern storage area 203y, and another memory area 203z. doing.

Special symbol 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserve sphere counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserve sphere counter 203e, normal symbol reserve sphere number counter Since 203f, the big hit flag 203i, the probability variation flag 203r, and the other memory area 203z are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the time saving counter 203r is also the same as that provided in the RAM 203 of the second and fourth embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power combination release pattern storage area 203y is an area for storing the power combination release pattern stored in the power combination release pattern table 202de. The electric accessory 701 is moved based on the electric-role opening pattern stored in the electric-role opening pattern storage area 203y.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 97, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per random number table 202a, a first per random type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and an electric power release pattern table 202de. ing. The tables other than the first winning type selection table 202b and the electric power release pattern table 202de are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although not shown in the drawing, the electric role releasing pattern table 202de is a storage area in which an operation pattern (electric role releasing pattern) for moving the electric accessory 701 is stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 which compose the first hit type selection table 202b will be described. FIG. 98(b) is a diagram showing the details of the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 that is referred to when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), in the toku-zu 1 type selection table 202b1 of the present embodiment, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit type is "big hit A". Are associated with. This “big hit A” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, the probability variation state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric-role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”, “big hit B” is associated as the big hit type. The “big hit B” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, the definite change state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 94”, “big hit C” is associated as the big hit type. The "big hit C" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, only the time saving state of 10 times is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric-role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated as the big hit type. The “big hit D” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, and only the time saving state of 10 times is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric-role opening pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98(b), the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 that is referred to when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 98(b), in the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 of the present embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 74", and the big hit type is "big hit E". Are associated with. The "big hit E" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 15, the certainty variation state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric-role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 79", "big hit F" is associated as the big hit type. The "big hit F" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two, the definite change state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric hand opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 84”, “big hit C” is associated as the big hit type. When the "big hit C" is obtained in the lottery for the second special symbol, the number of rounds is 4 and only the time saving state of 7 times is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric hand opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated as the big hit type. When the “special jackpot D” is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of rounds is four, and only the time saving state of seven times is given after the jackpot, and the open pattern B is set as the electric power combination releasing pattern.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 99 to 100.

First, with reference to FIG. 99, the special symbol variation process 5 (S164) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 5 (S164). This special symbol variation process 4 (S164) is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the fourth embodiment, and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, it is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation process 5 (S164) in the fifth embodiment, in contrast to the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the above-described fourth embodiment, the subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203g is not performed, the electric combination The difference is that the open pattern storage area is set, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 5 (S164), similarly to the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86), the processes of S201 to S217 are executed. When it is determined in the process of S217 that the result of the lottery this time is a big hit (S217: Yes), the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S218), and the number of rounds corresponding to the big hit type is set in the round counter. The round start flag is set to ON (S281) and the round start flag is set to ON (S282). Then, the big hit start is set (S220), the hour and hour counter 203r is reset to 0 (S283), the electric-role opening pattern storage area 203y is cleared (S284), and the process proceeds to S222.

On the other hand, in the processing of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is larger than 0 (S272). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203r is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S213), and the process proceeds to S282.

In the processing of S272, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203r is 0 (S272: No), the electric power releasing pattern A is stored in the electric power releasing pattern storage area 203y (S285), and this processing is performed. To finish. As described above, in the case of the electric role opening pattern A, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is guided to the first operating port 704. That is, the game ball enters the right first ball inlet 64a2, and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (FIG. 100, S208) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (S208). This special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (S208), the special pattern 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14) in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state The difference is that the variation pattern is selected based on the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (S208), similar to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S301 to S305 are executed. In the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of place (S305: No), the outlying display mode is set (S308), and out of the variation pattern table corresponding to the current game state. The variation pattern is determined (S381), and the process proceeds to S310.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table and the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the variation pattern is determined based on the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table and the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the gaming state is the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the time saving state. Thereby, it is possible to set a variation pattern according to the gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, details of the special symbol 1 variation start process 5 (FIG. 101, S213) will be described. 101 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process 5 (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process 5 (S213), the special pattern 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), variation pattern table corresponding to the game state The difference is that the variation pattern is selected based on the above, and the other points are the same. The same portions will be denoted by the same reference numerals, detailed description thereof will be omitted, and the differences are the same as the special symbol 2 variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 100) described above. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the prefetch process 5 (S513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S513). In the pre-reading process 5 (see FIG. 102), in each process of S601 and good S672, the same process as the pre-reading process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment is executed.

Further, in the prefetching process 5 (see FIG. 102) of the fifth embodiment, when S672 ends, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S681), and this process ends.

In this embodiment, the jackpot determination value (“0”) at the low probability (normal game state) is included in the jackpot determination value (“0-9”) at the high probability (probability variation game state). Therefore, even if the lottery result is prefetched in the normal game state and then the probability variation game state is entered, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the lottery result is changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106). This normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device, and the like. Is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 701 associated with the passage opening 701a.

In this normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103), in each process of S701 to S713 and S718 to S725, S701 to S713 and S718 of the ordinary symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S725 is performed.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103 ), when the process of S713 is completed, then, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set based on the opening pattern stored in the electric-commitment opening pattern storage area 203y. (S781), the process proceeds to S719. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103) of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S725 ends, the operation of the switching valve is set and the present process ends (S782).

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing 5 (S1105). The jackpot control process 5 (S1105) is a process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, for executing various effects according to the jackpot. is there.

In the jackpot control process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), it is not necessary to control the big hit, and thus the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether the round start flag is on (S1381). The mouth (large opening mouth) 65a is opened (S1382), the round start flag is set to OFF (S1383), the round number command indicating a new round to be started is set (S1384), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the round start flag is off in the process of S1381 (S1381: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening is satisfied (S1385), and if it is satisfied (S1385: Yes), The large opening is closed (S1386), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1387), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the condition for closing the large opening is not satisfied (S1385: No), it is determined whether the value of the round counter is 0 (S1388), and if it is 0 (S1388: No), the round start flag is turned on. Is set (S1389), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1388, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is not 0 (S1388), the jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF (S1390), and the electric outlet opening pattern corresponding to the present jackpot type is opened. The data is read from the pattern table 202de and stored in the electric power release pattern storage area 203y (S1391). Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit this time is the probability variation big hit (S1392), and if it is the probability variation big hit (S1392: Yes), the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON (S1393), and this processing ends. .. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1392 that the jackpot is usually a big hit (S1392: No), the probability variation flag 203r is set to OFF (S1394), and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the balls that enter the sorting prize winning device 700 that can enter when the winning is won by the universal drawing lottery are changed by the switching valve 702 to the first flow path 703 or It is distributed to any of the second flow paths 706 and enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. When the balls enter the respective operation ports (704, 707), the corresponding operation accessories (645a, 645b) are opened. When the first actuating member 645a is in the open state, the right first entrance 64a2 can enter, and when the second actuating member 645b is in the open state, the right second entrance 64b can enter. Becomes

Then, depending on the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won by the special drawing lottery, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the sphere to the first flow path 703 as an opening pattern of the slide member (electric role) 710 of the distribution winning apparatus 700. And an open pattern (open pattern B) that guides the sphere to the second flow path 706. That is, the game state in which the special figure 1 substantially changes and the game state in which the special figure 2 substantially changes are set based on the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory) set based on the jackpot type. be able to. In addition, the bonuses that are more advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 2 lottery are more than those when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 1 lottery. It is set that the ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed is high) is given.

As a result, the time saving state and the probability variation state are further advantageous to the game state (time saving state 2, probability variation state 2), and the player is more advantageous than the advantageous game state but is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variation state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, two types of opening patterns A and B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the types of opening patterns can be changed. You may comprise so that 3 or more types can be set. As a result, it becomes possible to set more various game states.

In the fifth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern that guides the sphere to the second flow path 706 are used as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory). Although the pattern (opening pattern B) is set, for example, an opening pattern is provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. Is also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the sphere entering the electric accessory 701 guides, further improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 116. In the sixth embodiment, the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment is used. In the above-described fourth embodiment, a large amount of game value is imparted when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 650a provided in the second variable winning device 650 when a big hit occurs (1 ball. 15 balls are paid out for each prize), and the probability variation game state is given by the balls passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened in a part of the jackpot period. The pachinko machine 10 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a small hit is provided in addition to the big hit as the lottery result of the special symbol, and when the small hit occurs, the specific winning opening 65a provided in the variable winning device 65 The opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be opened/closed. In addition, a specific winning port 650a different from the variable winning a prize device 65a is provided, and the specific winning port 650a is configured to be opened and closed when a big hit occurs. Hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 that allows the game ball to enter when a small hit is called the first variable winning device 65, and the specific winning port 65a provided in the first variable winning device 65 is the first winning prize. The specific winning opening 65a will be called. In addition, the variable winning a prize device 650 which can enter the game ball when it becomes the big hit is called the 2nd variable winning a prize device 650, the specific winning a prize mouth 650 which is provided in the 2nd variable winning a prize device 650 is specified second. It will be referred to as a winning opening 650.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the gaming ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning a prize device 65, so that the probability variation gaming state is given.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 is called a jackpot switch 65e3, and the jackpot is awarded based on the fact that the game ball has passed the jackpot switch 65e3. Configured.

As a result, when a small hit occurs, a game ball can enter the variable winning device 65, and when the game ball passes through the big hit switch 65e3, a big hit is provided. Therefore, even if it is a small hit, a big hit may be given thereafter, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the characteristic game characteristics in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, there are two types of triggers for executing the jackpot game, one is a jackpot executed by winning the jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and another. The result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, and is a big hit executed by the ball passing through the big hit switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game.

In this way, a pachinko game with a game performance in which a jackpot game is executed with two types of triggers, such as a lottery result of a special symbol, and a ball passing through a specific area (big hit switch 65e3) within a specific period (small hit period). The machine 10 is called a type 1 type 2 mixer.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a gaming state (so-called probability variation state (hereinafter, referred to as a probability variation state)) in which the special symbol jackpot probability or the normal symbol hit probability is higher than normal probability After the jackpot game, which does not have, the variation time of the special figure and the universal figure is shortened, and further, the operation of the electric accessory (electric role) 701 is controlled when the jackpot is won as a result of the universal figure lottery. A time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state) is given when the opening pattern is changed.

In the 1-type/2-type mixer configured as described above, for example, the probability of a small hit is set to be higher in the special figure 2 without changing the big hit probability in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. By facilitating the lottery of Toku-zu 2 during the time saving state, it is possible to set the jackpot probability during the time saving state higher than that during the normal game. Furthermore, the jackpot game is further executed by setting the opening pattern of the electric role object (electric role) 701 in the time saving state to be an opening pattern in which it is easier to enter the sorting prize winning device 700 than in the normal game. It is possible to increase the probability.

Further, in the special maps 1 and 2, the opening pattern of the specific door 65f1 when the small hit is won is changed (the ratio of the advantageous opening pattern selected from the predetermined opening patterns is changed to the special map 2 By setting the small hit higher than the small hit in the special figure 1), it is possible to set the probability of executing the big hit game in the time saving state higher than in the normal game state.

As in the above-described fourth embodiment, the time saving state that is provided after the jackpot is completed includes the first time saving state in which the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is substantially executed and the fluctuation of FIG. The second shortened state is set corresponding to the jackpot type at the time of jackpot. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 106(b).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, details will be described with reference to FIG. 106(b), but the jackpot game won by the lottery of the Toku-zu 2 is more advantageous to the player than the Toku-zu 1. A game (a big hit game in which a player can obtain a large number of balls during a big hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to set a more advantageous state (second time saving state) and a disadvantageous state (first time saving state) in the time saving state more advantageous than the normal game state.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to set a plurality of stages of gaming states (normal gaming state, first saving time state, second saving time state) according to the degree of advantage to the player, in the playing state, the player It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

The structure in the distribution prize winning apparatus 700 and the mechanism for operating the first actuating member 645a and the second actuating member 645b are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

Although the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has been described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball passes (is easy to pass) the jackpot switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65. It may be changed depending on the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the opening 65a.

For example, when "small hit A" is selected, the opening (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is set to 1 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the game ball easily wins the first variable winning device 65. Set the release scenario to release for 5 seconds. On the other hand, when "small hit B" is selected, the ball (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is set to 0. 0 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the ball is difficult to win the first variable winning device 65. It suffices to set an opening scenario in which the operation of opening for 1 second is performed three times.

In this way, by changing the opening pattern of the door (attacker) 65f during the small hit game depending on each small hit type, a small hit and a disadvantage advantageous to the player in the small hit game for opening the first variable winning device 650. It is possible to set various small hits and provide a variety of playability.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, as the bonus after the big hit game, the time saving game state is given according to the big hit type, but another benefit may be given as the benefit given after the big hit game. Well, for example, a high probability state in which the special symbol big hit probability or small hit probability is set higher than the normal gaming state may be given for a predetermined period. As the predetermined period in this case, a period until the next big hit is won, a period until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), or a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5) is shifted to the normal game state. It is conceivable that there will be a lottery period until you win the lottery. In addition, as other benefits, the privilege to increase the winning probability of the normal symbol from the normal game state and the opening pattern of each winning device executed in the big hit game and the small hit game are changed to an open pattern advantageous to the player. Benefits etc. can be considered.

<Regarding electrical configuration in sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 119. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 106(a), a jackpot determination value is defined corresponding to the symbol type and the value of the first random number counter C1. Specifically, when the symbol type is special figure 1, it is determined to be a big hit when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0", and it is determined to be out of the case when the value is any other value.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is special figure 2, it is determined as a big hit when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and is small when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “1 to 399”. It is judged as a hit. In this way, the special figure 1 is not judged to be a small hit, and the special figure 2 is not judged to be out of position.

Next, the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 106(b), in the first hit type selection table 202b, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is determined as the determination value of the big hit A in correspondence with Toku-zu 1 of the big hit B. "50 to 99" is set as the determination value. In addition, corresponding to the special figure 2, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit C, and “50 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit D. The details of the jackpot C and the jackpot D will be described later, but they are also referred to when the jackpot type is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed by the ball passing through the jackpot switch 65e3.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot game is started, the opening/closing 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large amount of prize balls is obtained by inserting the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a. The game is played. In addition, a time saving game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished is given according to the jackpot type.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for four rounds (4R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the hour-shortening state 1 (electric role releasing pattern A is set as the hour-shortening state. The time saving state) is given until the special figure changes 100 times (100 times saving).

When the jackpot B is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for four rounds (4R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the hour-shortening state 2 (electric role releasing pattern B is set as the hour-shortening state). The time saving state) is given until the special figure changes 100 times (100 times saving).

When the jackpot C is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the hour-shortening state 1 (electricity-role opening pattern A is set as the hour-shortening state. The time saving state) is given until the special figure changes 100 times (100 times saving).

When the jackpot D is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the hour-short state 2 (electric role releasing pattern B is set as the hour-short state). The time saving state) is given until the special figure changes 100 times (100 times saving).

Next, the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 106(c), when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is "5 to 204", it is determined to be a winning.

In the electric role release pattern table 202ea, an open pattern A and an open pattern B are set as in the above-described fourth embodiment. Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first small hit type selection table 202eb will be described with reference to FIG. 106(d). As shown in FIG. 106(d), the first small hit type selection table 202eb is a table in which the relationship between the value of the first small hit type counter value C2 and the selected small hit is defined.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the small hit A is selected. In this small hit A, the number of rounds is one, the opening time of the attacker (the first specific winning opening 65a) is 1.5 seconds, and the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a passes the big hit. By passing through the switch 65e3, the jackpot C is a jackpot.

On the other hand, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit B is selected when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”. In this small hit B, the number of rounds is one, the opening time of the attacker (the first specific winning opening 65a) is 1.5 seconds, and the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a passes the big hit. A big hit D is given by passing through the switch 65e3.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 116, a description will be given of differences in the control processing of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment from the control processing of the main control device 110 in the above-described fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above executes processing capable of providing a probability variation state, but the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment does not have a probability variation state, and the hit type of the special figure. The difference is that the small hit is added as, and the control related to the small hit is added.

Specifically, in place of the special symbol variation process 4, a special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 107) is executed. Instead of the normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 108) is executed. In that point, the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 111) is executed instead of the big hit control process 4 in the main process (see FIG. 110), and the small hit control process (see FIG. 113) is added. Be different. The other configurations are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. The special symbol variation process 6 in the sixth embodiment is different from the special symbol variation process 4 in the fourth embodiment in that the processes of S291 to S296 are added and that some processes are deleted. There is. The other processes are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 6 is executed, the processes of S201 to S217 are executed similarly to the special symbol variation process 4. When it is determined that the lottery this time is a big hit in the process of S217 (S217: Yes), the opening flag 203v is set to ON (S241), the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S220), and the time saving medium counter is set. 203u is reset to 0 (S292), and the process proceeds to S222.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not the big hit (S217: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is the small hit (S293). When it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a small hit in the process of S293 (S293: Yes), a small hit setting process is executed (S294). A detailed description of this small hitting setting process will be given later with reference to FIG. 108.

When the process of S294 ends, or in the process of S293, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S293: No), then similarly to the special symbol variation process 4, S272, S273. The process of is executed. After the processing of S273 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr is 0 (S295), and when it is determined that the value of the counter is 0 (S295: Yes), the electric power release pattern is stored. The open pattern A is stored in the area 203ee, and the process proceeds to S282 described above. Further, in the processing of S295, when it is determined that the value of the counter is not 0, the processing of S245 is skipped and the above-described processing of S282 is performed. Then, when the processing ends in S282, the present processing ends.

Next, the small hitting setting process (S294) will be described with reference to FIG. When the small hit setting process is executed, first, the small hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table (S4501), and the opening scenario is set based on the small hit type (S4502). After that, the small hit flag 203ed is set to ON (S4503), and the small hit opening flag 203ec is set to ON. Then, the V-jumping big hit type is set according to the small hit type (S4505), and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the normal symbol variation process 6 (S106) will be described. This normal symbol variation process 6 is different from the normal symbol variation process 3 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that the process related to the high probability state (probability variation state) of the ordinary symbol is deleted, and the details of the detailed operation control are changed. The difference is the point, and the other configurations are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal symbol variation process 6 (S106) is executed, the processes of S701 to S707 are executed similarly to the normal symbol variation process 3. When the process of S707 is finished, then, a lottery result based on the normal symbol per random number table (second per random number table) 202c is acquired (S791). With reference to the lottery result acquired in the process of S791, the processes of S712 to S715, S717 and S718 are executed similarly to the normal symbol variation process 3.

In the processing of S715, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the big hit (S715: No), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are next based on the table stored in the electric accessory release pattern storage area 203ee. To set (S792). When the process of S792 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the present time is shortening (S719). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr is greater than 0. If it is determined that the present time is shortening in the processing of S719 (S719: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S719, when it is determined that the present is not in the time saving (S719: No), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds (S721), and this processing is ended.

Further, in the process of S702 executed in the normal symbol variation process 6 of FIG. 123, if it is determined that the normal symbol is currently changing (S702: Yes), then it is determined whether the variation time has elapsed. Yes (S722). When it is determined in the process of S722 that the variable time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S722, when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (S722: Yes), the processes of S723 to S725 are executed similarly to the normal symbol variation process 3, and the operation of the switching valve 702 is set ( S793), and this processing ends.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment does not have the probability changing function, the hit probability of the general figure cannot be changed. Therefore, a large difference is provided in the variation time of the universal figure between the normal game state and the time saving game state (180 seconds in the normal game state and 3 seconds in the time saving state), and by changing the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701. The game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the main process 6 executed by the main controller 110 of the sixth embodiment will be described. The main processing 6 of the sixth embodiment differs from the main processing 5 of the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the big hit control processing 3 are changed and that the small hit control processing (S1191) is added. The other configurations are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 6 is executed, the processes of S1161 to S1165 are executed similarly to the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot control process 5 is executed in the process of S1165, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

After finishing the process of S1165, a small hit control process is then executed (S1191). This small hit control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 112. When the process of S1191 ends, the processes of S1166 to S1176 are executed similarly to the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment, and the present process ends.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1165) executed in the main process 6 (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. When the big hit control process 5 (S1165) is executed, first, it is determined whether the opening flag 203v is on (S1391). When it is determined that the opening flag 203v is turned on in the process of S1391 (S1391: Yes), the opening flag 203v is turned off (S1392), the opening command is set (S1372), and the jackpot type is dealt with. An opening pattern is set (S1393), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening flag is not on in the process of S1391 (S1391: No), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203eb is on (S1301). When it is determined in S1301 that the jackpot flag is not on (S1301: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203eb is on (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the opening operation timing (S1394). If it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S1394: Yes), the opening solenoid is set to ON to open the second variable winning a prize device 650 (S1395), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1394, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1394: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1378), and it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing. In the case (S1378: Yes), the ending process 6 is executed (S1379). If it is determined in S1378 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1378: No), or if the process of S1379 ends, this process ends.

Next, the ending process 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In this ending process, the processes of S4101 to S4195 are executed as shown in FIG. 112, and the gaming state (whether or not the time saving state is given) and the opening pattern of the electric role are set after the jackpot is over.

Specifically, it is determined according to the regulation contents set corresponding to each jackpot type in the first hit type selection table 202b. For example, when the jackpot this time is the jackpot A in the special FIG. Is set to 100 (S4193), and pattern A is set as the electric power release pattern (S4194).

In this way, it is configured to be able to set the electric power release pattern during the time saving state and during the time saving state based on the specified contents (whether there is time, electric power opening pattern) set corresponding to the jackpot type. It becomes possible to easily set the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2 during the time saving state.

Next, the small hitting control process (S1191) executed in the main process 6 (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The small hit control process (S1191) is a process for controlling from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit, and in particular, the ball passes through the big hit switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit. It is characterized by the control that gives the big hit game given by the end of the small hit game.

When the small hit control process (S1191) is executed, the processes of S4601 to S4611 are executed as shown in FIG. 113, and thereafter, the same process as the abnormal process 4 executed in the fourth embodiment is executed. .. Specifically, the same processing as S1061 to S1670 shown in FIG. 89 is executed, and instead of the processing of S1671, the winning number counter 203t2 and the discharging number counter 203t8 are reset, and this processing is ended.

In the above-mentioned small hit control processing (S1191), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened at a predetermined timing (for example, 0.2 seconds after the small hit is started) (S4605 and S4606). Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the opening/closing door 65f1 was opened (as a period required for a ball entering the first variable winning device 65 to reach the flow path switching member 65h, for example, a small hit is started. 0.5 seconds after the start), the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to ON in order to operate the flow passage switching member 65h provided in the first variable winning device 65 to switch the flow passage (S4607 to S4608). ..

In this way, by performing the operation control of the various devices (the opening/closing door 65f1, the flow path switching member 65h) that is executed during the small hit in a series of control, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error in the operation timing of the various devices. It becomes possible to provide a proper small hit game. It should be noted that various operation controls executed by this small hit control are defined in one release scenario, and the release scenario is updated by a counter that is counted in a fixed cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds). You may comprise so that various operation controls may be performed based on the content. With this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the error in the timing when various operation controls are executed.

Next, the small hit winning process (S4611) executed in the above-described small hit control process (S1191) will be described with reference to FIG. 114. This small hit winning process (S4611) is a process for executing various processes based on a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit period. Regarding specific contents, the same process as the winning process 3 (S1270 in FIG. 88) executed in the fourth embodiment described above is executed. The difference between the small hit winning process (S4611) and the winning process 3 (S1270) is that in the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the big hit game and provided in the first variable winning device 65. In the sixth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the small hit and the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the small hit, while the positive change is given by the ball passing through the positive change switch 65e3 which is the specific area. Since the jackpot is provided by the ball passing through the jackpot switch 65e3, which is a specific area provided in the variable winning device 65, the names of various components are changed as shown in FIG. 114. is there.

When the small hit prize winning process S4611 is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4721 are executed as shown in FIG. 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the V-passing jackpot setting process (S4711) will be described. When this V passing jackpot setting processing (S4711) is executed, the jackpot type is first determined based on the V passing jackpot type value B1 (S4801), and then the open scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S4802). .. As a result, the big hit is executed after the small hit ends.

Next, the small hit winning completion process (S4721) will be described with reference to FIG. When this small hit winning completion process (S4721) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit setting flag 203β2 is on (S4901). When it is determined that the big hit setting flag 203β2 is on in the process of S4901 (S4901: Yes), the big hit flag 203eb is turned on (S4902), and the opening flag 203v is turned on (S4903). , S4904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the jackpot setting flag 203β2 is set to OFF, the process proceeds to S4904. In S4904, the jackpot type value at the time of V passage is cleared, and this processing ends.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. In the above-described fourth embodiment, a plurality of time-saving states having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided as the time-saving states provided when the jackpot is won. That is, when the jackpot is a jackpot type, it is difficult to select the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (probability variation state 1), and when the jackpot is the jackpot type, which is advantageous to the player and is easily selected, the jackpot type 2 ( Probability change state 2) was provided. By diversifying the game state by these multiple time saving states, the player's interest was improved.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, not only the advantageous degree of each time saving state is changed, but also the time saving period of the time saving state given according to the game state when a big hit is made different. As a result, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the short-time period will continue for a long time can be varied depending on the game state, so that the time-short period provided can be predicted in consideration of the game state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , And a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 117, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 117A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 117A, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment, a time saving number selection table 202h is provided. The time saving number selection table 202h is a data table for selecting a time saving number according to a game state as a time saving state of a normal symbol which is set after the end of the big hit when the special symbol becomes a big hit. The time saving number selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b).

FIG. 117(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hour/hour count selection table 202h. As shown in FIG. 117(b), the hour/short time count selection table 202h is associated with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the hour/short period of the normal symbol to be given after the jackpot is defined.

Specifically, when the winning jackpot is one of the jackpots A and B, and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state (non-probable variation non-shortening state), 50 times is set as the shorting period. That is, in the case of the jackpot A, the time saving state 1 of 50 times is set after the jackpot is finished, and basically (if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot), the probability state of the special symbol is given 100 times. To be done. In other words, the probability variation state 1 is 50 times after the jackpot A ends, and the probability variation non-time saving state (latency probability variation state) is 51 times to 100 times. When the latent probability changes, it is difficult to hit the normal pattern, and it is easy to lose balls. Therefore, there is a disadvantage in comparison with the probability variation state 1, so that the player can play the game in the hope that the player will be a big hit again during the probability variation state 1. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the game. Also, in the case of the big hit B, the time saving state 2 of 50 times is set after the big hit is ended, and basically (provided that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed during the big hit), the probability change state of the special symbol is given 100 times. It In other words, 50 times after the big hit B ends, the probability variation state 2 is reached, and from 51 times to 100 times, the probability variation non-time saving state (latent latency variation state) is achieved. In the latent probability variation state, it is difficult to normally hit the symbol, and even if it hits, the opening pattern A is set (the opening pattern in which it is easy to enter the first operating port 704), so the probability variation state is set. It is disadvantageous compared to 2. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater sense of tension to the game once to 50 times after the jackpot B is over.

When the jackpot A or the jackpot B is won in the latent probability variation state (probability variation non-time saving state), the time saving state is given 100 times. That is, in the case of the big hit A, the probability variation state 1 is basically given 100 times, and in the case of the big hit B, the probability variation state 2 is basically given 100 times. Therefore, since it does not switch to the latent probability change state, the game can be played with confidence until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which a long time and a short period are selected in the latent probability changing state, it is possible to reduce the disappointment for switching from the probability changing state 1 or the probability changing state 2 to the latent probability changing state, and to hit the jackpot A or the jackpot during the latent probability changing state. You can make B want to win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game in the latent probability change state.

When the big hit A or the big hit B is won in the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2 (non-probably variable time saving state), the time saving state is given 30 times. Therefore, in the case of the big hit A, the probability variation state 1 of 30 times is switched to the latent probability variation state of 70 times. In the case of the big hit B, the probability variation state 2 of 30 times is switched to the latent probability variation state of 70 times.

When the jackpot A or the jackpot B is won in the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2 (probability variation time saving state), the time saving state is given 20 times. Therefore, in the case of the big hit A, the probability variation state 1 of 20 times is switched to the latent probability variation state of 80 times. Further, in the case of the big hit B, the probability variation state 2 of 20 times is switched to the latent probability variation state of 80 times.

Further, even when the jackpots C and D are won, the distribution of the number of shortened times is changed according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the normal state (non-probable variation non-time saving state), when one of the big hits C and D is achieved, 100 time saving periods are provided. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, the time saving state 1 is given 100 times, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving state 2 is given 100 times. The reason why the relatively long time period is set in the normal state is to prevent excessive disadvantage to the player. That is, in the normal state, which is most unfavorable to the player, the jackpot that the probability variation state is not given, and when it is shortened to the short time period, the player's motivation for the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from decreasing by setting a relatively long time period.

Similarly, when the jackpots C and D are won in the latent probability variation state (probability variation non-time saving state), no time saving period is given. That is, it shifts to the most unfavorable normal state. As described above, when the big hits A and B occur in the latent probability change state, a relatively long (100 times) short time period is selected. On the other hand, in the jackpots C and D, the state shifts to the most unfavorable normal state. Therefore, in the latent latent variation state, the degree of advantage of the player greatly differs depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the latent probability variation state, the big hit type can be paid more attention. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When the jackpots C and D are achieved in the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2, 30 time saving periods are provided. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, the time saving state 1 is given 30 times, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving state 2 is given 30 times. Furthermore, when the jackpots C and D are achieved in the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2, ten time saving periods are given. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, the time saving state 1 is given 10 times, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving state 2 is given 10 times.

On the other hand, in the case of the big hits F to H (big hits by lottery of the second special symbol), the same short time period is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, when either of the big hits E or F is reached, 100 time saving periods are awarded regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the jackpot G or H is achieved, 20 time saving periods are awarded regardless of the gaming state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving period to be given is different according to the game state at the time of the big hit. With this configuration, the jackpot to be won can be changed according to the gaming state. That is, the degree of advantage of each jackpot can be changed according to the gaming state, so that more various game characteristics can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 118 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, in the present embodiment, a winning state storage area 203γ is provided in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment. The winning state storage area 203γ is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of the big hit at the start of the big hit. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is held until the end of the big hit, and is referred to when the short-time period is set at the end of the big hit. That is, at the end of the jackpot, the hour/hour count corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the information stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is read out from the hour/hour count selection table 202h described above, and is set to the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr. Is set. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. First, with reference to FIG. 119, the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 75) of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment.

In this special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119), in each process of S201 to S273, the same process as each of S201 to S273 of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 75) in the fourth embodiment is performed. Executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) in the present embodiment, when the process of S218 ends, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is determined and information corresponding to the winning state storage area 203γ is stored. The winning state determination process is executed (S299), and the processes after S220 are executed. Details of the winning state determination process (S299) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the winning state determination process (S299). When the winning state determination process (see FIG. 120) is started, first, the values of the probability variation counter 203ce and the time saving/measuring counter 203cr are read (S5001). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the probability variation counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S5002), and when it is determined that the value is 0 (not in the probability variation state) (S5002: No), the next read time saving It is determined whether or not the value of the middle counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5003).

In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour saving counter 203cr is 0 (not in the hour/hour state) (S5003: No), it is determined that the gaming state has won the jackpot in the normal state (non-probable variation non-time period state). Since this means “00H”, which is a value indicating the uncertain variation non-time saving state, it is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr is larger than 0 (S5003: Yes), the jackpot is hit in any state of the hour/hour state 1 or the hour/hour state 2 (non-probable variable hour/hour state). Since this means that the winning has been won, "01H", which is a value indicating the indeterminate variation short-time state, is stored in the winning-state storing area 203γ (S5005), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the processing of S5002, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S5002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5006), and the value is When it is determined that it is 0 (not in the time saving state) (S5006: No), it means that the jackpot has been hit in the latent latent variation state (probability variation non-time shortening state), so when the winning “02H” indicating the latent latency variation state is won. The state is stored in the state storage area 203γ (S5007), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5006, if it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5006: Yes), it means that the jackpot has been hit in either the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2. “03H” indicating the probability-variable time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5008), and this processing ends.

At the end of the jackpot, the value stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is referred to, the game state at the time when the jackpot is won is determined, and the number of saved times is selected. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of shortening times depending on the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the ending process 7 (S1379) will be described with reference to FIG. This ending process 7 (S1379) is a process that is executed in place of the ending process 3 (see FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment, and like the ending process 3 (see FIG. 87), a big hit ending and a big hit. This is a process for setting a later game state.

When this ending process 7 (see FIG. 121) is started, first, an ending command for starting the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is set (S4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203ct is set to OFF to set the jackpot end (S4102). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203cf is on (S4103), and if it is on (S4103: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203ce is set to 100 (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105. To do. With this, it is possible to set the probability change state of the special symbol 100 times after the big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203cf is off (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether the big hit this time is one of big hits A, C, E, and G (S4105). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type in which the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot, and when it is determined to be one of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (S4105: Yes), the time saving identification flag 203cs is set. On the other hand, 0 is set (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4191. On the other hand, in the processing of S4105, when it is determined that the jackpot A, C, E, or G is not one of the jackpots B, D, F, or H (S4105: No), the time saving identification is performed. The flag 203cs is set to 1 (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4191.

In the processing of S4191 executed after the processing of S4106 or S4107, the values stored in the time saving number selection table 202h and the winning state storage area 203γ are read (S4191), and the read winning state storage area 203γ is stored. The time saving frequency indicated by the value and the jackpot type of this time is specified from the time saving frequency selection table 202h (S4192). Then, the specified time saving count is set in the time saving intermediate counter 203cr (S4193), and this processing is ended.

By executing this ending process, it is possible to set a variety of time saving times according to the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of shortening times depending on the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the degree of advantage is made different depending on whether the jackpot is achieved by the lottery for the first special symbol or the jackpot due to the lottery for the second special symbol. It is structured so that the player who wins the big prize in the lottery of the two special symbols becomes advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, that is, a time saving state 1 and a time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving states provided after the jackpot. Time saving state 1 is a time saving state in which a lottery for the first special symbol is easily performed (a ball easily enters the right first entrance 64a2), and time saving state 2 is a lottery for the second special symbol. Is easily executed (the ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b), which is a short time state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times of saving time provided after the jackpot is finished is varied according to the gaming state. As a result, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the short-time period will continue for a long time can be varied depending on the game state, so that the time-short period provided can be predicted in consideration of the game state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

In addition, you may combine all or one part of each said embodiment and each control example, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in comparison with the first embodiment, the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 1640 is changed, the right first entrance 64a2 is provided, and the right second entrance 64b is provided. The difference is that the structure for entering the ball has been changed. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 39, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the normal game state, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) is executed. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won is executed. Also, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, there is a high probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the jackpot game is over, and furthermore, the probability variation game state (hereinafter, probability change state) that makes it easy to receive the lottery for the special map, or The probability of being a big hit does not change, but a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a lottery for special maps is given.

Here, the probability change state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state, and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is provided. Moreover, the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is 1 or after the jackpot game is over). The number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game of the number of times is easy to transition to a gaming state where it is easy to win the jackpot)) is set.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game and the probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. As a result, for example, the ratio of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (it is easy to enter the probability variation state 1), and it is easier for the player to experience the game state (probability variation state) that is more likely to be hit than the normal game. As a result, it is possible to easily experience the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game effect or the probability variation state, and to entertain the game, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability variation state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has transitioned to the probability changing state 2 with a sense of superiority, and to improve the interest of the game for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, even in the time saving state, the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set similarly to the above-described probability variation state, and both of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are more than the normal game. A gaming state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (balls are easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special drawing in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time saving state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is substantially configured to execute the lottery of the special figure 2. Is set as a more advantageous game state for the player.

A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation states, and the time saving state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time saving states.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the jackpot game is over, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display device unit 80) is Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched to the right side area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and the vicinity of the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67 is reached. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. The electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and when the electric prize 710 is in an open state, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700. The electric accessory 710 is opened when the result of the lottery for ordinary symbols (general symbol lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 is successful. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 is different.

The detailed description is omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. 40 of the third embodiment described above, but the configuration inside the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the result of the universal drawing lottery that the winning (per the universal drawing) is won, and the first operation is performed depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate with each other as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 44, the second flow path 706 communicates with each other from the time when 1.5 times elapses to the time when 3.5 seconds elapse (2 seconds) after being won per universal figure. Thus, the switching valve 702 operates, and during the other periods, the first flow path 703 operates so as to communicate with each other.

A first operation port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow channel 703, while a second operation port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow channel 706, and each flow channel is The ball that has flowed down enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 122, the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 707 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 122, the first actuation port 704 is connected to the first actuation accessory 645a provided below the right side region of the game board 13 by the first actuation mechanism 705, and enters the first actuation port 704. By pressing the first contact piece provided on the one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up by the sphere. It is configured to come into contact with the operating accessory 645a and open the first operating accessory 645a.

Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 is ready to enter. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed similarly to the case of the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball is placed on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first actuation accessory 645a is closed.

As described above, a mechanism for changing the accessory to the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical structure is a known technique called a non-electric accessory. In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the configuration of the non-electric accessory is omitted, but any technology that has already been disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 similarly to the configuration of the above-mentioned non-electric auditors member, so that The second working accessory 645b is opened. By the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b which can enter the ball when the second actuating member 645b is opened, the lottery of the special map 2 which is set more advantageously than the special FIG. Executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory including the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the above-described first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating mechanism 705 are provided. Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electrical accessory that is composed of the working accessory 645a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, the second flow path 706 is provided only for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the switching valve 702 is elected per universal figure. The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during a period other than that (including a period in which a general figure is not elected) is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second actuating object 645b, the special figure 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. This is because.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description of the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b is ready to be entered by the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700, the game board 13 of the game board 13 does not enter the distribution winning apparatus 700. The ball that has flowed down the right side region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the ball entry ports that are ready to enter.

In this way, in the gaming state where the right-handed game is executed (probably changed state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

First, with reference to FIG. 123, the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 is a front view of the game board 13 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, three ball entrances are provided in which a special symbol is drawn by entering a ball. Specifically, the first ball entrance 64a1 provided on the lower side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, and the right second ball entrance provided on the right side with respect to the variable display device unit 80 in front view. 64b and the right 1st entrance 64a2 provided in the front view right side with respect to the right 2nd entrance 64b are provided.

Both the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are subjected to a lottery for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the ball. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-mentioned two kinds of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 123, the right first ball inlet 64a2 is provided with a first working accessory 645a. The first actuating member 645a is in an open state in which the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2 (easy) and cannot enter the ball in the right first ball entrance 64a2 ( Difficult) and closed state. The first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state when the ball enters the first operating port 704 provided inside the sorting winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a that has been switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

Similarly, the right second ball inlet 64b is provided with a second actuation accessory 645b. The second actuating member 645b is also in an open state in which the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b (easy), and cannot enter the ball in the right second ball entrance 64b ( Difficult) and closed state. The second operating accessory 645b that accompanies the second operating accessory 645b is switched to the open state when the ball enters the second operating port 707 provided inside the distribution winning apparatus 700. On the other hand, the second actuation accessory 645b that has been switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

A distribution winning apparatus 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball that has entered inside into either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first actuation port 704 (when the ball is entered), the first actuation accessory 645a attached to the right first entrance port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entrance The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second actuation opening 707 (entering the ball), the second actuation accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance opening is switched to the open state, and then to the right second entrance opening 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

Here, details of the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a front view of the distribution winning apparatus 700. As shown in FIG. 124, the distribution winning apparatus 700 is provided with the electric accessory 701 on the upper right side thereof. In the game board 13, the electric accessory 701 is buried in the projecting position projecting to the flow channel on the right side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 and the wall surface on the left side of the flow channel without projecting to the flow channel. It can be switched to the buried position. When the electric accessory 701 is in the projecting position, only one sphere that has flowed down the flow path can be received and held on the upper part thereof. In addition, when the electric accessory 701 switches from the projecting position to the burying position, the sphere held at the upper part can flow into the distribution winning apparatus 700 through the opening 701a.

The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 and the opening 701a is branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. The first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are provided with detection sensors 703a and 706a for detecting passage of a sphere, respectively. Further, since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow channel 703, the sphere that has flowed down the first flow channel 703 enters the first working port 704. On the other hand, since the second operating port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow channel 706, the ball flowing down the second flow channel 706 enters the second operating port 707. In addition, at the position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are branched, a flow path through which a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is switched ( A variable flow path) 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches (slides and displaces) between a first switching state in which the sphere flows down into the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the sphere flows down into the second flow path 706. )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the left side in front view to close the upstream side of the second flow path and only the first flow path is opened. To the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the right when viewed from the front to close the upstream side of the first flow path, and only the first flow path is opened. , The sphere advances to the second flow path.

If the ball can be thrown into the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the second switching state, the ball can be made to flow down toward the second operation port 707. When the ball enters the second operation port 707, the second operation accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability that the probability variation state of the special symbol is given when it is a big hit, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow-down direction (whether the flow is flowing down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707) of the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124, a first operating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operating port 704. The first operating port 704 is composed of a known non-electrically-powered accessory, that is, the first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball entering the first operating port 704. You can Further, when the first actuating member 645a is in the open state, the first actuating member 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. The second operating mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operating mechanism 705. That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second operating port 707. Further, when the second actuating member 645b is in the open state, the second actuating member 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b.

In this way, by throwing a ball into the distribution winning apparatus 700, the ball is thrown into the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating accessory 645a or The two working accessory 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if the special design 2 lottery is a big hit, it is more advantageous than the special design 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first working opening 704 or the second working opening 707. You can let me know. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 125 is a view showing the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in comparison with the first embodiment, the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 1640 is changed, the right first entrance 64a2 is provided, and the right second entrance 64b is provided. The difference is that the structure for entering the ball has been changed. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 39, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the normal game state, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) is executed. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won is executed. Also, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, there is a high probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the jackpot game is over, and furthermore, the probability variation game state (hereinafter, probability change state) that makes it easy to receive the lottery for the special map, or The probability of being a big hit does not change, but a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a lottery for special maps is given.

Here, the probability change state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state, and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is provided. Moreover, the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of the special map 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is 1 or after the jackpot game is over). The number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game of the number of times is easy to transition to a gaming state where it is easy to win the jackpot)) is set.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game and the probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. As a result, for example, the ratio of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (it is easy to enter the probability variation state 1), and it is easier for the player to experience the game state (probability variation state) that is more likely to be hit than the normal game. As a result, it is possible to easily experience the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game effect or the probability variation state, and to entertain the game, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability variation state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has transitioned to the probability changing state 2 with a sense of superiority, and to improve the interest of the game for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, even in the time saving state, the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set similarly to the above-described probability variation state, and both of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are more than the normal game. A gaming state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (balls are easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special drawing in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time saving state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is substantially configured to execute the lottery of the special figure 2. Is set as a more advantageous game state for the player.

A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation states, and the time saving state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time saving states.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the jackpot game is over, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display device unit 80) is Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched to the right side area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and the vicinity of the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67 is reached. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. The electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and when the electric prize 710 is in an open state, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700. The electric accessory 710 is opened when the result of the lottery for ordinary symbols (general symbol lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 is successful. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 is different.

The detailed description is omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. 61 of the third embodiment described above, but the configuration inside the distribution winning apparatus 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the result of the universal drawing lottery that the winning (per the universal drawing) is won, and the first operation is performed depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate with each other as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 65, the second flow path 706 is in communication between 1.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning of the general figure. Thus, the switching valve 702 operates, and during the other periods, the first flow path 703 operates so as to communicate with each other.

A first operation port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow channel 703, while a second operation port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow channel 706, and each flow channel is The ball that has flowed down enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 125, the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 707 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 125, the first operating port 704 is connected to the first operating accessory 645a provided below the right side region of the game board 13 by the first operating mechanism 705, and enters the first operating port 704. By pressing the first contact piece provided on the one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up by the sphere. It is configured to come into contact with the operating accessory 645a and open the first operating accessory 645a.

Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 is ready to enter. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed similarly to the case of the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball is placed on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first actuation mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first actuation accessory 645a is closed.

As described above, a mechanism for changing the accessory to the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical structure is a known technique called a non-electric accessory. In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the configuration of the non-electric accessory is omitted, but any technology that has already been disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 similarly to the configuration of the above-mentioned non-electric auditors member, so that The second working accessory 645b is opened. By the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b which can enter the ball when the second actuating member 645b is opened, the lottery of the special map 2 which is set more advantageously than the special FIG. Executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory including the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the above-described first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating mechanism 705 are provided. Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electrical accessory that is composed of the working accessory 645a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, the second flow path 706 is provided only for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the switching valve 702 is elected per universal figure. The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during a period other than that (including a period in which a general figure is not elected) is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second actuating object 645b, the special figure 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. This is because.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description of the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b is ready to be entered by the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700, the game board 13 of the game board 13 does not enter the distribution winning apparatus 700. The ball that has flowed down the right side region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the ball entry ports that are ready to enter.

In this way, in the gaming state where the right-handed game is executed (probably changed state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

Next, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710 and the switching member 702 described above will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an opening pattern A and an opening pattern B as opening patterns for the electric power role (electrically-powered object) 710. The opening pattern of the electric role is configured to be set according to the type of jackpot won by the special drawing lottery. Note that the opening pattern A is set in the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 (when the RAM is cleared).

When the opening pattern A is set, it will be opened for 1 second (becomes in an open state) after being won in general, then closed for 1.4 seconds (becomes in a closed state), and then opened again (0.1 seconds). The operation of the electric accessory 710 is controlled (the winning period is 2.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory is opened for 0.1 second (open state), then closed for 1.4 seconds (closed state), and opened again (1 second). 710 is operationally controlled (the winning period is 2.5 seconds).

In this way, the electric accessory 710 is configured such that the control contents to be opened/closed differ depending on the set opening pattern. The opening pattern in which the operation control content of the electric accessory 710 is set is determined by the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won.

In the fourth embodiment, the hit period (2.5 seconds) in the hit game (game in which the figure is hit) executed by the hit figure and the opening period (total time) of the electric accessory 710 during the hit period. The number of times (2 times) the electric accessory 710 is opened during the winning period is the same regardless of whether the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B is set. This is for reducing the processing load of the operation control process in the winning game, and is expected to enter the distribution winning device 1640 for the player no matter which universal figure winning game is executed. This is because the degree is not changed.

It should be noted that, if the degree of expectation that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 does not change, another operation control content may be used as the control for operating the electric motor accessory 710. For example, it is possible to increase the number of times the ball is opened during a period in which it is difficult to enter (0.1 second), or to change the period in which the ball is in a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter.

Furthermore, in all the opening patterns of the electric accessory 710, it is not necessary to unify the expectation of the balls to enter the distribution prize winning device 700, and it is easy to enter the distribution prize winning device 700 and difficult to enter. A winning game may be provided. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the operation is controlled so that the electric accessory 710 is opened as soon as the universal figure jackpot is won, but this is because the winning game is won by immediately executing the hit game. This is to notify the player without delay. It should be noted that the operation control may be performed such that the electric accessory 710 is opened after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the winning of the general figure.

In the case of adopting such a configuration, it is preferable to use a configuration in which a player can visually recognize the winning by using a display device that can be visually recognized by the player like the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in advance that he or she has won the prize and that the ball is ready to enter the distribution winning apparatus 700. In addition, the technology of notifying the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol whether or not to win per universal symbol (identification symbol (identification information) when the stop symbol is displayed after variably displaying the identification symbol (identification information)) The technique may be used to notify the player of the lottery result (discrimination result) in accordance with the display mode. As a result, the player can enjoy the variable display of both the special symbol and the normal symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. A switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided in the distribution winning apparatus 700. The switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to a position where the second flow path is in communication for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have elapsed after winning the prize. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is performed with a constant operation regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

Next, the flow of balls entering the distribution prize winning device 700 for each electric role opening pattern will be described. First, when the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period in which the ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 is 1 second from the start of the game. The balls that enter during this period reach the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed, as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in the state where the first flow passage 1644 is in communication, so the ball is guided to the first flow passage 1644. As described above, while the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball entering the distribution winning apparatus 700 is guided to the first flow path 703 and enters the first operating port 704. As a result, the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. That is, when the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), the gaming state (time saving state 1, probability changing state 1) in which Toku-zu 1 is substantially changed in the time saving state or the probability changing state is Will be set. In the opening pattern A, the electric accessory 701 is released for 0.1 seconds after 1.5 seconds have passed after the big hit, but the opening for 0.1 seconds is a difficult interval for the ball to enter. And there is almost no ball coming in. In the unlikely event that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700, the ball will enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern B described later.

Next, when the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period in which the ball can enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 is 1 second after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game. .. The balls that enter during this period reach the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed, as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is positioned in the state where the second flow passage 706 is in communication, so the ball is guided to the second flow passage 706. As described above, while the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the balls that enter the sorting prize winning device 700 are guided to the second flow path 706 and enter the second operating port 707. It acts to make a ball, so that the ball can enter the right second ball inlet 64b. That is, when the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory), the gaming state (time saving state 2, probability changing state 2) in which Toku-zu 2 is substantially changed in the time saving state or the probability changing state is Will be set. In the opening pattern B, the electric accessory 701 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the jackpot is won, but the opening for 0.1 seconds is a difficult interval for the balls to enter, and almost all the balls enter. There is no ball. In the unlikely event that a ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 700 during this period, the ball will enter the distribution winning apparatus 700 at the same timing as the above-described opening pattern A, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the ball entered in the opening pattern B is surely guided so that the ball entered in the opening pattern A is surely guided to the first flow path 703. The operation is performed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. As a result, it becomes possible to guide a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball moves from the distribution winning apparatus 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the universal figure is set to 3 seconds in a state where the variation time of the universal figure is shortened (time saving state, probability variation state). Therefore, in the state where the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, in order to reliably guide the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning apparatus 700 to the second flow path, the switching valve 702 is started from the normal position. Even if the second flow path is placed in communication for 3 seconds after the lapse of 1.5 seconds, the first flow path will be in communication by the time the game is executed again after the next universal figure change. Since it can be positioned, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 is guided to an unintended flow path over a plurality of times of a game per game.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory) is settable based on the jackpot type, and the set opening pattern of the electric role (electrical accessory) is set. Based on, it is possible to set a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially changes and a game state in which the special figure 2 substantially changes. In addition, the bonuses that are more advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 2 lottery are more than those when the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 1 lottery. It is set that the ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed is high) is given.

As a result, the time saving state and the probability variation state are further advantageous to the game state (time saving state 2, probability variation state 2), and the player is more advantageous than the advantageous game state but is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variation state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, by setting a high transition ratio for shifting from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability changing state 1, the player can easily see the effect executed in the time saving state or the probability changing state. It is possible to give a superior feeling to the player who has transitioned to the probability variation state 2 by setting a low transition rate to transition to the probability variation state 2 which is the most advantageous game state for the player. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of opening patterns A and B can be set as the opening patterns of the electric role (electric accessory), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the types of opening patterns can be changed. You may comprise so that 3 or more types can be set. As a result, it becomes possible to set more various game states.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern that guides the sphere to the second flow path 706 as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory). Although the pattern (opening pattern B) is set, for example, an opening pattern is provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. Is also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the sphere entering the electric accessory 701 guides, further improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is configured to enter any of the operation ports (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707). , Out which is connected to the discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without providing a flow path for discharging again from the sorting prize winning device 700 to the game board 13 or entering each operation opening. A flow path for entering the mouth may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in the flow of the balls in the distribution winning apparatus 700, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the switching valve 702 is configured such that a predetermined constant operation is performed after the hit game is executed, but for example, a constant operation is always performed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It may be configured to be opened, or may be configured to switch the communicating flow paths when the number of balls entered into the distribution winning apparatus 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

In the fourth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). However, for example, the switching valve 702, which is a switching member, is actuated by contact of a ball, and a predetermined condition (for example, It may be configured such that the communicating flow path is switched when 10 balls are passed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the sphere guided to any one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter any one of the operating ports. A distribution member that distributes a sphere guided to any of the flow paths by 702 to a plurality of flow paths is provided, and the sphere distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member enters the corresponding working port. You may.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a certain time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As a means for varying (extending) the time for a ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 to reach the switching valve 702, a period until the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is set. It is also possible to provide a plurality of different routes and to provide a distribution unit that distributes a ball entering the distribution winning apparatus 700 to one of the routes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player, who can play a game while predicting when the ball entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 will reach the switching valve 702, from getting tired of the game early. The effect is that you can.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 132. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the distribution prize winning device 700, the right first ball entrance 64a2, and the right second ball entrance 64b are provided in the right side area (hereinafter, right hitting area) of the game board 13. It had been.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the left through gate 67a and the first entrance 64a1 are provided in the left area of the game board 13 (hereinafter referred to as the left hitting area LE). The right through gate 67b and the second ball entrance 64b1 are provided in the right hitting area RE of 13 and the lower side of the game board 13 through which both the left hitting area LE and the game balls launched in the right hitting area RE can pass. In a region (hereinafter referred to as central region CE), a third distribution winning device 7000 is provided in place of the distribution winning device 700, a variable winning device 165 is provided in the central region CE, and a third distribution winning device. The difference is that a central first ball entrance 64a3 and a central second ball entrance 64b3 into which game balls entered into 7000 can enter are provided, and the first variable winning device 65 is deleted. The same components as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 126, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment differs in a game aiming at the left hitting area LE (hereinafter referred to as a left hitting game) and a game aiming at a right hitting area RE (hereinafter referred to as a right hitting game). Have sex.

Specifically, in the left-handed game, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 is executed, and a special symbol 1 (special figure 1) is drawn based on the entry of the game ball into the first entrance 64a1. Executed. As a result of the lottery in Toku-zu 1, if the jackpot is won, the game state (time saving state) in which the game ball can easily enter the third distribution winning device 7000 after the end of the jackpot game is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Or until the next big win).

Similar to the above-described fourth embodiment, a time saving state (time saving state 1, time saving state 2) having different degrees of advantage for the player is set in this time saving state, and a lottery is executed in the left-handed game. After winning the jackpot as a result of the lottery of Special Figure 1, the time saving state 1 (the ball that entered the third distribution winning device 7000 is the entrance for executing the lottery of Special Figure 1 (the first entry Only the short-time condition (flowing down to the mouth 64a2) is settable.

On the other hand, in the right-handed game, a game aiming at the second entrance 64b1 is executed, and the lottery for the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) is executed based on the entrance of the game ball into the second entrance 64b1. .. When the specific jackpot is won as a result of the lottery of the special map 2, after the jackpot game is over, the game ball is easy to enter the third distribution prize winning device 7000 (time saving state) as a time saving state 2 ( It is configured such that a ball that has entered the third distribution winning device 7000 flows down to a ball entrance (second ball entrance 64b2) for executing the lottery of the special drawing 2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player arbitrarily selects whether to perform the left-handed game or the right-handed game, thereby selecting one of the different game characteristics and executing the game. it can.

By using such a structure, for example, in the left-handed game, as a result of the lottery (special jackpot probability 1/100) of the special drawing 1, when the jackpot is won, there is a high probability (including 100%) of the time saving state (time saving state 1 ) (For example, with a probability of 30%, shift to a short-term state (time-saving state 1) until the next big hit, and with a probability of 70% until special figure fluctuation is executed 50 times (time-saving state 1 )), and during that time saving game (time saving game 1), it is possible to execute a game aiming for a further big hit (game with low gambling).

On the other hand, in the right-handed game, as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery (big hit probability 1/100 (the same as the big hit probability of special drawing 1)), a predetermined probability when the big hit is won (when the big hit is won in the special drawing 1) To the time saving state (time saving state 2) with a probability (eg, 30%) lower than the probability that the time saving state (time saving state 1) is given to (for example, the time saving state (time saving state 2) until the next jackpot. It becomes possible to execute a game (a game with high gambling ability) aiming for a further big hit during the time saving state (time saving state 2) that is given) and during the time saving state (time saving state 2).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery of special figure 2 is a big hit during the time saving state 2, the probability is higher than when the lottery of special figure 2 is a big hit in the non-time saving state (for example, 80 %), it is configured to shift to a time-saving state (time-saving state 2), so that once the time-saving state 2 is entered, a game in which the jackpot and the time-saving state 2 are looped with high probability (high gambling) It is possible to execute a game).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can select and execute a game with a low gambling probability and a game with a high gambling property by selecting a game that shoots a game ball. Since it is configured, it is possible to eliminate the action of the player moving to a different pachinko machine 10 in order to execute a game with different gambling characteristics. Further, since the player can play the game while selecting the gambling property in accordance with the investment amount of the game and the number of coins acquired, the variation of the game can be increased.

Here, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. Although a detailed description will be given later, the probability variation state of the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the jackpot probability of the special figure is almost the same as that of the normal state that is not the probability variation state (for example, the jackpot probability of the normal state is The probability of jackpot in the probability variation state is 1/100, and it is 5/400). This is a case where the lottery result of special figure 2 in the right-handed game in the normal state is a big hit, and a case where the lottery result of special figure 2 in the right-handed game in the probability variation state is a big hit. This is because the probability of shifting to a state that is advantageous to

Returning to FIG. 126, the description will be continued. When the lottery result of the special symbol (special map 1 or special map 2) is a big hit, the variable winning device 165 that allows the game ball to enter the big hit game to be executed is provided in the central area CE. The game ball that has passed through the right hitting area RE and the left hitting area LE is configured to be able to enter.

As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot game using the same variable winning device 165 depending on whether the right hitting game results in a big hit or the left hitting game results in a big hit. It is possible to reduce the number of parts that configure the machine 10.

In this embodiment, the same variable winning device 165 is used for the right-handed game and the left-handed game, but other configurations may be used, for example, a variable for the right-handed game. A winning device (right variable winning device) is provided in the right hitting area RE, a variable winning device for left hitting game (left variable winning device) is provided in the left hitting area LE, and a game ball is entered in each variable winning device. In this case, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) paid out may be different. In this case, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered in the right variable winning device is larger than that in the left variable winning device. Thereby, there is an effect that the level of gambling can be made clearer.

Returning to FIG. 126, the description will be continued. In the central area CE, a ball that has passed through the variable winning device 165 without entering the variable winning device 165 can enter the ball (lower side (downstream side) of the variable winning device 165), the third distribution winning. A device 7000 is provided. Here, the configuration of the third distribution winning apparatus 7000 will be described with reference to FIG. 127.

FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the third distribution-winning device 7000. In FIG. 127(a), the ball that has entered the third distribution-winning device 7000 is the first working port 704. FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram showing a flow in the case of entering a ball, and FIG. 127(b) is a flow in the case of a ball entering the third distribution winning device 7000 entering the central first entrance 64a3 It is the schematic diagram which showed.

The third distribution winning device 7000 is different from the second distribution winning device 700 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that the central first winning entrance 64a3 and the central second winning entrance are provided in the third distributing winning device 7000. The point where 64b3 is provided, the ball entering the third distribution winning apparatus 7000 and flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first actuation port 704 or the central first ball entry port 64a3, and The difference is that a ball that flows down the two flow paths 706 is provided to enter the second operation port 707 or the central second ball entry port 64b3. Other configurations are the same as those of the second distribution/winning device 700 according to the above-described fourth embodiment, and therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 127(a), the switching valve 702 is in a movable state (that is, the time saving state) so that the game ball that has entered the third distribution winning apparatus 7000 can flow down the first flow path 703. In 1), when the game ball enters the third distribution winning device 7000, first, the game ball flows down the first flow path 703 and enters the first operation port 704. Then, when the game ball enters the first operating port 704, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the first operating accessory 645a is opened, and then the game ball entering the third distribution winning device 7000. Enters the central first entrance 64a3.

In this way, whether the gaming ball that has entered the third distribution prize device 7000 flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is a type of a set time saving state (time saving state 1 Since it is determined by the time saving state 2), the game balls that enter the third distribution winning device 7000 during the same time saving state flow down the same flow path (the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706). Will be done. Therefore, the ball that entered the third distribution prize device 7000 enters the operation port (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707), and then enters the third distribution prize device 7000. The balls can be alternately entered into the entrance (the central first entrance 64a3 or the central second entrance 64b3).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the central first entrance 64a3 and the central second entrance 64b3 are provided in the third distribution winning apparatus 7000, but other configurations may be used, and left hitting. In the central area CE through which the game ball flowing down the area LE or the right-handed area RE can pass, if the game can be entered regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is played, the third distribution prize It may be provided outside the device 7000.

Returning to FIG. 126, the ball flow of the game balls flowing down the game board 13 provided with the above-described components will be described. First, when the left hitting game is executed and the game ball flows down the left hitting area LE, it passes through the left through gate 67a. Then, the game ball that has passed through the left through gate 67a is, with the nails Q1, Q2, and Q3 provided above the first ball entrance 64a, the general prize hole 63, the first ball entrance 64a, and the variable winning device 165 ( Alternatively, the flow can be easily distributed to any of the third distribution winning devices 7000).

In other words, for example, if the nail Q3 is adjusted to the left in order to reduce the rate of entry into the first entry port 64a, the proportion of entry into the variable winning device 165 (or the third distribution winning device 7000). When the nail Q2 is adjusted to the right in order to reduce the rate of entry into the first entry port 64a, the proportion of the entry into the general winning opening 63 is increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a disadvantageous nail adjustment. The second ball entrance 64b and the nails Q4, Q5, Q6 in the right hitting area RE are also configured in the same relationship, but since the contents are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the game ball that has passed through the left through gate 67a enters the first ball entrance 64a, the lottery of special figure 1 is executed, passes through the left through gate 67a, and is directed toward the variable winning device 165. The game ball flowing down enters the variable winning device 165 during the big hit game, passes through the variable winning device 165 except during the big hit game, and flows down to the third distribution prize device 7000. Then, in a state where the electric accessory 701 closes the passage opening 701a of the third distribution winning apparatus 7000, the third distribution winning apparatus 7000 does not enter the ball, but the ball enters the out opening 71 and the game board. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of 13.

On the other hand, in a state where the electric accessory 701 opens the passage port 701a of the third distribution prize device 7000, the game ball enters the third distribution prize device 7000 and is made passable by the switching valve 702. Flow path (the first flow path 703, the second flow path 706) is flowed down, and the operation port (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707) or the ball entrance (the center first ball entrance 64a3 or the center) Enter the second entrance 64b3).

In the present control example, the game ball that has entered the third distribution prize device 7000 is the operating opening (first operating opening 704 or second operating opening 707) or the incoming opening (central first incoming opening 64a3). Although a configuration for entering a ball in any of the central second ball inlets 64b3) is used, a configuration other than that may be used, for example, an out port may be provided, or the game board 13 may be discharged again. It may be configured to be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player's gaming state (left-handed game or right-handed game) is configured to be discriminable (for example, it is discriminated by detecting a game ball entering each entrance). The player is able to identify the area in which the player is playing the game (left hitting area LE or right hitting area RE).

Specifically, by changing the brightness of various left decoration LEDs provided in the left hitting area LE and various right decoration LEDs provided in the right hitting area RE in accordance with the game state (left hitting game or right hitting game). The LED provided in the game area where the game is currently being played is configured to have high brightness. This allows the player to be notified of the game state in an easy-to-understand manner.

It should be noted that a configuration other than the above may be used, for example, the glass unit 16 that covers the game board 13 is configured with a half mirror, and only the area where the game is currently being performed is transparent (the game board 13 can be visually recognized by the player. It is also possible to use a control of transmitting the light.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric prize 701 that allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 165 and the third distribution winning device 7000 is provided in the central area CE to be shared (left hitting game and right hitting game). The number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 is reduced by making them common to the batting game, but the variable winning device 165 and the electric accessory 701 are provided separately for the left batting game and the right batting game. Alternatively, the third prize-winning device 7000 may be provided separately for the left-handed game and the right-handed game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the central area CE is provided as an area in which both the game ball flowing down the left hitting area LE and the game ball flowing down the right hitting area RE are allowed to flow down, but left hitting on the game board 13 The area LE and the right hitting area RE may be completely separated. This can prevent the game ball from flowing down to an unintended area.

Further, the handle 51 is provided with adjusting means (adjusting button or the like) for adjusting the launching force of the game ball. The player may easily aim at a desired area (left hitting area LE or right hitting area RE).

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the transition of the game state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition. As shown in FIG. 128, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal state in which the electric accessory 701 is difficult to open (a game without electric support), a latent change probability state, and a time saving state 1 (special time variation time saving state ( It is configured to shift the disadvantageous time saving)) and the time saving state 2 (time saving state for changing special figure 2 (advantageous time saving)) based on the type of jackpot that was won.

First, the case where the left-handed game is executed in the normal state will be described. In the left-handed game, a game in which the variation of the special map 1 (lottery) is executed is performed, and if you win the jackpot, 30% will change to a certainty/time saving state 1 (until the next jackpot) and 50% will change (until the next jackpot) ) ・Transition to time saving state 1 (50 times), and 20% shift to normal time saving state 1 (50 times).

Next, when the time saving (game with electric power support) state shifts, the respective game states are transferred at the respective ratios shown, and when the time saving state ends, the game shifts to a game without electric power support as shown in the figure.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when the right-handed game is executed, the game in which the variation (lottery) of the special map 2 is executed is performed, and if you win the jackpot, 30% will be a certainty change/time saving state 2 (until the next jackpot) 50% shifts to probability change (until the next big hit) and no time saving (that is, latent latency change state), and 20% shifts to normal state.

Then, when the jackpot is won in the time saving state 2 (game with electric power support), 80% shifts to the probability variation/time saving state 2 (until the next big jackpot), and 20% shifts to the normal state. In other words, the left-handed game moves from the normal state to the time-saving state (time-saving state 1) with a probability of 100%, whereas the right-handed game moves from the normal state to the time-saving state (time-saving state 2) with a probability of only 30%. It is set not to migrate. That is, the left-handed game can execute a game in which the time saving game is more likely to be given from the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time saving state (game with electric support), the left hitting game has a 30% probability of shifting to the game state in which the time saving condition is set until the next big hit, whereas the right hitting game has the time saving state. Is set to a high probability of 80% that the game state shifts to the next big hit. In other words, once the game shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to execute a game in which the right hitting game is easier to continue in the time saving state.

As described above, when the player selects the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), the player easily shifts from the normal state to the time saving state, and easily shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. Perform a game (left hitting game with low gambling), or a game that does not easily shift from the normal state to the time saving state, and that does not easily shift from the time saving state to the normal state (right hitting game with high gambling) be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to save the trouble of moving to a different pachinko machine 10 when a player executes a game with different gambling characteristics.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 130. The eighth embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a first random number 2 table 202a is provided in place of the first per random number table 202a, and a first per type selection table 202b is replaced with the first per random type selection table 202b. The difference is that the hit type selection 2 table 202b is provided. Other configurations are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first random number 2 table 202a, and FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per-type selection 2 table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), in the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399, and when the special symbol has a low probability (in the normal state). , There are four random numbers that are jackpots for special symbols, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are stored in the first random number table 202a as determination values for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low (during a normal state), the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 4. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/ 100".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol (at the time of probability change state), there are five random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the value "0-5" is high probability in the first random number table 202a. It is stored as a judgment value for. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols (at the time of probability change state), the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 5, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/ 80".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the normal state and the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the probability changing state are set so as not to cause a large difference. This will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. In addition, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the normal state, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the probability changing state, if the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to be higher than in the normal state, set another value Alternatively, for example, the total number of random number values is 4000, the total number of random number values that are jackpots in the normal state is 40 (the jackpot probability is 1/100), and the total number of random number values that are jackpots in the probable variation state is 41 ( The jackpot probability may be set to about 1/98).

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(b), in the first hit type selection 2 table 202b in this embodiment, there are a special 2 selection 2 table 202b3 and a special 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4. 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5 is set.

Here, the contents of the selection 2 table for special figure 1 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 selection 2 table 202b3. In this pachinko machine 10, three types of jackpot types from jackpot A to jackpot C are set as jackpot types selected when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery (discrimination) of Toku-zu 1.

As shown in FIG. 130(a), the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit A, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit B. "30 to 79" is set, and for the big hit C, the value "80 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

Here, when the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is given as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is finished, the probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won, and the electric power is released. The time saving state (time saving state 1) in which the open pattern A is set as the pattern is given until the next big hit. When the jackpot A is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

When the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is given as the jackpot game, the probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game is finished, and the opening pattern A is used as the electric power releasing pattern. Time saving state (time saving state 1) is set until the special symbol is changed 50 times. When the big hit B is executed, about 500 gaming balls are paid out during the big hit game.

When the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 4 rounds is given as the jackpot game, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric power releasing pattern without the probability variation state being given after the jackpot game ends. Time saving state (time saving state 1) is given until the special symbol is changed 50 times. In addition, when the big hit C is executed, about 250 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

Next, the contents of the selection 2 table for special figure 2 (normal) 202b4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the selection 2 table (normal) for special figure 2 202b4. This special 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4 is referred to in the case of a big hit in the lottery (discrimination) of the special drawing 2 in the normal state, and from the big hit D as the big hit type to be selected. Three types of jackpots up to jackpot F are set.

As shown in FIG. 130(b), the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit D, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit E. “30 to 79” is set, and for the big hit F, the value “80 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

Here, when the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is given as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is finished, the probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won, and the electric power is released. The time saving state (time saving state 2) in which the open pattern B is set as the pattern is given until the next big hit. When the big hit D is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

When the jackpot E is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 8 rounds is given as the jackpot game, and the probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won, without the time saving state being given after the jackpot game ends. It When the big hit B is executed, about 500 gaming balls are paid out during the big hit game.

When the big hit F is selected as the big hit type, a big hit game of four rounds is given as a big hit game, and it is set so that the time saving state and the probability variation state are not given after the end of the big hit game. In addition, when the big hit C is executed, about 250 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

Next, the contents of the selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5 for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5. The selection 2 table for special figure 2 (time saving) 202b5 is referred to when a big hit occurs in the lottery (discrimination) of special figure 2 in the time saving state. It differs from (normal) 202b4 in that a jackpot G is set instead of the jackpot E. The description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 131, when the big hit G is selected in the special 2 table for selection 2 (time saving) 202b5, a big hit game of 8 rounds is given as a big hit game, and the next big hit is won after the end of the big hit game. The probability variation state is given up to, and further, the time saving state (time saving state 2) in which the opening pattern B is set as the electric power releasing pattern is given until the next big hit. When the big hit G is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5 is provided with the time saving state (time saving state 2) at a distribution rate of 80%, and the special drawing 2 selection 2 table is provided. In (normal) 202b4, the time saving state (time saving state 2) is set at a distribution rate of 30%. As a result, the probability that a time-saving state (time-saving state 2) is given by the jackpot of special figure 2 in the normal state (that is, first hit) and the big hit of special figure 2 in the time-shortening state (that is, big jackpot in the condominium) Can be different.

Therefore, it is possible to provide a difference between the rate at which the gaming state shifts to the gaming state (time saving state 2) that is advantageous to the player and the rate at which the gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state 2) is looped. Therefore, even though the game state shifts to the gaming state (time saving state 2) that is advantageous for the player and the transition probability is set to be low, it immediately shifts to another gaming state (for example, a normal state). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player is dissatisfied.

As described above, in the above-described eighth embodiment, the player performs the game by aiming at the left hitting area LE of the game board 13 and the case where the player aims at the right hitting area RE of the game board 13. Different games (games with different gambling characteristics) can be executed depending on whether or not to execute. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the action of the player moving to a different pachinko machine 10 in order to execute a game with different gambling abilities. Further, since the player can play the game while selecting the gambling property in accordance with the investment amount of the game and the number of coins acquired, the variation of the game can be increased.

In addition, the variable winning a prize device 165 which becomes the opening state where the game ball can enter during the big hit game which is executed when the big hit of the special design in the left hitting game or the right hitting game, left hitting area LE or right hitting Since any of the game balls that flow down the area RE are provided in the central area CE that can flow down, the number of parts that configure the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the third distribution winning device 7000 is provided in the central area CE, it is possible to reduce the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, which of the central first ball entrance 64a3 and the second central ball entrance 64b3 the ball entered into the third distribution winning device 7000 enters is determined by the type of time saving state being executed (time saving state. Since it is determined by 1 or the time saving state 2), in the case of executing the game in which the ball is thrown into the third distribution prize winning device 7000 in the time saving state, it is executed by either the left hitting game or the right hitting game. It is possible to obtain the same game result (the result of entering the game ball in the third distribution winning device 7000).

Therefore, for example, when a time-saving state (time-saving state 2) is reached as a result of performing a right-handed game, a left-handed game is performed rather than a right-handed game being performed and a game ball being entered in the third distribution prize device 7000. When it is easier to play the game and enter the game balls into the third allocation prize device 7000, the game method can be changed from the right-handed game to the left-handed game. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) suitable for the current game state (normal state, time-saving state) and play the game, thereby increasing the motivation for the game.

As a cause of the difference in the ease of entering the third distribution winning device 7000 between the left-handed game and the right-handed game, adjustment of the nails planted in the game board 13 is conceivable. The through-gate 67a makes nail adjustment easier for the game ball to pass than the right-through gate 67b, and the guide nail that guides the game ball flowing down the left hitting area LE toward the third distribution winning device 7000 is right-handed. It is conceivable to make the nail adjustment that makes it easier to guide the game ball than the guide nail that guides the game ball flowing down the area RE toward the third distribution winning device 7000.

Next, a modified example of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a schematic view schematically showing a front view of the game board 13 of the modified example of the eighth embodiment. In this modified example, a plurality of (two) passage openings into which the game balls can enter the distribution device 7000 are provided in the distribution device 7000, and the game balls enter the respective passage openings. A variable electric accessory (left electric accessory 701a, right electric accessory 701b) is provided at a permissible position for restricting and a restricting position for restricting, which is executed by the game ball passing through the left through gate 67a. Based on the normal symbol lottery (left ordinary symbol lottery), the left electric accessory 701a is controlled to be opened, and based on the ordinary symbol lottery (right ordinary symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the right through gate 67b. The difference is that the right electric accessory 701b is controlled to be opened. The other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 132, the left electric accessory 701a is provided in the left hitting area LE, and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery (left ordinary symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the left through gate 67a is It is configured to be opened (allowable position) when it hits. The left electric accessory 701a is controlled to be opened so that the game ball can easily enter when the time saving state 1 is set.

On the other hand, if the right electric role object 701b is provided in the right hitting area RE, and the result of the normal symbol lottery (right ordinary symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the right through gate 67b is a win. It is configured to be opened (allowable position). This right electric accessory 701b is controlled to be opened so that the game ball can easily enter when the time saving state 2 is set.

In this way, for the third distribution winning device 7000, passage openings (left passage opening, right passage opening) through which game balls can enter are provided for left-handed gaming and right-handed gaming, respectively, and left-handed passing. By providing the left electric accessory 701a for the mouth and the right electric accessory 701b for the right passage opening, it is possible to reliably separate the right-handed game and the left-handed game even in the time saving state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time saving state 1 is set for the left electric accessory 701a that is controlled to be opened based on the normal symbol lottery (left ordinary symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the left through gate 67a. , The game ball is configured to be easy to enter, the right electric accessory 701b controlled to be opened based on the normal symbol lottery (right normal symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the right through gate 67b. , When the time saving state 2 is set, the game ball is controlled to be opened so that the player can easily enter the ball. Therefore, the game is performed on the electric accessory 701a in the state where the time saving state 2 that is most advantageous for the player is set. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball.

In addition, in this modification, the same configuration as that of the above-described eighth embodiment is used in the third distribution winning device 7000, and the left electric accessory 701a or the right electric accessory 701b is opened (allowed). Although the game balls that have passed through the respective passage ports in the state where they are present are configured to be guided onto the switching valve 702, other configurations may be used.

For example, the left electric accessory 701a is opened, the ball entering from the left passage port flows down the first flow path 703, the right electric accessory 701b is opened, and the ball entering from the right passage port is the second flow. It may be configured to flow down the path 706. As a result, the left-handed game and the right-handed game can be reliably separated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game that is not intended by the player from being executed.

The configurations of the eighth embodiment and the modification of the eighth embodiment described above may be combined with the configurations of the control examples and the embodiments described above.

<First Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a first modification of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described. The first modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a distribution winning device 7000 is provided instead of the distribution winning device 700. Details of the distribution winning apparatus 7000 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a front view showing the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 7000 in the first modified example of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 133, the distribution winning apparatus 7000 includes a distribution winning apparatus 650 (see FIG. 35) in the modification of the first embodiment and a distribution winning apparatus 700 (see FIG. 81) in the fourth embodiment. It is a combination of. The basic functions of the distribution winning apparatus 7000 are the same as those of the distribution winning apparatus 700, and when a ball enters (is distributed to) the first operating port 7040 of the distribution winning apparatus 7000, The first working accessory 645a associated with the right first ball entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball is ready to enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. On the other hand, when the ball is distributed to the second operation port 7070 provided inside the distribution winning device 7000 (when the ball is entered), the second operation accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance port is opened. Then, the ball is ready to enter the right second entrance 64b.

When the ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high rate of being given the probability variation state of the special symbol when it is a big hit, so for the player Be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation opening (whether to enter the first operation opening 7040 or the second operation opening 7070) through which the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 enters. it can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 133, an electric accessory 7010 is provided on the upper surface side of the distribution winning apparatus 7000. Like the electric prize 701 of the distribution prize winning apparatus 700 in the modified example of the first embodiment, the electric prize 7010 is in an open state in which a ball can enter (easy) into the distribution prize winning apparatus 7000. It is configured to be switchable between a (immersed state) and a closed state (protruding state) where the ball cannot enter (is difficult). This electric accessory 7010 is set to an open state when it is hit by a lottery for ordinary symbols.

Inside the distribution winning apparatus 7000, a guide flow path 7020 through which a sphere can flow is provided, and a magnetic sensor 7020a that detects passage of the sphere is provided downstream of the guide flow path 7020. A first rotating body 7090 is provided below the magnetic sensor 7020a. This first rotating body 7090 is provided with four recesses (rotating ball entrances 7090a to 7090d) around which game balls can enter, similar to the probability variation rotating body 900 in the modification of the first embodiment. There is. Of these recesses, the rotary ball entrance 7090a is configured to guide the game ball to the back side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 7000 enters the rotary entrance 7090a, the first rotating body rotates clockwise in a front view, and the first operating opening is provided on the back side of the rotary entrance 7090a. When 7040 is placed in the positional relationship, the game ball rolls from the rotary entrance 7090a toward the back side thereof and enters the first actuation opening 7040. In this case, the first actuation accessory 645a associated with the right first ball entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, the rotary ball entrances 7090b to 7090d are provided with wall portions that prevent the balls from being guided to the back side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the rotary ball inlet ports 7090b to 7090d is blocked by the wall portion even if the first rotating body 7090 rotates to the front surface side of the first operating port 7040, and the first operating port 7040 is blocked. I can't enter. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the rotary ball entrances 7090b to 7090d is guided to the guide flow path 7060 that continues to the second rotary body 7091.

The guide passage 7060 is provided with a magnetic sensor 7060a for detecting a passing game ball, and the game ball detected by the magnetic sensor 7060a flows down to the second rotating body 7091. Similarly to the first rotating body 7090, the second rotating body 7091 is also provided with four recesses (rotating ball inlets 7091a to 7091d) into which game balls can enter, and only the rotating ball inlet 7091a is a game ball. Is configured to be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball enters the rotary entrance 7091a, the second rotating body rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and the second actuating opening 7070 is arranged in front of the rotary entrance 7091a. In this case, the game ball rolls toward the back side and enters the second operating port 7070. In this case, the second actuation accessory 645b associated with the right second ball entrance 64b is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the rotating ball entrance ports 7091b to 7091d, the game ball is not guided to the second operation port 7070, and thus is guided to the discharge flow path 656 and discharged from the discharge port 657. It is discharged to the outside.

The first rotary body 7090 and the second rotary body 7091 always rotate at a constant speed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on until the power is cut off. More specifically, the first rotating body 7090 rotates clockwise in front view at a rotation speed of 1 rotation in 5 seconds, and the second rotating body 7091 rotates counterclockwise in front view at a rotation speed of 1 rotation in 3 seconds. , Have been rotated respectively. As a result, the normal design hits, the game ball enters the first operating port 7040 in accordance with the timing when the electric accessory 7010 is opened, and the game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000. Whether to enter the ball (enter the rotary entrance 7090a), the second actuation opening 7070 (enter the rotary entrance 7091a), or the exit 657. change. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the arrangement of each rotating body (first rotating body 7090, second rotating body 7091) when the game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 7000. it can. That is, when the game ball reaches the first rotating body 7090, the game ball flows down to the second rotating body 7091 without being guided to the first operating port 7040 (the game ball rotates into the ball inlet port 7090b. 7090d). In addition, when the game ball reaches the second rotating body 7091, it is expected that the game ball is guided to the second operation port 7070 (the game ball enters the rotating ball entrance 7091a). You can

As described above, in this modification, the distribution winning device 7000 that makes it easy to enter the ball in the time saving state of the normal symbol causes the game ball to be directed to one of the first operating port 7040, the second operating port 7070, and the discharge port 657. It is configured to be distributed. Further, the operation port (or the discharge port) to which the game balls are distributed changes depending on the rotational positions of the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interestingly observe the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000 and the arrangement of the rotating bodies (the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091). Then, when the game ball is distributed to the second operation port 7070, the player can be pleased.

In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, in the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091, a rotation ball entrance (rotation ball entrance 7090a, which can guide the game ball to the back side). Although only one rotary entrance 7091a) is provided for each, the invention is not limited to this, and any number may be set. For example, if the number of recesses that guide the game ball toward the back side of the first rotating body 7090 is increased (for example, if the number of the rotating ball entrances 7090a and 7090b is increased to two), the first operating port in the time saving state Since it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball will enter 7040 (the probability that the first operating accessory 645a associated with the right first entrance 64a2 will switch to the open state), in the case of a big hit in the time saving state It is possible to execute a lot of lottery for the first special symbol which is difficult to be provided with the probability variation state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the probability change state is too continuous and an unexpected disadvantage is given to the hole. Further, for example, if the number of recesses that guide the game ball to the back side in the first rotating body 7091 is increased (for example, if the number is increased to three of the rotating ball entrances 7091a to 7091c), the second in the time saving state. Since it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the actuation opening 7070 (the probability that the second actuation accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance 64b will switch to the open state), it was a big hit in the time saving state. In this case, it is possible to execute a lot of lottery for the second special symbol which is likely to be given the probability variation state. Therefore, the probability that the probability variation state is given after the jackpot ends can be increased, so that the expectation for the probability variation state can be further increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091 are rotated at a constant speed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation speed may be randomly changed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize at what timing the game ball should enter the sorting prize winning device 7000 in order to enter the second operation port 7070. it can. As a result, when a game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 7000, the whereabouts of the game ball can be watched more interestingly. Further, the rotation speed may be regularly changed instead of being randomly changed. Specifically, for example, the rotation speed of the first rotating body 7090 is increased within a range in which the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 7000 can enter the rotary entrance 7090a, and the rotary entrance 7090a. The rotation speed of the first rotating body 7090 may be slowed down in a range in which the ball cannot enter (the ball can enter the rotary entrances 7090b to 7090d). With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the rotary entrance 7090a, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the first operation port 7040. Therefore, the game ball relatively moves to the second operation port 7070. It is possible to make it easy to enter a game ball. In addition, for example, the rotational speed of the second rotating body 7091 is slowed down at a rotational position within a range in which the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 7060 can enter the rotary ball entrance 7091a, and the ball enters the rotary ball entrance 7091a. The rotational speed of the second rotating body 7091 may be increased at a rotational position in a range where the ball cannot be thrown (the ball can enter the rotary entrances 7091b to 7091d). With this configuration, the game ball can easily enter the rotary ball entrance 7091a, so that the second actuation accessory 645b associated with the right second ball entrance 64b can be easily opened. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the right second ball inlet 64b, and the advantageous second special symbol lottery is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the time saving state.

In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, the game balls that enter the rotary entrance balls 7091b to 7091d of the second rotating body 7091 are guided to the exit port 657, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, an operation port having the same function as the first operation port 7040 (the first operation accessory 645a is operated by the game ball entering the opening state) may be provided. With such a configuration, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000, either the first operating accessory 645a or the second operating accessory 645b can be operated in an open state. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the probability changing state and the time saving state.

In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, four recesses into which balls can enter are provided for the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091, but the number of recesses is four. The number is not limited to individual and may be set arbitrarily. Further, the ratio of the recesses that can guide the game balls to the back side of each rotating body may be arbitrarily set. With this configuration, the probability (ratio) of the game ball being guided to the first operating port 7040 and the second operating port 7070 can be set more finely, so that the probability changes in the probability changing state or the time saving state. The ratio of entering the state can be set more freely (finely).

In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the internal structure of the distribution winning apparatus 7000 has the same structure as the distribution winning apparatus 650 (see FIG. 35) in the modification of the first embodiment. It is not limited to. For example, the distribution winning device 650 (see FIG. 3) in the first embodiment may be adopted.

The distribution winning device 7000 in this modification may be applied to the distribution winning device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 having the board surface configuration shown in FIGS. 126 to 133. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

<Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a second modification of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described. The second modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a distribution winning device 8000 is provided instead of the distribution winning device 700. As shown in FIG. 134, the distribution winning apparatus 8000 includes a distribution winning apparatus 64c in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 40A and 40B) and a distribution winning apparatus 700 in the fourth embodiment (FIG. (See 81)). The basic function of the distribution winning apparatus 8000 is the same as that of the distribution winning apparatus 700 (see FIG. 81), and a ball has entered the first working opening 8040 of the distribution winning apparatus 8000 (sorting). In this case, the first actuation accessory 645a associated with the right first ball entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. On the other hand, when the ball is distributed to the second operation port 8070 provided inside the distribution winning device 8000 (when the ball is entered), the second operation accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance port is opened. Then, the ball is ready to enter the right second entrance 64b.

When the ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high rate of being given the probability variation state of the special symbol when it is a big hit, so for the player Be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation port (whether to enter the first operation port 8040 or the second operation port 8070) through which the ball that has entered the distribution winning apparatus 700 enters. it can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 134, on the upper surface of the distribution winning apparatus 8000, an electric auditors product 8010 having the same configuration as the electric auditors product 701 of the distribution winning apparatus 700 in the fourth embodiment is provided. This electric accessory 8010, like the electric accessory 701 described above, is in an open state (immersion state) in which a ball can enter (easy) and a closed state (projection in which a ball cannot enter (difficult). State) and can be switched to. This electric accessory 8010 is set to an open state when it is hit by a lottery for a normal symbol.

The game sphere that has entered from the electric accessory 8010 into the distribution winning apparatus 8000 flows down the guide flow path 8020. The guide passage 8020 is provided with a magnetic sensor 8030a for detecting the passage of game balls (the number of game balls entering the distribution winning apparatus 8000). Further, adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are provided below the magnetic sensor 8030a. The game ball that has passed through the opening 8030c between the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b enters either the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070 provided downstream thereof. As described above, when the ball enters (is distributed) to the first operating port 8040, the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first entering port 64a2 switches to the open state, and the right first entering The ball can enter the ball opening 64a2. On the other hand, when the ball is distributed to the second operation port 8070 provided inside the distribution winning device 8000 (when the ball is entered), the second operation accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance port is opened. Then, the ball is ready to enter the right second entrance 64b.

The adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are configured so that the inclination can be adjusted by a clerk of a game store or the like, like the adjusting nails t1 and t2 in the first embodiment. As the adjusting nail 8030a is adjusted so as to be inclined downward, the upper side of the first operating port 8070 is blocked by the adjusting nail 8030b, and as a result, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to advance to the second operating port 8070. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the first operation port 8040. On the contrary, as the game nail 8030b is adjusted to be inclined downward, the upper part of the second operation port 8040 is blocked by the adjustment nail 8030b, and as a result, the game ball is less likely to advance to the first operation port 8040. It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the first operation port 8070.

As described above, in this modification, the operating port (the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070) that facilitates ball entry in the time saving state can be changed by adjusting the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b. .. That is, whether the ball easily enters the right first entrance 64a2 or the right second entrance 64b when right-handed in the time saving state (and the probability variation state). Since it can be changed, it is possible to change the probability (ratio) of the probability variation state being given in the case of a big hit. More specifically, by tilting the adjusting nail 8030b downward so as to prevent the ball from entering the first operating port 8040, and when right-handing is performed in a probable state, only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Can be configured. Therefore, the continuation rate of the probability variation state can be set to 80%. On the other hand, by tilting the adjusting nail 8030a downward so as to prevent the ball from entering the second operation port 8070, when the player strikes right in a probable state, only the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the continuation rate of the probability variation state can be set to 50%. As described above, in the present modification, the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are configured to be adjustable, so that the probability variation plunge ratio of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the gaming shop.

Further, when adjusting the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b, the ball entering one of the operating ports (the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070) is completely blocked, and the game ball enters only the other operating port. Instead of being configured to be capable of balls, it is possible to allow game balls to enter both operation ports and make adjustments so as to make the ratio of entering balls different.

For example, as the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are tilted to the right in the front view, it is possible to increase the ratio of the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 8000 and that enter the first operating port 8040. On the other hand, as the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are tilted to the left when viewed from the front, it is possible to increase the proportion of the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 8000 and that enter the second operating port 8070. Therefore, by varying the degree of adjustment of the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b, it is necessary to provide an individual in which the probability variation state is likely to continue (a game ball easily enters the second operation port 8070) or an individual in which the probability variation state is difficult to continue. You can Therefore, the player can be made to select the table more seriously, so that the player's interest can be improved at the stage of selecting the table before the game is performed.

In addition, in the distribution winning apparatus 8000 of this modified example, since the switching valve 702 is deleted, it is not possible to switch the type of the time saving state during the game, but the configuration can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, since the time saving identification flag 203cs can be deleted, the processing for switching the opening pattern of the electric accessory 8010 with reference to the time saving identification flag 203cs in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the value of the time saving identification flag 203cs at the end of the jackpot are set. It is possible to delete the processing set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

The distribution winning apparatus 8000 according to the present modification may be applied to the distribution winning apparatus 700 of the pachinko machine 10 having the board configuration shown in FIGS. 126 to 133. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

Further, the present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is not provided. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

A pachinko machine in which some or all of the above-described embodiments are combined may be used.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Below, in addition to the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Switch between V confirmation lottery route and continuous lottery route in the attacker)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery means for executing the lottery, the winning opening to which the first benefit which is advantageous to the player by the entering of the playing ball is given, and the playing ball enters the winning opening. A variable means for changing between a possible first state and a second state that is more difficult to enter than the first state, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the variable means is changed to the second state. In a gaming machine having a variable control means for changing the state from the first state to a first state, a first ball entering area which is arranged inside the winning port and into which a game ball entering the winning port can enter, A second benefit different from the first benefit area and a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first benefit area is provided. 2 Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entering area, a privilege granting unit that grants a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege, and the variable unit is changed by the variable control unit. And a switching means for switching between a first ball entering state in which the ball can enter the first ball entering area and a second ball entering state in which the ball can enter the second ball entering area depending on the timing. A gaming machine A1 characterized by the above.

Here, for example, after a predetermined display mode appears, by passing the game ball through a predetermined region provided on the game board, a lottery for the type of jackpot game based on the predetermined region through which the game ball has passed. There is known a gaming machine in which the jackpot game is started by the type of the jackpot game that has been drawn. The lottery ratio of the type of jackpot game is different for each of the plurality of predetermined areas provided, and by the player selecting one of the plurality of predetermined areas and passing the game ball. A gaming machine in which the type of jackpot game is selected by lottery has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In this case, it is possible to increase the interest of the player until the jackpot game which is a bonus game is given, but after the jackpot game is given, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired early. was there.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the specific lottery result is obtained, it is possible to give the second benefit or the third benefit in addition to the first benefit at the timing when the variable means is changed by the variable control means. Therefore, even after a specific lottery result is obtained, it is possible to be interested in the privilege to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A1, a first flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the first ball entry area and a second flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the second ball entry area are provided in the winning opening. The switching means has a distribution member that is variable between a first distribution state that distributes the game balls that have entered the winning opening to the first flow path and a second distribution state that distributes the game ball to the second flow path, A gaming machine A2 comprising at least variable control means for varying the distribution member to one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state at a predetermined timing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the flow paths to be sorted are variable depending on the state of the sorting member, so that the enjoyment of predicting the state of the sorting member is provided after a specific lottery result is obtained. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first rotating body which is arranged in the winning opening and has a plurality of ball-entering areas around which game balls including the first ball-entering area can enter And a second rotating body having a plurality of ball entry areas around which a game ball including the second ball entry area can enter, and at least during a period in which the game ball can enter at least the winning opening. A gaming machine A3 having one rotation body and rotation control means for rotating the second rotation body in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A2, the first entry area of the first rotating body that rotates in the predetermined direction and the second rotating body of the second rotating body that rotates in the predetermined direction. It is possible to pay attention to which of the entry areas the player enters. As a result, the player pays attention to the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a specific winning opening configured so that a gaming ball different from the winning opening can be entered, and a winning state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening and the winning A specific variable means that can be changed to a regulated state that is more difficult to enter than the state, and the variable control means, when the specific lottery result is determined by the lottery means, the variable One of the means or the specific variable means is selected to variably control the second state to the first state or the regulated state to the ball entering state.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the winning opening to which the second benefit or the third benefit is given can be changed by the changing means, or the specific winning opening which is not Any one of the variable by the specific variable means is selected. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the prize-winning port and the special prize-winning port can be changed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

<Characteristic B group> (V confirmation and continuous lottery)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery means for executing the lottery, the winning opening to which the first benefit which is advantageous to the player by the entering of the playing ball is given, and the playing ball enters the winning opening. A variable means for changing between a possible first state and a second state that is more difficult to enter than the first state, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the variable means is changed to the second state. In a gaming machine having a variable control means for changing the state from the state to the first state until a predetermined condition is established, a gaming ball placed inside the winning opening and into which the gaming ball entered the winning opening can enter. A first benefit area, a second benefit area different from the first benefit area, and a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first benefit area. And a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit, based on the first deciding means for deciding whether or not to grant the game ball and the game ball entering the second entry area. Second determining means for deciding whether or not to perform, and the first ball entering area is arranged upstream of the second ball entering area, and the game ball enters the first ball entering area and the first ball entering area 1. A gaming machine B1 having a guiding path for guiding the entered game ball to the second ball entering area when the second privilege is not given by the 1 determining means.

Here, for example, after a predetermined display mode appears, by passing the game ball through a predetermined region provided on the game board, a lottery for the type of jackpot game based on the predetermined region through which the game ball has passed. There is known a gaming machine in which the jackpot game is started by the type of the jackpot game that has been drawn. The lottery ratio of the type of jackpot game is different for each of the plurality of predetermined areas provided, and by the player selecting one of the plurality of predetermined areas and passing the game ball. A gaming machine in which the type of jackpot game is selected by lottery has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In this case, it is possible to increase the interest of the player until the jackpot game which is a bonus game is given, but after the jackpot game is given, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired early. was there.

According to the gaming machine B1, even when the player enters the first ball-entering area and the second privilege is not given, the game ball is guided to the second ball-entering area to give the third benefit. The player may be given the opportunity to decide whether or not to be decided. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect as to whether the second benefit or the third benefit is further given to the player even during the game in which the first benefit is given to the player. Therefore, various effects can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress an inconvenience of getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine B1, a first rotating body, which is arranged in the winning opening and has a plurality of entering areas around which a game ball including the first entering area can enter, is arranged in the winning opening. A second rotating body having a plurality of ball entry areas around which a game ball including the second ball entry area can enter, and the first rotation at least during a period in which the game ball can enter the winning opening. A gaming machine B2 having a body and a rotation control means for rotating the second rotating body in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, a first ball entering area of the first rotating body rotating in a predetermined direction and a second ball entering area of the second rotating body rotating in the predetermined direction. You can focus on which one you enter. As a result, the player pays attention to the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific winning opening configured so that a gaming ball different from the winning opening can be entered, and a winning state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening and the winning state Specific changing means that can be changed to a regulation state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and the variable control means, when the lottery means determines that the specific lottery result, the variable means or the A gaming machine B3, wherein either one of the specific changing means is selected and variably controlled from the second state to the first state or from the regulation state to the ball entering state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the winning opening to which the second benefit or the third benefit is given is changed by the changing means, or the specific winning opening other than that is specified changing means. Either one of them is selected. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the prize-winning port and the special prize-winning port can be changed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

The gaming machine Z1 wherein each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball becomes a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a large amount of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

<Characteristic C group> (Selectable pachinko)
A passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first area where a game ball passing through the passage opening can enter, a second area different from the first area, and the first area Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first game value, the first giving means capable of giving the first game value, and based on the fact that the game ball entered the second area, A ratio of a second giving means capable of giving a second game value different from the game value, and a game ball having passed through the passage opening entering each of the first region and the second region. An adjusting unit capable of adjusting the game machine C1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of ball entrances into which a game ball can enter are arranged, and when a game ball enters the ball entrance, the game ball enters the ball entrance in advance. There is known a gaming machine configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-269071). In this case, the game store side cannot set the number of prize balls, etc., and must purchase a game machine in which the number of prize balls, the jackpot probability, etc. that match the business method of the game store are preset. Instead, in order to change the business method, it was necessary to newly purchase a game machine suitable for the business method.

According to the gaming machine C1, the adjusting means can adjust the ratio of the game ball that has passed through the passage opening into each of the first area and the second area. Therefore, for example, if the adjusting means adjusts the ball entry rate to the first area to be higher than the second area, it is possible to set the gaming machine to which the first game value is easily given, and by the adjusting means. It is possible to set the gaming machine to which the second game value is easily given, by adjusting the ball entry rate to the second area to be higher than the first area. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the game value that can be given to the player, it is possible to change the game value at a lower cost than installing a new game machine.

The gaming machine C1 has a payout means capable of paying out a game ball to the player, and the first number of game balls are based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first area. A second number of game balls different from the first number is paid out as one of the first game values by the payout means and a game ball enters the second area. A gaming machine C2, which is paid out as one of the second gaming values by the above.

According to the gaming machine C2, a different number of game balls are paid out to the player in the first area and the second area, so that the profit on the game shop side can be easily adjusted by adjusting the entry rate by the adjusting means. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a lottery means for executing the same lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first area and the second area, respectively, and a specific lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine C3, comprising: a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first entry area and the second entry area, different game values are given even though the same lottery is executed, so whether the privilege game is executed even if the entry ratio is adjusted by the adjusting means. The lottery can be configured so that the lottery is evenly performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played without changing the degree of expectation of the privilege game even if the game value to be given is adjusted.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the adjusting means has an adjusting portion that can be adjusted directly from the outside of the gaming machine, and the adjusting portion is covered from the front side to adjust the adjusting portion. A gaming machine having a cover body that can be changed between a difficult first state and a second state in which the adjustment unit is easier to adjust than the first state. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the illegal adjustment of the adjusting means can be suppressed by setting the cover body in the first state. is there.

In the gaming machine C4, the cover body has a visually difficult means that makes it difficult to visually recognize the adjusting portion when the cover body is changed to the first state.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the state of the adjusting section becomes difficult to see because the cover body is changed to the first state by the difficult-to-recognize means. There is an effect that a game can be played without worrying that the game machine is owned.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust a ball entry width into the first region and a ball entry width into the second region. Gaming machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C5, the entering rate can be adjusted by changing the entering width, so that the entering rate can be adjusted by an easy operation. is there.

In the gaming machines C1 to C6, counting means for counting the number of gaming balls that have respectively passed through the first area and the second area, and the first area in a predetermined period based on the count value by the counting means. For each of the second area, a calculating means for calculating a ball entry rate for the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, and a notifying means for notifying the calculation result by the calculating means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine C7 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C6, it is possible to notify the entry rate of the first area and the second area when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the adjustment means adjusts the entry rate. There is an effect that it is possible to actually confirm the ball entry rate.

<Feature D group>
A passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first area where a game ball passing through the passage opening can enter, a second area different from the first area, and the first area Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first game value, the first giving means capable of giving the first game value, and based on the fact that the game ball entered the second area, The ratio of the second giving means capable of giving a second game value different from the game value and the game ball having passed through the passage opening entering each of the first area and the second area. An adjusting device capable of adjusting, and a gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the game ball passing through the passage opening into each of the first region and the second region by the adjusting means. Therefore, for example, if the adjusting means adjusts the ball entry rate to the first area to be higher than the second area, it is possible to set the gaming machine to which the first game value is easily given, and by the adjusting means. It is possible to set the gaming machine to which the second game value is easily given, by adjusting the ball entry rate to the second area to be higher than the first area. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the game value that can be given to the player, it is possible to change the game value at a lower cost than installing a new game machine.

The gaming machine D1 has a lottery means for executing a lottery, and the lottery is executed by the lottery means as the first game value and the second game value, and the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In this case, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the lottery as the second game value is more likely to be provided with a privilege that is advantageous to the player than the lottery as the first game value.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, a lottery is executed as the first gaming value and the second gaming value, and the size of the privilege given according to the lottery result is different. There is an effect that the gambling property can be adjusted by adjusting by.

In the gaming machine D2, display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means, and then stop display with the identification information indicating the lottery result Display means, first storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of identification information indicating the lottery result for the first game value are stored, and dynamic identification information indicating the lottery result for the second game value. Second storage means in which a plurality of display modes are stored, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means from the first storage means or the second storage means A gaming machine D3 characterized by having a mode determining means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the identification displayed on the display means depending on whether the game ball enters the first area or when the game ball enters the second area. The dynamic display mode of information can be made different, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a fresh game by adjusting the adjusting means.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the lottery means has a probability setting means for setting a probability of being drawn with the specific lottery result, and has a probability of being set as the second game value rather than a lottery as the first game value. A gaming machine D4, wherein a lottery is more likely to be set to a higher lottery probability than the normal time by the probability setting means when the specific lottery result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the first region and the second region are set such that the proportions of the lottery probabilities higher than those in the normal time are set differently. There is an effect that it is possible to easily adjust the profit of the amusement store by adjusting it according to the store.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the adjusting means has an adjusting portion that can be adjusted directly from outside the gaming machine, and the adjusting portion is covered from the front side to adjust the adjusting portion. A gaming machine having a cover body that can be changed between a difficult first state and a second state in which the adjustment unit is easier to adjust than the first state. D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, it is possible to prevent the adjustment means from being illegally adjusted by setting the cover body in the first state. is there.

In the gaming machine D5, the cover body has a visually difficult means that makes it difficult to visually recognize the adjusting portion when the cover body is changed to the first state.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, the state of the adjusting section becomes difficult to see because the cover body is changed to the first state by the difficult-to-see means, so that the player is provided with the adjusting section. There is an effect that a game can be played without worrying that the game machine is owned.

One of the gaming machines D1 to D6 is characterized in that the adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust a ball entry width into the first region and a ball entry width into the second region. Gaming machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the game machines D1 to D6, since the ball entrance rate can be adjusted by changing the ball entrance width, the effect that the ball entrance rate can be adjusted by an easy operation is provided. is there.

In the gaming machines D1 to D7, counting means for counting the number of gaming balls that have respectively passed through the first gaming area and the second gaming area, and the first gaming area based on the count value by the counting means. Calculation means for calculating a ball entry rate in a predetermined period for the game balls that have passed through the passage openings in the second game area, and an informing means capable of informing the calculation result by the calculation means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine D8 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the entry rate of the first area and the second area can be notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the adjustment means adjusts. There is an effect that it is possible to actually confirm the ball entry rate.

<Characteristic E group> (2 types of non-electricity and V accuracy and multiple accuracy changes)
A variable ball entering means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state, and the variable ball entering means to satisfy the opening condition. Based on the variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state based on the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path of the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means. Based on a game ball entering the first flow path, the game ball can enter the first ball entering means, and based on the game ball entering the second flow path, the game ball To the second ball entering means and the second ball entering means for executing the first judgment based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered, a second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination and the first discriminating means gives a first privilege when a specific first discrimination result is obtained, and the second discrimination means is provided. A gaming machine E1 comprising: a privilege granting unit that grants a second privilege, which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, when the determination unit has a specific second determination result.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege granted by the privilege granting means is made different between the specific first determination result and the specific second determination result, so that the player can use the first flow path and the second flow path. There is an effect that the degree of expectation can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1, the game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means are distributed to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and to the variable ball entering means. A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed in the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed in the second flow path, Characteristic gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the distribution between the first flow path and the second flow path can be changed depending on the distribution state set by the distribution state setting means. There is an effect that interest can be improved by making the user interested in which one of the distribution states is set.

In the gaming machine E2, the sorting state setting means determines the first sorting state or the second sorting state based on the determination of the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second distribution state based on the specific second determination result rather than the specific first determination result. ..

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, there is an effect that the player can expect the player to expect a specific second determination result and improve the interest.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a second variable ball entering means capable of changing between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. And a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game state that sets a game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area Setting means, and the privilege granting means changes the second variable ball entering means as the first privilege or the second privilege from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in the case of the second privilege, the game machine E4 makes it easier to enter the specific area than the first privilege.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not a gaming ball enters a specific area, thereby providing a novel gaming property. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine E4, the game state setting means determines the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result as the game state advantageous to the player, or the second determination means determines the specific state. A gaming machine E5, characterized in that the probability of being discriminated as the second discrimination result is set higher than usual.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the probability of being discriminated as the specific second determination result by the gaming state setting means is set to be high, so that the second determination specific to the player in a short period of time. Since the result is easily discriminated, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early because of a change in the game.

In the gaming machine E4, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state in which a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the gaming state in which the privilege game is executed is set by the gaming state setting means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a rut of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first flow path, the first ball entering means is brought into a state in which the game ball can enter the first ball entering means. Means for setting the first ball entering means into a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered, and based on the fact that the game ball entered the first flow path. It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a predetermined number of game balls have entered the first ball entering means. A game machine E7, characterized in that the game machine E7 has means for setting the state.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, it is possible to stably enter a predetermined number of game balls into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, which is stable. There is an effect that the played game can be executed.

<Feature F group> (G type)
A variable ball entering means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state, and the variable ball entering means to satisfy the opening condition. Based on the variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state based on the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path of the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means. Sorting means capable of sorting the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means into one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the first Sorting state setting means for setting a first sorting state that is easily sorted to the flow path and a second sorting state that is easily sorted to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path. Based on, the first ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter, and the second ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the second flow path. , Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, a first judging means for executing a first judgment, and based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, Second discrimination means for executing two discriminations, and the first discrimination means executes the first privilege game when the first discrimination result becomes the specific first discrimination result, and the second discrimination means becomes the specific second discrimination result. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed when the specific second determination result is obtained rather than the specific first determination result, the second distribution state is set. There is an effect that the game can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the distribution state setting means according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine F2 characterized by having a ratio changing means for changing a setting ratio set to and.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the first distribution state and the second distribution state are determined according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. Since the ratio set to any one of the states is variable, there is an effect that the game can be diversified depending on the game state as well as the determination result.

In the gaming machine F2, a plurality of game states are set as the game states, and one of the plurality of game states is set based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A gaming machine F3 having selection setting means for selecting and setting the gaming state of.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the selection setting means selects and sets one gaming state based on the result of the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved by not only the determination result but also the set game state.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a second variable ball entering means capable of changing between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. And a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a privilege giving means for giving a benefit to the player when the game ball enters the specific area A gaming machine F4 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is an effect that a game can be played that expects whether or not a player will enter a specific area, so that the game can be diversified.

In the gaming machine F4, the privilege granted by the privilege granting means sets the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result to be high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, the probability of being discriminated as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result can be varied, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. ..

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the specific first condition is satisfied until the end condition is satisfied based on the specific condition being satisfied. A gaming machine F6 having special state setting means for setting a determination result or a probability of being determined as the specific second determination result higher than usual.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, it is possible to make the player worry about whether or not the ending condition is satisfied, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. is there.

<Characteristic G group> (Ratio variable depending on the number of times saved)
A variable ball entering means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state, and the variable ball entering means to satisfy the opening condition. Based on the variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state based on the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path of the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means. Sorting means capable of sorting the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means into one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the first Sorting state setting means for setting a first sorting state that is easily sorted to the flow path and a second sorting state that is easily sorted to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path. Based on, the first ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter, and the second ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the second flow path. , Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, a first judging means for executing a first judgment, and based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, Second discrimination means for executing two discriminations, and the first discrimination means executes the first privilege game when the first discrimination result becomes the specific first discrimination result, and the second discrimination means becomes the specific second discrimination result. In the case of, a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and after the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means is finished, Advantageous setting means for facilitating the opening condition to be satisfied until an ending condition is satisfied, and setting means for setting the ending condition by making the specific first determination result different from the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G1, the advantage and disadvantage of the player can be varied depending on the difference in the period until the end condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the ending condition is satisfied based on that the number of times the first determination and the second determination are performed is the number set by the setting means. A gaming machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the end condition is set by the number of times the first determination and the second determination are executed, so the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. There is an effect that the probability of being discriminated as the discrimination result can be easily changed depending on the termination condition.

In the gaming machine G2, the setting means is configured to change and set the set number of times according to a game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. Gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, since the number of times of setting is variably set according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is given, the player is interested in the gaming state to be set. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the distribution state setting means determines the first distribution state and the distribution state according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine G4, characterized by having a ratio changing means for changing a setting ratio set to the second distribution state.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the ratio at which the first distribution state and the second distribution state are set is variable between the first determination and the second determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in which one of the discriminations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Gives shorter time even after rushing with mixer)
The game ball is a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path, a distribution means capable of distributing the game ball to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which distribution is easy to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which distribution is easy to the second flow path, and a game ball enters the first flow path. Based on the fact that the game ball can enter, the first ball entering means, and the game ball can enter the ball based on the game ball entering the second flow path. Means, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, the first judging means for executing the first judgment, and based on the game ball having entered the second ball entering means. A privilege game advantageous to the player when the second determination means for performing the second determination and the first determination result specific by the first determination means or the specific first determination result by the second determination means are obtained. When the special second discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result by the privilege game executing means for executing the above and the second discriminating means is given, the player is given the right to execute the privilege game. Special game execution means for executing a special game to enter the game ball into the area where the game ball can enter the specific area, and the special game is executed when the special game is given by the special game. After being played, a gaming machine H1 having a setting means for setting one of the first sorted state and the second sorted state.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to switch between the first distribution state and the second distribution state when the special game is given through the special game, so that the game can be diversified. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, it is possible to move an opening into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball can enter, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. A gaming machine H2 comprising a movable member and a movable means for moving the movable member from the second state to the first state based on execution of the special game.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the game ball can enter the opening by the execution of the special game, so that a special state can be given to the player, There is an effect that it can have a fresh taste.

The gaming machine H2 has a switching means for switching between a guiding state for guiding the game ball entering the opening to the specific area and a non-guide state for not guiding the game ball to the specific area. Machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the state of entering the specific area can be switched, so that the gambling performance can be easily controlled.

In the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to change between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the entered game ball is the first one. A variable ball entering means that is distributed by the distributing means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the variable ball entering means is changed from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an opening condition. A gaming machine H4 comprising variable control means for varying and a state setting means for setting a state where the opening condition is easily established until an ending condition is established.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H3, a state in which the opening condition is easily established is set, so that a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is obtained depending on the period during which the ending condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the probability of being a discrimination result can be substantially changed to make the game diverse.

In the gaming machine H4, the ending condition is satisfied when the number of times the first determination and the second determination are executed reaches the number set by the state setting means. Machine H5.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, it is established when the end condition is the number of times the first determination and the second determination are executed, which is the number set by the state setting means. There is an effect that the number of times set by the state setting means can be interested.

In the gaming machine H5, the state setting means sets the number of times predetermined by the setting means as the end condition when the first distribution state is set after the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine H6 characterized by setting a state in which an opening condition is easily established.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H5, the state setting means sets the number of times predetermined by the setting means when the first distribution state is set after the privilege game is executed. Since the state in which the release condition is set as the end condition is set easily is set, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

<Characteristic I group> (divided)
Launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area, a first flow-down area in which the game ball can flow down, and a second area in which the game ball flowing down the first flow-down area is difficult to flow down and the game ball can flow down. By partitioning means for partitioning the game area, and varying the firing intensity of the launching means based on the operation of the player, the game ball is directed toward either the first flow-down area or the second area. A launch adjusting means capable of being launched by the launching means, a first ball entering means provided in the first flow-down area, into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball provided in the second flow-down area, A second ball entering means capable of entering a ball, a first judging means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. Second discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on having entered the ball, and a first game state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the first discriminating means discriminates the specific first discrimination result. First setting means capable of setting either one of the second game state, which is disadvantageous to the first game state, and the second determination means, which is determined as a specific second determination result. The second setting means capable of determining one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the first gaming state, the first setting means and the second setting means, A gaming machine I1 characterized by different proportions for setting.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine I1, the ratio of setting the first game state is different depending on which of the first flow-down area and the second flow-down area the game ball is flowed down to. There is an effect that it can be enjoyed and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1, a third ball entering means different from the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, a first state in which a game ball can enter the third ball entering means, and a first state thereof. A variable member that can be changed to a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball, and a predetermined condition is established from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of an opening condition for the variable member. Variable means for changing up to, the first guiding flow path which is advantageous to the player and the second guiding flow which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first guiding flow path for the game ball entered in the third ball entering means. When the first gaming state and the sorting means for sorting to either one of the roads are set, the first guiding flow is set by the sorting means more than when the second gaming state is set. A game machine I2 having a distribution control means for easily distributing a game ball to a road.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, in the case where the first gaming state is set, the gaming balls are easily distributed to the first guiding flow path by the distribution means. There is an effect that the player can be expected to execute the game more expecting that the game state is set.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, means for setting a normal game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state in a normal game, and the first game state or the second game state being set. Based on the above, means for facilitating establishment of the opening condition, and a gaming machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set, so that the opening condition is easily established, so that the advantage of the gaming is achieved step by step. There is an effect that can be changed.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, a first variable ball entering means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and an open state in which the game ball can enter and difficult to enter. The second variable ball entering means that can be changed to the closed state, and the first variable ball entering means can be changed from the closed state to the open state based on the game ball entering the first guiding flow path. Then, in the open state, the first variable means for changing the closed state after the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable ball entering means, and the game ball in the second guiding flow path Based on the fact that the second variable ball entering means is changed from the closed state to the open state, and in the open state, the second variable ball entering means has a predetermined number of game balls. The second variable means for changing the closed state after entering the ball, and, based on the game ball entered the first variable ball entering means, the determination is executed by the first determining means, A gaming machine I4, wherein a discrimination is executed by the second discriminating means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second variable ball admission means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the game ball is stably thrown into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means to stabilize the first determination or the second determination. Thus, there is an effect that the player can be given more discrimination opportunities.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination of the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A gaming machine I5 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the privilege game is executed, so that it is the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. The effect is that you can expect it.

In the gaming machine H5, the privilege game execution means performs the privilege game executed based on the specific second determination result rather than the privilege game executed based on the specific first determination result. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being executed more favorably by a person.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H5, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by expecting a specific second determination result.

In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the first variable ball entering means is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow-down area is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area. The second variable ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the first flow-down area. A gaming machine I7 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the player can enter the game ball into the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means without changing the operation. The effect is that you can.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I8, a first visual recognition state and a first visual recognition state in which it is easy to visually recognize the first flow-down area and the second flow-down area, each having a performance means capable of executing a predetermined performance The visual recognition changing means that can be changed to a second visual recognition state that is more difficult to visually recognize, and either the first flow-down area or the second flow-down area based on the selection operation by the player. A visual recognition variable control means for changing the state to the first visual recognition state, and a gaming machine I8.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the player can visually recognize the first downflow region or the second downflow region by the selection operation, and thus the downflow selected by the player. There is an effect that the area can be recognized easily.

In the gaming machine I8, the selection operation is based on a flow-down area in which a game ball has flowed down by the launching means, and the game machine I9.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I8, there is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize which flow-down area the game ball shot by the launching means has flowed down.

A game machine I10, characterized in that the game machine I8 has operation means operable by a player, and the selection operation operates the operation means.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I8, there is an effect that the flow-down area selected by the player can be recognized in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine Z1 wherein each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball becomes a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
On a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, after a predetermined display mode appears, by passing the game ball through a plurality of predetermined areas provided on the game board, a jackpot based on the predetermined area through which the game ball has passed There is known a gaming machine in which a lottery for a type of a game is made and a big hit game is started by the type of the big hit game that is drawn.
The lottery ratio of the type of the jackpot game is different for each of a plurality of predetermined areas provided, and the player selects any one of the plurality of predetermined areas to pass the game ball. The type of jackpot game is selected by lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233181).
However, until the jackpot game type is drawn, the interest of the player can be increased, but after the jackpot game type is drawn and the jackpot game is granted, the game becomes monotonous, and the player is early. There was a problem that I got tired of.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting tired early after a jackpot game is given.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a first privilege which is advantageous to a player by entering a game ball. The prize hole to be given, a variable means for changing the game ball into the first state in which the game ball can enter the prize hole and the second state in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first state, and the lottery result by the lottery In the case of a specific lottery result, there is a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state, and the game is arranged inside the winning opening and enters the winning opening. A first ball entering area where a ball can enter, a second ball entering area different from the first ball entering area, and the first ball based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering area. A privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the privilege and granting a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege on the basis of the game ball entering the second ball entering area. According to the timing at which the variable means is changed by the variable control means, the first entrance state in which the first entrance area can enter and the second entrance area in which the second entrance area can enter. And a switching means for switching between the spherical state and the spherical state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the first flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the first entry area and the second entry area in the winning opening. And a second flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the first and second flow paths, in which the switching means distributes the game ball entering the winning opening to the first flow path and the second flow path. At least a distribution member that can be changed to a second distribution state and a variable control unit that changes the distribution member to one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state at a predetermined timing. It is a thing.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, which is arranged in the winning opening and surrounds a plurality of entry areas in which a game ball including the first entry area can enter. A first rotating body having a second rotating body disposed in the winning opening and having a plurality of entering areas around which a game ball including the second entering area can enter, and at least the winning It has a rotation control means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a predetermined direction during a period in which a game ball can enter the mouth.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, in which a gaming ball different from the winning opening can be entered and a specific winning opening. The game ball has a specific variable means that can be changed between a entering state in which the game ball can enter and a restricting state in which it is more difficult to enter than the entering state, and the variable control means is the lottery means. When it is determined that the result is a specific lottery result, either one of the variable means or the specific variable means is selected to change from the second state to the first state or from the regulated state to the entering state. It is variably controlled.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the first benefit which is advantageous to the player by the game ball being entered are awarded. Mouth, variable means for changing the first state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result And a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state, the game ball that is arranged inside the winning opening and enters the winning opening is entered. Different from the first privilege based on a possible first entrance area, a second entrance area different from the first entrance area, and a game ball entering the first entrance area. A privilege granting means for granting a second privilege, and a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entering area; Depending on the timing at which the changing means is changed by the control means, a first entry state in which the first entry area can enter and a second entry state in which the second entry area can enter. And switching means for switching. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the winning opening has a first flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the first entrance area and a second flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the second entrance area, The switching means is a distribution member that is variable between a first distribution state that distributes the game balls that have entered the winning opening to the first flow path and a second distribution state that distributes the game ball to the second flow path, and the distribution member. At least with variable control means for varying either the first distribution state or the second distribution state at a predetermined timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first rotating body disposed in the winning opening and having a plurality of winning areas around which game balls including the first winning area can enter, and a second rotating body disposed in the winning opening, the second rotating body A second rotating body having a plurality of entering areas around which a game ball including a entering area can enter, and the first rotating body and the first rotating body at least during a period in which the game ball can enter the winning opening. And a rotation control means for rotating the second rotating body in a predetermined direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it becomes more difficult to enter the game than a specific winning opening in which a gaming ball different from the winning opening is allowed to enter, a winning state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening, and the winning state. A specific variable means that can be changed to a regulated state, and the variable control means, when the lottery means determines that the specific lottery result, among the variable means or the specific variable means. Either one is selected and variably controlled from the second state to the first state or from the restricted state to the ball entering state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
64a 2 right first entrance (first entrance means)
64b Right second entrance (second entrance means)
700 distribution prize winning device (variable winning means)
702 switching valve (sorting means)
704 First working port (first flow path)
705 First actuation mechanism (first variable means)
707 Second working port (second flow path)
708 second actuation mechanism (second variable means)
S305 Second discriminating means
S405 First discriminating means
S725 variable control means
S772, S773, S774 distribution state setting means
S1105 privilege granting means

Claims (4)

Lottery means for executing lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions,
A winning opening to which the first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given when the game ball is entered,
Variable means for changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state,
In a gaming machine having variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result,
A first ball-entering area, which is arranged inside the prize-winning slot and into which a game ball that has entered the prize-winning slot can enter, and a second ball-entering area different from the first ball-entering area,
Based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area, a second benefit different from the first benefit is given, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entry area, Privilege granting means for granting a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege;
According to the timing at which the variable means is changed by the variable control means, a first ball entering state in which the ball can enter the first ball entering area and a second ball entering state in which the ball can enter the second ball entering area. A gaming machine having switching means for switching between and. In the winning opening, there is a first flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the first entrance area, and a second flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the second entrance area,
The switching means is
A distribution member that is variable between a first distribution state in which the game balls that have entered the winning opening are distributed into the first flow path and a second distribution state that is distributed in the second flow path,
2. The game according to claim 1, wherein the distribution member is composed of at least variable control means for changing the distribution member to either the first distribution state or the second distribution state at a predetermined timing. Machine. A first rotating body which is arranged in the winning opening and has a plurality of ball entry areas around which game balls including the first ball entry area can enter,
A second rotating body which is disposed in the winning opening and has a plurality of ball entry areas around which game balls including the second ball entry area can enter,
2. At least a rotation control means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a predetermined direction during a period when a game ball can enter the winning opening. The gaming machine described in 2. A specific winning opening configured so that a game ball different from the winning opening can be entered,
With a specific variable means capable of changing a game ball into the specific winning opening and a regulated state in which it is more difficult to enter than the entered state,
The variable control means selects one of the variable means and the specific variable means when the lottery means determines that the result is the specific lottery, and selects the first state from the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is variably controlled from the state or the regulated state to the ball entering state.

Images